JP2020182728A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: Specific processing necessary for a game is executed by processing execution means when a specific condition is satisfied; a specific sound is output by sound output means when the specific processing is executed; and a sound volume output from the sound output means is set by sound volume setting means. The sound output means is configured so as to output the specific sound while executing switching between a case to output the specific sound by the sound volume set by the sound volume setting means and a case to output the specific sound by a sound volume different from that sound volume in outputting the specific sound.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 217

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is successful, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a process execution means capable of executing a specific process required for the game when a specific condition is satisfied, and the process execution means executes the specific process. The voice output means has a voice output means capable of outputting a specific voice when the sound is generated, and has a volume setting means capable of setting the volume output by the voice output means. When outputting the specific sound, the specific sound is output at a volume set by the volume setting means, and the specific sound is output at a volume different from the volume. Is configured to be possible.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific process is configured so that the setting of the game can be executed based on an operation from the outside of the gaming machine. ..

The gaming machine according to claim 3 has an operating means that can be operated by a player in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, and the gaming machine changes the volume based on the operation of the operating means. It is configured to be configurable, and when the operating means is operated during the period in which the specific process is being executed, the specific voice can be output at a newly set volume.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a processing execution means capable of executing a specific processing necessary for a game when a specific condition is satisfied, and a specific processing execution means when the specific processing is executed by the processing execution means. It has an audio output means capable of outputting audio, and has a volume setting means capable of setting the volume output by the audio output means, and the audio output means outputs the specific audio. In this case, it is possible to switch between the case where the specific sound is output at the volume set by the volume setting means and the case where the specific sound is output at a volume different from the volume. Is what you are doing.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific process is configured so that the game setting can be executed based on the operation from the outside of the game machine.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game machine has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the game machine is configured so that the volume can be changed and set based on the operation of the operation means, and the operation is performed during the period when the specific process is executed. When the means is operated, the specific voice can be output at a newly set volume.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. It is sectional drawing of the game board in the VI-VI line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the throwing unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in line XIIa-XIIA of FIG. 9 (a), and FIG. 12 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the sorting unit in the range XIIIa of FIG. 12 (b). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the game board and the operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central constituent unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central constituent unit. It is an enlarged front view of the game board in the range XXVI of FIG. FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an enlarged front view of the game board in the range XXXI of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a distribution unit. It is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in the range XXXV of FIG. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of an operating unit in the range XLV of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation unit. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member, the elevating plate member, and the resistance generator in the range XLIXa of FIG. 47, and (b) is a front perspective view of the outer member in the range XLIXb of FIG. 47. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating plate member, the inner member, the displacement member and the rotational posture assisting member in the range La of FIG. 47, and (b) is the displacement member and the rotational posture assisting in the range Lb of FIG. 47. It is an exploded front perspective view of a member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting operation production unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a light emitting operation effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting operation production unit. (A) is a front view of the intermediate connecting member on the right side, (b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member in the direction of arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a), and FIG. 54 (c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member. ) Is a side view of the intermediate connecting member in the direction of the arrow LIVc, and FIG. 54D is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member in the LIVd-LIVd line of FIG. 54 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. (A) to (c) are schematic side views of the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole and the curved elongated hole which schematically show the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole and the curved elongated hole. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of the fastening portion of the displacement member, the elongated hole and the support hole of the connected hole. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LXVII-LXVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LXVII-LXVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LXVII-LXVII line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the distribution unit according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. (A) is a front view of the distribution unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. It is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in the LXXIII-LXXIII line of FIG. 72. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LV-LV line of FIG. 36. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line corresponding to the LV-LV line of FIG. (A) to (c) are schematic side views of the guide portion and the L-shaped elongated hole schematically showing the guide portion and the L-shaped elongated hole in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (c) are the second elongated hole, the curved elongated hole, the third elongated hole, the second elongated hole and the curved upper portion of the first elongated hole and the lower portion of the first elongated hole in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic side view of the elongated hole, the third elongated hole, the upper portion of the first elongated hole, and the lower portion of the first elongated hole. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member and the light emitting operation effect unit in the ninth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa in FIG. 37. (A) and (b) are front views of the rotating member and the posture detecting means in the tenth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a sorting device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (d) are schematic views schematically showing a procedure for changing the setting in the first embodiment, and (e) to (g) confirm the setting in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the procedure for this. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the hold look-ahead effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the hold look-ahead effect, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the hold look-ahead effect displayed in 81. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the holding upper limit is reached, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the hold upper limit is reached, and (b) is the third symbol display in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when there is a big hit hold at the time of reaching the hold upper limit displayed in the apparatus 81. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the SP time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the SP time, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 30th rotation in SP time displayed in 81. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variation effect at the 30th rotation during the SP time after pressing the frame button 22 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows typically the relationship between the type of the look-ahead effect in 1 Embodiment, and the look-ahead prohibition period. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variation effect at the end of the SP time when the remaining variation time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment is 20 seconds or more. b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the suggestion effect high accuracy period displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the setting suggestion effect during the SP time in the 1st embodiment. (A) to (d) are timing charts showing the passage of time from the power-on and the flow of the fluctuation effect in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the high-speed fluctuation mode in which the special figure fluctuation is 81 times in the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the variation which the 81st special figure variation deviates by 6 seconds in the probability variation state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device 81 of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a high-speed fluctuation mode when the 81st special figure fluctuation is a fluctuation per 12 seconds in a probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a pseudo-hit fluctuation effect (6 seconds) displayed after the end of the pseudo-high-speed fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. (A-1) to (c-2) are timing charts showing the flow of the effect executed when the high-speed fluctuation period in the first embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the predetermined prize ball acquisition in the jackpot game displayed in 81. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an additional privilege display screen during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the promotion effect in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the privilege content schematically. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of a jackpot during the SP time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the jackpot in the SP time, and FIG. 3 It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the end of a big hit at the time of missing SP time displayed by the symbol display device 81. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control unit according to the first embodiment, and (b) is one of the contents of the RAM of the main control unit according to the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number table per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the jackpot type selection table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the variation pattern selection table in the 1st Embodiment schematically, and (b) is the typical variation pattern table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the time saving / probability variation table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table for high-speed variation which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the variation pattern scenario table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the effect switching table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the setting suggestion effect selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead prohibition period selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold upper limit effect selection table in the first embodiment. Is. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the effect execution number selection table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the mission selection table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the promotion point selection table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the promotion effect selection table in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the timekeeping apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the register table in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) to (d) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of boot processing. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation execution determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the initial setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the set value control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time acquisition process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the standby process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect execution decision process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the boot completion process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect mode setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving / probability variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the period effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the notification command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the jackpot game, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the lucky effect lottery displayed in 81. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the hold continuous effect when there is no overlap with the SP time period displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a hold continuous effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the shortened hold continuous production when a part overlaps with the SP time displayed by the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the look-ahead regulation period table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the alternative effect selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold continuous production setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the alternative effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect screen during SP time preparation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the modified example of the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the look-ahead effect screen of the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of entering the SP time during the look-ahead effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the modification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display mode of the hold symbol is changed to the specific display mode by the hold change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (B) is an example of a display screen displayed when eight hold memories are acquired in a state where the hold symbols of the specific display mode are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. It is the figure shown, (c) is an example of the display screen displayed when the specific display mode changes to the normal display mode by the hold change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (D) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display mode of the hold symbol changes from the specific display mode to the special display mode due to the hold change effect. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the pending change effect selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold ball number command process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold mode setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold change effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the variation pattern selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the end mode selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the end screen setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the standby process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the effect switching 6 table in 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect execution decision process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command receiving process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the first display mode of the 1.5-second pseudo-disengagement fluctuation in the high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. , Is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second pseudo-disengagement variation of 1.5 seconds in the high-speed variation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (f) are timing charts showing the display contents of the reserved symbols in the high-speed fluctuation mode in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 7th Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the prize effect setting process during high-speed display executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop process 7 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving / probability variation effect setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo hold effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after boot processing during a setting change in a high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after boot processing. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the volume level is raised while the setting displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth embodiment is changed.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 16, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a large number of nails for ball guidance (shown below the center frame 86, in the upper half of the game area) on the base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. (Not shown) and windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit. It is configured by assembling 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a tapping screw or the like is provided from the front side of the game board 13. Is fixed by.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof can be shielded invisible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) formed in front of the game board 13 by being partitioned by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, the "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). It is the state of. In the high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability increases during a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in the present embodiment), and the hit probability of the second symbol described later increases and the second Includes a game state in which a ball can easily win a prize in the winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends changes by 100. It becomes a high probability state for the number of times. If it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuation times.

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is compared with the normal time. And a long time is set. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 140 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 140a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 of the variable display device unit 80 in front view.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case fixed to the back surface of the game board 13, and the center frame 86 borders the window portion (center opening 60b) of the base plate 60. It is arranged. That is, in the front view, the center frame 86 seems to be arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction. Has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle, and lower. Three symbol rows of are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 140 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol “” is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened (enlarged) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 140 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 140 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, or 140 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged (in FIG. 2). Not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 2). A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side with the lower side as an axis, and the MPU 201 is connected to these via the input / output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to it.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 648, 820, solenoid 651, and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 is referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. Note that in FIG. 5, the illustration of units other than the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2)) arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the base plate 60, a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 5) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 in front view, which will be described later, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

The winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the base plate 60 from the game area (front) side, and the ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side of the game area, and each is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the VI-VI line of FIG. FIG. 6 illustrates the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 in the assembled state.

As shown in FIG. 6, the passages of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 6), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is formed. It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d have a second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, the protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed in the second throwing portion 942c. This makes it possible to easily align the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 when assembling to the base plate 60.

Next, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.
FIG. 7A is a front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 7B is a side view of the throwing unit 970. FIG. 8A is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 8B is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the throwing unit 970 is a distribution unit 980 arranged on the player side (game area side) and provided with a space through which the game ball can be inserted, and the game area of the distribution unit 980. It is formed with a passage unit 990 arranged on the opposite side to the above.

The distribution unit 980 is provided with openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that are connected to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 of the above-mentioned winning port unit 930, and the openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) are provided. ) To the side opposite to the game area through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, the game ball can be received inside. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

The passage unit 990 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980. The passage unit 990 is provided with a plurality of openings (first insertion holes 991a to second insertion holes 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives a game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from the openings. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12. 9 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 9 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 12 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in line XIIa-XIia of FIG. 9 (a), and FIG. 12 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12 (a). Is.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the distribution unit 980 rotates between the back base 985, the front base 981 arranged on the player side of the back base 985, and the front base 981 and the back base. It is mainly provided with a distribution portion 983 arranged in a possible state and a cover member 987 arranged at a position corresponding to the distribution portion 983 on the back surface side of the back surface base 985.

The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and has a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape and a plurality of openings (openings) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recess 985h recessed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction, and a housing portion 986b and a protrusion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h. Formed in preparation.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape on the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed with 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw through which the front base 981 described later is inserted. As a result, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 990, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the aisle unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a part of the openings 985b to 985f described later on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Thereby, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 9B), and is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 9B) of the base portion 985a. Will be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed inside with a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 described later, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j protruding in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction, and the size of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (FIG. 9 (b) left-right direction) of the base portion 985a, and the position in the gravity direction (FIG. 9 (b) vertical direction) is substantially the same as the opening 985b and the opening 985c. Set to position. Further, the opening 985d is formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the openings 985b and 985c. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. Further, the openings 985e and 985f are extended in the direction of gravity and flow into the inflow passages 985e1,985f1 in the space opening on the front base 981 side and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 in the space opening on the opposite side to the front base 981 side. It is mainly provided with intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 that communicate with the passages 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3,985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is communicated with the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. .. As a result, the game ball passing through the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 can flow into the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.

Further, in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, recessed portions 985f4 are formed which are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction (gravity direction) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing the detection device SE3 described later inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE3 in rear view. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and arranged from the back side (opposite side to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

The detection device SE3 is a device that detects the passage of the game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE1a in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed unevenly in either one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE3 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and the detection hole SE1a is not formed in either of the longitudinal directions. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b that controls the detection device SE3 is arranged on one side.

In the present embodiment, when the detection device SE3 detects the passage of the game ball, five prize balls are paid out and the lottery of the first symbol is executed. In response to this lottery, the third symbol display device 81 executes the variable display of the third symbol.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. Placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. it can. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the weight of the game ball can be easily used when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed so as to be connected to the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed by using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 from increasing in length in the gravity direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back base 985 from becoming larger in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990 described later in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 can be made to flow into the discharge passage 985e3, 985f3, and can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the opening 985d. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed on the cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. As a result, the magnetic material 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be minutely large due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semicircular rings are elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be arranged.

The projecting portion 986e is projected in a columnar shape from a position opposite to the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a described above. Further, the projecting portion 986e is provided with a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing the tip of a screw through which the cover member 987, which will be described later, is inserted. By screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and by being arranged in the accommodating portion 986b, a magnetic field can be generated on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. As a result, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, can be repelled to facilitate the displacement of the distribution unit 983.

The front base 981 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. Further, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the back base 985 in the front view, and bulges from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981 g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on the outer peripheral edge thereof and a first guide wall projecting toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, the second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction. It is mainly provided with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5), and is set to an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw. ..

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and is formed in pairs in the lateral direction with the bulging portion 982 described later sandwiched between them. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed so that the open portion of the semicircle faces the substantially central side in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The inner edge shape of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f can be inserted. The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. As a result, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened.

The through hole 981c is formed through a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 9A) along the edge portion thereof. Further, the through hole 981c is a portion communicating with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into.

The side wall portion 981b is formed so that the upright tip surface abuts on the second throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Further, in the side wall portion 981b, the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located on the one side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and is located on the back base 985 side. It is formed with a downward slope toward it (see FIG. 6).

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 projecting from the erection tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, is set to a size that allows the game ball to be inserted inside, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside thereof. It is formed by including a throwing passage TR0, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the throwing passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and is erected at an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the direction of gravity and bent toward the back base 985 side at a substantially intermediate position in the front view. It is mainly provided with an erection wall 982a to be formed and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on other sides in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U-shape in front view. Further, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that is in a rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 in a state where the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Formed at overlapping positions.

Further, the inflow port 982d is provided with a second protrusion 982d1 projecting to the side opposite to the back base 985 side at the edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60, the first protrusion 982d1 is formed. The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

Further, the distance dimension L14 (see FIG. 9A) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first thrown ball from the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1. The distance dimension to the inner edge on one side in the gravity direction of the portion 942 g is set to be larger than the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown into the first throwing portion 942g through the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 982) and the first throwing portion 942g It can be difficult to get caught in between.

The erection wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance in front view. Further, the erection wall 982a is formed to be formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with a contact portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erection direction on the upper side in the gravity direction.

In the erection wall 982a, the distance L16 (see FIG. 12B) in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is set between the opposite sides. The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the space through which the passage can pass are formed.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is sent to either of them. The distribution unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately thrown into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

On the other side of the erection wall 982a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a bearing portion 982c is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 to the back base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 described later, and the inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, since one end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the shaft member 988a and inserting the other end side of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983 described later, and the rotational displacement amount of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by the contact portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).
Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the second passage TR2, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d can flow in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985f of the back base 985.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recessing direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982g, a third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be miniaturized. ..

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage BK3 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985. ..

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is extended toward the back base 985 side toward one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, so that the game ball flowing down is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. Can be easily guided to the openings 985b to 985f and flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are connected to the recess 982h and the recess 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected tip surface is inclined downward toward the back base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 9B). As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the vertical tip surface of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and guided to the opening 985e and the opening 985f side to guide the opening 985e and the opening. It can be easily flowed into 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed by connecting with the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and is guided to the back base 985 side while colliding with the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 to open the game ball at the opening 985e. And it can be made to flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the standing distance of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be reduced by the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be increased to improve the durability.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 becomes difficult to see from the player side. Further, when the guide portion 982h1,982j1 is erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is played by the thickness of the guide portion 982h1,982j1. There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily made visible even in a state through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T shape in front view. Further, the distribution portion 983 penetrates the connecting portion between the acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, the intermediate plate 983b protruding from the substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. The through hole 983c to be formed, the abutting portion 983d bulging around the axis of the through hole 983c, and the wall portion 983e formed by connecting the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the back surface base 985 side. It is formed mainly with and.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.
As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the back base 985, the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the distribution portion 983, so that the front base 981 and the back base can be rotated in a state where the distribution portion 983 can rotate. It is arranged between the opposing 985s.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotating to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from the tip thereof. The separation distance L17 to the inside (see FIG. 12B) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to either one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. Further, in the intermediate plate 983b, the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1 and the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Can be switched to the regulated state.

The working portion 983a is formed so as to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in the front view. Further, the connection position of the working portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d.
As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is in a state in which a load is applied to the action unit 983a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to project outward from the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction orthogonal to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is larger than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Set small. Therefore, the wall portion 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h in a state where the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the inflow port 982d into the distribution unit 980 from being caught in the recess 985h, thereby hindering the flow of the game ball.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 which is on the back surface side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed from the through hole 983c to the outer end portion in the radial direction toward the intermediate plate 983b side. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988c formed in the columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated internally from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is arranged in a state of repelling the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back surface base 985. As a result, in the distribution unit 983, a magnetic force is applied from the magnetic body 988b in which the magnetic body 988c is arranged on the back surface base 985, and the magnetic body 988c is rotated around the through hole 983c to rotate the acting portion 983a in one or the other direction. Can be tilted to.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c to be inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is the accommodating portion 983e1. It is possible to suppress getting out of. That is, since the portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the back base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape in the front view in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion inside which accommodates the accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 described above, and is set to an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating portion 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodating inside the accommodating portion 986b as described above, the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b is accommodated. It is possible to prevent the portion 986b from coming out.

The second recess 987b is provided with a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the back base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess. Further, the inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recessed portion 987b is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985 and can be positioned and arranged, and in the positioned state, the screw is inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the distribution unit 983 when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in the range XIIIa of FIG. 12 (b). In the following, the acting unit 983a of the distribution unit 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), it is arranged in the distribution 983 as described above. When the magnetic body 988c provided repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 10), the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is in a state of being tilted toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 13A).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action unit 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 13B, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1. It is said that. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from the state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to the state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the state in which the distribution unit 983 is rotated can be maintained. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 one by one.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16.
14 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball, a third passage member 993 that is arranged on the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992, a second passage member 992, and a second passage member 992. It is mainly provided with a detection device SE4 arranged between the three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed on the second passage member 992 side with a predetermined width. Further, the first passage member 991 has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the distribution unit 980 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and one side of the first insertion hole 991a in the gravity direction (lower in the gravity direction). The second insertion hole 991b formed through the side), the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d formed through the second insertion hole 991b on both sides in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in the front view. It is mainly provided with through holes 991f which are formed through a plurality of circular through holes.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985e of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passes through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 can be received. And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the detection device SE3 from projecting to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (left direction in FIG. 14A).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985f of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passes through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991d2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (right direction in FIG. 14A).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 992b that penetrates the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a fifth insertion hole thereof. It is mainly provided with a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the 992b and an erection wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The fifth insertion hole 992b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 992b is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The erection wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the erection wall 992a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 992b can be rolled to the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 14B).

The outer peripheral surface of the upright wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d protruding in the horizontal direction and a protruding wall 992e protruding in the horizontal direction from the end portion on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape so as to project in the horizontal direction and the tip thereof bends toward the third passage member 993. The wiring of the detection device SE4 and the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, which will be described later, is inserted into the engaging portion 992d while facing the erection wall 992a. As a result, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from coming out of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The projecting wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in the front view on both sides of the erecting wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes through holes 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof is connected to the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. To. As a result, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, around the sixth insertion hole 992c, a guide wall 992c1 erected toward the third passage member 993 side is formed. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to the first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction and also has gravity. It is formed from a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are positioning wall surfaces for arranging the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e and the engaging portion 993d formed on the third passage member 993. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions facing the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 is provided with an annular protrusion 992f projecting toward the third passage member 993 at a position separated from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 14A).
The annular projection 992f is provided with a fastening hole 992f1 having a circular hole on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole for screwing a screw through which the third passage member 993 is inserted, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed through substantially an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. Mainly provided with an erection wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position connected to the internal space of the detection device SE4 arranged in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (downwardly inclined toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). Will be done. As a result, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 993a can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (right side in FIG. 14B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the third passage member 993 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 14B) of the standing wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, since the other side (upper side in FIG. 14B) of the third passage member 993 is opened, the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the erection wall 992a by that amount. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the outer shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be miniaturized.

In the erection wall 993e, when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the first wall portion 992c2 is the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

Further, on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) to which the game ball is thrown, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side in the gravity direction of the detection device SE4 is formed. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, since the detection hole SE1a is formed in a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing the player from cheating, the inside thereof is caused by a slight misalignment of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first wall portion 992c2 that positions the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being displaced from each other. As a result, the game ball through which the sixth insertion hole 992c is inserted can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip thereof. In the bent portion 993d1, when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the second wall portion 992c3 is the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular projection 992f is formed. It is formed into a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c is provided with a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular protrusion 992f on the concave bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the through hole 993c1 is inserted from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1 to screw the screw into the second passage. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the throwing unit 970 is formed of a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are formed. Since it is arranged on the back side (opposite side to the game area) of the front unit 940 provided with the above, the game of flowing down the game area by exchanging the throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit. It can be a different game form without affecting the flow of the ball.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 69. In the first embodiment, the case where the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the distribution unit 980 are formed as a passage that guides the ball backward without returning the ball forward has been described, but the distribution of the second embodiment has been described. The unit 300 is configured to allow the ball to move forward. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 35, and then the details of the configuration of the operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 69.

FIG. 17 is a front exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17, an internal opening is formed in the center frame 86 arranged inside the game board 13, and the player can visually recognize the operation unit 500 through the internal opening of the center frame 86. ..

In addition to this, in the present embodiment, since the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, the visual mode is not limited to the visual mode through the internal opening of the center frame 86, and the center frame 86 The operation unit 500 can be visually recognized via the base plate 60 located on the outside of the.

FIG. 18 is a front view of the game board 13, FIG. 19 is a rear view of the game board 13, FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 21 is a rear view of the game board 13. It is a figure. In FIG. 18, the wind turbine FS1 and the nail KG1 which are not shown in FIG. 2 are also shown.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, an upper connecting member 270 that replaces the function of the nail that distributes the flow path of the ball is provided, and the nail KG1 is arranged within the range in which the upper connecting member 270 is arranged. Absent.

This makes it possible to avoid the impermeable nature of the nail KG1 acting as a drawback.
In other words, by removing the nail KG1 from the position above the center frame 86 (the position above the center frame 86 and below the outer rail 62) where the upper connecting member 270 is arranged, the position above the center frame 86. Since it is possible to prevent the light passing through the center frame 86 from being reflected or blocked by the nail KG1 in various directions, it is possible to improve the visibility of the light effect at the position above the center frame 86. The mode of the light effect at the upper position of the center frame 86 will be described later.

In FIG. 19, the shape of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is formed from a shape that is recessed upward at the left and right center positions, and electricity connected to the illumination substrate 251 arranged in the recessed portion. A sensor cover 254, which is also used to hold the wiring DH1, is shown.

As shown in FIG. 19, at the lower position of the center frame 86, on the back side of the base plate 60, a gutter 480 forming a flow path of a ball entering the general winning opening 63 and an upper gutter 480 thereof. A wide decorative member 490 formed in a shape straddling the rear side of the first winning opening 64 is fastened and fixed.

The gutter 480 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gutter 480 from blocking the incident light from the back surface side. In addition, it is possible to improve the visibility of the ball that enters the general winning opening 63 and flows down the gutter 480 in the front view.

The wide decorative member 490 is formed of a colored transparent (blue in this embodiment) resin material.
As a result, the wide decorative member 490 can be made conspicuous to the player who visually recognizes the game area from the front.

The wide decorative member 490 includes insertion holes 491 for fastening screws at the left and right ends. A fastening screw screwed into the collecting gutter 480 is inserted into the insertion hole 491, and the wide decorative member 490 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 480 by the fastening screw. As a result, the attention to the wide decorative member 490 can be connected to the attention to the sphere flowing down the gutter 480.

The wide decorative member 490 is a pair of left and right inclined forming portions formed at the same inclination angle as the plate-shaped portion behind the plate-shaped portion (ceiling plate portion 455) that rolls the ball above the general winning opening 63. It includes a 492 and a central forming portion 493 extending in the left-right direction on the left-right inner side of the inclined forming portion 492.

The inclination forming portion 492 is arranged so that the upper surface of the member is along the plate-shaped portion (ceiling plate portion 455) that rolls the ball above the general winning opening 63 in the front view. Therefore, even when the plate-shaped portion that rolls the sphere is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, it is possible to make the sphere appear as if it is rolling on the inclined forming portion 492 in the front view. It is possible to make it easier to grasp the flow path.

The central forming portion 493 constitutes the ceiling portion of the flow path (inclined extending portion 315 described later) of the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the flow path, and even when the flow path of the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, it is colored and transparent. The central forming portion 493 formed from the resin material of the above makes it easy to grasp the flow path of the sphere from the front view.

In FIG. 20, a resin member such as an upper connecting member 270 having a portion overhanging the game area and being formed of a light-transmitting resin material and a winning opening component 400 is shown above and below the center frame 86. ing. These resin members can produce the effect of stably maintaining the flow-down mode of the sphere, which will be described in detail later. In FIG. 20, the nail KG1 and the wind turbine FS1 are not shown.

To explain the outline first, one of the common effects of the resin members such as the upper connecting member 270 and the winning opening constituent member 400 is that they can be easily repaired when they are cracked or chipped. This effect is an effect that is not achieved when using commonly used metal nails.

In the case of nails planted on the base plate 60, the nails may bend or break if the balls collide or if the operator accidentally overloads the nails. If it bends, it may be possible to restore it by bending it to the opposite side by the same amount, but if it bends, it is difficult to restore it.

In the first place, the nails are driven into the base plate 60 by an automatic machine, and the nails are not driven individually one by one, but are generally driven into the entire game board at once. Therefore, even if only one nail is missing, it is difficult to re-strike a single missing nail while the other nails are planted, and it is necessary to replace the entire base plate 60. there is a possibility.

At this time, since the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, and the like are assembled to the base plate 60, these assembled members may be reassembled to the replacement base plate 60, or these members may be reassembled. It is necessary to replace each one, and in any case, the repair cost tends to increase.

On the other hand, if a part of the resin member such as the upper connecting member 270 or the winning opening component 400 is cracked or chipped, the repair can be completed by replacing the resin member with a new member, and the base plate 60 is replaced. You don't have to. Further, since the resin member is independent of the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc., there is no cost related to the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc. when the resin member is replaced, so that the repair cost is not incurred. Can be suppressed.

In FIG. 21, with respect to the illuminated substrate 251 and the substrate holding plate 252 arranged above the center frame 86, the substrate holding plate 252 is arranged so as to be within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the substrate holding plate 252 is arranged. It is shown that the illuminated substrate 251 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 is arranged so as to fit inside the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 21, a plurality of fitting portions 60c are provided so as to project from the back surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface side in a cylindrical shape whose outer shape is tapered. The fitting portion 60c has a female screw formed on the inner diameter side, and functions as a portion into which the fastening screw is screwed when the operating unit 500 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60.

FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60, a central configuration unit 240 arranged inside the base plate 60 and having a center frame 86, and an upper portion of the central configuration unit 240. It includes an upper connecting member 270 that connects the base plate 60 and limits the flow direction of the ball that flows down the game area, and a thin plate member 290 that is arranged between the upper connecting member 270 and the central constituent unit 240. ..

The details of the central configuration unit 240 will be described later, but as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 22, the central configuration unit 240 is formed with a fixing portion 244 used for positioning and fixing the thin plate member 290.

FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central configuration unit 240, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central configuration unit 240. The central configuration unit 240 is a unit that is assembled in an annular shape when it is arranged in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, has a center frame 86, and guides the flow of the sphere.

The central constituent unit 240 includes an upper constituent member 241 that constitutes an upper portion of the center frame 86, and a lower constituent member 261 that constitutes a lower portion of the center frame 86. The upper component 241 and the lower component 261 each form the upper and lower halves of a ring shape from a light-transmitting resin material, thereby surrounding the third symbol display device in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 18). The center frame 86 is configured.

In this way, the size of the resin mold required for molding the resin member can be reduced by forming the center frame 86 in an annular shape by combining a plurality of members instead of forming the center frame 86 in an annular shape by itself. .. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the resin mold can be suppressed.

For example, the shape of the upper edge portion of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is not a shape that is recessed upward corresponding to the shape of the thin plate portion 242 in the left and right central portions as in the present embodiment, but is a substantially arc shape. When the design of the base plate 60 is changed so as to be formed, the center frame 86 can be assembled to the base plate 60 by changing the design corresponding to only the upper half (upper member 241), so that the lower half (lower side) is formed. As for the component member 261), a member designed in accordance with the present embodiment can be diverted.

As a result, it is necessary to newly manufacture a large mold that covers the entire center frame 86 for minor changes made by changing the design of the base plate 60 or changing the shape of the center frame 86 to change the appearance. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the mold cost.

The upper component 241 is a thin plate portion 242 arranged flush with the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), and extends in a strip shape on the front side of the thin plate portion 242, and is made of glass during the game. A strip-shaped frame portion 245 formed with a size that does not allow the sphere to pass between the unit 16 (see FIG. 1) and that can guide the flow of the sphere, and arranged on the lower side and the left and right inside of the strip-shaped frame portion 245. A decorative portion 247 that is provided and forms a substantially arc shape is provided.

The thin plate portion 242 is used for positioning and fixing the extension portion 243 extending to the back side for reinforcement at the left and right and upper edge portions and the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23). A fixing portion 244 is provided.

The extension portion 243 is designed so that the front-rear width is about the same as the plate thickness of the base plate 60. That is, the front-rear thickness of the thin plate portion 242, which is shorter in front-rear width than the extension portion 243, is designed to be thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space on the back surface side of the thin plate portion 242.

The fixing portion 244 is disposed close to the recessed portion 244a recessed for positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and the recessed portion 244a, and is projected to the front side. The projecting portion 244b and the fastening portion 244c into which the fastening screw inserted from the front side into the upper connecting member 271 is screwed are provided at symmetrical positions.

The thin plate portion 242 is arranged flush with the base plate 60, and the projecting portion 244b can be formed from an arbitrary position on the front side. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) can be improved. The assembly of the upper connecting member 270 using the fixing portion 244 will be described later.

A plurality of three-dimensional patterns and figures are formed in the decorative portion 247, and the decorative portion 247 is formed so as to have lower light transmission than the thin plate portion 242. As a result, the decorative portion 247 can be used as a portion that divides the field of view while leaving some light transmission.

Up to this point, the configuration on the front side of the upper component member 241 has been mainly described. Next, a configuration arranged on the back surface side of the upper component member 241 will be described. The upper component 241 includes an illuminated substrate 251 that is fastened and fixed to a fastening portion formed on the back surface side of the thin plate portion 242, and a substrate holding plate 252 that is fastened together with a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the illuminated board 251. , A dish-shaped member 253 sandwiched between the illuminated substrate 251 and the thin plate portion 242 and formed in a dish shape that expands toward the front side, and a decorative portion on one left and right side (right side in this embodiment) of the upper component member 241. A sensor cover 254 that is fastened and fixed at a position on the back side of the 247 is provided.

The substrate holding plate 252 does not have a symmetrical shape, and the formation of the lower right portion is omitted as compared with the left portion. This makes it possible to facilitate the connection of the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIG. 19) passed from the sensor cover 254 side. That is, the connection terminal 251a of the illumination board 251 is arranged on the back surface of the lower right side of the board, and the shape of the board holding plate 252 is designed so that the electric wiring DH1 can be easily connected to this position. Has been done.

Further, the substrate holding plate 252 includes a recessed portion 252a that is recessed in a curved shape that is convex upward at the center position on the left and right. The recessed portion 252a is a portion formed for the purpose of improving the degree of freedom in arranging the operating unit 500, and the details will be described later.

The sensor cover 254 is fixed by arranging a capacitance sensor (for example, a sensor capable of detecting that a player holds his hand over the front side of the glass unit 16) inside and fixing the capacitance sensor. It is a member. In this embodiment, it is used not only for fixing the capacitance sensor but also as a relay portion for the electric wiring DH1 connected to the illumination board 251.

That is, by fixing the electric wiring DH1 to the hook-shaped portion formed on the illuminated substrate 251 with a binding band or the like, the electric wiring DH1 can be held at the back position of the decorative portion 247. As a result, the electrical wiring DH1 can be hidden so that it is difficult for the player to see. In this way, by holding the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 by using the sensor cover 254, the assembling man-hours can be reduced or compared with the case where a dedicated member for holding the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 is prepared. Material costs can be reduced.

The lower component 261 includes a thin plate portion 262 that is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), and a strip-shaped extension portion 263 that extends from the thin plate portion 262 to the back side in a strip shape. And the back covering portion 264 that is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion formed at the extending end portion of the strip-shaped extending portion 263 and covers the back side of the strip-shaped extending portion 263, and the left and right of the thin plate portion 262. A pair of left and right flow path front component parts 265 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the lower end portion to form a flow path for flowing the ball to the back side with the thin plate portion 262, and the back side of the left and right lower end portions of the thin plate portion 262. A pair of left and right flow paths that form a flow path that guides the sphere to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263 by being united with the semi-constituent portion that is fastened and fixed to and protrudes inward from the thin plate portion 262 of the flow path front configuration portion 265. A rear component 266 is provided.

The strip-shaped extension portion 263 includes an upper surface portion that inclines downward toward the left and right central portions, and functions to return the rolled ball to the front side of the base plate 60. In the left and right central portions of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, there are a central rear inclined portion 263a that inclines downward to the back side so that a ball whose velocity in the left and right direction is settled can easily flow to the back side, and left and right sides of the central rear inclined portion 263a. A pair of left and right front inclined portions 263b, which are arranged slightly below the central rear inclined portion 263a and incline downward to the front side so that a ball whose velocity in the left-right direction is settled can easily flow to the front side, and a back surface by the central rear inclined portion 263a. The back covering portion 264 is provided with a ball discharge hole 263c formed so as to allow the ball guided to the front side to be discharged to the front side of the base plate 60 after being flowed down to the side.

In relation to the strip-shaped extension portion 263, the back covering portion 264 is basically closed so as to prevent the ball from falling off from the back side end portion of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, but is behind the central rear inclined portion 263a. Only in the case of, a gap is formed between the band-shaped extension portion 263 and the sphere so that the sphere can flow downward.
A ball guided to the front side through this gap is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c.

Since the ball discharge hole 263c is arranged at the center position on the left and right, and the first winning opening 64 is arranged below it (see FIG. 18), the ball discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c has a high probability (nail). Enter the first winning opening 64 (with a higher probability than the ball approaching the first winning opening 64 while being played by KG1).
Therefore, when the ball is guided to the strip-shaped extension portion 263, the attention to the ball can be improved.

The flow path front component 265 forms a guide path for guiding the sphere flowing down the front side of the thin plate portion 262 to the back side, and the flow path rear component 266 forms a sphere by forming the rear end surface of the guide path. Is guided to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263. In other words, the flow path front component 265 and the flow path rear component 266 form a tunnel-shaped portion that discharges the sphere that has flowed in from the front side of the base plate 60 to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 22 and 23. The upper connecting member 270 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and projects so as to be extruded from the back side to the front side with the thin plate-shaped portion 271 and the plate-shaped portion 271 as the base end. An overhanging portion 272 to 277, a thin portion 278 formed partially thin on the back side of the plate-shaped portion 271, and a protruding portion 279 formed so as to project to the back side in the thin portion 278. , Equipped with.

The plate-shaped portion 271 is formed in a symmetrical bow shape that is long left and right when viewed from the front, and the shape of the lower edge portion is formed to follow the shape of the upper edge portion of the center frame 86. Further, the plate-shaped portion 271 has an upper edge portion having a curved shape, and more specifically, an outer rail in which a tangent line at a specific point of the upper edge portion of the plate-shaped portion 271 is arranged close to the specific point. The shape is parallel to the tangent of the corresponding point of 62.

The outer rail 62 and the plate-shaped portion 271 are spaced apart from each other by about the diameter of a ball (game ball) (see FIG. 18). As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball rolling along the outer rail 62 collides with the plate-shaped portion 271 and the momentum is attenuated.

That is, the ball is configured to separate from the outer rail 62 before the ball introduced into the game area collides with the plate-shaped portion 271. In other words, as long as it is in contact with the outer rail 62, the ball does not collide with the plate-shaped portion 271, so that the ball to be launched with the maximum firing intensity (for example, the outer rail 62 until it collides with the return rubber 69). It is possible to prevent the ball that rolls in contact with the ball) from colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271 and dampening the momentum.

As a result, unnecessary attenuation of the sphere can be avoided, and it is possible to prevent the plate-shaped portion 271 from being cracked or chipped due to the collision of the sphere with the maximum firing intensity with the plate-shaped portion 271.

The distance between the outer rail 62 and the plate-shaped portion 271 is not limited to the distance of about the diameter of the sphere, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, in consideration of the shape of the sphere, the distance may be changed in the front-rear direction (the distance becomes wider as the distance from the base plate 60 increases) so that the collision between the sphere and the plate-shaped portion 271 can be avoided. In this case, since the distance between the plate-shaped portion 271 and the outer rail 62 on the side close to the base plate 60 can be narrowed, when the plate-shaped portion 271 is decorated, the formation area of the decoration can be expanded. ..

The overhanging portions 272 to 277 have a symmetrical shape with respect to the left-right center of the plate-shaped portion 271 from a position symmetrical with respect to the left-right center of the plate-shaped portion 271 from the back side to the front surface of the plate-shaped portion 271. The parts that overhang toward the side, each of which replaces the function of the nail.

From the left and right center side, it is described as the first overhanging part 272, the second overhanging part 273, the third overhanging part 274, the fourth overhanging part 275, the fifth overhanging part 276, and the sixth overhanging part 277. To do.

The first overhanging portion 272 and the second overhanging portion 273 are arranged in front of the central constituent unit 240 via the thin plate member 290. The third overhanging portion 274 is arranged so as to straddle the central constituent unit 240 and the base plate 60. The fourth overhanging portion 275, the fifth overhanging portion 276, and the sixth overhanging portion 277 are arranged in front of the base plate 60.

As described above, since each of the overhanging portions 272 to 277 is arranged on the front side of which member, the function and the design concept may be different, but the details will be described later.

The thin portion 278 is a portion formed thin by shifting the back surface of the plate to the front side by the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290 or a dimension slightly exceeding the thickness dimension in order to arrange the thin plate member 290. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 290 is held by the fixing portion 244 (see FIG. 22) instead of holding the thin plate member 290 by applying a pressing force from the thin portion 278 to the thin plate member 290. doing.

The deviation dimension of the thin portion 278 toward the front surface of the plate back surface is not limited to the case where the thin plate member 290 is formed with a thickness dimension of 290 or more, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the deviation of the back surface of the plate toward the front side may be designed to be less than the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290. In this case, since the thin plate member 290 is formed so as to be expandable (compressible) in the thickness direction, it is easy to fix the arrangement of the thin plate member 290 while avoiding excessive pressure being applied to the thin plate member 290. Can be done.

Further, for example, the deviation of the thin portion 278 to the front side of the plate back surface may be reduced only in the portion corresponding to the edge portion of the thin plate member 290. In this case, the range in which pressure is applied to the thin plate member 290 can be limited to the edge portion of the thin plate member 290.

The projecting portion 279 is a portion inserted into the positioning hole 291 formed in the thin plate member 290, and is a projecting portion for positioning the thin plate member 290. Since a recess (recess) corresponding to the shape of the overhanging portion 272, 273 is formed on the back side of the arrangement position of the first overhanging portion 272 or the second overhanging portion 273 in the thin portion 278, from this position It is not possible to project the projecting portion 279. That is, the projecting portion 279 is projected from a position in the thin portion 278 that avoids the arrangement of the first overhanging portion 272 and the second overhanging portion 273.

The thin plate member 290 is a member formed in a thin plate shape (sheet shape) from a light-transmitting resin material, and has a plurality of positioning holes 291 drilled for positioning at the time of assembly and an upper connecting member 270 at the center. It is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 292, which are formed as holes for inserting fastening screws for fastening and fixing to the constituent unit 240.

The positioning holes 291 are holes 291a that are bored on the left and right outside and through which the projecting portion 244b of the central configuration unit 240 is inserted, and holes 291b that are bored on the left and right inside and through which the projecting portion 279 of the upper connecting member 270 is inserted. , Equipped with. That is, the thin plate member 290 is used for positioning both the central constituent unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270.

In the present embodiment, the left and right outside means the left and right edge sides of the game board 13 or the operation unit 500 in the front view, and the left and right inside means the left and right center portions of the game board 13 or the operation unit 500 in the front view. means.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the projecting portion 244b is formed at a position facing the recessed portion on the back surface side of the second overhanging portion 273. Therefore, in the front view, the projecting portion 244b is blindfolded by the second overhanging portion 273. As a result, the positioning (position stabilization) action of the thin plate member 290 can be caused by the projecting portion 244b while reducing the visibility of the projecting portion 244b.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, by forming the portion formed in the upper connecting member 270 into the protruding portion 279 instead of the hole portion, positioning can be performed without any problem even in a narrow range of the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272 and 273. Part can be constructed. In other words, when a through hole or a recess is formed in a narrow range, the wall thickness of the member may become excessively thin and the strength may be insufficient, but such a situation can be avoided.

In other words, it is possible to easily avoid that the arrangement of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 is restricted or the strength is lowered due to the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290. That is, when a hole for positioning is formed at the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272 and 273, the width length of the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 is equal to or greater than the width length of the hole portion (the hole portion is a circle). If it is a shape, it is necessary to make it larger than the diameter), and the strength of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 may be reduced by the amount that the material is scraped by the holes. However, according to this embodiment, these problems It is possible to easily eliminate the points.

On the other hand, as described above, since the back surfaces of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 are recessed, the projecting portion 279 cannot be formed. However, as shown in FIG. 22, this position is from the central configuration unit 240. Since it can be dealt with by projecting the projecting portion 244b, the positioning portion (protruding portion 244b, 279) of the thin plate member 290 can be arranged without being limited to the arrangement of the projecting portions 272 and 273. ..

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the projecting portions 244b and 279 for positioning the thin plate member 290 are formed on both the central configuration unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270, thereby freely designing the upper connecting member 270. Since it is possible to avoid limiting the arrangement of the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290 while maintaining a high degree of freedom and strength, the position of the thin plate member 290 can be stabilized.

Further, the protruding portion 279 inserted through the thin plate member 290 is designed so as to be inserted into the recessed portion 244a of the central constituent unit 240, so that the thin plate member 290 can be inserted into the central constituent unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270. At the same time, the upper connecting member 270 can be positioned with respect to the central configuration unit 240.

The thin plate member 290 is a member that can be visually recognized by the player via the upper connecting member 270.
Although not shown, in the present embodiment, patterns, figures, characters or characters are colorfully drawn on the front surface of the thin plate member 290, and the LED is illuminated from the LED arranged on the illuminated substrate 251 of the central configuration unit 240. Depending on the difference in the light emission mode (difference in color and light / dark mode), the color and light / dark mode visually recognized through the thin plate member 290 change in various ways.

Unlike the case where the pattern, graphic, character or character is drawn directly on the base plate 60, according to the present embodiment, if the thin plate member 290 is removed, the pattern, graphic, character or character drawn on the thin plate member 290 is drawn from the game board 13. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when the game board 13 has the same shape but the game playability is changed (so-called different specifications), the patterns, figures, characters or characters, colors, etc. drawn on the game board 13 are different. It may make it easier for the player to understand the playability.

When a pattern, a figure, a character, or a character is drawn directly on the base plate 60, it is necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, so that it is easy to actually replace the entire game board 13, and the cost for changing the game playability is high. Easy to bulk.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 290 with another thin plate member 290 having a different pattern, graphic, character or character, color, etc., so it is necessary to replace the entire game board 13. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the game playability.

26 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXVI of FIG. 18, FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 26, and FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 of FIG. 26. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in -XXVIII line.

As shown in FIG. 26, the overhanging portions 272 to 277 are each formed in an individual shape, and when a ball introduced into the game area collides, the momentum of the ball is reduced. It has a common purpose of allowing the sphere to flow down to the left and right sides of the center frame 86.

Conventionally, overhanging portions 272 to 277 are formed as a substitute for nails that have been planted in the same arrangement. That is, each overhanging portion 272 to 277 is designed from a shape that surrounds a plurality of nails to be planted in a front view.

As can be seen in common with the first overhanging portion 272, the second overhanging portion 273, and the third overhanging portion 274, the upper side surface is formed wider than the other side surfaces. As a result, the ball can be configured to flow in the same direction along the inclination of the upper side surface regardless of the position on the upper side surface. As a result, even if the adjustment of the firing force is slightly deviated, the ball can be easily flowed down by a similar flow path, so that the stress during the game of the player who wants the ball to flow down by the same path can be alleviated.

Since the third overhanging portion 274 and the fourth overhanging portion 275 are arranged next to each other, even if the adjustment of the firing force of the ball is slightly deviated, which one the ball reaches will change. The slope of the upper side is very different. That is, the upper side surface of the third overhanging portion 274 is a downwardly inclined surface that gently inclines toward the left and right inward, while the upper side surface of the fourth overhanging portion 275 is steeply inclined toward the left and right inward. It is formed as a descending inclined surface.

Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper side surface of the fourth overhanging portion 275 and flows down will bounce greatly upward when colliding with the center frame 86, and the momentum is likely to be lost. Therefore, on the downstream side of the game area, it is easy to flow down toward the out opening 71 or toward the general winning opening 63 without reaching the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, the ball that reaches the upper side surface of the third overhanging portion 274 and flows down collides with the center frame 86 in the left-right direction, and the load in the bounce direction can also be used as the momentum of the flow down, so that it is on the downstream side of the game area. It is easy to reach the first winning opening 64.

That is, the shape of the overhanging portion 272 to 276 is designed so that the flow mode of the ball on the downstream side of the game region changes depending on which overhanging portion 272 to 276 the ball reaches. As a result, the player can enthusiastically adjust the firing force of the ball.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, a gap CL1 and CL2 of about the thickness of the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240 is provided between the base plate 60 and the extension portion 243 of the central configuration unit 240. Designed to be placed.

That is, it is not a design concept in which the central constituent unit 240 is positioned in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, but a gap is left between the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 and the central constituent unit 240, and the upper connecting member 270 is provided. It is designed from the design concept that the central constituent unit 240 is simultaneously aligned with the base plate 60 at the time of fastening and fixing (connecting) by.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the thin plate member 290 and the central configuration unit 240 are arranged on the back surface of the first overhanging portion 272, while the base plate 60 is arranged on the back surface of the third overhanging portion 274. Is placed. As described above, the members arranged on the back surfaces of the overhanging portions 272 to 277 are not all the same and may be different.

As shown in FIG. 27, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240 is formed of a thin wall, for example, when a load is applied to the first overhanging portion 272, the first overhanging portion 272 is bent and deformed. In this case, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240 can also be bent and deformed, the load applied to the first overhanging portion 272 can be absorbed. As a result, the possibility that the first overhanging portion 272 is cracked or chipped can be reduced.

Therefore, for example, when a sphere collides with the first overhanging portion 272, even if the momentum of the sphere is very large, the bending deformation of the first overhanging portion 272 and the thin plate portion caused by the bending deformation. Since the momentum of the ball can be sufficiently reduced by the bending deformation of the 242, the flow of the ball after colliding with the first overhanging portion 272 can be calmed down.

The bending deformation of the thin plate portion 242 is likely to occur by adopting a configuration in which gaps CL1 and CL2 are provided between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, instead of the configuration in which the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60 are fitted as described above. .. That is, in the present embodiment, by providing the gaps CL1 and CL2 between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, the central constituent unit 240 is bent and deformed, so that the load applied to the first overhanging portion 272 is released. be able to.

A similar effect can be expected for the second overhanging portion 273. The load given to the first overhanging portion 272 includes a load due to a collision of a game ball, a load applied by a clerk of a game machine store when clearing a ball clogging in a game area, and a worker performing maintenance work. The load applied from is assumed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the base plate 60 is formed so thick that no bending occurs. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the third overhanging portion 274, the base plate 60 bends. Although it cannot be expected that the load is released by the deformation, the height position of the third overhanging portion 274 is lower than that of the overhanging portions 272 and 273, so that the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small. Therefore, even if the third overhanging portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60, the possibility that the third overhanging portion 274 is cracked or chipped can be reduced.

Furthermore, considering that if the momentum of the ball colliding with the third overhanging portion 274 is excessively reduced at a place where the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small, the flow of the ball may stop. In the embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the third overhanging portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60.

Further, since the bending of the third overhanging portion 274 is suppressed and the state is stable, the center frame 86 is distributed to the left and right sides of the center frame 86 and is used as a game area where nails are planted. Since the guidance of the sphere can be stabilized in the arrangement close to the left right region and the lower region, the correspondence between the firing intensity of the sphere and the flow mode of the sphere can be stabilized.

In order to prevent the third overhanging portion 274 from cracking or chipping, the collision angle with the sphere, the shape of the third overhanging portion 274, and the like are given to the third overhanging portion 274. It is preferable to design so that the load is small (the load can easily escape). It is preferable to adopt the same design concept for the 4th overhanging portion 275 to the 6th overhanging portion 277.

The advantages of using the overhanging portions 272 to 277 as a substitute for the nail KG1 planted on the base plate 60 will be described. In particular, it is possible to improve the effect of production. That is, in the case of the overhanging portions 272 to 277 formed from the light-transmitting resin material, there are few blindfolded portions for the player as compared with the metal nail KG1.

For example, even in the configuration in which the illuminated substrate 251 and the thin plate member 290 are arranged on the back side of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 27), the overhanging portions 272 and 273 emit light. Since it is transmitted, the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the illuminated substrate 251 and the pattern, graphic, character or character drawn on the thin plate member 290 should be easily visible to the player. Can be done.

The illumination substrate 251 includes a central light emitting means 251b composed of four LEDs arranged at the center position of the lower side portion, and seven arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the central light emitting means 251b. It is provided with an ambient light emitting means 251c composed of LEDs and a distant light emitting means 251d composed of two LEDs arranged near both left and right ends, and the arrangement in the present embodiment is a hidden line in FIG. Illuminated. In each of the light emitting means 251b, 251c, and 251d, the irradiation direction of light is not always unified, and the objects to be illuminated are different.

The central light emitting means 251b illuminates the symbol mark (shown in white in FIG. 26) in the left and right central portions of the decorative portion 247 of the central configuration unit 240 in the light irradiation direction in the front direction (optical axis is in the front-rear direction). In order to make the entire symbol mark emit light lightly, the width angle in the irradiation direction with respect to the optical axis of the light emitted from the central light emitting means 251b is designed to be large.

The ambient light emitting means 251c emits light to a portion having a width in the front-rear direction, such as a band-shaped frame portion 245 and an edge portion of an overhanging portion 272, 273, in which the light irradiation direction is the front direction (the optical axis is the front-rear direction). It is arranged to be introduced. The optical axis of the light emitted from the ambient light emitting means 251c is used as a reference in order to collect the energy of the light on the optical axis so that the light visually recognized by the player after passing through the long portion in the front-rear direction is not weakened. The width angle in the irradiation direction is designed to be small.

As a result, the path of light (the path of light passing through the strip-shaped frame portion 245 and the overhanging portions 272 and 273) is directly conspicuous depending on how the light is brightened and darkened and the color is changed, and the difference in the conspicuous way is It is possible to perform a production that puts on. For example, by making a difference in the brightness of the light on the left and right, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that implicitly suggests the direction in which the sphere is launched.

For example, the LED of the ambient light emitting means 251c arranged behind the lower edge portion 272a of the first overhanging portion 272 guides light from the lower edge portion 272a of the first overhanging portion 272 to the left and right outer edge portions 272b. It is arranged to shine. As a result, the player can easily reach the left and right outer edge portions 272b of the first overhanging portion 272 by firing the ball with the light of the first overhanging portion 272 as a mark. The optical axis of the light passes through a position where the front-rear width of the first overhanging portion 272 is long, and it is possible to facilitate total internal reflection of the light inside the first overhanging portion 272.

Further, since the internal shape of the first overhanging portion 272 is curved so that the rear portion protrudes inward, the light traveling inside the first overhanging portion 272 is directed to the first overhanging portion 272. It can be repeatedly reflected inside to facilitate the collection of light inside the first overhanging portion 272. As a result, the first overhanging portion 272 can be made to emit light brighter than the surroundings in the front view.

As shown in FIG. 27, the illumination substrate 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240. In the present embodiment, on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270 in the range where the sphere is guided on the front side, within the thickness dimension (front-back direction) of the thick portion of the base plate 60 (the thickness portion required for driving the nail KG1). The illumination board 251 is arranged (within the dimensions). That is, the front-rear position of the illuminated substrate 251 is set to the front side rather than the front-rear position of the back side surface of the thick portion of the base plate 60.

This is an impossible substrate arrangement in the range in which the nail KG1 as a component for guiding the ball is driven into the base plate 60. In other words, in the range where the nail KG1 is driven, the base plate 60 must be formed to be sufficiently thick, so that it is within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (front and back of the back side surface of the thick portion of the base plate 60). It is not possible to secure a space for arranging the illumination substrate 251 (on the front side of the position).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as a part for guiding the ball, a thin-walled upper connecting member 270 is adopted instead of the nail KG1, and the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is arranged on the back surface of the base plate 60. Instead, by arranging the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240, a space for arranging the illumination substrate 251 is secured on the back side of the range where the sphere is guided.

As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the illumination board 251 can be improved as compared with the case where the illumination board 251 has to be arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, and the illumination board 251 can be arranged. The arrangement can be moved to the front side.

By moving the illumination board 251 toward the front side, it is possible to facilitate the arrangement of the rotation effect device 800 (see FIG. 17) of the operation unit 500 arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and also to move the electric decoration board 251 toward the front side. Since the central light emitting means 251b and the ambient light emitting means 251c arranged on the decorative substrate 251 and the light source arranged on the rotation effect device 800 are arranged on the front side, the light to be visually recognized by the player is made brighter. can do.

The distant light emitting means 251d is a direction in which the light irradiation direction (optical axis direction) intersects the front-rear direction (the direction shown by the arrow in FIG. 26), and the overhanging portions 274 to 276 arranged on the left and right outer sides and the like. , The strip-shaped frame portion 245, the outer rail 62, and the like are arranged so as to irradiate light.

As a result, even in the configuration as in this embodiment in which a plate-thick portion of the base plate 60 is formed to ensure strength and the overhanging portions 274 to 276 are arranged in front of the plate-thick portion, far-distance light emission is performed. The overhanging portions 274 to 276 can be sufficiently illuminated by utilizing the light irradiation from the means 251d.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 251 is closer to the front end side than the plate thickness rear end of the base plate 60 (arranged within the plate thickness dimension), it is front and rear from the distant light emitting means 251d. It is possible to facilitate the light emitted in the direction intersecting the direction to reach the fifth overhanging portion 276 separated from the left and right outside.

The shapes of the overhanging portions 274 to 276 that receive the light from the distant light emitting means 251d are devised so that the amount of light can be easily secured. That is, for example, in the third overhanging portion 274, the side surface 274a (left and right inner and upper side surfaces) on the distant light emitting means 251d side is widely formed, and is formed so as to receive the light from the distant light emitting means 251d on the surface. ..

Further, on the opposite side (left and right outer side and lower side) of the distant light emitting means 251d, a corner portion 274b is formed at a connecting position between the surfaces, and a cut formed on the overhanging portion 274 is applied to the corner portion 274b. It is formed from a shape that concentrates the light. As a result, the light emission intensity can be ensured even at the corner portion 274b away from the distant light emitting means 251d.

Regarding the light irradiation to the 6th overhanging portion 277, the thin plate portion 242 (not the center of the left and right but the left and right) arranged on the left and right inside of the 6th overhanging portion 277 is not the light irradiation from the illuminated substrate 251. The light transmitted through the outer thin plate portion 242) to the front side is used.

Further, the light emitting effect of the sixth overhanging portion 277 is also executed by the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800, which will be described later, but the light emitted from the rotating member 810 is directed toward the front side. The configuration and its strength setting will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the winning openings 63, 64 and the like arranged below the center frame 86 are formed as a part of the winning opening constituent member 400 formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. 29 and 30 show a state in which the winning opening component 400 is disassembled.

The winning opening component 400 is a central component 410 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 at the left and right central portions of the game board 13, and an lining member 430 that covers the lower portion of the central component 410 from the front side. A left component 450 arranged on the left side of the central component 410 and fastened and fixed to the base plate 60, and a right component 470 arranged on the right side of the central component 410 and fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. To be equipped. The right portion component 470 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with the left component member 450.

The central constituent member 410 includes a flat plate-shaped main body plate portion 411 that is fastened and fixed in contact with the base plate 60 in a surface contact, a horizontally long opening 412 formed as an opening forming the specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long opening thereof. A pair of left and right distribution portions 413 that are formed so as to be able to distribute the flow path of the sphere above the left and right sides of the 412, and an upper side surface formed in a curved plate shape above the distribution portion 413. A pair of left and right curved protrusions 414 that project to the front side so that the flow path of the ball can be distributed, and a size that allows the ball to be discharged to a position separated from the left and right ends of the horizontally long opening 412 to the left and right. It is provided with a pair of left and right out ports 415 to be drilled.

The main body plate portion 411 includes sheet disposing recesses 411a that are recessed from the back surface side on both the left and right sides so as to reduce the plate thickness. The sheet arranging recess 411a is recessed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the effect sheet member (thin plate member 380), and is formed at a recessing depth substantially equal to the thickness of the sheet member.

The gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved projecting portion 414 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the sphere can flow down through the gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved projecting portion 414, so that the randomness of the sphere's flow down can be enhanced, and the attention to the sphere can be improved. Can be done.

The distribution portion 413 includes a plurality of ridge portions 413a projecting from the left and right inner side (second winning opening 140 side) side surfaces. The ridge portion 413a is a shape portion provided to reduce the flow speed of the sphere by abutting against the flowing sphere, and due to the deceleration effect of the ridge portion 413a, the opening / closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is formed from the ridge. The given collision force can be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the opening / closing plate 65b from being damaged.

The tangent line HL1 (see FIG. 31) of the curved surface passing through the lower end of the curved surface of the curved projecting portion 414 is designed to pass through the left and right inner side surfaces (side surface on the first winning opening 64 side) of the distribution portion 413. ing. Therefore, a sphere that has rolled the curved surface of the curved projecting portion 414 to the lower end portion tends to reach the left and right inner side surfaces of the distribution portion 413.

The lining member 430 has a main body plate portion 431 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and formed in a thin plate shape, and a strip-shaped back surface extending from the left and right side ends of the main body plate portion 431 toward the left and right inner portions. A pair of left and right strip-shaped portions 432 extending to the side and a pair of left and right vertical plate portions extending to the back side in the shape of a long plate in the vertical direction while being connected to the left and right inner ends of the strip-shaped portion 432. The rotation of the 433, the pair of left and right inclined plate portions 434 extending to the back side in the shape of a long plate having a posture of ascending and inclining from the upper end portion of the vertical plate portion 433 toward the left and right inward, and the electric accessory 140a. An upright portion 435 formed upright on the back side from the main body plate portion 431 is provided on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a so as to regulate the angle.

The strip-shaped portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the erecting portion 435 have the tip portion of the main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410 in a state where the lining member 430 is fastened and fixed to the central constituent member 410. It is formed with a length that allows it to come into contact with. That is, the flow path of the sphere is changed by the strip-shaped portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the erection portion 435, and the flow path of the sphere is distributed.

The band-shaped portion 432 is arranged along the left-right outer side and the lower side of the out port 415, and the ball that rolls and flows down to the band-shaped portion 432 is guided by the out port 415 and discharged from the game area.

The inclined plate portion 434 is arranged on the specific winning opening 65a side of the out opening 415, but since the inclined direction of the upper side surface is the direction of downward inclination toward the out opening 415 side, the inclined plate portion 434 rolls down to the inclined plate portion 434. The ball is also guided to the out port 415 and discharged from the game area.

The erection portion 435 is arranged on the left and right inside of the distribution portion 413 of the central constituent member 410 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17) of the central constituent member 410 and the lining member 430 with a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. To. As a result, the ball can flow down between the distribution unit 413 and the erection unit 435.

The left component 450 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a flat plate-shaped main body plate 451 that is fastened and fixed in contact with the base plate 60 in a surface contact state, and a wide front surface of the left portion of the main body plate 451. It is a plate-shaped part in which the left end is arranged with a gap large enough for a ball to pass between the overhanging portion 453 formed overhanging to the side and the overhanging portion 453. A ceiling plate portion 455 formed from a downwardly inclined shape, and a plurality of ball guide portions 457 and 459 formed in a shape capable of guiding a ball to the general winning opening 63 below the ceiling plate portion 455. Be prepared.

The ceiling plate portion 455 is not divided in the middle so that only the balls that have passed through the gap between the overhanging portion 453 and the ceiling plate portion 455 can flow down the ball guide portions 457 and 459. It is formed in a plate shape.

Sheet disposing recesses 451b and 471b, which are recessed from the back surface side so as to reduce the plate thickness, are formed on the back surface side of the left component member 450 and the back surface side of the right component member 470. The sheet arranging recesses 451b and 471b are recessed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the sheet member (not shown) for effect, and are formed with a recessed depth substantially equal to the thickness of the sheet member. In addition, the example of the decoration of this sheet member is substituted by the description in the thin plate member 380.

FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXXI of FIG. The ball that does not pass through the gap between the overhanging portion 453 and the ceiling plate portion 455 and rolls down on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is not guided to the guide portions 457 and 459, and has a central configuration. It flows down so as to be guided to the member 410 side. The flow path of the sphere from the upstream side of the left component member 450 and the central component member 410 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31, the plurality of nails KG1 planted on the base plate 60 are arranged side by side with a gap smaller than the diameter of the sphere along a straight line that inclines downward toward the inside in the left-right direction. While the path of the sphere (main path FL1) that flows down toward the center is formed, there are gaps that exceed the diameter of the sphere in some places, so that the sphere's dropout path that passes through the gap and deviates from the main path. FL2 and FL3 are formed.

The ceiling plate portion 455 is formed so that the sphere can roll on the upper surface, but the rolling speed of the sphere rolling on the ceiling plate portion 455 differs depending on the timing of falling down from the main path FL1. More specifically, when the path of the sphere changes from the main path FL1 to the dropout path FL2, the flow velocity of the sphere is switched from a state of mainly facing the left-right direction to a state of mainly facing the vertical direction.

Then, after reaching the ceiling plate portion 455, the speed is switched to the state in which the velocity faces the left-right direction again. Therefore, the earlier the timing at which the ball reaches the ceiling plate portion 455 (the upstream side of the flow path), the more the ceiling plate The rolling speed (momentum) of the ball when flowing down the portion 455 increases, and it is easy to reach the left and right inside (specific winning opening 65a side) of the game area.

Further, since the left and right inner end portions (lower end portions) of the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 are arranged above the upper end portions of the adjacent curved protrusions 414, the ceiling plate portion 455 is rolled to the left and right. It is easy to prevent the ball passing inward from being dammed by the left and right outer side surfaces of the curved projecting portion 414.

When the rolling speed of the ball when flowing down the ceiling plate portion 455 is increased and the specific winning opening 65a is reached at that speed, the opening / closing plate 65b is damaged due to a large impact force being transmitted from the ball to the opening / closing plate 65b. Although there is a concern, in the present embodiment, the ridge portion 413a is arranged in the flow path of the ball to the opening / closing plate 65b, and the flow speed of the ball is reduced.

In addition, standing portions 435 are arranged to face each other on the left and right inside of the ridge portion 413a to prevent a plurality of balls from flowing down side by side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from clogging between the ridge portion 413a and the upright portion 435 (rectifying action), and it is easy to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball lands on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the opening / closing plate 65b from being damaged (improved durability).

In this way, the flow path of the ball is restricted while the flow speed of the ball is reduced. As a result, the collision force generated when the ball collides with the opening / closing plate 65b can be reduced, so that the occurrence of a problem that the opening / closing plate 65b is damaged can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, since the ridges 413a are arranged symmetrically with respect to the erection 435, in the pair of flow paths formed by the pair of left and right ridges 413a and the erection 435. When the balls flow down at the same time, it is possible that a plurality of balls land on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time.

Therefore, in the special game state, by striking the balls to the left and right, it is possible to facilitate the simultaneous entry of a plurality of balls into the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the progress of the special gaming state becomes too slow.

Since the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed as a wide inclined surface to the left and right, a plurality of spheres can be received at the same time by the ceiling plate portion 455, and the spheres are vigorously arranged on the left and right inside (specific). It can be sent to the winning opening 65a side).

Then, the balls swept inward on the left and right pass in order on the left and right inside of the distribution portion 413 (the side on which the ridge portion 413a is formed), and reach the open / close plate 65b in order. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the paths of the spheres reaching the opening / closing plate 65b are grouped into the paths passing through the left and right inside of the distribution portion 413, so that the spheres collide with each other on the upstream side of the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball deviates from the specific winning opening 65a.

Furthermore, the position where it reaches the closing plate 65b flows down while in contact with the ridges 413a of the sorting unit 413, by the left and right ends of the particular winning holes 65a and closing plate 65b is designed to be located on the left and right outer side Even when the balls collide with each other on the opening / closing plate 65b and bounce to the left or right, the state in which the balls are on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b can still be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball spills from the opening / closing plate 65b.

Even when a plurality of balls are densely retained from the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b, a space is formed below the inclined plate portion 434 in the present embodiment, and the balls are placed on the left / right outside of the opening / closing plate 65b. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the path of the sphere passing through the left and right inside of the distribution unit 413 is clogged.

In the present embodiment, by arranging a gap exceeding the diameter of the sphere between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved projecting portion 414, the flow of the sphere through the gap is allowed. For example, when a sphere that rolls down the ceiling plate portion 455 collides with a sphere that rolls down through the inner drop path FL3, the ball that has rolled down the ceiling plate portion 455 is slowed down in the left-right direction, and the ceiling plate portion 455. It is easy to enter the gap between the curved protrusion 414 and the curved protrusion 414.

The frequency with which the sphere flowing down the main path FL1 flows down with the outer dropout path FL2 and the frequency with which it flows down with the inner dropout path FL3 may change depending on the state of the nail KG1 (dirt adhesion, production lot).
Therefore, without countermeasures, the game efficiency and game profit are affected by the state of the nail KG1, and it is not possible to provide the game under equal conditions.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a ball that rolls on the ceiling plate portion 455 through the outer drop path FL2 occurs more frequently than a ball that flows down on the inner drop path FL3, up to the first winning opening 64. Since the number of balls that reach is reduced, it is disadvantageous in the game state (normal state, time saving state, high probability state, etc.) aiming for a big hit by receiving a lottery, but in the big hit game state where the specific winning opening 65a opens and closes, the ceiling plate The possibility that a ball enters the gap between the portion 455 and the curved projecting portion 414 can be reduced, and most of the balls that have reached the ceiling plate portion 455 can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a, thus improving the game efficiency. It can be improved (for example, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened).

On the other hand, if the spheres flowing down the inner dropout path FL3 occur more frequently than the spheres rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 through the outer dropout path FL2, more balls reach the first winning opening 64. , It is advantageous in the game state (normal state, time saving state, high probability state, etc.) aiming for a big hit by receiving a lottery, but in the big hit game state where the specific winning opening 65a opens and closes, the ceiling plate portion 455 is rolled. A ball that has flowed downward from the inner drop path FL3 collides with the path of the ball that flows down, and the ball falls into the gap between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protrusion portion 414, or the distribution portion 413 and the curved protrusion. Balls that pass through the gap between the ceiling and the ceiling 414 and flow toward the out port 415 frequently occur. As a result, the number of balls deviating from the specific winning opening 65a increases, so that the game efficiency of the jackpot game decreases.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the magnitude relationship between the frequency of occurrence of balls rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 through the outer dropout path FL2 and the frequency of occurrence of balls flowing down the inner dropout path FL3 is switched, the game state is set. It is designed so that the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state are switched, and the player is not unilaterally advantageous or unilaterally disadvantageous.

That is, while allowing the state of the nail KG1 to be different, regardless of the state of the nail KG1, the relationship is maintained to be advantageous to the player in a certain state and disadvantageous to the player in another state. By doing so, we are trying to provide games under equal conditions.

On the left and right inside of the extension plate portion 455a which flows down along the outer dropout path FL2 and extends upward at the left end portion of the ceiling plate portion 455 and the overhanging portion 453 which is arranged to face the extension plate portion 455a. The flow path of the sphere flowing down between the side wall portion 453a formed to be curved toward the lower left and right sides will be described.

The rate at which the ball is guided to this flow path varies depending on the state of the adjacent nails KG2 (interval at the position where the ball flows down). The state of the nail KG2 may change due to a collision of a ball, a clerk of a game machine store, or the like.

Further, the ratio of whether the ball reaches immediately before the nail KG2 varies depending on whether the ball rolls on the upper surface of the side wall portion 453. Whether or not the sphere reaches the upper surface of the side wall portion 453 depends on the state of the wind turbine FS1 arranged above the side wall portion 453. Since the rotating shaft of the wind turbine FS1 is driven into the base plate 60 like the nail KG2, the state of the wind turbine FS1 may change due to a collision of a ball, a clerk of a game machine store, or the like.

Since the first ball guide portion 457 is arranged directly below the flow path between the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, the flowed ball normally passes through the first ball guide portion 457 and is in the game area. Is discharged from. The first ball guide unit 457 constitutes a general winning opening 63, and when the ball is guided to the first ball guide unit 457, the prize ball is paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, when a ball flows directly below between the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, the ball enters the first ball guide portion 457 with a probability of 80% and has a probability of 10%. It is configured so that it deviates to the left with a probability of 10%. It should be noted that this ratio can be designed to be different depending on the shapes (inclination, spacing, etc.) of the extending plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a and the arrangement of the first ball guide portion 457.

On the other hand, for example, when the next ball reaches the first ball guide portion 457 while the ball that has reached the first ball guide portion 457 is still staying at the first ball guide portion 457, the following The ball deviates to the left and right of the first ball guide portion 457 and easily flows down. Further, for example, when a plurality of balls are gathered and flow toward the first ball guide portion 457, some of the plurality of balls deviate to the left and right of the first ball guide portion 457 and easily flow down.

When the ball guide portion 457 deviates to the left and right outside, the winning opening is not arranged on the downstream side thereof, and the winning opening is discharged from the out opening 415. On the other hand, when the ball guide portion 457 deviates from the first ball guide portion 457 to the left and right inward, the inclined guide portion 458 projecting from the first ball guide portion 457 to the left and right inward can be rolled to reach the second ball guide portion 459. The second ball guide unit 459 constitutes the general winning opening 63, and when the ball is guided to the second ball guide unit 459, the prize ball is paid out to the player.

The number of prize balls paid out when the ball is guided to the first ball guide unit 457 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is guided to the second ball guide unit 459 are arbitrarily set. Although it is possible, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set to be larger when the balls are guided to the downstream side.

That is, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is guided to the second ball guide unit 459 is larger than the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is guided to the first ball guide unit 457. It is set to increase.

As a result, when a ball flows down to the left side of the left end of the ceiling slope portion 455, the ball does not enter the first ball guide portion 457 but deviates to the right side (second ball guide portion 459 side). It is possible to create the playability desired by a person and improve the attention to the left component 450.

For example, when one prize ball is set to be paid out as the ball is guided to the first guide unit 457, the ball toward the first guide unit 457 is on the left and right outside (left side in FIG. 31). The number of balls held by the player decreases when the player deviates to, and the number of balls is maintained as it is (1 prize ball for 1 shot) when guided by the 1st guide unit 457, and deviates to the left and right inside (right side in FIG. 31). It is said that the number of balls on hand may increase by guiding the balls to the second ball guide unit 459 and paying out prize balls (more than one, generally 2 to 15). Playability can be configured.

As a result, the flow of the ball near the first guide portion 457 can be easily associated with the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player, so that the attention to the flow of the ball near the first guide portion 457 can be improved. Can be done.

Since the inclined guide portion 458 extending to the right of the first guide portion 457 is made of a resin material, it easily breaks when bent or the like. Therefore, unlike the nail KG1, it is easy to grasp the change in the state. If the broken state can be grasped, the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped from operating until the member is replaced, so that the player can avoid suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

In the present embodiment, various shapes have been devised so that the ball that has rolled the tilt guide portion 458 is guided to the second ball guide portion 459 with a high probability. First, a bulging portion 456 that bulges toward the lower surface side of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed at the upper left position of the second ball guide portion 459.

The ball that starts rolling on the upper surface of the tilt guide portion 458 and whose vertical bounce is not sufficiently contained comes into contact with the bulging portion 456 in the left-right direction, and the velocity direction of the ball is changed downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the inclined guide portion 458 from deviating to the right side of the second ball guide portion 459 with the momentum.

Secondly, the horizontal distance between the tilt guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459 is shorter than the radius of the sphere, and the vertical distance between the tilt guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459 is a sphere. It projects toward the second ball guide portion 459 side to a position shorter than the diameter of the (tilt guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459, and is formed in a dimensional relationship that does not allow the passage of a ball. ) Therefore, the tilt guide portion 458 can easily prevent the ball from deviating to the left side of the second ball guide portion 459.

Since the winning opening component 400 is a resin molded member and is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a fastening screw, replacement when a defect occurs is easier than when replacing (re-strike) the nail KG1. Is.

For example, if the nail KG1 is broken, there is a high possibility that the operation of the game machine will be stopped for a long period of time. Normally, the nail KG1 is not driven individually but a large number of nails KG1. It is not easy to re-drive the nail KG1 just because a part of the nail KG1 is broken because the nail KG1 is driven by an automatic machine.

Therefore, it is often necessary to replace the entire game board for repair, but if it is judged that the replacement cost cannot be covered, even though there is no faulty part other than the nail KG1. There is a possibility that it will be stored in the warehouse without restarting. That is, there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintainability and improvement of the operating period of the game machine.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the nail KG1 from being defective as much as possible, the ball falling in the vertical direction is received by the overhanging portion 453 of the left component 450, and the received ball is received by the overhanging portion. By rolling left and right on the upper surface of 453, the momentum in the vertical direction is reduced, and then the nail KG1 on the downstream side thereof is brought into contact with the nail KG1. As a result, the load applied from the ball to the nail KG1 can be reduced, and the occurrence of defects in the nail KG1 can be suppressed.

Further, paying attention to the nails KG1 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the outer dropout path FL2, since the left and right outer sides are covered with the overhanging portion 453, the sphere does not collide with these nails KG1 from the left and right outer sides. Therefore, the period until the nail KG1 breaks can be lengthened as compared with the case where the nail KG1 receives a load from a random direction.

The ball that has flowed down the front side of the left component 450 passes through the out port 415 and is discharged to the back side of the base plate 60. At this time, since the passage of the ball to the left and right inside (the side close to the opening / closing plate 65b) is restricted by the vertical plate portion 433, the ball flows to the opening / closing plate 65b side without passing through the out port 415. Can be prevented.

Therefore, the rotation shaft of the opening / closing plate 65b can prevent the ball from flowing in from the left component 450 side, so that the ball can always pass between the opening / closing plate 65b and the inner rail 61 as a countermeasure against ball clogging. The vertical distance between the inner rail 61 and the rotation shaft (lower edge portion) of the opening / closing plate 65b can be set to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

Even with such a configuration, if the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b spills to the left or right, it can be temporarily placed between the vertical plate portion 433 and the opening / closing plate 65b, and the opening / closing plate 65b can be placed. In the closed state, the opening / closing plate 65b that blocks the flow path of the ball retracts from the flow path of the ball, so that the temporarily placed ball flows down toward the out port 71. Therefore, the possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. The main body plate portion 451 of the left component member 450 is an extension portion 451a extending from the left and right inner edge portions along the front surface of the base plate 60 in a thin plate shape (a plate shape thinner than the thickness of the main body plate portion 451). The main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410 includes a concealed extension portion 411b extending from the left and right outer edge portions along the front side side surface.

In the present embodiment, the extension portion 451a is sandwiched between the lining extension portion 411b and the base plate 60. As a result, the fastening screws for fixing can be removed from the left and right inner ends of the left component 450 on the sandwiched side, so that the fastening screws are present when the left component 450 is decorated accordingly. It is possible to make it easier to prevent the problem of lowering the effect of the effect due to the fact that In addition, since the number of fastening screws for fastening and fixing the members can be reduced, the man-hours for assembly and the material cost can be reduced.

The front-rear position of the front end portion of the overturned extension portion 411b in the state where the extension portion 451a is sandwiched between the extension portion 451a and the base plate 60 is located on the back side of the front-rear position of the front end portion of the main body plate portion 451. There is. As a result, when the sphere flowing down the front side of the main body plate portion 451 flows toward the front side of the main body plate portion 411, the front end portion of the overhanging extension portion 411b collides with the sphere, and the sphere is left and right outside. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the ball is bounced off.

FIG. 33 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 300, and FIG. 34 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the above-mentioned distribution unit 983 is arranged in a rotatable state inside the distribution unit 300, and passes through the first winning opening 64 to enter the distribution unit 300. It is configured so that the balls guided by are alternately distributed to the left and right.

The distribution unit 300 is a member arranged so that the distribution unit 983 can rotate from the back side, and has a first configuration that constitutes a flow path for distributing balls that have passed through the first winning opening 64 to the left and right and flowing them down. Along with supporting the member 310, the ceiling component 330 that constitutes the ceiling of the path through which the ball passing through the first winning opening 64 flows backward, and the shaft member 988a of the distribution portion 983 together with the first component 310, both sides are supported. A first auxiliary member 340 that regulates the falling of a ball that comes into contact with the sorting portion 983 to the back surface side, and a second component member that constitutes a discharge path for the ball discharged from the downstream side to the rear of the first component member 310. The 350 and its second constituent member 350 are fastened and fixed so as to cover the rear and upper sides of the discharge path formed by the second constituent member 350 and fastened and fixed to the first constituent member 310. A pair of left and right second auxiliary members 370 and a pair of left and right thin plate members 380 arranged on the front side of the first constituent member 310 and between the first constituent member 310 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410. And.

The first component 310 is a plate-shaped central plate portion 311 formed of a colorless translucent resin material and formed along a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and extends from the upper end of the central plate portion 311 to the front side. An extension plate portion 313 to be provided, a pair of inclined extension portions 315 extending on the back side of the central plate portion 311 and extending in a strip shape in a direction of downward inclination toward the left and right outside, and an inclined extension portion 315 thereof. A pair of direction switching portions 317 that are connected to the left and right outer ends to switch the flow direction of the ball (in this embodiment, the ball is switched 90 degrees from the left-right direction to the front-back direction), and a size that allows the ball to pass on the front side of the central plate portion 311. A pair of left and right opening forming portions 320, in which a plurality of left and right openings are arranged side by side, are provided.

The central plate portion 311 includes a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 312 into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted just below the rear end portion of the extension plate portion 313. The bearing portion 312 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The extension plate portion 313 is formed as a ridge portion that is formed as a ridge that inclines downward toward the rear toward the upper end surface along the left and right center portions, and a ridge portion 313a that forms a rolling path of the sphere, and a sphere that is erected from the left and right edges. A pair of left and right wall-shaped portions 314 for guiding the rearward are provided.

The ball that flows down the inclined extension portion 315 flows down to the left and right outside while being restricted from falling off to the back side by the front plate portion 371 of the second auxiliary member 370. The second auxiliary member 370 is also used as a member for preventing the detection device SE3 from coming off.

The direction switching portion 317 is formed as a plate surface on which the ball can roll at a position one step lower than the inclined extension portion 315 on the left and right outer sides of the left and right end portions of the inclined extension portion 315, and is inclined downward toward the front side. An inclined surface portion 318 and an erected curved portion 319 which is erected from the rear side edge portion and the left and right outer edge portions of the inclined surface portion 318 and is formed to be curved toward the front side in a shape capable of guiding the sphere to the front side. Be prepared.

The opening forming portion 320 is extended to the front side along the left and right side surfaces of the sensor placement opening 321 through which the detection device SE3 is inserted from the back side and the sensor placement opening 321 to support the left and right ends of the detection sensor SE3. A pair of left and right support extension portions 322, a winning opening 323 in which an opening is formed so that a ball can pass between the support extension portion 322, and a winning opening 323 based on the support extension portion 322. A pair of discharge openings 325 that are formed to allow balls to pass through on the left and right opposite sides of the above, and a bottom surface that receives the balls that have passed through the winning opening 323 and the discharge opening 325 and guides them to the back side. A pair of bottom surface constituents 327 in which the portions are curved rearward and a pair extending from the lower edge of the support extension portion 322 toward the bottom surface constituent portion 327 so as to partition the upper surface side of the bottom surface constituent portion 327. A partition wall portion 328 is provided.

When the detection device SE3 is inserted into the sensor arrangement opening 321, the detection hole SE1a is designed to be arranged inside the winning opening 323. The front-rear position of the detection device SE3 can be easily positioned by abutting the positioning protrusion 322a projecting from the front edge portion of the support extension portion 322 and the front end portion of the detection device SE3.

The ball that has passed through the direction switching portion 317 and reached the opening forming portion 320 passes through either the winning opening 323 or the discharging opening 325, and rolls on the upper surface of the bottom surface constituent portion 327 to the back side. You will be guided. Since each rolling path is divided by the partition wall portion 328, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the spheres intersect or collide with each other on the upper surface of the bottom surface constituent portion 327. As a result, the flow of the sphere can be rectified, so that it is possible to prevent the sphere from clogging or stagnation.

Among the spheres that roll on the upper surface of the bottom surface component 327, the spheres that have passed through the winning opening 323 are detected by the detection device SE3. On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the discharge opening 325 is not detected by the detection device SE3. In any case, the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the bottom surface component 327 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) after being detected by a detection device (not shown) that detects the discharge of the ball.

To the ball discharge path (not shown), the ball rolls the rolling surface 351 of the second component 350 toward the left and right inward while being restricted from falling off to the back side by the second auxiliary member 370, and is arranged on each of the left and right sides. It is guided by flowing through the common drop flow path 352 provided.

The second auxiliary member 370 has a front plate portion 371 that covers an open space on the back side of the inclined extension portion 315 to prevent the ball from falling off, a rolling surface 351 of the second component 350, and a common drop. A rear plate portion 372 that blocks the upper surface side and the back surface side of the flow path of the ball that flows down along the flow path 352 to prevent the ball from falling off, and a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 329 of the first component 310. An insertion hole 373 that is pierced in the front plate portion 371 so that it can be inserted, and an insertion hole 374 that is pierced in the rear plate portion 372 so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 353 of the second component 350 can be inserted. , Equipped with.

The material forming the second constituent member 350 and the second auxiliary member 370 can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, the second constituent member 350 is formed of a colorless opaque resin material, and the second auxiliary member is formed. 370 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material.

As a result, the visibility of the sphere flowing through the common falling flow path 352 can be reduced and the attention to the discharged sphere can be lowered, and the light can be taken in from the back side of the second auxiliary member 370. The first constituent member 310 arranged on the front side can be brightly illuminated, and the visibility of the sphere flowing down the first constituent member 310 can be improved.

The thin plate member 380 is positioned by being housed in the sheet arrangement recess 411a (see FIG. 30) of the main body plate portion 411. In this positioned state, the game board 13 is assembled, and the thin plate member 380 is sandwiched between the main body plate portion 411 and the first component member 310 in the front-rear direction.

The front-back and left-right displacements (arrangement changes) in the process of flowing down the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 will be described. First, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 is displaced rearward along the extension plate portion 313. After that, it is distributed to the left and right by the rotational displacement of the distribution unit 983 described in the first embodiment, and is displaced to the left and right outward along the inclined extension unit 315.

After that, the flow direction is switched to the front side by the direction switching unit 317, and the displacement is forward. When a guide portion for which a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the sphere is formed is arranged on the front side of the sphere to which the sphere flows, the guide portion tends to block the line of sight to the sphere, which may reduce visibility. However, in the present embodiment, since the erected curved portion 319 as the guide portion is arranged on the back side of the sphere, it is unlikely that the erected curved portion 319 blocks the line of sight to the sphere. This makes it easier to ensure the visibility of the sphere.

After that, the ball flowing directly below the winning opening 323 is displaced rearward along the bottom surface constituent portion 327 after being detected by the detection device SE3. Further, the ball that is displaced to the left or right above the winning opening 323 and reaches directly above the discharging opening 325 passes through the discharging opening 325 and is displaced rearward along the bottom surface constituent portion 327. To do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 is moved to the rear side at the beginning of the ball entry, flows to the left and right, and is moved to the front side immediately before passing through the detection device SE3. ing.
As a result, as compared with the configuration of the first embodiment, the arrangement of the distribution portion 983 can be moved to the rear, and a space can be left under the extension plate portion 313.

This vacant space can be used as a space for arranging a drive mechanism for operating the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the second winning opening 140 can be made closer to the first winning opening 64 as compared with the first embodiment.

Further, when the path through which the spheres after being sorted flows down is configured so as to switch the path in the front-rear direction so that the paths are consistently arranged in the vertical direction (for example, the distribution unit 980 described above). The vertical width in the front view of the flow path can be shortened as compared with the case of the above configuration). As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the relative vertical arrangement of the detection device SE3 with respect to the first winning opening 64.

FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXXV of FIG. In FIG. 35, the central constituent member 410 and the thin plate member 380 are shown semi-transparently so that the distribution unit 300 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 35, for convenience of explanation, the outer shapes of the electric accessory 140a in the closed state and the open state are both illustrated. In the description of FIG. 35, FIGS. 33 and 34 will be referred to as appropriate.

The thin plate member 380 is a member formed in a thin plate shape (sheet shape) from a light-transmitting resin material, and is a member that can be visually recognized by a player via a central constituent member 410. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, patterns, figures, characters or characters are colorfully drawn on the front surface of the thin plate member 380, and the difference in the mode of the emitted light (the mode of color and lightness and darkness). Depending on the difference), the color and the mode of light and darkness visually recognized through the thin plate member 380 change in various ways.

Unlike the case where the pattern, graphic, character or character is drawn directly on the base plate 60, according to the present embodiment, if the thin plate member 380 is removed, the pattern, graphic, character or character drawn on the thin plate member 380 can be drawn from the game board 13. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when the game board 13 has the same shape but the game playability is changed (so-called different specifications), the patterns, figures, characters or characters, colors, etc. drawn on the game board 13 are different. It may make it easier for the player to understand the playability.

When a pattern, a figure, a character, or a character is drawn directly on the base plate 60, it is necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, so that it is easy to actually replace the entire game board 13, and the cost for changing the game playability is high. Easy to bulk.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 380 with another thin plate member 380 having a different pattern, graphic, character or character, color, etc., so it is necessary to replace the entire game board 13. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the game playability.

The mode of decoration applied to the thin plate member 380 is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by forming a colorless and transparent range above the detection device SE3, the visibility of the sphere rolling on the inclined surface portion 318 is improved, and in the other portions, figures and patterns are drawn densely to improve the decorativeness. You may let it. Further, for example, a mark is drawn by a number or the like at a position corresponding to the winning opening 323 and the discharge opening 325 in the front view, and the profit obtained by the player depending on which mark the ball flows down. You may make it easier to understand.

The thin plate member 380 is designed to have a large shape so as to project outward from the left and right sides of the through hole 60a, and is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the base plate 60 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410. To.

In the present embodiment, the rear end surface of the thin plate member 380 and the front end portion of the first component 310 (for example, the front end portion of the support extension portion 322) are arranged so as to be in contact with each other. That is, since the detection device SE3 is arranged close to the thin plate member 380, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 can be brought closer to the player side. As a result, the visibility of the sphere passing through the detection device SE3 can be improved, and it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the sphere passing through the detection device SE3 is overlooked.

Further, the detection device SE3 is arranged on the left and right outside of the electric accessory 140a in the front view, and is not hidden by the electric accessory 140a. As a result, as compared with the case where the flow path of the sphere is hidden by the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 5), the sphere passes through the detection device SE3 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 140a (open state, closed state). Visibility can be improved.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is arranged behind the main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410, it does not affect the flow mode of the sphere on the front side of the main body plate portion 411. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved as compared with the case where the detection device SE3 is arranged so as to project to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 (the front side of the front end surface of the base plate 60).

Due to the strength, the nail is not arranged on the main body plate portion 411, but in the present embodiment, the path of the sphere is distributed by the distribution portion 413 or the curved protrusion portion 414 as a substitute for the nail. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow path of the sphere on the front side of the main body plate portion 411 from becoming monotonous.

The sphere detected by the detection device SE3 through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 (the sphere passing through the winning opening 323) and the sphere passing through the discharge opening 325 both have an inclined surface portion 318. It follows a path that rolls and displaces to the front side. Therefore, there may be a difference between the number of spheres that have reached the inclined surface portion 318 and the number of spheres that are detected by the detection device SE3.

Although the visibility of the ball can be improved by displacing the ball toward the front side by the inclined surface portion 318, it is difficult to distinguish whether the ball has passed through the winning opening 323 or the discharging opening 325. Then, it is not possible to determine whether the ball does not really pass through the detection device SE3 or whether the detection failure occurs even though the ball passes through the detection device SE3, and the player may feel dissatisfied.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball passing from the inclined surface portion 318 to the winning opening 323 is visually recognized as flowing downward in the front view along the winning flow path FL31, whereas the ball is inclined. The ball passing through the discharge opening 325 from the surface portion 318 is switched from downward to left and right by 90 degrees in the flow direction in front view along the flow path FL32 at the time of non-winning.

That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the sphere passes through the detection device SE3 depending on whether or not there is a left-right component in the flow direction of the sphere, so that the possibility of mistaking the passing location of the sphere is low. can do. This makes it easy to determine whether or not the sphere has passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3.

Because both the game ball that flows down along the flow-down path FL31 at the time of winning and the game ball that flows down along the flow-down path FL32 at the time of non-winning flow down in the vicinity of the distribution portion 413 and the curved protrusion portion 414 in the front view. , The flow path is visually recognized so as to overlap the flow path of the game ball flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player look as if the game ball flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 is flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a. The player outs the number of the launched game balls that have reached above the opening / closing plate 65b but have not entered the specific winning opening 65a (game balls that have passed when the opening / closing plate 65b is closed). In many cases, a game ball that rolls on the inner rail 61 toward the mouth 71 is visually confirmed and grasped. However, since the game ball flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 flows backward along the bottom surface constituent portion 327 (see FIG. 34) after flowing down the winning flow-down path FL31 or the non-winning flow-down path FL32, the game ball flows backward. It does not appear in front of the out port 71.

As a result, the game balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 during the jackpot game can be added to the number of game balls that appear to be flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a, so that the first winning can be achieved. Regardless of the number of game balls that have entered the mouth 64, it is possible to give the illusion that most of the launched game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the game ball flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 and the game ball actually flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a are separated in the front-rear direction by the thin plate member 380, so that they may collide with each other. There is no. As a result, the above-mentioned illusion can be generated without hindering the flow of the game ball flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a.

In the present embodiment, the case where the non-winning flow path FL32 is formed as a flow path in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the path through which the ball flowing down the inclined surface portion 318 toward the detection device SE3 flows, an opening is formed in the main body plate portion 411 and the thin plate member 380 in the front-rear direction, and by passing through this opening, a non-existence is achieved. The flow path FL32 at the time of winning may be formed as a flow path through which the ball flows to the front side.

That is, the ball flowing through the flow path FL32 at the time of non-winning may return to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 and flow down toward the out port 71. In this case, if the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that has flowed through the flow path FL32 at the time of non-winning can be picked up by the opening / closing plate 65b and enter the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, since it is possible to configure the game property that the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 can enter the specific winning opening 65a after returning to the front side of the main body plate portion 411, the first winning opening It is possible to improve the attention power to the ball that has entered the 64 (particularly, the attention power during the jackpot game in which the opening / closing plate 65b opens / closes).

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 17) that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

36, 37, 38 and 39 are front views of the operating unit 500. FIG. 36 shows the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 of the operation unit 500, FIG. 37 shows the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, and FIG. 38 shows the overhang state of the internal operation unit 600. In FIG. 39, the operation error limit state of one of the internal operation units 600 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the retracted state is a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 of the internal operation unit 600 is arranged at the upper end position of the vertical operation range, and the intermediate state is a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted back and forth from the retracted state. It is a state where it is arranged at the lower end position of the range in which it can operate while maintaining the posture in the direction, and in the overhanging state, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged at the lower end position of the vertical operation range, and the rotation effect is produced. The rotation axis RJ1 of the device 800 is in a state of facing the front-rear direction.

In the state change from the intermediate state to the overhanging state, the posture change (tilting operation) of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front-rear direction occurs. This posture change is executed as a rotation operation about a predetermined rotation axis (central axis J1 described later).

In the present embodiment, one operation error limit state is one of the states in which the tilt in the left-right direction allowed for the light emitting operation unit 700 is the limit. In FIG. 39, for convenience, the right side portion of the light emitting operation unit 700 is arranged at the same position as the retracted state, and the left side portion is shown as a state of being displaced downward. In the present embodiment, the operation unit 500 is configured so that the light emitting operation unit 700 can be operated in the vertical direction while maintaining the inclination angle of one operation error limit state, but the details will be described later. To do.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is in a posture in which the decorative plate 811 on which decorative figures and patterns are formed is directed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 37, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and are formed in an intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. It is visually recognized integrally (among the linear shape extending radially and the wave pattern formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shape is also visually recognized in the state of being formed on the rotating member 810).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the decorative plate 811 can be designed as a part of the figure that can be visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the rotating member 810 is formed on the rotating member 810. It is possible to avoid limiting the figures and patterns to be created.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38, in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted in the forward rotation direction, and figures and patterns formed on the main body member 710 of the light emission operation effect unit 700 are formed. It is visually recognized from the front.

These figures and patterns are also formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and are integrally visible (radially extending straight lines) in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600. Of the shape and the wavy pattern formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shape is formed only on the bottom wall portion 511, and is visually recognized with the wavy pattern formed on the main body member 710).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the main body member 710 can be designed as a part of the figure that can be visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the main body member 710 is formed on the main body member 710. It is possible to avoid limiting the figures and patterns to be created.

Since the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is displaced in the vertical direction from the retracted state to the overhanging state, the figure or pattern is integrally visible from the retracted state to the bottom in relation to the fixed bottom wall portion 511. The figure or pattern formed on the wall portion 511 and the figure or pattern formed on the rotating member 810 begin to deviate from each other.

This deviation becomes more noticeable as the amount of displacement in the vertical direction increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted and displaced in the overhanging state to switch the surface to be visually recognized by the player, and a new figure or pattern visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511 is newly created. It can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the light emitting operation effect unit 700 (main body member 710, rotating member 810) displaced in the vertical direction are in the retracted state and the overhanging state. It can be configured to be integrally visible in.

During the vertical displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 described here, the outer shape of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front view changes. As a result, a single effect unit can be made to appear as if it were a plurality of different effect units, and the degree of freedom in designing the motion effect can be improved.

FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 41 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In FIGS. 40 and 41, the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) arranged in the opening 511a of the back case 510 is omitted, and the back side is visually visible through the opening 511a.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the bottom wall portion 511 and the outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The back case 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The back case 510 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a plurality of positioning convex portions 513a projecting in an annular shape toward the front side in a shape capable of fitting with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b in which a fastening screw to be fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted in the central portion of the positioning convex portion 513a.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex portion 513a to the fitting portion 60c (see FIG. 21) of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b to fit the fitting portion. By screwing into the female screw of 60c, the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, an annular convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape (circular in the present embodiment) of the fitting portion 60c of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap becomes large in consideration of workability at the time of assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (large diameter ring shape) may be used. Further, when the outer shape of the fitting portion 60c is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and a light emitting means and an operation unit are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a back case 510, a decorative fixing member 520 that is inserted into the back case 510 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and an internal operation unit 600 that is arranged on the inner upper part of the back case 510. It includes a light emitting effect unit 518 arranged in the lower inside of the back case 510.

The light emitting effect unit 518 is a unit that irradiates light from the rear to the front of the distribution unit 300 and the winning opening component 400 (see FIG. 29), and is formed by the distribution unit 300 and the winning opening component 400. It functions to brightly illuminate the passage path of the sphere.

The decorative fixing member 520 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, is symmetrically arranged at both left and right positions, and is composed of a plurality of thin plate-shaped members that can be divided into upper and lower parts, and is arranged on the upper left side. The first fixing member 530, the second fixing member 540 arranged on the lower left side, the third fixing member 550 arranged on the upper right side, the fourth fixing member 560 arranged on the lower right side, and the first The left side illuminated substrate 570 arranged on the back side of the fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, and the right side illuminated substrate 580 arranged on the back side of the third fixing member 550 and the fourth fixing member 560. To be equipped with. The configuration and role of each part will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

FIG. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 43 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In FIGS. 42 and 43, the decorative fixing member 520 is disassembled from the rear case 510 and arranged in the front, and the internal operation unit 600 is disassembled from the rear case 510 and arranged between the rear case 510 and the decorative fixing member 520. State is illustrated.

The first fixing member 530 is formed from a thin plate-shaped insertion plate portion 531 extending in the front-rear direction, a front plate portion 534 extending to the right from the front side portion of the insertion plate portion 531 and a front side portion of the insertion plate portion 531. An outer plate portion 537 extending to the left is provided.

The insertion plate portion 531 includes a plurality of insertion protrusions 532 projecting from the extending tip portion to the back side in a shape and arrangement that can be inserted into the receiving hole 623 of the internal operation unit 600, and is an outer member of the internal operation unit 600. It has a role of preventing the outward tilt displacement of the 610. A description of the relative functions of the insertion plate portion 531 and the outer member 610 will be described later.

The front plate portion 534 is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged in front of the left illuminated substrate 570 and is formed from a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left illuminated substrate 570 (formed so as to cover the left illuminated substrate 570). Therefore, a light diffusion process is formed on the back side in order to diffuse the light from the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the front side of the left illumination substrate 570. In addition, it is provided with an insertion hole 535 in which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted.

The outer plate portion 537 is a portion that can come into contact with the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the back case 510, and is bored so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 512a formed in the outer wall portion 512 can be inserted. It is provided with an insertion hole 538.

That is, the first fixing member 530 connects and fixes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 and the outer member 610 of the internal operating unit 600 in the assembled state of the operating unit 500 (see FIG. 36).

The second fixing member 540 is a plate-shaped portion arranged at the same front-rear position as the front plate portion 534 of the first fixing member 530, and is a front plate portion arranged at a slight distance from the lower end of the front plate portion 534. 541, a fastening extension portion 544 extending to the right from the lower right side portion of the front plate portion 541, and an outer plate portion 547 extending from the left end portion of the front plate portion 541 to the left side. Be prepared.

The front plate portion 541 is a plate-shaped portion arranged in front of the left illumination substrate 570 and formed from a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left illumination substrate 570 (formed so as to cover the left illumination substrate 570). Therefore, a light diffusion process is formed on the back side in order to diffuse the light from the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the front side of the left illumination substrate 570.

In addition, an insertion hole 542 in which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operating unit 600 can be inserted and a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the inner member 670 of the internal operating unit 600 can be inserted. An insertion hole 543 to be drilled is provided. That is, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 can be connected and fixed by fastening and fixing via the front plate portion 541.

The connecting extension portion 544 includes an insertion hole 545 in which a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 518a of the light emitting effect unit 518 is inserted so as to be inserted. The outer plate portion 547 is a portion that can come into contact with the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the back case 510, and is bored so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 512b formed on the outer wall portion 512 can be inserted. It is provided with an insertion hole 548.

That is, the second fixing member 540 includes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the inner operation unit 600, and the light emitting effect unit 518 in the assembled state of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 36). , Are connected and fixed.

The third fixing member 550, the fourth fixing member 560, and the right side illuminated substrate 580 are the first fixing members due to the difference in the shape of the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 to be covered by being arranged on the back side. Although the shapes are slightly different from those of the 530, the second fixing member 540, and the left illuminated substrate 570, they are basically formed symmetrically with the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, and the structure having the structure and the role of each structure. Since the above is the same, the description of the overlapping portion will be omitted, and the above-mentioned reference numerals will be illustrated for convenience in the description of the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540.

The order of assembling the internal operation unit 600 and the decorative fixing member 520 to the back case 510 will be described. For assembly to the back case 510, first, the internal operation unit 600 is assembled to the back case 510 (see FIG. 40), and then the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled to the back case 510.

As an outline, in the process of assembling the internal operation unit 600 to the rear case 510, first, the left and right outer members 610 and the inner members 670 are fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, and then the light emitting operation effect is produced from the front side inside the rear case 510. The unit 700 is inserted and placed between the left and right outer members 610 and the inner member 670, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is placed at the assembly position with the displacement member 680, and members (screws, collars, etc.) for preventing falling off are placed. The work is performed in the order of assembling to the fastening portion 682 from the front side.

In the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to assemble the decorative fixing member 520 to the back case 510 during the assembling work of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, the front side of the back case 510 can be widely opened to the decorative fixing member 520. It is possible to avoid obstructing the flow line of the worker's hand. As a result, work efficiency can be improved.

Moreover, since the work of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion holes 535, 538, 542, 543, 545, 548 of the decorative fixing member 520 and fastening and fixing the decorative fixing member 520 can be performed from the front side of the rear case 510, the light emitting operation effect is produced. After the work of assembling the unit 700 to the displacement member 680 is completed, the work for fastening and fixing the decorative fixing member 520 can be continuously performed without changing the posture of the rear case 510. Thereby, the work efficiency can be further improved. Next, the details of the assembly work will be described.

44 is a sectional view of the operating unit 500 in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 36, FIG. 45 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the operating unit 500 in the range XLV of FIG. 44, and FIG. 46 is an enlarged sectional view of the operating unit 500 in the range XLIV of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit 500 in -XLIV line.

In FIGS. 44 and 45, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is disassembled from the rear case 510, and the decorative fixing member 520 is not shown as a state before the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled. On the other hand, FIG. 46 shows a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the decorative fixing member 520 are assembled to the rear case 510 (see FIG. 36).

In the present embodiment, the fastening position is designed so that sufficient rigidity is not exhibited only by fixing the internal operation unit 600 and the rear case 510 (for example, the fastening position is arranged only at one of the upper and lower ends). The internal operation unit 600 is configured to be flexible and deformable (posture changeable) with respect to the rear case 510 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 45).

By utilizing this bending deformation, it is possible to quickly assemble the light emitting operation effect unit 700. That is, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is assembled by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 682 with the fastening portion 682 inserted through the connected hole 764 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. When the 600 bends and deforms to the left and right, the dimension of the path for the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to enter toward the fastening portion 682 can be expanded to the left and right from the fixed width dimension W1 to the bending width dimension W2. Workability can be improved.

At this time, the internal operation unit 600 bends and deforms to the left and right outwards, so that the direction in which the fastening screw enters the fastening portion 682 is inclined toward the left and right inward toward the back side (the front side spreads to the left and right outside). Inclination direction).

In this case, as compared with the case where the fastening screw is inserted in the front-rear direction, the driver for screwing the fastening screw is separated (avoided) from the decorative member 750 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 (with respect to the front-rear direction). The fastening screw can be inserted into the rear case 510 in the inclined direction).

Therefore, the fastening work can be facilitated, and the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 whose shape is designed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the driver can be improved. .. That is, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the assembling work of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and improve the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750.

In order to make this effect possible, in the present embodiment, the left-right dimension of the elongated hole 764a of the connected hole 764 through which the fastening screw is inserted is set so that the fastening portion 682 is misaligned due to the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600. Designed with compatible dimensions (sufficient left and right length).

It should be noted that the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 inward to the left and right is less likely to occur than the bending deformation to the left and right outside because the tubular member 695 abuts on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 and resistance is generated. It is configured in.

In the present embodiment, by assembling the decorative fixing member 520, the internal operation unit 600 is configured to be suppressed from bending and deforming to the left and right. This is more than the fastening position between the internal operating unit 600 and the back case 510 (the fastening position arranged on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, the fastening position arranged closer to the back side), the internal operating unit 600, decoration. There are more fastening positions of the fixing member 520 and the back case 510 (fastening positions arranged on the front side of the outer wall portion 512 of the back case 510 and the internal operation unit 600, fastening positions arranged closer to the front side), and The effect is exhibited by devising the shape of the decorative fixing member 520.

First, the decorative fixing member 520 includes an outer plate portion 547 that is fastened and fixed to the outer wall portion 512 or the support plate portion 513, and the support plate portion 513 that is integrally formed with the outer wall portion 512 is attached to the base plate 60. It is fastened and fixed (see FIG. 42). That is, the displacement of the decorative fixing member 520 is restricted to the base plate 60 via the support plate portion 513. As a result, the rigidity of the decorative fixing member 520 and the internal operation unit 600 can be improved by utilizing the rigidity of the base plate 60, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be suppressed from bending and deforming to the left and right.

Secondly, the insertion plate portion 531 of the decorative fixing member 520 is arranged in contact with the left and right outer sides of the internal operation unit 600. That is, the insertion plate portion 531 can suppress the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right outside.

From these first configuration and the second configuration, it is possible to prevent the internal operation unit 600 from bending and deforming to the left and right outside when the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled.

In addition, the decorative fixing member 520 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, so that the posture of the rear case 510 is The assembling work can be performed in a series of steps so as to assemble the decorative fixing member 520 following the assembling of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 without changing the above. Therefore, the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

On the other hand, if the work of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 from the fastening portion 682 for maintenance or the like can be performed without removing the decorative fixing member 520, the man-hours of the maintenance work can be reduced and the efficiency is high.

Here, the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 are arranged on the back side of the decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 42), and it is better to configure the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 so as to project inward to the left and right. The production range of the production can be expanded, and the production effect can be improved.

On the other hand, if the illumination boards 570 and 580 are arranged so as to project to the left and right inward as in the present embodiment, when the maintenance worker moves the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to the front side, the light emitting operation effect unit The connecting plate portions 765 formed at the left and right ends of the 700 may collide with the illuminated substrates 570 and 580, and the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protective extension is provided in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface of the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 from the front side edge portion of the extension wall portion 677 of the inner member 670, which will be described later, to the left and right inside. The illuminations 677b is extended (see FIG. 42).

The protective extension portion 677b has left and right inner end portions formed in the same shape as the shape line S51 (see FIG. 42) corresponding to the shape of the left and right inner edge portions on the upper portions of the illuminated substrates 570 and 580. It is extended to the position corresponding to S51.

As a result, the area for supporting the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 from the back surface side can be increased, and the back surface of the upper portion of the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 can be protected by the protective extension portion 677b. Occasionally, it is possible to prevent the illumination boards 570 and 580 from coming into contact with the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

On the other hand, below the lower end of the shape line S51, the formation of the extending portion inward to the left and right is omitted regardless of the shapes of the illuminated substrates 570 and 580. Therefore, when the work of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is performed at this position, there is a possibility that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the illumination boards 570 and 580 come into contact with each other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to move downward and change its posture (see FIGS. 37 and 38), and the direction of the fastening portion 682 changes from the front-rear direction to the vertical direction due to the change in posture. Since the driver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw, the work of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to be executed before the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes. Therefore, it is sufficient to form the protection extension portion 677b at a position where it is arranged before the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes, and it is designed as such in the present embodiment (see FIG. 37). ..

In this way, the protective extension portion 677b is not formed over the entire vertical range, but is limited to the minimum necessary range for avoiding contact between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the illumination substrates 570 and 580. Therefore, the formation range of the protection extension portion 677b can be narrowed.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 capable of performing the work of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is limited to the arrangement between the retracted state and the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. By configuring it, the formation range of the protection extension portion 677b is reduced.

In the present embodiment, it is of course possible to remove the light emitting operation effect unit 700 after removing the decorative fixing member 520 from the back case 510. In this case, as in the case of the assembling work, the internal operation unit 600 is bent and deformed to the left and right to the left and right, so that the left and right width of the path for taking out the light emission operation effect unit 700 can be widened. Can be prevented from coming into contact with the protective extension 677b.

FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In FIGS. 47 and 48, the state in which the internal operation unit 600 is disassembled is mainly shown, and the decorative fixing member 520 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the internal operation unit 600 is supported by an outer member 610 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 511 of the rear case 510 and the outer member 610 so as to be displaceable in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction. An elevating plate member 630 arranged inside, a drive motor 648 that is a device that generates a driving force for raising and lowering the elevating plate member 630 and is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610, and a drive shaft of the drive motor 648. It is provided with a transmission gear 649 which is fixed to and transmits a driving force to the elevating plate member 630, and a coil spring SP1 which applies an upward urging force (load in the pulling direction) to the elevating plate member 630.

Further, the internal operation unit 600 is arranged inside in the left-right direction so as to arrange the elevating plate member 630 between the resistance generator 650 configured to generate the resistance force for the movement of the elevating plate member 630 and the outer member 610. An inner member 670 that is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 by a fastening screw that is inserted into the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, and a displacement member 680 that is displaceably supported by the inner member 670 and is arranged inside in the left-right direction. A rotational posture assisting member 690 that is fastened and fixed from the left and right inside on the back side of the upper end portion of the inner member 670, and a light emitting operation effect unit 700 whose both ends are connected to the displacement member 680 are provided.

The internal operation unit 600 is a unit configured substantially symmetrically, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged in the center on the left and right, and is substantially common to be fixedly arranged on the rear case 510 side on both the left and right sides of the light emission operation effect unit 700. The light emitting operation effect unit 700 is operably supported by the configuration of.

Hereinafter, details of each configuration of the internal operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50 in which each range of FIG. 47 is enlarged and illustrated. In the description of FIGS. 49 and 50, FIGS. 47 and 48 will be referred to as appropriate.

49 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member 610, the elevating plate member 630 and the resistance generator 650 in the range XLIXa of FIG. 47, and FIG. 49 (b) is the outer member 610 in the range XLIXb of FIG. 47. 50 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating plate member 630, the inner member 670, the displacement member 680 and the rotational posture assisting member 690 in the range La of FIG. 47, and is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 50 (b). ) Is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member 680 and the rotational posture assisting member 690 in the range Lb of FIG. 47.

As shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the outer member 610 has a plate-shaped portion 611 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the left and right outer sides (rear case) of the plate-shaped portion 611. With the extended wall portion 621 formed to partition the left and right outer regions of the plate-shaped portion 611 while being extended in a wall shape on the outer wall portion 512 of the 510 and adjacent to the outer wall portion 512 in the assembled state). , Equipped with.

The plate-shaped portion 611 has a pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 drilled in an oval shape that is elongated in the vertical direction, and is elongated and wide in the vertical direction behind the upper elongated hole 612 (wider than the elongated hole 612). It is provided with a wiring through hole 613 formed in an oval shape of the above, and a pair of upper and lower guide projecting portions 614 projecting in a columnar shape on the left and right outside behind the lower elongated hole 612.

The elongated holes 612 are elongated holes for limiting the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 630, and a pair is arranged on the upper side and the lower side. Since the front-rear width of the elongated hole 612 is formed to be slightly wider than the diameters of the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the elevating plate member 630 to be inserted, the displacement of the elevating plate member 630 in the front-rear direction becomes small. .. These pair of elongated holes 612 are formed by intentionally shifting the front-rear arrangement. That is, the lower elongated hole 612 is arranged on the front side as compared with the upper elongated hole 612.

As a result, the support position of the upper portion of the elevating plate member 630 is on the rear side as compared with the support position of the lower portion of the elevating plate member 630, so that the elevating plate is suspended from the upper portion of the elevating plate member 630. The lower portion of the member 630 is urged to the rear by gravity.

As a result, the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 can be brought closer to the transmission gear 649 side, so that it is possible to prevent the rack gear portion 634 from falling off from the transmission gear 649, and to optimize the tooth relation. Can be done.

The wiring through hole 613 is an electric wiring connected inside the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and passes through the deformed opening 685a of the fall prevention collar member 685 and passes through the electric wiring located on the left and right outside of the inner member 670 to the outside. It is an opening for discharging to the left and right outside of the member 610.

The guide protrusion 614 functions as a portion that guides the displacement of the front-rear displacement member 653 of the resistance generator 650. That is, it functions to guide the front-rear displacement member 653 so that it can be displaced in the front-rear direction and to prevent the front-rear displacement member 653 from tilting back and forth and changing its posture. Details will be described later.

The extended wall portion 621 has a plurality of fastening portions 622 arranged at the front end and capable of screwing in fastening screws inserted into the decorative fixing member 520, and insertion of the decorative fixing member 520 arranged on the back side. It is provided with a pair of upper and lower receiving holes 623 formed so that the insertion protrusion 532 (see FIG. 43) of the plate portion 531 can be inserted. The fastening portions other than the fastening portion 622 arranged at the front end portion are mainly fastening portions for fastening and fixing the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 (see FIG. 40).

The elevating plate member 630 is inserted into and fastened to a long main body 631 whose long direction is directed in the vertical direction and a long hole 612 on the upper side of the outer member 610, which is formed so as to project from the long main body 631 to the left and right outside. A pair of upper fastening portions 632 formed so that screws can be screwed in, and a pair of upper fastening portions 632 formed so as to project from the long main body portion 631 to the left and right outside, and inserted into a long hole 612 on the lower side of the outer member 610, and the fastening screw is screwed in. It includes a pair of lower fastening portions 633 that can be formed, and a rack gear portion 634 that is formed in a gear tooth shape on the back surface side of the long main body portion 631 and meshes with the transmission gear 649.

Further, the elevating plate member 630 extends from the lower end of the long main body 631 to the back side and is arranged in a detection groove of a position detection device (not shown) so that the position of the long main body 631 can be detected. The front and rear elongated holes 636 formed in the elongated main body portion 631 as elongated elongated holes in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position between the detected portion 635 and the pair of upper fastening portions 632, and the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611. The fall-out prevention plate 637, which is fastened and fixed to the upper fastening portion 632 by the fastening screw arranged and inserted in, and the fastening screw arranged and inserted on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 are fastened and fixed to the lower fastening portion 633. It is provided with a contact plate 638 and a ring member C1 that is assembled to the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 to reduce frictional resistance during operation.

The upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 are arranged corresponding to the front-rear arrangement of the elongated holes 612 of the outer member 610. Therefore, the lower fastening portion 633 is arranged on the front side of the upper fastening portion 632.

The front-rear elongated holes 636 are elongated holes that guide the front-rear movement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 inserted into the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 of the inner member 670, and the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are It is formed with a front-back length that is equal to or greater than the front-back width of the formed range.

With the upper fastening portion 632 of the elevating plate member 630 inserted into the upper elongated hole 612, the dropout prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the tip side of the upper fastening portion 632, and the lower fastening portion 633 is the lower elongated hole. The contacted plate 638 is fastened and fixed to the tip end side of the lower fastening portion 633 while being inserted through the 612, so that the lifting plate member 630 is supported by the outer member 610 so as to be able to move up and down, and falls off from the outer member 610. Can be easily prevented.

The contacted plate 638 is provided with a locking portion for locking the lower end portion of the coil spring SP1 on the left and right outer sides. The upper end of the coil spring SP1 is locked to the locking portions 638a formed on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610. That is, the coil spring SP1 generates an urging force (pulling force) that urges the contacted plate 638 upward.

The dropout prevention plate 637 is formed in an oval shape, whereas the contacted plate 638 is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, the contact area with the resistance generator 650 can be increased, and the magnitude of the load per unit area generated at the time of collision can be reduced, which will be described in detail later.

The resistance generator 650 is locked to a solenoid 651 whose displacement direction is the front-rear direction, a fixing cover 652 for accommodating the solenoid 651 and fixing the solenoid 651 to the left and right outside of the outer member 610, and a plunger of the solenoid 651. The front-rear displacement member 653 is configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction by being guided by the guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610.

The fixed cover 652 includes a plurality of insertion holes 652a formed at both upper and lower positions of the solenoid 651 as insertion holes through which fastening screws screwed into the outer member 610 can be inserted, and a guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610. A pair of upper and lower fitting portions 652b, in which the tip portions are recessed with a fitting arrangement dimension, are provided.

The front-rear displacement member 653 includes a pair of long holes 653a to be guided, which are formed in long front-rear directions as long holes through which the guide protrusions 614 are inserted on both the upper and lower sides. With the long hole 653a to be guided inserted through the guide protrusion 614, the fitting portion 652b of the fixed cover 652 is fitted to the tip of the guide protrusion 614, whereby the guide protrusion of the front-rear displacement member 653. It is possible to prevent the installation portion 614 from falling off.

As shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the inner member 670 has a plate-shaped portion 671 arranged to face the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, and left and right of the plate-shaped portion 671. It is provided with an extended wall portion 677 extending outward in a wall shape, and a rectangular overhanging portion 678 formed in a rectangular shape on the left and right inside at the rear portion on the upper end side of the plate-shaped portion 671.

The plate-shaped portion 671 has a first elongated hole 672 formed as an elongated hole in the vertical direction on the back side of the elevating plate member 630 and a first elongated hole 672 on the front side of the first elongated hole 672. The second elongated hole 673 formed as an elongated hole extending in parallel with the first elongated hole 672 from the upper end portion displaced above the upper end portion of the first elongated hole 672, and the lower end portion of the second elongated hole 673. It includes a curved elongated hole 674, which is formed as a curved elongated hole to be connected.

As a connecting portion of the plate-shaped portion 671 to the back case 510, the fastening portion is shown only on the back side of the upper end portion of the inner member 670 on the left side in FIG. 48, and the fastening portion is also shown on the back side of the inner member 670. There is no. As can be seen from this, the position fixing of the plate-shaped portion 671 is not mainly directly fastened and fixed to the back case 510, but the outer member 610 and the decorative fixing member 520 to be fastened and fixed to the back case 510 (FIG. This is due to fastening and fixing via (see 40). In other words, the plate-shaped portion 671 is indirectly fastened and fixed to the back case 510 to generate a fixing force to the back case 510.

The plate-shaped portion 671 includes a plurality of fastening portions 671a into which fastening screws inserted from the left-right outer side to the left-right direction are screwed into the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610, and the inner member 670 is screwed into the fastening screw. It is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610.

The first elongated hole 672 is formed to be wider than the width of the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the first elongated hole 672 can be used as a through hole for the electric wiring, and the electric wiring connected to the light emitting operation effect effect unit 700 is exposed in the left and right inner regions of the pair of left and right inner members 670. This can be prevented, but the details will be described later.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed with the same width. The curved shape of the curved elongated hole 674 is an arc centered on the center of the tubular portion 684 in a state where the tubular portion 684 of the displacement member 680 guided to the first elongated hole 672 is located at the lower end of the first elongated hole 672. Formed as a shape.

The extended wall portion 677 includes a partition wall portion 677a formed so as to surround the first elongated hole 672 from the plate-shaped portion 671 to the left and right outside, and the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 from the front side edge portion to the left and right inside. It includes a protective extension 677b, which is extended in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface.

The displacement member 680 is formed by a box-shaped main body portion 681 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape in which the left and right inner sides are opened, and a pair of fastenings formed so as to project outward from the lateral side wall portion of the box-shaped main body portion 681 in the lateral direction. A portion 682, an extension portion 683 extending along the left and right outer side surfaces of the box-shaped main body portion 681, and a tubular portion 684 extending cylindrically from a corner of the box-shaped main body portion 681 in the left-right outer direction. A metal rod-shaped member 686 that is fitted and fixed to a fall-out prevention collar member 685 that is fastened and fixed to the tip end side of the tubular portion 684 and a fitting recess 683a that is formed as a circular recess on the base end side of the extension portion 683. A plurality of ring members 687 arranged in a gap between the members that are relatively displaced and through which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is inserted, a large-diameter ring member 688 through which the cylindrical portion 684 is inserted, and a light emitting operation effect unit 700 are inserted in the front-rear direction. The front and rear ring members 689 to be inserted into the fastening portion 682 in a state of being arranged so as to be sandwiched (see FIG. 46) are provided.

The fastening portion 682 has a female screw portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted into the connected hole 764 of the light emitting operation effecting unit 700 is screwed, and the fastening screw causes the light emitting operation producing unit 700 to move into the displacement member 680. Be connected.

The extension unit 683 functions as a portion that protects the light emission operation effect unit 700 from contacting the inner member 670 when the light emission operation effect unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680 (extension unit 683 and the light emission operation effect unit). See FIGS. 45 and 46 for the arrangement relationship of 700).

The tubular portion 684 has a fall-prevention collar at both positions sandwiching a deformed opening 684b formed so as to penetrate the box-shaped single unit 681 in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral side and a central axis passing through the deformed opening 684a. A fastening portion 684a formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the member 685 can be screwed into the member 685 is provided.

The fall-prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the tubular portion 684 while being inserted into the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670. At the center of the fall-out prevention collar member 685, a deformed opening 685a is formed as an opening having the same size as the deformed opening 684b of the tubular portion 684.

That is, in a state where the fall prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the tubular portion 684, an opening penetrating in the left-right direction is formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion 684 and the fall prevention collar member 685. This opening has a function as a through hole for electrical wiring connected to the light emitting operation effect unit 700. This will be described here.

The other end of the electrical wiring whose one end is connected to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is exposed to the outside from the wiring through hole 762 (see FIG. 48) of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and the tubular portion 684 of the displacement member 680. It is projected to the left and right outside from the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670 through the deformed opening 684b and the deformed opening 685a of the fall prevention collar member 685, and further passes through the wiring through hole 613 of the outer member 610 to form a plate. It is put out to the left and right outside from the part 611.

The deformed opening 685a is not a simple circular opening, but has a protruding portion (a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted) that protrudes inward from the circular diameter position, and the deformed opening 685a is in the circumferential direction. When it rotates, the projecting portion hooks the electric wiring, so that the electric wiring is displaced in the circumferential direction.
As a result, it is possible to suppress the rubbing that occurs between the deformed opening 685a and the electric wiring, so that it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from being broken.

The other end side of the electrical wiring is laid from the left and right outside of the plate-shaped portion 611 to the back side of the back case 510, and is connected to an individual relay board. The left and right outer regions of the plate-shaped portion 611 are hidden by at least the decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 40).

It is conceivable that the electric wiring may be exposed at the position between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the displacement member 680 on one end side of the electric wiring, but in the present embodiment, the box-shaped main body portion 681 covers the electric wiring. As described above, the extension plate portion 763 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is extended in front of the wiring through hole 762 so as to cover the electrical wiring in a front view (see FIG. 48). ). As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from being exposed at the position between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the displacement member 680.

By passing the electrical wiring in this way, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring is exposed in the left and right inner regions of the pair of left and right inner members 670. Therefore, as a problem that tends to occur when the electric wiring is visually recognized by the player, there is a problem that the electric wiring is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and the display is hidden to reduce the visibility. It is possible to solve the problem that the electric wiring is arranged in an uncoordinated manner, which makes it look dirty and reduces the effect of production. That is, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved, and the electrical wiring can be hidden from the player.

At this time, since the arrangement of the electric wiring in the gap between the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 can be restricted by the partition wall portion 677a, the elevating plate member 630 arranged on the front side of the partition wall portion 677a. It is possible to avoid the situation where the electric wiring and the electric wiring come into contact with each other.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 has a rod shape with a brim by fitting an E-ring into the left and right outer ends, thereby preventing the member from falling off from the left and right outer ends. As for the insertion order of the metal rod-shaped member 686, the left and right inner ends are the ring member 687, the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, the ring member 687, and the second elongated hole 673 of the inner member 670 (curved elongated hole 674). , The ring member 687 and the fitting recess 683a of the displacement member 680 are inserted in this order, and are fitted and fixed to the fitting recess 683a of the extension portion 683.

As described above, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is a member inserted through the elevating plate member 630 and the inner member 670, and the vertical arrangement depends on the arrangement change due to the elevating operation of the elevating plate member 630, and the front-rear arrangement is the first. 2 Depends on the arrangement of the elongated holes 673 and the curved elongated holes 674. The arrangement and posture of the displacement member 680 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fitted and fixed are changed according to the change in the arrangement of the metal rod-shaped member 686. The arrangement of the production unit 700 and the change in posture will be described later.

The front-rear ring member 689 includes a plate-shaped ring member 689a arranged on the box-shaped main body portion 681 side, and a flanged ring member 689b on which a flange extending outward is formed at an end portion of the cylinder.

The plate-shaped ring member 689a and the flanged ring member 689b are configured such that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is sandwiched between the plate-shaped portions arranged in the front-rear direction, and the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the flanged ring member 689b is connected to an intermediate portion described later. It is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the connected hole 764 of the member 760.

The rotary posture assisting member 690 is arranged on the left and right inside of the rectangular overhanging portion 678 of the inner member 670, and the fastening screw inserted from the left and right inside is screwed into the fastening portion of the rectangular overhanging portion 678 to form a rectangular overhang. It is fastened and fixed to the portion 678.

The rotary posture assisting member 690 is a box-shaped main body 691 formed in a box shape with the left and right inside open and fastened and fixed to a rectangular overhanging portion 678, and a box-shaped main body arranged on the left and right inside of the box-shaped main body 691. A tubular member 695 that is rotatably supported by the portion 691 is provided.

The box-shaped main body portion 691 includes an extension portion 692 extending downward from the left and right inner ends on the back side, and the tubular member 695 is supported by a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction on the left and right inside of the extension portion 692. Has been done. That is, the tubular member 695 is arranged at the back side end portion and the lower position of the box-shaped main body portion 691 and is arranged away from the player, so that the tubular member 695 is prevented from being excessively conspicuous. be able to.

The light emitting operation effect unit 700 is a unit connected to the fastening portions 682 of the displacement members 680 arranged on both the left and right sides, and the arrangement and the posture change by changing the arrangement and the posture of the displacement members 680 on the left and right sides.

51 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and FIG. 53 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. .. Note that FIG. 53 shows an exploded view in a direction looking up at the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Further, in FIG. 53, in addition to the light emitting operation effect unit 700, the displacement member 680 is shown in a corresponding arrangement.

The light emitting operation effect unit 700 includes a main body member 710 on which the rotation effect device 800 is arranged, a lower plate member 730 arranged below the main body member 710 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 710, and the main body member 710 and below. An intermediate plate member 740 arranged between the plate member 730 and closing the front side of the space, a plurality of decorative members 750 fixed to the front side of the intermediate plate member 740, and left and right arranged on the left and right sides of the main body member 710. It includes a pair of left and right intermediate connecting members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 by fastening screws that are inserted from the outside.

The main body member 710 is formed in a box shape in which the lower side and the front side are opened, and a plurality of fastening portions 711 formed so that a fastening screw to be inserted from below into the lower plate member 730 can be screwed in, and the front surface of the top plate. A plurality of sandwiching portions 713 arranged to face the leading edge portion 712 with dimensions capable of sandwiching the intermediate plate member 740 between the leading edge portion 712 extending downward from the side edge and the leading edge portion 712. A pair of left and right fixed plate portions 720 formed so as to connect the top plate and the back side wall portion on both the left and right sides are provided.

The fixed plate portion 720 is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane intersecting the left-right direction axis so that the intermediate connecting member 760 can be supported by a surface, and a fastening screw inserted from the left and right outside into the intermediate connecting member 760 is screwed. It includes a plurality of fastening portions 721 that are formed so as to be able to be inserted and used for fastening and fixing the intermediate member 760, and a recessed portion 722 that is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape at the lower end portion on the back surface side.

The recessed portion 722 is formed so that the semicircular central axis is aligned with the central axis of the wiring through hole 762 bored in the intermediate connecting member 760. As a result, the opening formed by the recessed portion 722 and the lower plate member 730 and the wiring through hole 762 can be arranged in a straight line on the left and right, so that the electrical wiring can be easily passed through the wiring through hole 762. ..

The lower plate member 730 has a plurality of insertion holes 731 for inserting a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 711 of the main body member 710, and a plurality of ridge portions 732 arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the leading edge portion. And.

The lower plate member 730 is light-diffused on the left and right outer portions of the lower surface, and is formed so as to reduce visibility when looking at the back side through the member. As a result, even when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is visually recognized from the lower plate member 730 side when looking up (see FIG. 53), it is difficult to visually recognize the electric wiring and the driving device arranged inside the unit 700. be able to.

Further, a pattern, a figure or the like may be drawn on the left and right inner portions of the lower surface of the lower plate member 730 (the substantially circular white-painted portion in FIG. 53). As a result, even in a situation where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged on the front upper side of the third symbol display device 81 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 (see FIG. 36), the lower surface is visually recognized by the player. By making the player visually recognize the pattern or figure of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, the effect can be maintained.

The ridge portion 732 is formed so as to perform the same function as the leading edge portion 712 and the holding portion 713 of the main body member 710. That is, the intermediate plate member 740 is arranged side by side in the front-rear direction so as to be able to hold the intermediate plate member 740.

The intermediate plate member 740 is formed in a thin plate shape in which the left and right central portions are curved so as to project toward the front side along the shape of the front edge portion of the lower plate member 730, and a plurality of illuminated substrates 741 are fastened and fixed on the back surface side. Will be done.

The intermediate plate member 740 is held by being sandwiched between the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730. That is, the upper edge portion of the intermediate plate member 740 is sandwiched between the leading edge portion 712 and the sandwiching portion 713 of the main body member 710, and the lower edge portion of the intermediate plate member 740 is sandwiched by the ridge portion 732 of the lower plate member 730. It is retained by. Therefore, the number of fastening screws for assembly can be reduced as compared with the case where the intermediate plate member 740 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730.

The illumination substrate 741 is arranged at the center on the left and right and on both the left and right sides, and is configured to be able to irradiate the front side with light from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side. As a result, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the decorative member 750 to emit light.

The light emitting means arranged on the lighting substrate 741 only irradiates the front side with light, and the light emitting means for irradiating the light below (lower plate member 730 side) is not arranged, but the lower plate member. When the player visually recognizes the 730, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged diagonally in front of and above the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 36), so that the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is the lower plate. The member 730 will be irradiated. That is, since the brightness of the lower plate member 730 can be ensured by the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81, the possibility that the effect of the lower plate member 730 is reduced can be reduced.

The decorative member 750 is a decorative member arranged at the left and right center positions of the intermediate plate member 740, and is arranged on both the left and right sides of the central decorative member 751 having a three-dimensional shape formed of a thin-walled resin material and the central decorative member 751. A pair of left and right members to be fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the intermediate plate member 740 from the back surface side.

The fastened member 755 includes a plurality of fastening portions 756 into which the fastening screws are screwed, and the central decorative member 751 is bored at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 756 with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 756. It is provided with a plurality of position holding holes 752 to be provided.

The fixing of the central decorative member 751 to the intermediate plate member 740 is not by a fixing means dedicated to the central decorative member 751, but by inserting a fastening portion 756 for fastening and fixing the member to be fastened 755 to the intermediate plate member 740. It is being done. Therefore, the work man-hours for assembling the central decorative member 751 to the intermediate plate member 740 can be reduced, and the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of fastening portions 756 are formed so as to be connected by a plate-shaped portion 757 having a curved cross section. The plate-shaped portion 757 has a shape corresponding to the base end side contact surface portion 753 which is an edge portion of the central decorative member 751 and abuts on the front surface of the intermediate plate member 740.

As a result, in a state where the fastening member 755 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 756, the base end side contact surface portion 753 is held between the plate-shaped portion 757 and the intermediate plate member. Since it can be supported by sandwiching it with the 740, the arrangement of the central decorative member 751 can be stabilized.

The intermediate connecting member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (d). In the description of FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (d), FIGS. 51 to 53 are appropriately referred to.

54 (a) is a front view of the intermediate connecting member 760 on the right side, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 in the direction of the arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 in the direction of arrow LIVc in FIG. 54 (a), and FIG. 54 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member 760 in the LIVd-LIVd line of FIG. 54 (a). Is.

The intermediate connecting member 760 is a portion of the main body member 710 that faces the fixed plate portion 720 and has a plate-shaped portion 761 having a plurality of insertion holes 761a into which a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 721 is inserted. , A wiring through hole 762 formed in the lower part on the back side of the plate-shaped portion 761 in the left-right direction, an extension plate portion 763 extending in the left-right direction from the plate-shaped portion 761 in a flat plate shape, and an extension thereof. A connected hole 764 formed in the outer portion in the width direction of the plate portion 763, and a pair of connecting plate portions 765 extended so as to be connected to the plate-shaped portion 761 in the central portion in the width direction of the extended plate portion 763. A shielding extension plate 766 extending from one side end in the width direction (lower plate member 730 side end) of the extension plate portion 763 to the front side (intermediate plate member 740 side) is provided.

The angle between the straight line connecting the two insertion holes 761a arranged in the front-rear direction at the substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the horizontal straight line HL71 facing horizontally is designed as an inclination angle θ71. The angle of the inclination angle θ71 is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the inclination angle θ71 is about 5 degrees.

The plane on which the extension plate portion 763 is formed is arranged on the vertical straight line VL71 (pointing at a right angle to the horizontal straight line HL71) in the direction of gravity (the angle is set to 0). By arranging the extension plate portion 763 on the vertical straight line VL71, it is possible to facilitate the work of assembling the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to the displacement member 680 from the front side as described above.

The inclination angle θ71 of the insertion hole 761a corresponds to the inclination angle of the rotation member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 in a state where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680. Therefore, it is possible to realize a design (see FIG. 55) in which the initial posture of the rotation effect device 800 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted while maintaining the workability of assembling the intermediate connection member 760 to the displacement member 680. ..

In this case, even in the retracted state or the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the optical axis of the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 can be directed diagonally forward.
As a result, the light emitted from the rotating member 810 can illuminate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the game board 13 (for example, a place where the light from the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to reach), so that the entire game board 13 can be illuminated. It can be bright and easy to see.

Two holes 764 to be connected are formed in the extending plate portion 763, but the left and right holes are formed so as to have different shapes. That is, in the intermediate connecting member 760 on the left side, long elongated holes 764a are formed on the left and right sides of the extending plate portion 763 on both sides in the width direction. On the other hand, in the intermediate connecting member 760 on the right side, a long hole 764a is formed on one side (upper side in FIG. 36) of the extension plate portion 763 in the width direction, and a substantially circular shape is formed on the opposite side in the width direction (lower side in FIG. 36). A support hole 764b to be provided is formed (see FIG. 36).

The connecting plate portion 765 is a portion for reinforcing the angular relationship (positional relationship) between the plate-shaped portion 761 and the extended plate portion 763 so as to be able to be held. In the posture shown in FIG. 53, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 that supports the plate-shaped portion 761 is along the vertical direction (gravity direction), so that the extension plate with respect to the plate-shaped portion 761 due to the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Part 763 is hard to break.

On the other hand, as will be described later, the intermediate connecting member 760 is configured to be tiltable, and when it is tilted forward by about 90 degrees, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 is the front-rear direction (the direction orthogonal to the gravity direction). Therefore, the extension plate portion 763 is easily broken with respect to the plate-shaped portion 761 due to the weight of the light emitting effect unit 700.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the connecting plate portion 765 is reinforced, it is possible to easily prevent the extension plate portion 763 from breaking with respect to the plate-shaped portion 761. That is, it is possible to easily avoid a defect (occurrence of breakage) caused by the posture change of the intermediate connecting member 760.

The shielding extension plate 766 has a function of blocking the view to the connected hole 764 when looking up (see FIG. 53) and a decorative pattern is formed on the outer surface (lower surface of FIG. 53) to provide an effect area by decoration. It has a function to expand.

As shown in FIG. 53, a striped pattern is formed on the lower side surface of the box-shaped main body portion 681 of the displacement member 680 in the same manner as the decorative pattern is formed on the lower side surface of the shielding extension plate 766 of the intermediate connecting member 760. It is formed. Therefore, the lower side surface of the shielding extension plate 766 and the lower side surface of the box-shaped main body portion 681 can be made easy to see integrally, so that the area where the decorative pattern (decorative pattern, striped pattern) is formed. Can be opened and visually recognized.

As a result, in the assembled state of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 36), the effect of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the displacement member 680 in the direction looking up at the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be improved.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of using the light emitting operation effect unit 700 not only when the left and right central portions of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 are visually recognized but also when the left and right end portions are visually recognized when looking up. Can be done.

The rotation effect device 800 includes a rotating member 810, a drive motor 820 that generates a driving force for rotationally displacing the rotating member 810, and a posture detecting means 830 that rotates synchronously with the rotating member 810 to detect the posture of the rotating member 810. And.

The rotating member 810 is rotatably supported by the main body member 710 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and a low friction bearing is used for the support. As a result, even when the rotating member 810 is rotationally driven, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the load associated with the rotation of the rotating member 810 is transmitted to the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

The rotating member 810 is fastened and fixed to a decorative plate 811 on which decoration is formed, a heat radiating plate 812 formed in an outer shape corresponding to the decorative plate 811 and arranged to face the decorative plate 811, and the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812. It is arranged between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 and the rotating base member 813 which is formed with a circular cross section and is supported by the main body member 710 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction at the center position of the circular cross section. The arch-shaped transparent member 814 is provided.

The decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 are members having a similar shape formed of a colored (black in the present embodiment) resin material, and the decorative plate 811 is mainly formed with decorations such as figures and patterns. The heat radiating plate 812 is provided with intake openings 812a arranged in rows from the rotation base member 813 side as the rotation base end side toward the rotation tip side (longitudinal end side of the rotation member 810).

The arch-shaped transmissive member 814 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material and has an arch shape formed along the curved surface of the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812, and is formed between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812. It is fixed. The light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the illuminated substrate (not shown) arranged between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 through the arch-shaped transmitting member 814 is emitted from the rotating member 810. It travels in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation.

Light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board are arranged in a row along the curved shape of the rotating member 810 like the intake opening 812a, and the interval between the rows is set narrower than that of the intake opening 812a. To. By turning on and off the plurality of LEDs in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member 810 (rotational light emission effect), it is possible to execute an afterimage display (afterimage display by the afterimage effect) that makes a specific display visually recognized by the afterimage of light. Become.

The light emitted from each LED is partitioned inside the rotating member 810 so as to be adjacent to each other in the radial direction of rotation, and is configured to travel in each path extending in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation, and enters another path. Formed so that there is no. As a result, the traveling path of the light emitted from each LED (the diameter of the displacement locus of the LED light in the rotational emission effect) can be clarified, so that the afterimage display can be visually recognized as a clear display.

Rough surface processing (diffusion processing) is formed on the concave side surface of the arch-shaped transparent member 814. As a result, the LED light can be diffusely reflected and diffused, so that the glare is suppressed as compared with the case where the LED light is directly visually recognized.

The intake opening 812a of the heat radiating plate 812 will be described. The intake opening 812a is formed in the tangential direction of the rotating member 810 in the rotational circumferential direction, and acts to take in air between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 when the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced.

Of the configuration of the position between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812, the opposite side (lower side in FIG. 51) of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is open, and air can be discharged. Further, between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812, a recess extending continuously along an arch shape extending in the radial direction of rotation is formed as an air passage.

That is, when the rotating member 810 is rotated, the air taken in from the intake opening 812a flows outward in the rotational radial direction through the recess along the arch shape of the arch-shaped transmissive member 814, and is discharged to the back side. , Air can be discharged into the atmosphere. Since the heat inside the rotating member 810 can be dissipated (heat radiated) to the outside by this air flow, it is possible to easily avoid problems caused by the high temperature of the illuminated substrate.

Arch shape The arch shape of the transmissive member 814 allows air to be smoothly sent to the back surface side, and it is possible to avoid the generation of vortices. As a result, air can be smoothly taken in from the back surface side of the rotating base member 813 side, so that cooling in the vicinity of the rotating shaft can be performed.

In other words, when air is flowed outward in the radial direction, the air pressure inside the radial direction is lowered, so that air can be taken in from the back side and the air flow can be circulated during rotation. As a result, the heat dissipation effect can be continuously generated.

The cooling action due to the flow of air is not expected only when the rotational light emission effect is executed, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, even when the rotating member 810 is swung back and forth in the retracted state or the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, air circulation through the intake opening 812a is generated, and the illumination substrate can be cooled. it can.

In the present embodiment, the decorative plate 811 is not formed with the intake opening 812a in consideration of decorativeness (see FIG. 37). Since the intake of air through the intake opening 812a acts to take in the air in the traveling direction of the intake opening 812a, if the rotation direction is fixed in one direction, the side that takes in the air is the rotating member. Since the 810 is biased to one side in the longitudinal direction, the cooling effect of the illuminated substrate may be halved.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotating member 810 is not fixed in one direction, but is rotated in one rotation direction in the first effect mode, and is rotated in another rotation direction in a different second effect mode. It is controlled to do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the air intake side from being biased to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and a sufficient cooling effect of the illuminated substrate can be expected.

The attitude detecting means 830 includes a detecting gear 831 that meshes with a gear portion pivotally supported by the rotating shaft of the rotating member 810 and rotates synchronously with the rotating member 810, and an axial direction from the radial outer portion of the detecting gear 831. A detection groove is arranged at a position where the extension portion extending in parallel can enter, and the detection sensor 832 capable of detecting the phase of the detection gear 831 by detecting that the extension portion has entered the detection groove. , Equipped with.

As a design of the posture detecting means 830, it is possible to arbitrarily design which posture the rotating member 810 is in, but in the present embodiment, the rotating member 810 has a decorative plate 811 on the decorative member 750 side. At least it is detected that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is in a posture along the left-right direction and the decorative plate 811 is in a posture in which the decorative plate 811 is arranged on the front side (appropriate posture, see FIG. 51) in the arranged state. The formation position of the extension portion of the detection gear 831 is designed so that the detection gear 831 can be formed.

55 to 57 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the LV-LV line of FIG. 36. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled state are shown in FIGS. 55 to 57. In FIGS. 55 to 57, how the internal operation unit 600 changes from the retracted state to the extended state is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIG. 55, the internal operation unit 600 is shown in the retracted state, in FIG. 56, the internal operation unit 600 is shown in the intermediate state, and in FIG. 57, the internal operation unit 600 is shown in the overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the internal operation unit 600 is configured so that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 are displaced in the process of changing the state from the retracted state to the overhanging state. The displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 is configured such that the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the forward rotation direction occur in stages, and the details will be described later.

In the configuration of the present embodiment, the arrangement of the rotation effect device 800, which is particularly noticeable, will be described. Since the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 change their postures in the forward rotation direction, the front and rear of the rotation effect device 800 in the overhanging state are compared with the arrangement in the front-rear direction of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state and the intermediate state. The directional arrangement is located on the front side.

As a result, by locating the rotation effect device 800 on the back side in the retracted state, a space can be secured on the front side of the rotation effect device 800, so that the decorative portion 247 and the lighting board 251 are arranged closer to the front to produce the effect. While it is possible to improve the effect, the position of the rotation effect device 800 when executing the rotation light emission effect for rotating the rotation effect device 800 in the overhanging state can be brought closer to the player side, so that the rotation light emission effect can be improved. The power of can be increased. Therefore, both the effect of the effect in the retracted state and the effect of the effect in the overhang state can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the light irradiation direction LD81 from the rotation effect device 800 is set to the front side in the overhanging state. On the other hand, the light irradiation direction LD81 is set not directly above but diagonally forward in consideration of being used for light production even in the intermediate state and the retracted state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the utility value of the rotation effect device 800 as a light effect means from being extremely lowered in the intermediate state and the retracted state. The details of the light effect will be described later.

As a result of setting the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 diagonally forward, the posture change of the light emission operation effect unit 700 from the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 to the overhanging state. The attitude change angle in the forward rotation direction required for the above is smaller than 90 degrees. As a result, the time and space required for the posture change can be shortened as compared with the case where the posture change angle is 90 degrees.

In the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 that supports the rotation effect device 800 is in an inclined posture in the forward rotation direction, so that the front-rear width is slightly increased.
Therefore, normally, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged closer to the back side, or the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is designed to be suppressed inside the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 in front view. , The collision between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the base plate 60 is to be avoided.

However, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged closer to the back side, the power of the effect may be halved because the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is far from the player. Further, when the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is suppressed inside the central opening 60b, the operation tends to be small and the force of the effect may be halved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the space on the back side is secured by using the central configuration unit 240 which is thinner than the base plate 60. Further, the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 251 in the front-rear direction for improving the effect effect is kept within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and a recessed portion 252a is formed in the substrate holding plate 252 to be between the illuminated substrate 251 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700. It is designed to form a gap. As a result, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is prevented from colliding with the configuration of the game board 13 while improving the degree of freedom in the posture and arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

The posture change in the forward rotation direction of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 is not started in the retracted state, but descends in the same posture until the intermediate state, and the posture change is started from the intermediate state. The start position of this posture change is defined by the shapes of the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674, as will be described later, and is defined by the shape of the driving device (drive motor 648, solenoid 651). It is configured so as not to be changed depending on the control mode.

In the intermediate state, as can be seen from the fact that the rotation effect device 800 is located below the vertical position H1 (see FIG. 56) of the lower edge portion of the decorative portion 247 in the cross section at the center of the left and right, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 Since the central opening 60b is located in front of the rotation effect device 800 and the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is not arranged, there is no possibility of collision.

By starting the posture change of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the forward rotation direction from the state where there is no possibility of collision, the possibility that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 collide with the game board 13 is reduced. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to avoid that the space for arranging the illumination substrate 251 and the decorative portion 247 is limited by overlapping with the displacement locus of the forward rotation direction displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement positions of the illuminated substrate 251 and the decorative portion 247.

Next, a configuration for stepwisely dividing the displacement modes of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 will be described. In the present embodiment, the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to be guided by two elongated holes having different shapes.

58 (a) to 58 (c) show the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 schematically showing the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674. It is a schematic side view of.

FIG. 58 (a) shows the arrangement of the configuration of the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state, FIG. 58 (b) shows the arrangement of the configuration of the internal operation unit 600 in the intermediate state, and FIG. 58 (c) shows the arrangement of the configuration. , The arrangement of the configuration of the internal operation unit 600 in the overhanging state is illustrated.

In FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, the box-shaped main body portion 681 and the extension portion 683 of the displacement member 680 are imaginary lines. The outlines of the tubular portion 684 of the displacement member 680 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 (outer lines of the portion surrounded by the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674) are shown in solid lines. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), in the present embodiment, the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed from different shapes, and a light emitting operation effect is produced. The light emitting effect unit 700 is configured to be displaced stepwise by changing the guidance of the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 corresponding to the vertical position and posture of the unit 700 depending on the arrangement. The details will be described below.

The driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 680 that holds the light emitting effect unit 700 via the elevating plate member 630. That is, in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), the front and rear elongated holes 636 are on the most upstream side of the driving force transmission path generated by the drive motor 648 (see FIG. 47).

That is, as the elevating plate member 630 is vertically displaced in the vertical direction, the metal rod-shaped member 686 arranged inside the front-rear elongated hole 636 is displaced in an allowable direction, and the other portion is displaced by the displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686. Follows and displaces.

First, the first elongated hole 672 and the second elongated hole 673 are arranged so that the elongated directions coincide with each other in the vertical direction and are parallel to each other. Therefore, while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided to the second elongated hole 673 and the tubular portion 684 is guided to the first elongated hole 672 (between the retracted state and the intermediate state), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is connected to the displacement member 680. The displacement of the light emitting effect unit 700 in the forward rotation direction is suppressed, and the light emitting unit 700 is displaced in parallel in the vertical direction.

Next, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided to the curved elongated hole 674, and the curved elongated hole 674 is in an intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (a state in which the tubular portion 684 is in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672). It is formed along an arc having the center of the tubular portion 684 as the central axis J1 and is connected to the lower end of the second elongated hole 673.

Therefore, while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided to the curved elongated hole 674 (between the intermediate state and the overhanging state), the vertical position of the tubular portion 684 is maintained, and the metal rod-shaped member 686 is centered on the central axis J1. The light emitting effect unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction about the central axis J1 by being rotationally displaced.

When the elevating plate member 630 is moved up from the state shown in FIG. 58 (c), the driving force is transmitted to the metal rod-shaped member 686 via the front and rear elongated holes 636, but the elevating plate member is transmitted to the tubular portion 684. No direct driving force transmission from the 630 occurs.

Therefore, the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is maintained in a state of being in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672 until the internal operation unit 600 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 58B). Then, when moving from the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 to the retracted state (see FIG. 58 (a)), the tubular portion 684 is moved via the box-shaped main body portion 681 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fixed. The tubular portion 684 moves up in a manner of being lifted by the elevating plate member 630.

That is, the displacement of the displacement member 680 accompanying the lowering of the elevating plate member 630 is designed as a displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (a) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) and then to the state of FIG. 58 (c). The displacement of the displacement member 680 accompanying the rise of the elevating plate member 630 is designed as a displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (c) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) and then to the state of FIG. 58 (a). Will be done.

It is the front and rear elongated holes 636 that transmit the driving force of these displacements, the displacement direction is defined as the vertical direction (straight direction), and the front and rear length is such that the metal rod-shaped member 686 passes through the curved elongated holes 674. Is set as long enough to allow. That is, since it is not necessary to switch the displacement direction of the front and rear elongated holes 636 according to the change in the displacement mode of the light emitting effect unit 700, the design of the elevating plate member 630 can be simplified.

The light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state is set diagonally forward, while the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 in the overhanging state is set forward. The displacement angle of the 700 in the forward rotation direction is designed to be slightly smaller than 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), the wide first elongated hole 672 is formed in the deformed opening 684b of the tubular portion 684 (see FIG. 50 (a)). Functions as a wiring through hole for passing electrical wiring, and one purpose is to form a sufficiently large gap for passing electrical wiring.

Further, for another purpose, the support area (area of the peripheral surface) can be increased when the shaft supported when the light emitting effect unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction has a large diameter. As a result, the load (friction force) generated per unit area of the support portion (first elongated hole 672) at the time of displacement accompanied by a change in posture can be reduced, so that local wear can be avoided and the cylinder can be avoided. The durability of the shape portion 684 and the first elongated hole 672 can be improved. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the material of the member can be improved, and for example, even if the tubular portion 684 is made of a resin material, sufficient durability can be provided.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are elongated holes for guiding the displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686, and are narrower in width than the first elongated hole 672. The driving force generated by the drive motor 648 is transmitted to the metal rod-shaped member 686 via the elevating plate member 630. Although the metal rod-shaped member 686 has a small diameter, it is made of metal, and it is not necessary to pass electrical wiring inside, and the inside is filled, so that sufficient strength can be exhibited.

Since the widths of the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed to be narrow, the clearance between the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 can be reduced, so that the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be stabilized. it can.

Therefore, the misalignment of the metal rod-shaped member 686 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (a state in which the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the forward rotation direction can be switched) can be reduced. As a result, the stepwise switching of the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be smoothly executed.

The direction in which the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 acts in the process of displacement will be described. In FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), the center of gravity position G1 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is shown.

It is the elevating plate member 630 that regulates the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680, but the tubular portion 684 is not directly supported by the elevating plate member 630. Therefore, the tubular portion 684 is suspended from the elevating plate member 630 via the box-shaped main body portion 681, the extending portion 683, and the metal rod-shaped member 686, and the displacement is limited to the first elongated hole 672. The placement is maintained.

Therefore, from the retracted state to the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, a load (metal rod shape) that displaces the tubular portion 684 downward along the direction with the metal rod-shaped member 686 as the rotation axis by the own weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Since a load in the backflip direction centered on the member 686) is generated, the tubular portion 684 is urged diagonally forward and downward by the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

As a result, the tubular portion 684 can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the first elongated hole 672, and the large diameter ring member 688 (see FIG. 50 (a)) can be configured to roll in one direction. Compared with the case where the sliding direction is not fixed, the wear of the tubular portion 684, the large diameter ring member 688, and the first elongated hole 672 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, from the intermediate state to the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the tubular portion 684 is supported by the first elongated hole 672 (the downward displacement is restricted). Therefore, due to the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is maintained at the lower end of the first elongated hole 672, and the metal rod-shaped member 686 is directed downward along the direction with the tubular portion 684 as the rotation axis. Since a load (load in the forward rotation direction centered on the tubular portion 684) is generated, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is urged in the direction along the arc centered on the central axis J1 by the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Will be done.

Therefore, since the load when the internal operation unit 600 starts the state change from the intermediate state to the overhanging state is generated by its own weight, the displacement can be smoothly generated. In the present embodiment, since the center of gravity position G1 is arranged between the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the tubular portion 684 in the front-rear direction, the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the tubular portion 684 to be the shaft to the center of gravity position G1. It is possible to avoid excessively long distances.

As a result, both the load in the rotation direction centered on the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the load in the rotation direction centered on the tubular portion 684 can be prevented from becoming excessive and can be generated with an appropriate size.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 is configured to overtake the tubular portion 684 during the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680. With this configuration, the tubular portion 684 can be stopped and only the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be displaced in the vertical direction.

The driving force required to start the ascending displacement of the displacement member 680 as compared with the case where the tubular portion 684 is also ascending and displaced at the start of the ascending displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 from the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600. Can be reduced. As a result, the drive motor 648 can be miniaturized.

Further, by shortening the vertical displacement width of the tubular portion 684, the vertical displacement width of the electric wiring inserted through the tubular portion 684 can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of disconnection of the electrical wiring.

The appearance of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 in the front view will be described. In the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction to execute a different mode of light emitting effect.

59 to 61 are front views of the operating unit 500. In FIGS. 59 to 61, for convenience of explanation, the outer shapes of the outer rail 62, the decorative portion 247 of the central configuration unit 240, and the illuminated substrate 251 are schematically shown, and the inside of the decorative portion 247 and the illuminated substrate 251 is shown. It is shown in a whitewashed state.

In FIGS. 59 to 61, the inside of the decorative portion 247 and the illuminated substrate 251 is painted white to express that the light transmission is lowered. In reality, the illumination substrate 251 is formed of an impermeable material and blocks the player's field of view, but the decorative portion 247 is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that it can be said that the light transmission is low. , The player's field of view passes (it becomes possible to visually recognize the configuration on the back side via the decorative portion 247).

FIG. 59 shows the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, FIG. 60 shows the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 61 shows the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged behind the decorative portion 247 and the illumination board 251 and most of them are hidden in the front view.
Therefore, the visibility of the rotation effect device 800 itself is low. In this state, the elevating plate member 630 is arranged at the upper end of the vertical displacement by being detected by the detection device when the detected unit 635 enters the detection groove of the detection device (not shown). The determination is made by the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

Further, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 are visually recognized in a state of being divided by the decorative portion 247. Therefore, the light emitting operation unit 700 executes the light effect toward the front side, which is executed by irradiating the decorative member 750 with the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 741 (see FIG. 51), and the rotation effect device 800 performs the outer rail 62. When performing an upward light effect that irradiates light toward, each light effect can be visually recognized separately, so that each light effect can be made to stand out.

In the present embodiment, the surface curved in a bow shape (the surface arranged so as to face the outer rail 62 in the vertical direction in the front view) and the outer rail 62 are convex upward as a portion to irradiate light from the rotation effect device 800. It is designed with a similar shape as a curved shape.

Therefore, when the rotation effect device 800 is in a posture different from the posture for executing the rotation light emission effect described later, the rotation effect device 800 is visually recognized as if it is a member for illuminating the outer rail 62. be able to. As a result, the utility value of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600 can be improved.

As an effective effect by performing the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 to the outer rail 62, a right-handed suggestion effect is assumed in which the light is visually recognized as if it is moving along the path of a sphere.
For example, the order of irradiating light from the rotation effect device 800 is the range E2 of the outer rail 62 with the LED on the right side, starting from the time of irradiating the range E1 of the outer rail 62 arranged above with the leftmost LED. The LED is set to the first light emission control mode in which the LED is turned off after a certain period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed from the irradiation timing, while changing the range E3 and E4 in order to irradiate the light. , It is possible to make it appear as if the light is moving to the right along the outer rail 62, whereby it is possible to notify the player that it is time to hit the right.

In this case, in order to produce a right-handed suggestion effect, the illumination boards are scattered on the game board 13 (see FIG. 18), or a figure or a picture for right-handed suggestion to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is designed. You can save the labor of doing it.

It should be noted that the right-handed suggestion effect is not limited to the case where the right-handed suggestion effect is executed only by the light emission effect by the rotation effect device 800, and various modes are exemplified. For example, in addition to the light emitting effect by the rotation effect device 800, the light emitting means arranged on the illuminated boards scattered on the game board 13 may be made to emit light, or in addition to the light emitting effect by the rotation effect device 800. , The third symbol display device 81 may display a figure or a picture for suggesting right-handed stroke.

Since the arrangement position of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is set on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 made of transparent resin, no nail is arranged in front of the rotation effect device 800. As a result, since it is not affected by the reflection by the nail, the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 can be easily made visible to the player.

In addition, as will be described later, although the rotation effect device 800 can execute the rotation light emission effect in the overhang state of the internal operation unit 600, the evacuation device 800 has a different posture from the overhang state of the internal operation unit 600. It is used as a device capable of performing a right-handed suggestion effect by shining light on the outer rail 62 in the state. That is, the rotation effect device 800 can be used for different purposes.

The light effect executed by the rotation effect device 800 is not limited to the right-handed suggestion effect. For example, as a warning effect in which the central light emitting means 251b of the illumination board 251 as an effect device executes the light emission effect, a light effect such that the player can visually recognize the upward arrow may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged below the decorative portion 247. As a result, the visibility of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 is improved by the amount not shielded by the decorative portion 247 as compared with the retracted state.

Further, as compared with the retracted state, it becomes easier to understand that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 are integrally configured, and the vertical distance between the outer rail 62 and the rotation effect device 800 becomes wider.

Therefore, as the role of the rotation effect device 800, it can be easily recognized as a member that executes the light effect integrally with the decorative member 750 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, instead of the member for illuminating the outer rail 62.

As a result, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the central decorative member 751 was a small effector that could be visually recognized, but in the intermediate state, it became a large effector including not only the central decorative member 751 but also the rotation effect device 800. It is possible to give the player the illusion that it has changed.

As shown in FIG. 61, the rotation effect device 800 is in a posture in which the light irradiation direction LD81 faces the front side in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600. In this state, when the light is emitted from the rotation effect device 800 in the above-described first light emission control mode, the light can be visually recognized as moving to the right along the left-right direction. Also with this method, the player can be made to grasp as a right-handed suggestion effect.

In addition, unlike the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a in the game area in the present embodiment (see FIG. 31), when the specific winning opening 65a is arranged on the lower right side of the game area, the longitudinal direction of the rotation effect device 800 The posture of the rotation effect device 800 may be changed so as to have a downwardly downward tilted posture, and light may be irradiated in that posture in the above-described first light emission control mode. In this case, since the specific winning opening 65a is arranged at the destination where the light moves, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the ball should be launched toward the specific winning opening 65a.

The rotation effect device 800 is arranged so as to be able to perform one or more rotation operations in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600. The operation speed of the rotation operation is not particularly limited, but for example, when rotating at high speed, by finely controlling the blinking of each arrangement of the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800, a figure or a pattern is formed during rotation. May be configured to be visible (may be configured as a so-called versa writer device).

In FIG. 61, the fact that the elevating plate member 630 is arranged at the lower end of the vertical displacement is detected by the detection device when the detected unit 635 enters the detection groove of the detection device (not shown), thereby rotating. The voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the rotation axis RJ1 of the member 810 is oriented in the front-rear direction.

With this detection as a flag, it may be controlled so that the rotation light emitting effect of the rotating member 810 can be executed. That is, the detection device that detects the moving end of the elevating plate member 630 can also be used as the detecting device that detects the startable timing of the rotational light emission effect of the rotating member 810.

FIG. 62 is a front view of the operating unit 500. In FIG. 62, for convenience of explanation, the outer shapes of the outer rail 62, the decorative portion 247 of the central configuration unit 240, and the illuminated substrate 251 are schematically illustrated, and the inside of the decorative portion 247 and the illuminated substrate 251 is painted white. It is illustrated in the state of being.
In FIG. 62, the outline of the afterimage in the state where the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is rotating at high speed in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The speed of high-speed rotation of the rotating member 810 is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the back side is difficult to see due to the afterimage, or the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the back side can be visually recognized through the position where the rotating member 810 is not arranged, although the afterimage is generated.

In FIG. 62, as a light effect (rotational light emission effect) of the rotation effect device 800, the rotating member 810 is rotated at a rotation speed so that the configuration on the back side is difficult to see due to an afterimage, and is controlled to be visible during rotation. An example of a figure (a large arrow pointing to the right) is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 62, in order to facilitate understanding, the possible arrangement of the rotating member 810 is shown with an angle shift of 45 degrees, but in reality, only an afterimage can be seen, and the outer shape of the rotating member 810 is clarified. It rotates at a rotation speed that makes it difficult to see. By making the figure visible as shown in FIG. 62, the player can be notified (it is possible to grasp that it is the timing to hit right).

A specific method of implementing the rotary light emission effect will be described. Inside the rotating member 810, a plurality of LEDs arranged so as to allow light to travel toward the front side via the arch-shaped transmitting member 814 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810. Therefore, the diameter of the locus (circular path) in which the LED moves when the rotating member 810 is rotated around the rotating shaft RJ1 differs depending on the distance from the rotating shaft RJ1.

In FIG. 62, the arrangement of the moving LEDs accompanying the high-speed rotation of the rotating member 810 is different depending on whether it is inside or outside the figure to be displayed (in FIG. 62, the arrow pointing to the right). By switching the LED on and off, the afterimage of the light visually recognized through the arch-shaped transmitting member 814 is integrally visually recognized, so that the player can visually recognize a specific figure (in FIG. 62, an arrow pointing to the right). ..

Since the displayed figure can be changed in various ways by switching the on / off control timing of each LED in response to the rotation of the rotating member 810, the degree of freedom in producing a light emitting effect using the rotating member 810 is improved. be able to.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the rotation effect device 800 can be used to execute a notification effect (right-handed suggestion effect) for the same purpose in various modes. That is, in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, it can be executed in a mode of irradiating the outer rail 62 with light, and in the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600, it is executed in both a mode in which the rotation effect device 800 is not rotated or a mode in which the rotation effect device 800 is rotated. can do.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect as compared with the case where the variation of the notification effect is small (for example, one). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed suggestion notification effect has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects are exemplified. For example, it may be a notification effect that suggests that the direction of the light and the direction of the arrow are switched alternately left and right to switch the firing of the ball alternately left and right, or the direction of the left and the direction of the arrow are set to the left to hit left. A notification effect suggesting that the device should be returned may be performed.

Further, for example, by performing the light emitting effect so as to display the arc shape concentric with the outer rail 62 during the high-speed rotation in the rotational light emitting effect in the overhanging state, the outer rail 62 is similarly to the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state. It is possible to continue the light emitting effect according to the shape of the above even in the overhanging state. As a result, it is possible to make the light emission effect consistent.

As shown in FIG. 62, the rotation effect device 800 is capable of rotating at high speed in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, but the rotation light emission effect is based on the premise that the rotation axis of the rotation effect device 800 is maintained. Since it is designed, the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the rotation effect device 800 is supported so as not to be displaced by a load generated in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis due to high-speed rotation.

First, the regulation of the displacement of the rotation effect device 800 in the left-right direction will be described. The light emitting operation effect unit 700 is held by connecting the connected holes 764 of the intermediate connecting member 760 to the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680, and the lower right of the pair of left and right connected holes 764 is connected. Only one is formed as a substantially circular support hole 764b instead of an elongated hole, and the other is formed as an elongated hole 764a.

Here, by making the connected hole 764 to which the fastening portion 682 is connected a long hole 764a, it is possible to allow the vertical displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is displaced in the vertical direction. (See FIG. 39). On the other hand, if only the elongated holes 764a are configured, the rotation effect device 800 may be misaligned in the left-right direction when the rotation effect device 800 rotates at high speed.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by making at least one hole a support hole 764b, the movement of the fastening portion 682 in the left-right direction can be restricted by the support hole 764b, so that the rotation effect is produced in the rotation light emission effect. Even if the device 800 rotates at high speed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the rotation effect device 800 in the left-right direction.

63 (a) to 63 (c) are schematic front views of the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680, the elongated hole 764a of the connected hole 764, and the support hole 764b. In FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c), the longitudinal direction (horizontal width direction) of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is schematically illustrated as a schematic straight line 700L.

That is, FIG. 63 (a) illustrates a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is maintained in a horizontal posture because the schematic straight line 700L is arranged along the left-right direction, and FIG. 63 (b) shows a schematic. Since the straight line 700L is tilted to the upper left, the state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted is shown at the maximum allowable tilt angle. In FIG. 63 (c), the schematic straight line 700L is tilted to the upper right. Therefore, the state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted is shown at the maximum allowable tilt angle. The state shown in FIG. 63 (a) corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, and the state shown in FIG. 63 (c) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 39.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c), the inclination of the schematic straight line 700L is caused by the rotational displacement with the support hole 764b as a fulcrum. FIG. 63 (b) shows a position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front-rear ring member 689 abuts on the left end portion of the elongated hole 764a arranged in the upper left of the drawing, and a schematic straight line 700L (light emitting operation effect unit) up to this state. Rotation (corresponding to 700) (rotation in the front clockwise direction) is allowed.

FIG. 63 (c) shows a position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front-rear ring member 689 abuts on the right end portion of the elongated hole 764a arranged in the upper right of the drawing, and a schematic straight line 700L (light emitting operation effect unit) up to this state. Rotation (corresponding to 700) (rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front) is allowed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where the support holes 764b are adopted at a plurality of positions, the displacement in the straight line UD71 direction along the vertical direction of the fastening portions 682 arranged on the left and right can be allowed. Therefore, in a configuration in which the elevating operation of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is executed by simultaneously driving the drive motors 648 arranged on the left and right sides, the operation timings of the drive motors 648 are deviated and the rotation speed varies. Can be tolerated.

The rotation of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b moves up and down when the opening direction of the support hole 764b is the front-rear direction (retracted state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600) as shown in FIG. It is allowed as a displacement in the moving direction of the plate member 630 (direction along the straight line UD71, vertical direction).

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted and displaced so that the opening direction of the support hole 764b is substantially the vertical direction (in the present embodiment, the angle with respect to the vertical direction is 5 degrees, that is, the internal operation. In the overhanging state of the unit 600), the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is a direction along a plane substantially orthogonal to the straight line UD71 (in the present embodiment, the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is (Direction along a plane of 5 degrees) and intersects the straight line UD71 at a substantially right angle.

The elevating plate member 630 is guided so as to be displaced in the straight line UD71 direction by the elongated hole 612 (see FIG. 49), while the displacement in the front-rear direction is restricted, so that the displacement in the front-rear direction of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is suppressed. Has been done. Therefore, when the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is along a plane substantially orthogonal to the straight line UD71, the allowable rotation width of the schematic straight line 700L is suppressed.

That is, even under the condition that the elongated hole 764a is formed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 with respect to the elevating plate member 630 in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600.

In this case, as described above, by controlling the rotation light emitting effect in which the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed to be executed in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the arrangement of the rotating shaft RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is rotated light emitting. It is possible to prevent the displacement during the production. As a result, it is possible to omit the arrangement of another member for fixing the arrangement of the rotation shaft RJ1 of the rotation member 810.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the support hole 764b is arranged on the opposite side of the rotating member 810 (rear side in the state of FIG. 62), it is compared with the case where the support hole 764b is arranged on the side close to the rotating member 810. Therefore, it is possible to easily limit the misalignment caused by the rotation of the rotating member 810 (the misalignment caused on the front side of the light emitting operation effect unit 700).

When the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted and displaced, the load in the rotational direction causes a load on the intermediate connecting member 760 in the direction away from the displacement member 680 (the direction in which the fastening portion 682 (see FIG. 50) projects) (FIG. 53). Therefore, without countermeasures, the fastening portion 682 may be overloaded and damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by setting the posture in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is slightly tilted (see FIG. 55) as the initial posture, the intermediate connecting member 760 is moved to the lower edge side of the displacement member 680 before the tilt displacement. It is urged in the approaching direction. That is, since the intermediate connecting member 760 is arranged close to the displacement member 680 on the side close to the tubular portion 684 (see FIG. 50 (a)) as the rotation axis of the displacement member 680, the displacement member with respect to the intermediate connecting member 760. The load generated in the direction away from the 680 can be easily generated as the load in the rotational direction of the displacement member 680, and the load applied to the fastening portion 682 can be reduced.

Next, regulation of vertical displacement of the rotation effect device 800 will be described. In the present embodiment, the vertical displacement of the contact plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 can be regulated by the resistance generator 650, and the regulation can be enforced in the overhanged state of the internal operation unit 600. Will be done.

64 to 66 are cross-sectional views of the operating unit 500 along the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 36. The LXIV-LXIV line is set as a line passing through the center of the plate thickness of the contacted plate 638 (see FIG. 49) of the elevating plate member 630. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled state are shown in FIGS. 64 to 66.

FIG. 64 shows the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, FIG. 65 shows the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 66 shows the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600.

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 66, the state in which the solenoid 651 is not energized and the solenoid 651 is not excited is shown. In addition, in FIG. 65, for reference, a state in which the solenoid 651 is energized and the solenoid 651 is excited is partially cut out and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 66, when the solenoid 651 is not excited, the front-rear displacement member 653 of the resistance generator 650 is located on the front side and enters the moving path of the contacted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630. ..

The upper and lower side surfaces of the contacted plate 638 and the upper and lower side surfaces of the front-rear displacement member 653 are formed in a plane shape orthogonal to the vertical direction. As a result, the moving direction (vertical direction) of the contacted plate 638 can be matched with the direction of the load received by the contacted plate 638 from the upper and lower side surfaces of the front-rear displacement member 653 in the moving direction.

Therefore, since the load applied to the front-rear displacement member 653 from the contacted plate 638 does not have a component toward the rear, it is possible to prevent the front-rear displacement member 653 from being pushed out to the back surface side. Therefore, the state in which the front-rear displacement member 653 is located on the front side is maintained.

In the state shown in FIG. 64, the front-rear displacement member 653 comes into contact with the contacted plate 638 in the vertical direction, and functions to prevent the downward displacement of the contacted plate 638. That is, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the elevating plate member 630 can be prevented from being displaced downward by its own weight by the front-rear displacement member 653, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the retracted state.

In this embodiment, since the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 47) exerts an upward urging force on the elevating plate member 630, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is applied while the internal operation unit 600 is retracted. By designing the internal operation unit 600 to be sufficiently large in size for maintenance, it is possible to maintain the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state without operating the front-rear displacement member 653.

On the other hand, in this case, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 becomes large, and the driving force generated in the drive motor 648 for downward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 becomes large. Therefore, the drive motor 648 can be increased in size. May be needed. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the internal operation unit 600 is maintained in the retracted state by the front-rear displacement member 653 as in the present embodiment, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 can be reduced as an auxiliary one. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the drive motor 648.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the front-rear displacement member 653 comes into contact with the contacted plate 638 in the vertical direction, and functions to prevent the ascending displacement of the contacted plate 638. That is, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the elevating plate member 630 can be prevented from being displaced upward by the front-rear displacement member 653, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the overhanged state.

As the load for ascending and displacementing the elevating plate member 630, a load due to inertia during the rotation light emission effect of the rotation effect device 800 (see FIG. 62) is assumed. That is, when the rotation effect device 800 rotates at high speed, the rotation effect device 800 may be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, but the vertical displacement can be prevented by the front-rear displacement member 653.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the front-rear displacement member 653 not only lowers the elevating plate member 630 in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, but also ascends the elevating plate member 630 in the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600. Can also be prevented.

In the state shown in FIG. 65, the elevating plate member 630 is downwardly displaced while the solenoid 651 is energized and excited (see the cutout range in FIG. 65), and then the solenoid 651 is de-energized. Corresponds to the state of.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the solenoid 651 is excited, the front-rear displacement member 653 retracts from the displacement locus of the contacted plate 638, so that the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 is allowed. Even if the solenoid 651 is in a non-excited state during the vertical displacement of the plate member 630, the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 is not immediately regulated, and the contacted plate 638 is in front of the front-rear displacement member 653. The vertical displacement can be continued while sliding on the side surface.

In other words, as the mode of the load that the elevating plate member 630 receives during the vertical displacement, the front-rear displacement member 653 does not come into contact with the contacted plate 638, so that the load from the front-rear displacement member 653 is not received, and the front-rear displacement member. It is possible to configure a mode in which frictional force is received by contacting with 653, and these can be switched depending on whether or not the solenoid 651 is energized.

The shape of the front side surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 that comes into contact with the contacted plate 638 is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the planar shape that is orthogonal to the front-rear direction over the pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614. The shape of the curved surface is curved so as to escape from the contacted plate 638 on the upper and lower outer sides of the guide protrusion 614.

As a result, the vertical width of the contact surface with the contacted plate 638 having a planar shape whose back surface side surface is orthogonal to the front-rear direction can be widened, and the contact area can be secured. Therefore, from the front-rear displacement member 653. The frictional force received by the elevating plate member 630 can be increased, and the degree of braking of the elevating plate member 630 can be increased in both the vertical and vertical directions.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the elevating plate member 630 in the vertical displacement can be braked (or stopped) by the front-rear displacement member 653. That is, the front-rear displacement member 653 is a member for maintaining the arrangement of the elevating plate member 630 at the upper and lower ends (the retracted state and the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600) and for braking the elevating plate member 630 during displacement. It can also be used as a member.

When the driving force is transmitted to the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 via the transmission gear 649 meshed with each other, as described above, the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 is urged rearward by its own weight. As a result, the meshing state of the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 is optimized, and the transmission efficiency of the driving force is improved.

On the other hand, when braking the elevating plate member 630, the load applied from the front-rear displacement member 653 to the contacted plate 638 is a load toward the front side, and acts to separate the rack gear 634 from the transmission gear 649.

Therefore, when the front-rear displacement member 653 comes into contact with the contact plate 638, not only the effect of deceleration due to being braked by the frictional force generated at the contact position but also the meshing state of the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 is exhibited. The effect of deceleration can be produced by making it worse (lowering the degree of meshing and making the transmission efficiency of the driving force worse). As a result, the elevating plate member 630 can be efficiently braked (decelerated).

An example of energization switching control of the solenoid 651 will be described. The description will be described with reference to the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600. First, the solenoid 651 is energized before the drive motor 648 is started to be driven, and the front-rear displacement member 653 is retracted from the displacement locus of the contacted plate 638.

As a result, the elevating plate member 630 can be displaced in the vertical direction, so that the drive motor 648 is started to be driven and the internal operation unit 600 is displaced downward toward the overhanging state. By releasing the energization of the solenoid 651 in the state before the overhang state (for example, the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the front-rear displacement member 653 is pressed against the contact plate 638 (see FIG. 65). ), The lifting plate member 630 can be braked by the frictional force.

When the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 is reached in this state, the contacted plate 638 is arranged below the displacement locus of the front-rear displacement member 653, so that the front-rear displacement member 653 is fronted by the return spring of the solenoid 651. Displace to the side position (see FIG. 66).

Therefore, the action given to the contacted plate 638 by the front-rear displacement member 653 can be smoothly changed from braking to position regulation without switching whether or not the solenoid 651 is energized.

On the other hand, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced ascending from the overhanging state, the front-rear displacement member 653 is brought into contact with the contact plate by maintaining the energization of the solenoid 651 during the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630. The state of not contacting 638 can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent frictional resistance between the front-rear displacement member 653 and the contacted plate 638, so that the driving force required for the ascending displacement of the elevating plate member 630 can be reduced, and the driving force can be reduced. The size of the motor 648 can be reduced.

It will be described that the mode of the rotation operation of the rotation effect device 800 changes in response to the change of the state of the internal operation unit 600. In the present embodiment, the posture of the rotation effect device 800 changes as the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes in the forward rotation direction or the backward rotation direction, but the rotation operation (rotation angle) allowed for each posture is determined. Change.

67 to 69 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the LXVII-LXVII line of FIG. 36. The LXVII-LXVII line corresponds to a line passing through the center of the width dimension of the tubular member 695 (see FIG. 37) of the rotary posture assisting member 690. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled state are shown in FIGS. 67 to 69.

FIG. 67 shows the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b) show an intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600. FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b). ) Shows the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600. That is, in FIGS. 67 to 69, how the internal operation unit 600 changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state through the intermediate state is illustrated in chronological order.

Note that FIGS. 68 (a) and 69 (a) show the rotating member 810 in an appropriate posture in which the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is along the left-right direction, and FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b) show rotation. The state in which the front end portion of the member 810 in the drawing reaches the allowable end of movement toward the back surface is shown.

That is, in FIG. 68 (b), a state in which the end portion of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 is shown (in FIG. 68 (b), it is shown as non-contacting). In FIG. 69 (b), the end portion of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the tubular member 695 of the rotating posture assisting member 690, which is in contact with the right side of the illustrated cross section (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 68 (b)). The state of contact is shown (in FIG. 69 (b), it is shown as non-contact, but it is in contact on the right side of the illustrated cross section (on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 69 (b))). ..

In the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 shown in FIG. 67, the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 makes one or more turns (360 degrees or more) in the rotation direction RD1 about the rotation axis RJ1 as an example of the rotation light emission effect. It is configured to enable the rotation operation of. That is, the decorative portion 247 or the like arranged on the center frame 86 is arranged at a position where it does not enter the operation locus of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800.

In FIG. 68, since the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 is determined by the rotating member 810. It is limited to the angle until it is displaced in the rotation direction RD1 and comes into contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 68 (b)).

Basically, the posture of the rotating member 810 is controlled so that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is along the left-right direction before the state changes from the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 to the intermediate state. (Controlled to an appropriate posture), and then controlled to change the state toward the intermediate state, the possibility of collision between the rotating member 810 and the bottom wall portion 511 is low.

In the present embodiment, even if the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 collides with the bottom wall portion 511 due to erroneous control, the rotating member 810 bottoms above the upper edge of the opening 511a of the bottom wall portion 511. Since it is arranged so as to collide with the wall portion 511, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 810 collides with the third symbol display device 81.

In FIG. 69, since the tubular member 695 of the rotation posture assisting member 690 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotation member 810 of the rotation effect device 800, the rotatable angle of the rotation member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is determined by the rotation member. The angle is limited until the 810 is displaced in the rotation direction RD1 and comes into contact with the tubular member 695. That is, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is smaller in the retracted state than in the intermediate state (see FIG. 68 (b)) (see FIG. 69 (b)).

In the present embodiment, when the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced until it comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, the state change continues until the internal operating unit 600 is retracted. However, in the process of the state change (upward displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700), the rotating member 810 abuts on the tubular member 695 and is pushed forward, so that the posture difference from the proper posture of the rotating member 810 is increased. The posture of the rotating member 810 is modified so as to be smaller.

Since the rotating member 810 has a symmetrical shape in a proper posture (see FIG. 61) and the tubular member 695 is arranged at a symmetrical position, it is assumed that the posture difference of the rotating member 810 occurs between the left and right sides. However, the posture of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the posture difference from the proper posture of the rotating member 810 is small (regardless of which rotation direction is generated around the rotating shaft RJ1).

Since the rotating member 810 is rotating around the rotating shaft RJ1, the rotating member 810 is displaced to the back side and is in contact with the tubular member 695 (one side on the left and right, see FIG. 69) on the opposite side (left and right, etc.). On the side), the rotating member 810 comes close to the base plate 60. If the posture deviation from the proper posture is large, the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60 may rub against each other, causing the rotating member 810 to wear or be damaged by a collision.

On the other hand, when the tubular member 695 functions as described above, the posture of the rotating member 810 changes to the side where the internal operating unit 600 returns to the proper posture in the process of changing the state toward the retracted state. The rotating members 810 on the left and right sides can be displaced in a direction away from the base plate 60. As a result, contact between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60 can be avoided.

As described above, the tubular member 695 is a member that abuts on the rotating member 810 and functions to push the rotating member 810 toward the front side, and is a perfect circle that can be rolled in order to avoid wear of the rotating member 810. It is formed in a tubular shape. That is, the tubular member 695 rotates when it comes into contact with the rotating member 810 so as not to leave scratches on the rotating member 810.

In order to maintain this function, it is preferable to omit the decorative shape as much as possible. However, when the tubular member 695 is visually recognized by the player, the shape is too simple when viewed at the same time as other decorative parts, giving a sense of discomfort. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the tubular member 695 is arranged on the retracted position side (upper side and back side) of the arrangement of the rotating member 810 in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the tubular member 695 It is possible to lower the attention to.

Further, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the tubular member 695 is designed to be arranged on the back side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 36), so that the rotating member 810 provides visibility of the tubular member 695. Can be lowered.

Therefore, while the shape of the tubular member 695 is designed to be the optimum shape for avoiding wear of the rotating member 810, the tubular member 695 can be seen by the player by reducing the visibility of the tubular member 695. The sex can be lowered, and the game can be continued without discomfort.

The light effect made possible by the posture change allowed in the rotating member 810 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 is applied to the outer rail 62, so that the outer rail 62 can emit light.

In addition to this, by changing the posture of the rotating member 810 around the rotating shaft RJ1, one of the rotating tip portions of the rotating member 810 can be displaced to the front side. For example, in FIG. 69B, since the rotational tip portion on the back side (left side) of the paper surface can be moved toward the front side, the left side of the outer rail 62 can be made to emit light brighter and the right side can be made to emit light slightly darker. Further, if the direction of the posture change of the rotating member 810 is reversed, the difference between the left and right light and dark can be reversed.

As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the light emitting intensity of the outer rail 62 for each part. For example, the light emission intensity of the light irradiation from the rotating member 810 was not changed, but the rotating member 810 was repeatedly changed in posture so as to reciprocate in the rotation direction of the center of the rotation axis RJ1 to irradiate the left and right sides of the outer rail 62. The apparent brightness of the light can be switched alternately left and right.

The light effect enabled by the posture change allowed in the rotating member 810 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the posture of the rotating member 810 can be changed at an angle larger than the posture change angle in the retracted state. Therefore, the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 is applied to the outer rail 62, and the arrival position of the light in the effect of causing the outer rail 62 to emit light can be positioned closer to the front side.

As a result, even if the rotating member 810 provided with the light emitting means such as an LED moves away from the outer rail 62, the position where the light is reflected by the outer rail 62 is changed to the front side (player side), so that the outer rail 62 can be used. The change in the intensity of the emitted and reflected light can be made inconspicuous to the player.

Further, the reachable range of the light is not limited to the outer rail 62, and the light is also applied to a portion of the upper connecting member 270 such as the sixth overhanging portion 277 (see FIG. 26) which is arranged away from the outer rail 62. Can be reached.

By swinging the rotating member 810 around the rotating shaft RJ1 arranged at the center position on the left and right, the longitudinal end portions arranged on the left and right outer sides can be arranged forward one side at a time. It is possible to assist the light effect in a range (left and right outer positions) that is difficult to cover with the illuminated substrate 251 designed to be arranged at the center position on the left and right from the viewpoint of strength.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the illumination board 251 is limited, the effect performance of the light effect in the place where the illumination board 251 is not arranged can be obtained by the rotation effect device 800 arranged in the operation unit 500. It can be improved by the light emission effect.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In the first embodiment, the case where the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging the game ball from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 has been described. However, in the distribution unit 3980 of the third embodiment, the discharge path of the ball is formed on the front side of the bulging portion 3982 forming the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 70 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 3980 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 70 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 3980. As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the distribution unit 3980 is configured so that the sphere can be discharged to the front side on the upstream side of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the front base 3891 of the distribution unit 3980 has a pair of openings 3982k formed through the bulging portion 982 and a ball that has passed through the openings 3892k and is discharged to the front side of the bulging portion 982 in the left direction. It is provided with a discharge gutter (3982 l) that allows the flow down and discharges to the back side.

The opening 3982k is arranged on the front side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed through a rectangular shape having a size that allows a ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass through. ..

The left and right long portions of the discharge gutter 3982l are inclined downward to the left, and the front and rear long portions formed at the left end thereof are inclined downward to the rear. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the opening 3982k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and got on the discharge gutter 3892l is flowed to the left along the discharge gutter 3982l, and the flow direction is switched to the rear side at the left end position. It is swept backwards.

In the present embodiment, the discharge gutter 3982l is configured to receive balls on both sides of the pair of openings 3892k to reduce the component cost by reducing the number of parts, but discharges to each opening 3892k. A gutter 3982 liter may be provided. In this case, the discharge gutter 3982l arranged on the front side of the left opening 3892k is inclined downward to the left, and the discharge gutter 3982l arranged on the front side of the right opening 3982k is lowered toward the right. By configuring it to be inclined, the length of the discharge gutter 3982l alone can be shortened.

The appearance of the sphere that has passed through the inflow port 982d will be described. The front base 3981 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and a sphere that passes through the inflow port 982d and flows down the back side of the bulge 982 is visually recognized through the bulge 982. can do.

On the other hand, since the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through which the ball flows down are formed so as to extend to the rear of the electric accessory 140a, the electric accessory 140a serves as a shield in the range behind the electric accessory 140a. It acts and the visibility of the sphere deteriorates.

If the difference in whether or not the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 occurs in the flow direction of the ball in the range behind the electric accessory 140a, it is necessary to pay attention to the ball in the range with poor visibility, and the player May give a feeling of fatigue.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the ball deviating from the path toward the detection device SE3 flows to the front side through the opening 3892k, not only the ball approaches from the player's point of view, but also the flow to the front side is electric. Since it occurs above the range hidden by the accessory 140a, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the sphere that has passed through the inflow port 982d and that flows in the direction deviating from the detection device SE3.

Thereby, when the lottery of the special symbol does not occur even though the ball has passed through the inflow port 982d, it can be easily grasped that the result is that the ball deviates from the detection device SE3.

Other modifications in shape of the distribution unit 3980 will be described. In the present embodiment, instead of forming the opening 3892k to secure the discharge path of the sphere, in the back base 3985, the formation of the openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) is omitted from the back base 985 in the first embodiment. Correspondingly, the left-right width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is shortened.

As a result, the left-right width of the distribution unit 3980 can be shortened, so that the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 can be reduced, so that the thick portion (nails) of the base plate 60 can be reduced. The area of the plantable part) can be secured. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails can be improved.

Further, since the nails can be arranged in the vicinity of the electric accessory 140a, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails for guiding the ball to the electric accessory 140a can be improved.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. In the first embodiment, the case where the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging the game ball from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 has been described. However, in the distribution unit 4980 of the fourth embodiment, the discharge path of the ball is formed on the rear side of the back surface base 4985 forming the back side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 71 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 4980 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 71 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 4980. As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the distribution unit 4980 is configured so that the sphere can be discharged to the back side on the upstream side of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the back base 4985 of the distribution unit 4980 has an opening 4985k formed through a pair of left and right, and a ball that has passed through the opening 4985k and is discharged to the back side of the back base 4985 to flow down to the left side. It is provided with 4985 liters of a discharge gutter for discharging.

The opening 4985k is arranged on the back side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed through a rectangular shape having a size that allows a ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass through. ..

The left and right long portions of the discharge gutter 4985l are inclined downward to the left, and the long front and rear portions formed at the left end thereof are inclined downward to the rear. Therefore, the ball passing through the opening 4985k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and riding on the discharge gutter 4985l is flowed to the left along the discharge gutter 4985l, and the flow direction is switched to the rear side at the left end position. It is swept backwards.

The drain gutter 4985l is arranged on the back side of the back base 4985 and is arranged away from the player, but the front base 981 and the back base 4985 arranged on the front side thereof are formed of a translucent resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball rolling the discharge gutter 4985 l and the discharge gutter 4985 l through the front base 981 and the back base 4985.

In the present embodiment, the discharge gutter 4985l is configured to receive balls on both sides of the pair of openings 4985k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the component cost. However, the discharge gutters are discharged to each opening 4985k. A gutter of 4985 liters may be provided. In this case, if the ball is flown at least to the rear side from each opening 4985 l, the ball can be discharged, so that it is not necessary to form the discharge gutter 4985 l long to the left and right. Thereby, the shape of the discharge gutter 4985 l can be simplified.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment in which the discharge gutter 4985 l is formed on the back side, it is possible to prevent the discharge gutter 4985 l from being conspicuous. Therefore, the design of the base plate 60 in the vicinity of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5) It is possible to avoid the influence of 4985 l of the discharge gutter. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the decorative pattern of the base plate 60 can be improved.

Other modifications in shape of the distribution unit 4980 will be described. In the present embodiment, instead of forming the opening 4985k to secure the discharge path of the ball, in the back base 4985, the formation of the openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) is omitted from the back base 985 in the first embodiment. Correspondingly, the left-right width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is shortened.

As a result, the left-right width of the distribution unit 4980 can be shortened, so that the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 can be reduced, so that the thick portion (nails) of the base plate 60 can be reduced. The area of the plantable part) can be secured. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails can be improved.

Further, since the nails can be arranged in the vicinity of the electric accessory 140a, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails for guiding the ball to the electric accessory 140a can be improved.

According to the configuration in which the opening 4985k is formed on the back side, the vertical arrangement of the opening 4985k is arbitrarily designed regardless of the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a, as compared with the configuration in which the opening is formed on the front side (see FIG. 70). It will be possible. Therefore, the probability that the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will be detected by the detection device SE3 (passing through the detection hole SE1a) without deviating can be adjusted from the shape.

For example, when the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be the same width as the diameter of the sphere, most of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 do not pass through the opening 4985k, and the detection device SE3 detects. It will pass through the hole SE1a.

On the other hand, when the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, about 20% of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 pass through the opening 4985k, and the rest. About 80% of the above passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. That is, the probability of being detected by the detection device SE3 can be adjusted by arbitrarily designing the vertical width of the opening 4985k.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the second embodiment, the case where the sphere reaching the upper connecting member 270 is smoothly guided to the left and right has been described, but in the upper connecting member 5270 of the fifth embodiment, the smooth guidance of the sphere in the left-right direction is suppressed. Various ingenuity is given. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 73 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 on the line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 72.

As shown in FIG. 72, the upper component member 5241 constituting the center frame 86 includes left and right projecting portions 5246 formed so as to project from the strip-shaped frame portion 245 toward the second overhanging portion 5273. The second overhanging portion 5273 includes a deceleration protruding portion 5273a that protrudes from the lower end portion toward the left and right positions of the deceleration protruding portion 5246.

According to the present embodiment, a ball flowing down between the pair of left and right first overhangs 272 and between the first overhang 272 and the second overhang 5273 reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 and is left and right. When it rolls to, it flows down so as to be ejected from the left and right protrusions 5246 to the left and right outside, collides with the deceleration protrusion 5273a, and is decelerated.

That is, the momentum of launch is so great that it reaches between the pair of left and right first overhangs 272 and between the first overhang 272 and the second overhang 5273, and the sphere has a large kinetic energy. The speed can be reduced by collision with the deceleration protrusion 5273a.

The overlapping width (vertical dimension) related to the contact of the ball with the deceleration projecting portion 5273a differs depending on the magnitude of the speed of the ball when passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246. That is, the ball passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246 at high speed contacts the deceleration projecting portion 5273a in a wide range at a higher position, while the ball having a slow speed when passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246 is decelerated and projecting. It is displaced to a lower position from before the contact with the portion 5273a, and is kept in contact with the deceleration protrusion portion 5273a to the extent that it rubs against it.

Therefore, when the speed when passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246 is high, a large deceleration action can be expected, while when the speed when passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246 is slow, the deceleration action is suppressed. It is possible to prevent the ball from staying.

According to the present embodiment, a ball that is launched along the launch path HL51 with a strong firing force and reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 on the upstream side (left and right inside) of the left and right projecting portions 5246 is in the process of rolling. While the deceleration action is generated by contacting the deceleration protrusion 5273a, the ball is launched along the launch path HL52 with a weak firing force and reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 on the downstream side (left and right outside) of the left and right protrusion 5246. Is configured so that the deceleration action by the deceleration protrusion 5273a does not occur.

That is, the ball launched with a strong firing force reaching the center of the left and right of the game area is decelerated by the deceleration projecting portion 5273a, and is launched with a weak firing force reaching the left and right outside (left side) of the game area. The ball is not decelerated by the deceleration projecting portion 5273a. As a result, it is possible to reduce the speed difference of the flow of the sphere (flow when passing through the lower end side of the strip-shaped frame portion 245) due to the magnitude of the firing force (the magnitude of the kinetic energy).

As shown in FIG. 73, an opening 5274a is formed through the upper surface of the third overhanging portion 5274 with a size that allows the ball to pass through. The opening 5274a is formed with a left-right width of about the diameter of the sphere, and jointly forms a passage of the sphere with the recessed portion 5217a formed in such a manner that the plate-shaped portion 271 is cut out. The recessed portion 5217a makes it easier to guide the ball toward the opening 5274a.

A through-passage 5060d is formed through the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction as a passage for a ball that has entered the opening 5274a. On the back side of the base plate 60, a flow path component member 5295 having a guide flow path 5295a that receives the ball that has passed through the gangway 5060d and guides the ball downward to the left and right is fastened and fixed.

The guide flow path 5295a is connected to the flow path rear component portion 266 (see FIG. 25) as a member for sending a sphere to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263 so as to communicate the internal path. As a result, the path of the sphere can be configured so that the sphere that has flowed to the back surface side of the base plate 60 reappears on the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263.

When the ball rolling through the strip-shaped extension portion 263 (see FIG. 24) passes through the central rear inclined portion 263a and is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c, the ball falls toward the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 18). Due to such an arrangement relationship, the possibility that the ball rolling on the strip-shaped extension portion 263 will enter the first winning opening 64 is remarkably increased.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the sphere that has flowed to the back side of the base plate 60 through the opening 5274a. In addition, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to adjust the firing force so that the ball passes through the opening 5274a.

The subsequent flow path of the sphere that has flowed to the back side is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a through hole may be formed in the base plate 60 so as to return to the front side of the base plate 60 at the left and right outer positions of the flow path front component 265 (see FIG. 18), or the left component 450 or the right. The flow path may be extended downward so as to flow down behind the component member 470.

When the flow path extends downward so as to flow down behind the left component 450 and the right component 470, the flow path is at least a part of the outer dropout path FL2 (see FIG. 31) in front view. By arranging them so as to overlap each other, it is possible to make the balls flowing down the back surface side of the base plate 60 appear as if they flow down toward the first ball guide portion 457. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball flowing down the back surface side of the base plate 60.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. In the second embodiment, the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13. ..
The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

74 and 75 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 6010 according to the sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LV-LV line of FIG. 36. FIG. 74 shows a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, and FIG. 75 shows a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the pachinko machine 6010 is provided with a front frame 6014 on the front side of the game board 13, and the first glass unit 6016a is in a state where the front frame 6014 is locked to the outer frame 11. It is configured to block the front side of the game area.

The front frame 6014 includes the above-mentioned first glass unit 6016a and a second glass unit 6016b which is arranged in an inclined posture so as to incline toward the front side and is arranged closer to the front side.

In the first glass unit 6016a, a plate-shaped glass portion is formed on the game region side and an opening 6016c is formed through the opposite side of the center frame 86 as a reference. That is, since the front surface of the center frame 86 of the first glass unit 6016a is open, the third symbol display device arranged inside the center frame 86 and the center frame 86 is arranged so that the glass unit 6016a does not block the view in the front view. The visibility of the display of 81 can be improved.

The second glass unit 6016b is fixed so as to be fitted inside the support portion 6014a forming the periphery of the front frame 6014. Since the second glass unit 6016b isolates the player from the operating unit 500, even when the opening 6016c is formed in the first glass unit 6016a, the situation where the player touches the operating unit 500 is avoided. be able to.

The support portion 6014a is formed of an impermeable resin material and a metal material, and functions to hide a configuration arranged on the back surface side thereof.

The light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is the same as the light emitting operation effect unit 700 described in the second embodiment, except that the arrangement is different. That is, the rotation effect device 800 is rotatably arranged in the light emitting operation effect unit 6700.

Inside the front frame 6014, the first elongated hole 6672, the second elongated hole 6673, and the curved elongated hole having the same shape as the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674 described in the second embodiment The 6674 is formed in a state of being inclined by about 25 degrees in the forward rotation direction with respect to the posture in the second embodiment.

The change in the appearance of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 due to the change in the arrangement will be described.
As shown in FIG. 74, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, the central decorative member 751 is barely visible, and the entire image of the rotating member 810 is blindfolded by the support portion 6014a of the front frame 6014. That is, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, the visibility of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is lowered.

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is downwardly displaced toward the diagonally rearward direction, the portion hidden by the support portion 6014a is arranged behind the second glass unit 6016b, and the entire image of the rotating member 810 can be visually recognized. Further, even when the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed around the rotating shaft RJ1 to execute the rotational light emitting effect, the player can visually recognize the rotating tip side of the rotating member 810. That is, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position, the visibility of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is improved.

As shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 75, the rotation locus of the rotating member 810 enters within the thickness dimension of the first glass unit 6014a, but an opening 6016c is formed at the entered position. , The contact between the first glass unit 6014a and the rotating member 810 is avoided. That is, the opening 6016c functions to improve the degree of freedom in arrangement of the rotating member 810 by avoiding contact with the rotating member 810.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, while the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The operation mode of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is as described above in the second embodiment.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position or emit light as an effect operation in which the movable unit projects to the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. The operation effect unit 700 may be in an overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600.

Further, the rotation light emission effect of the rotation effect device 800 may be executed by the rotation member 810 of the light emission operation effect unit 700, or may be executed by the rotation member 810 of the light emission operation effect unit 6700. As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the execution position of the rotary light emission effect can be improved, and the execution variation (either the light emission operation effect unit 700 or the light emission operation effect unit 6700 executes the rotary light emission effect or rotates alternately. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing (variations such as whether to execute a light emitting effect or to execute a rotating light emitting effect at the same time).

Although the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is also arranged in the rear case 510 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 may not be arranged inside the rear case 510.

In this case, since the field of view is not obstructed by the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the upper edge portion of the third symbol display device 81 is pulled upward to display the third symbol display device 81. The area of the area can be increased. Further, since the front-rear width of the rear case 510 required for accommodating the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be shortened, the front-rear distance between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 can be shortened. The visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the second embodiment, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided by the linear second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 formed to be curved, so that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 moves in parallel. Although the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is switched to the rotating state about the central axis J1 of the tubular portion 684 has been described, the guide portion 7673 of the seventh embodiment extends linearly along the vertical direction. It is formed in a ridge shape. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

76 (a) to 76 (c) are schematic side views of the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 that schematically show the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 in the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 76 (a) shows the arrangement of the configuration at the height of the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state, and FIG. 76 (b) shows the arrangement of the configuration at the height of the internal operation unit 600 in the intermediate state. In FIG. 76 (c), the arrangement of the configuration at the height of the internal operation unit 600 in the overhang state is illustrated.

The arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the overhanging state is such that the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is displaced rearward, so that the overhanging of the internal operation unit 600 described in the second embodiment can be seen. It shifts backward from the arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the state.

The guide portion 7673 is formed along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 673 described in the second embodiment, and is formed on the left and right inner side surfaces of the outer member 610 as a plate-shaped portion extending further downward. , The metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged so as to regulate the displacement in the front-rear direction. The L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed with a recessed portion 7674a having a width capable of receiving the tubular portion 684 from the lower end portion of the curved elongated hole 674 described in the second embodiment toward the rear.

The downward displacement of the displacement member 680 will be described. The displacement from FIG. 76 (a) to FIG. 76 (b) is a translation performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. In the displacement from FIG. 76 (b) to FIG. 76 (c), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is rotationally displaced around the tubular portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rotation direction.

At this time, the tubular portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in a manner of entering and retracting into the recessed portion 7674a because the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. That is, during the posture change of the displacement member 680, the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced while the tubular portion 684 is still displaced in the front-rear direction. be able to.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the second embodiment, the case where the second elongated hole 673 for guiding the metal rod-shaped member 686 is extended along the vertical direction has been described, but the second elongated hole 8673 of the eighth embodiment is oriented in the vertical direction. It is extended along the direction of inclination. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

77 (a) to 77 (c) schematically show the second elongated hole 8673, the curved elongated hole 8674, the third elongated hole 8675, the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic side view of the 2nd long hole 8673, the curved long hole 8674, the 3rd long hole 8675, the 1st long hole upper part 8672a and the 1st long hole lower part 8672b.

FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the tubular portion 684 are arranged at the upper end positions of the displacement range, and FIG. 77 (b) shows the metal rod-shaped member 686 curved with the second elongated hole 8673. The state where the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at the connecting position with the elongated hole 8674 is positioned, and FIG. 77 (c) shows the state where the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at the connecting position between the curved elongated hole 8674 and the third elongated hole 8675. Ru.

The first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the second elongated hole 8673 are extended in a direction of descending inclination toward the rear at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. A curved elongated hole 8674 is connected to the lower end of the second elongated hole 8673.

The curved elongated hole 8674 is curved along an arc centered on the central axis J81 of the tubular portion 684 in a state where the tubular portion 684 is arranged at the connecting position between the upper portion of the first elongated hole 8672a and the lower portion of the first elongated hole 8672b. It is extended in shape.

The upper end of the third elongated hole 8675 is connected to the lower end of the curved elongated hole 8674. The first elongated hole lower portion 8672b and the third elongated hole 8675 connected to the lower end portion of the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a are extended in a direction of descending inclination toward the front at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. Will be done.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 is inserted through the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, and the vertical position changes as the elevating plate member 630 moves in the vertical direction. The displacement of the displacement member 680 due to the change in the arrangement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 will be described.

The displacement from FIG. 77 (a) to FIG. 77 (b) is a translation performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. At this time, the displacement direction of the displacement member 680 is not the vertical direction but the direction having the components in the front-rear direction. From the player's point of view, the displacement member 680 seems to be retracted toward the rear while being lowered, so that the size of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 becomes smaller as the light emitting operation effect unit 700 descends and appears. Can be shown for (moving away).

In the displacement from FIG. 77 (b) to FIG. 77 (c), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is rotationally displaced around the tubular portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rotation direction. Along with this, the visible surface of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be switched. In the present embodiment, since the tilt angle is larger than that in the second embodiment, the player can visually recognize the back surface side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 51).

At this time, the tubular portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in a manner of entering and retracting into the recessed portion 7674a because the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. That is, during the posture change of the displacement member 680, the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced while the tubular portion 684 is still displaced in the front-rear direction. be able to.

When the metal rod-shaped member 686 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 77 (c), the displacement member 680 is displaced forward along the third elongated hole 8675. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the displacement member 680 is protruding forward while being lowered.
At this time, the forward overhang can be emphasized by the amount that is once displaced rearward along the second elongated hole 8673.

In the present embodiment, the displacement resistance of the tubular portion 684 is increased in a state where the tubular portion 684 is arranged at the connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b. .. That is, in FIG. 77 (b), the inner surface of the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b that abuts on the rear side portion of the tubular portion 684 is a friction between the other portion of the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b and the inner surface of the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a. It is made of a material with a large coefficient of friction compared to the coefficient.

As a result, the tubular portion 684 can be easily maintained at the connecting position between the upper portion of the first elongated hole 8672a and the lower portion of the first elongated hole 8672b until the metal rod-shaped member 686 reaches the terminal position of the curved elongated hole 8674. ..

The method of maintaining the tubular portion 684 at the connecting position between the upper portion of the first elongated hole 8672a and the lower portion of the first elongated hole 8672b is not limited to adopting a material having a large coefficient of friction, and various aspects are available. Illustrated. For example, the shape of the inner surface of the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a or the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b may be formed from a shape having a large friction coefficient (for example, a textured shape).

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the second embodiment, the case where the elongated hole 764a through which the fastening portion 682 is inserted is long in the left-right direction and short in the vertical direction has been described, but the large-diameter hole 9764a of the ninth embodiment has a cylindrical shape of the ring member 9689b with a flange. It is a circular hole with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the portion 689b1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

78 (a) and 78 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member 9680 and the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa in FIG. 37.

In FIG. 78 (a), the fastening portion 682 faces in a substantially front-rear direction (a direction in which the fastening portion 682 rises and inclines three degrees toward the front), and the upper edge portion of the large-diameter hole 9764a abuts and is supported by the cylindrical portion 689b1. The state is illustrated. In FIG. 78 (b), the posture of the displacement member 9680 is switched to the posture in which the fastening portion 682 faces downward, and the ring member 9689b with a collar attached to the head of the fastening screw B91 fastened to the fastening portion 682 and the light emitting operation effect unit 9700. Is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped ring member 689a sandwiching the large-diameter hole 9764a from both sides and the flanged ring member 9689b differ in the mode of contact with the light emitting operation effect unit 9700.
That is, the plate-shaped ring member 689a comes into contact with the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 at the plate flat surface portion. On the other hand, the flanged ring member 9689b has an inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed 360 degrees from the tip of the flange portion toward the cylindrical portion 689b1 side, and is formed at the end portion of the large diameter hole 9764a over 360 degrees. The chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 is brought into contact with the surface.

In the state shown in FIG. 78 (a) (the state corresponding to the retracted state or the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the fastening portion 682 is inclined in the backward tilting direction, so that the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 moves backward. And comes into contact with the plate-shaped ring member 989a.

Since this contact is a contact on a flat surface, the sliding frictional force with respect to the rotational displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 centered on the fastening portion 682 is reduced, and at least between the large diameter hole 9764a and the cylindrical portion 689b1. The light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be displaced by the amount of the gap. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be allowed.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 78 (b) (corresponding to the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600), the tip of the fastening portion 682 is directed downward, so that the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 sinks downward and has a collar. It comes into contact with the ring member 9689b.

Since this contact is between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed over 360 degrees and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 formed over 360 degrees, the center of the large-diameter hole 9764a coincides with the center of the fastening portion 682. The light emitting operation effect unit 9700 is arranged as described above, and a gap between the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 of the large-diameter hole 9764a and the inclined surface portion 9689b2 of the flanged ring member 9689b in a direction orthogonal to the central axis of the fastening portion 682 is formed. By filling it, the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be restricted (regulated).

Since the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 acts in the direction in which the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 is pressed against the inclined surface portion 9689b2, the degree of limitation of the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be strengthened by utilizing gravity.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of allowable (limitation) of displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be switched according to the change in the posture of the displacement member 9680. Therefore, even when a large-diameter hole 9764a, which is a circular through hole having a simple cross section, is adopted, the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 moves back and forth in a state where the displacement member 9680 is tilted and displaced (see FIG. 78 (b)). It is possible to prevent the displacement in the direction and the left-right direction.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 from being displaced during high-speed rotation of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 62), so that the afterimage display by the rotating member 810 can be advantageously executed.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the second embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 832 detects that the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture and thereby facilitates the tilt displacement of the rotation effect device 800 in the front-rear direction has been described. The rotating member 810 of the above is urged to a proper posture by the posture detecting means 10830. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

79 (a) and 79 (b) are front views of the rotating member 810 and the posture detecting means 10830 according to the tenth embodiment. In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the arrangement of the internal operation unit 600 in the overhanging state is shown, and the outer diameter of the rotating member 810 is shown by an imaginary line and fixed to the rotating member 810. Gear 10815 is illustrated with a solid line. Further, FIG. 79 (b) shows the proper posture of the rotating member 810, and FIG. 79 (a) shows that the rotating member 810 is angularly displaced from the proper posture (displaced by about 15 degrees in the rotation direction about the rotation axis RJ1). The state is shown, and the rotation directions of the gears 10815, 10821, and 10831 toward the state shown in FIG. 79 (b) are shown by arrows.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), in the rotating member 810, the driving force of the drive gear 10821 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 820 is transmitted to the fixed gear 10815 by gear meshing. The fixed gear 10815 is rotatably configured with the detection gear 1083 of the attitude detecting means 10830.

The detection gear 10831 includes a weight portion 10831a formed with a compaction over an angle range of 180 degrees about the rotation axis. In the present embodiment, the weight portion 10831a is fitted with the detection gear 10831 with a metal member, but may be integrally formed from a resin material.

According to this configuration, since the center of gravity of the detection gear 10831 is arranged on the center side of the weight portion 10831a (on the line connecting the rotation axis and the center of the arc), the rotation of the rotating member 810 is different from the proper posture (the posture (). Even when stopped in FIG. 79 (a)), the detection gear 10831 is urged by gravity so that the rotating member 810 can rotate and return to the proper posture.

Therefore, even if the rotating member 810 cannot be accurately stopped in the proper posture as the stopping posture of the drive motor 820 after the rotary light emitting effect is executed in the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600 (see FIG. 61). After that, the rotating member 810 can be returned to the proper posture, so that the accuracy of the posture detection of the rotating member 810 can be relaxed. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the rotation axis RJ1 in the intermediate state and the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 faces the forward tilting direction instead of the vertical direction (see FIGS. 68 and 69). Therefore, the gravitational bias using the weight portion 10831a can be generated regardless of the posture of the rotating member 810 in the forward tilting direction.

As a result, not only the movement mode in which the rotation member 810 is set to the proper posture in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 and then the rotation effect device 800 changes its posture in the rising direction, but also during the rising operation of the rotation effect device 800 and the vertical displacement. It is possible to realize a moving mode in which the rotating member 810 is moved while returning to an appropriate posture.

Further, when the rotation effect device 800 rises up and operates from the posture of FIG. 79 (a) (see the time series of FIGS. 67 to 69), the rotating member 810 receives air resistance on the back side and returns to the proper posture. Can be done. That is, in the present embodiment, since the rotating member 810 has a shape that easily receives air resistance from the side surface in the lateral direction, it is possible to easily return the rotating member 810 to the proper posture when the rotating member 810 moves up.

The side surface of the rotating member 810 on the lateral side may be formed from a narrow shape that is less likely to receive air resistance. In this case, the operating resistance of the rotary light emitting effect of the rotary member 810 can be reduced.
The action of returning the rotating member 810 to the proper posture can be caused by the weight portion 10831a.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the case where the upper connecting member 270 connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is formed with overhanging portions 272 to 277 for distributing the flow path of the sphere has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this.

For example, the portion that distributes the flow path of the sphere may be formed as a recess instead of overhanging. Further, a flow path for guiding the ball may be formed through the recess so that the ball can be guided to another part of the game area.

For example, a member that connects the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is arranged on the lower side of the center frame 86 to guide the ball to any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140. It may be configured to include. Further, for example, the member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be configured such that the through gate 67 is arranged.

Further, the upper connecting member 270 is extended along the surface side of the base plate 60, and a game area is formed between the upper connecting member 270 and the glass unit 16, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front frame 14 may be extended along the back surface side of the glass unit 16 in a closed state, and a game area may be formed between the front frame 14 and the base plate 60. In this case, an overhanging portion may be formed on the base plate 60 side to distribute the flow path of the sphere.

In this case, the fastening position with the base plate 60 is important. For example, if the fastening position is arranged near the inner rail 61 so as not to affect the flow of the ball (lower left of the return ball prevention member 68, etc.). , It is possible to secure a sufficient area for the game area.

In the second embodiment, the case where the upper connecting member 270 is formed from a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the center frame 86 is such that the left side is separated from the inner rail 61 to form a large space with the inner rail 61 in order to secure the flow path of the sphere, while the right side is the sphere with the outer rail 62. When designed to leave a space slightly longer than the diameter of the game (in the case of a general right-handed machine), it is fully assumed that the upper connecting member 270 is formed only on the left side of the game area. It is also possible to design the left and right sides upside down.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which at least one of the base plate 60 or the center frame 86 is arranged on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270, and if the upper connecting member 270 has sufficient rigidity, the upper connecting member It is fully assumed that the 270 has a portion on the back side where neither the base plate 60 nor the center frame 86 is arranged.

Further, the position where the center frame 86 constitutes the thin plate portion 242 and overhangs does not have to be in the center of the left and right. For example, it may be formed on both the left and right sides, or it may be configured so as to project as a thin plate portion 242 at a plurality of positions and mesh with the base plate 60 (entering each other with a gap).

Further, the thin plate portion 242 may be formed so as to occupy most of the left and right width of the upper connecting member 270. In this case, the left-right width in which the illumination board 251 can be arranged can be expanded.

Further, the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 251 is not limited to the upper side of the center frame 86 with respect to the configuration in which the illuminated substrate 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 and fits within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60. For example, if thin plate members such as the upper connecting member 270 that are connected to the front surface of the base plate 60 and form one surface of the game area are formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86, the illuminated substrates are formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86. The 251 can be arranged, and the illumination board 251 is incorporated into the distribution unit 300 and the winning opening component 400 arranged below the base plate 60 so as to be within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60. It may be configured as.

In the second embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 251 is arranged on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 in a form fixed to the base plate 60 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration similar to that of the light emitting effect unit 518 arranged in the rear case 510 (a configuration in which a logo or the like corresponding to the model is formed and the LED of the illumination substrate arranged inside performs the light emitting effect) is on the upper part. It may be arranged behind the connecting member 270 to illuminate the upper connecting member 270 side, or the illumination substrate 251 may be omitted and the light from the rotation effect device 800 passes through the upper connecting member 270. It may be easier for the player to pass.

In the second embodiment, the case where the light from the LED of the ambient light emitting means 251c is applied to the lower edge portion 272a of the first overhanging portion 272 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the LED may be arranged inside the first overhang 272 in front view. In this case, the inside of the first overhanging portion 272 is irradiated by providing a light diffusing process on the concave side of the first overhanging portion 272 or by denting the first overhanging portion 272 in a shape that tapers as it becomes deeper in the recessing direction. The light can be diffused, the visibility of the outer shape of the LED can be lowered, and the visibility of the light emitted from the LED can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the case where the thin plate member 290 is drawn with a pattern, a figure, a character, or a character on the front surface of the plate in a colorful manner has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, light diffusion processing or grain processing may be formed on at least a part of the thin plate member 290, or a shape (for example, a convex lens shape or the like) that penetrates into the recesses of the first overhanging portion 272 and the second overhanging portion 273. , Three-dimensional shape) may form the surface of the thin plate member 290.

In the second embodiment, the holes 291a and 291b formed in the thin plate member 290 form a projecting portion 244b projecting from the center frame 86 side and a projecting portion 279 projecting from the upper connecting member 270. Although the case where the misalignment of the thin plate member 290 is suppressed by accepting the sheet member 290 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the projecting portion inserted into the holes 291a and 291b of the thin plate member 290 may be configured to project from either the center frame 86 or the upper connecting member 270.
Further, the projecting portion 244b and the projecting portion 279 may not be inserted into different holes 291a and 291b, but may be commonly inserted into a single hole formed in the thin plate member 290. As a result, the thin plate member 290 can be positioned, and the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 270 can also be connected.

In the second embodiment, the projecting portion 244b projecting from the center frame 86 side is formed inside the recess on the back surface side of the second overhanging portion 273, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion 244b may be arranged on the back surface side of the plate-shaped portion 271 (so that it is arranged so as to face the plate-shaped portion 271 in the front-rear direction). When the projecting portion 244b is formed inside the recess on the back side of the second projecting portion 273, the second projecting portion 273 functions as a blindfold for the projecting portion 244b.

In the second embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down between the side wall portion 453a and the extension plate portion 455a flows into the first ball guide portion 457 with a probability has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the side wall portion 453a and the extending plate portion 455a are spaced apart from each other and the ball guide portion 457 is provided, and the distribution portion 983 is arranged between them so that one of the two can reliably guide the ball. It may flow into the part 457. That is, the ratio of entering the ball guide unit 457 may be changed depending on which of the two postures of the distribution unit 983 the ball is guided.

In the second embodiment, the case where the tilt guide portion 458 is tilted in one direction (lower right direction) to guide the ball directly to the second ball guide portion 459 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the tilt guide portion 458 may be extended in opposite directions from both the left and right sides of the ball guide portion 457. For example, the tilt guide portion 458 is configured to meander the ball left and right to guide the ball to the left and right. It may be configured to deflect the ball from the second ball guide portion 459 with a certain probability at the turning position of.

Further, for example, the inclination guide unit 458 may be configured to change the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide unit 459 depending on whether the tilt guide unit 458 guides a single ball or a plurality of balls at the same time. good. For example, by displacing the arrangement of the second ball guide portion 459 in the direction closer to the tilt guide portion 458 in the left-right direction than the current state, the ball that has reached the second ball guide portion 459 first is a trailing ball before it flows down. When the player reaches the second ball guide unit 459, the player can easily deviate from the second ball guide unit 459 by blocking the way to the previous ball.

On the contrary, for example, by displacing the arrangement of the second ball guide portion 459 in the left-right direction slightly away from the tilt guide portion 458, the ball is likely to reach the second ball guide portion 459 first. If the trailing ball reaches the second ball guide portion 459 before the ball that is about to fall from the inclination guide portion 458 has completely fallen, it becomes easier to roll on the previous ball and reach the second ball guide portion 459. It is possible to realize the configuration.

If the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide 459 is lower when guiding a single ball, it means that multiple balls enter the second ball guide 459 and the prize balls paid out at one time are excessive. You can avoid the situation. On the other hand, if the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide portion 459 is higher when guiding the plurality of balls, the attention to the vicinity of the tilt guide portion 458 when the plurality of balls reach the tilt guide portion 458 is higher. Can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the case where the tilt guide portion 458 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tilt guide portion 458 may be configured so as to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction. In this case, in the protruding state, the ball can flow into the second ball guide portion 459 as in the second embodiment, while in the retracted state, the ball flowing to the right upstream of the first ball guide portion 457. The rate of reaching the second ball guide portion 459 is reduced. Further, the tilting guide portion 458 is not limited to the case where the tilting guide portion 458 appears and disappears, and the tilting operation may be performed at regular intervals around a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction so that the tilting angle changes.

In the second embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls when entering the second ball guide unit 459 is larger than the number of prize balls when entering the first ball guide unit 457 has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls may be the same, or the quality of profits obtained by the player may be different depending on the number of balls entered.

For example, as a profit, it is possible to obtain the profit of the lottery of the symbol instead of paying out the prize ball, or the profit that the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be selected (variable) by entering the ball before the start of the jackpot game. However, it may be possible to obtain a profit that the hit probability of the symbol after the big hit game changes (increases) by entering the ball during the big hit game. These benefits can be arbitrarily set in the first ball guide unit 457 and the second ball guide unit 459.

In the second embodiment, the case where the inclination of the ceiling plate portion 455 is substantially constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the ceiling plate portion 455 may be a large angle with respect to the horizontal from the intermediate position to the upstream side, and may be a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the same intermediate position to the downstream side. In this case, the rolling speed of the sphere is likely to change depending on whether the sphere lands on the ceiling plate portion 455 on the upstream side of the intermediate position or the sphere lands on the ceiling plate portion 455 on the downstream side of the intermediate position. It is easy to predict the flow path of the ball. That is, it is possible to improve the attention to the intermediate position of the ceiling plate portion 455.

Further, a plurality of ridges for reducing the rolling speed of the sphere may be formed on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455. In this case, the position of forming the ridges does not have to be formed over the entire left and right width of the ceiling plate portion 455, and may be formed in a partial range in the same manner as the change in inclination.

Further, the plurality of ridges for deceleration are not limited to the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455. For example, it may be projected from the resin wall constituting the guide flow path for guiding the ball downward toward the first ball guide portion 457 toward the guide flow path side, or on the lower surface side of the bulge portion 456 or the inclined guide portion 458. It may be projected from the upper surface side of the sphere to the flow path side of the sphere.

Further, the forming direction of the ridge is not limited to the direction intersecting the front-rear direction. For example, a ridge may be projected from the main body plate portion 451 to the front side, or a front plate member formed from a flat plate shape along a plane parallel to the main body plate portion 451 is arranged on the front side of the main body plate portion 451. When it is provided and a flow path of the ball is formed between the main body plate portion 451 and the main body plate portion 451, a ridge may be provided so as to project from the front plate member to the back surface side.

In the second embodiment, the case where the ball that has fallen on the first ball guide unit 457 is smoothly guided to the general winning opening 63 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the internal shape of the first ball guide portion 457 is formed in a mortar shape and the opening at the lower end portion is formed with a size slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, the sphere passes through the first ball guide portion 457. You can extend the time it takes to do this.

In this case, if the trailing ball reaches the first ball guide portion 457 while the ball remains in the first ball guide portion 457, it is easy to guide the ball to the tilt guide portion 458 side, and the second guide portion 459. It is possible to increase the probability of a ball entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to configure the situation so that the ball is guided to the second guide portion 459 side without waiting for the rare situation where a plurality of balls are connected to reach the first ball guide portion 457.

Further, as a method other than devising the shape of the first ball guide portion 457, a movable member that is displaced by the weight of the sphere may be arranged. The movable member is configured to block the ball entering the first ball guide portion 457 within a predetermined period after the ball enters the first ball guide portion 457, and the ball that reaches the movable member is placed on the tilt guide portion 458 side. It is configured to guide you to. As a result, it is possible to improve the probability that the ball will reach the second ball guide unit 459 within a predetermined period after the previous ball has passed the first ball guide unit 457.

In the second embodiment, the case where the left component 450 is formed of a fixed resin member has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path of the ball may be changed by an electric movable accessory. In this case, the tilt guide portion 458 may be configured so as to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction. That is, the ball is guided to the second ball guide portion 459 side in the state of protruding forward, but the ball may not be guided to the second ball guide portion 459 side in the state of being immersed in the rear, and may fall. ..

Further, for example, a plate-shaped member arranged so as to close the first ball guide portion 457 may be arranged so as to appear and disappear in the front and rear. That is, in the state where the plate-shaped member protrudes forward, the ball that has reached the plate-shaped member is guided toward the inclined guide portion 458 side and easily enters the second ball guide portion 459, but the plate-shaped member moves backward. In the immersive state, the ball can be easily dropped onto the first ball guide portion 457.

Further, for example, the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to operate so that the inclined direction is reversed left and right in synchronization with the opening and closing of the opening / closing plate 65b. When the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state, the inclined plate portion 434 is inclined downward to the left and right inward, so that the second ball guide portion 459 is deflected to the left and right inward, and the ceiling plate portion 455. The ball that has fallen between the and the curved projecting portion 414 can be made to flow into the opening / closing plate 65b side. Thereby, the ball can be configured to be guided from a wide range to the opening / closing plate 65b side.

The inclination of the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to be inclined downward to the left and right inward regardless of the presence or absence of electric power. Even in this case, when the opening / closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the destination of the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 434 does not change, so that the playability can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the ball can be discharged from the game area through the out port 415, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the formation of the vertical plate portion 433 may be omitted, the formation of the out port 415 may be omitted, and the ball passing through the left portion component 450 may be configured to flow down to the opening / closing plate 65b side. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the flow path of the sphere toward the opening / closing plate 65b.

In the second embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 65b is formed of a rectangular plate member in front view that is rotationally displaced by a rotation axis extending to the left and right along the lower edge has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, it may be formed in a front-view pentagonal shape (a shape similar to a home base) by forming the upper edge portion so as to ascend and incline toward the left and right central portions in the front view. As a result, when the sphere comes into contact with the upper edge portion, the sphere can be easily flown to the left and right outside along the shape of the upper edge portion.

It should be noted that an adjusting means for adjusting the flow mode of the ball flowed to the left and right outside at the upper edge portion of the opening / closing plate 65b may be provided. For example, an extension plate extending downward in parallel with the vertical plate portion 433 from the left and right inner tips of the inclined plate portion 434, and a ball passing hole formed through the extending plate in the left-right direction with a size that allows the ball to pass through. And may be provided.

For example, the arrangement of the ball passage holes is set to a position deviated from the arrangement of the balls flowed to the left and right outside on the upper edge portion 65b of the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b (the position deviated to the upper side). It may be designed as a position that allows the ball flowing to the left and right outside to pass through the upper edge portion 65b of the opening / closing plate 65b when the 65b is between the open state and the closed state.

In this case, the extension plate and the ball passage hole keep the ball on the upper side of the opening / closing plate 65b when the opening / closing plate 65b is open to prevent left-right leakage, while the opening / closing plate 65b causes the ball to flow left and right during closing. It can be configured to be able to (spill).

In addition, in order to maintain the posture of the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state, the projecting portion 430 is provided so as to project from the back side to the back side of the main body plate portion 431 of the covering member 430 at a position where it can be supported. It may be formed in. Further, the projecting portion may abut the opening / closing plate 65b in the tilting direction at both ends of the opening / closing plate 65b in the left-right width direction. In this case, it becomes easy to maintain the posture of the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state.

In the second embodiment, when the distribution unit 300 passes through the discharge opening 325 after the ball guided forward by the direction switching unit 317 is switched in the left-right direction above the detection device SE3. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the winning opening 323 may be used as the discharge opening to discharge the ball. In this case, a through hole having a size that allows the ball to fall may be formed on the lower surface of the direction switching portion 317, and the ball that has fallen into the through hole may be detected by the detection device SE3. Further, as the same configuration, the arrangement of the discharge opening and the detection device SE3 may be reversed.

Further, the same configuration may be adopted in which the switching direction of the flow path by the direction switching portion 317 is not the front side but the rear side, or the ball passes from above the winning opening 323 to the front and the base plate. It may be configured to be discharged to the front side of the 60.

In this case, since it is not necessary to dispose the discharge opening 325 on the left and right sides of the detection device SE3, the left-right distance between the pair of left and right detection devices SE3 can be narrowed, or the left and right spaces of the detection device SE3 can be nailed. It can be effectively used as a planting space.

Further, these configurations do not have to be the same around the left and right detection devices SE3, and separate left and right configurations may be adopted. For example, during the jackpot game, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball passing forward from above the winning opening 323 can be picked up by the opening / closing plate 65b. In this case, the winning opening 323 Depending on whether the ball is guided from above to the side where the ball passes forward or vice versa, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 returns to the front side of the base plate 60 and becomes the opening / closing plate 65b. The probability of being picked up changes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64.

In the second embodiment, the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is retracted above the center frame 86 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81 in the overhanging state has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 may be vertically long and retracted to the left and right sides of the center frame 86.

Further, following the configuration in which the front frame 14 is configured to project forward from the upper edge portion, a configuration is adopted in which the front frame 14 projects forward from the left and right edge portions, and a light emitting operation effect is produced on the protruding portion. The unit 700 may be configured to be retracted. In this case, it can be configured so that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is retracted to the front side of both the left and right edges and is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 in the overhanging state.

In the second embodiment, the tubular member 695 has been described as a member that comes into contact with the rotating member 810, but the material of the tubular member 695 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed of a hard resin material that does not deform in shape under a load given by the rotating member 810. In this case, excessive displacement of the rotating member 810 can be suppressed.

Further, it may be formed from a soft resin material that can be deformed (deformed in the radial direction) even with a load given by the rotating member 810. In this case, the tubular member 695 functions as a cushioning material, and it is possible to easily avoid damage to the rotating member 810.

In the second embodiment, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are designed to be visually recognized integrally with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted to the left or right in a specific vertical arrangement, the decorative plate 811 can be visually recognized integrally with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511. You may design the figure or pattern to be formed. In this case, the contents visually recognized integrally are designed so as to be different depending on whether the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted to the left side or the right side, thereby producing the effect of the bottom wall portion 511 and the decorative plate 811. Can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 tilts up and down while being displaced up and down to change the outer shape of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front view and the change in the vertical position of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Although the case where the two occur at the same time has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the outer shape of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front view may be changed while maintaining the vertical arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Also in the second embodiment, for example, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 and the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced by a predetermined angle about the rotation axis RJ1, the projection direction of the rotating member 810 is changed. Therefore, the outer shape of the rotating member 810 in the front view can be changed.

In the second embodiment, the front-rear displacement member 653 that causes resistance to the up-and-down displacement of the elevating plate member 630 is configured as a member that is displaced in the front-rear direction by the solenoid 651, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotating arm that is displaced by the driving force of a drive motor can be displaced in a direction that is close to or away from the contacted plate 638, and a frictional force is generated or moves with the contacted plate 638. Displacement resistance of the elevating plate member 630 may be generated by blocking the direction.

In the second embodiment, the case where the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 630 (a direction on a plane orthogonal to the moving direction of the elevating plate member 630) has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. That is, the angle formed by the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 and the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the elevating plate member 630 does not have to be a right angle.

For example, when the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to be upwardly inclined toward the front, when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the elevating plate member 630 is downwardly displaced. By applying an upward load in addition to the sliding friction, the time until the elevating plate member 630 is stopped can be shortened. On the other hand, if the elevating plate member 630 is upwardly displaced, the kinetic energy of the elevating plate member 630 is reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the elevating plate member 630 by applying an upward load in addition to the sliding friction. Can be done.

Further, when the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to be downwardly inclined toward the front, when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the elevating plate member 630 is upwardly displaced, the sliding By applying a downward load in addition to the dynamic friction, the time until the elevating plate member 630 is stopped can be shortened. On the other hand, if the elevating plate member 630 is downwardly displaced, the kinetic energy of the elevating plate member 630 is reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the elevating plate member 630 by applying a downward load in addition to the sliding friction. Can be done.

In the second embodiment, the abutted plate 638 and the front-rear displacement member 653 are configured so that the overlapped front-rear width in the vertical direction is substantially the same regardless of whether the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state. However, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed by an inclined surface that inclines backward as it goes upward. In this case, if the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward when the contacted plate 638 is downwardly displaced, a load is generated on the contacted plate 638 in a direction of picking up from the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653. Therefore, the action of braking the elevating plate member 630 can be strengthened.

Further, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed by an inclined surface that inclines backward toward the downward direction. In this case, if the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward when the contacted plate 638 is displaced upward, a load in a direction of pressing the front-rear displacement member 653 downward from the front end surface of the contacted plate 638. Can be generated, so that the action of braking the elevating plate member 630 can be strengthened.

Further, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 is such that an inclined surface that inclines backward from the lower end position toward the upper side and an inclined surface that inclines backward from the upper end position toward the lower side are at predetermined intermediate positions. A correspondingly overhanging portion may be formed at an intermediate position of the rear end surface of the contacted plate 638 so as to be united with each other.

In this case, when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward while the contact plate 638 is arranged on the front side of the front-rear displacement member 653, the front-end displacement member 653 is brought into contact with a predetermined intermediate position on the front end surface. The vertical position of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized in such a manner that the overhanging portion of the plate 638 is accommodated.

In this case, the number of portions where the inclined surface inclined backward toward the lower side and the inclined surface inclined backward toward the upper side are united is not limited to the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653. For example, it may have a shape (for example, a saw blade shape or a jagged shape) that constitutes a plurality of parts to be combined. In this case, the vertical positions of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized at a plurality of positions.

In the second embodiment, the case where the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 are configured to be vertically displaced is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right elevating plate members 630 may be fastened and fixed to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 so that the vertical position deviation of the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 is not allowed. In this case, it is sufficient that the resistance generator 650 for generating the displacement resistance of the elevating plate member 630 is configured on only one of the left and right sides.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the vertical position deviation of the pair of left and right lifting plate members 630 is allowed, it is preferable to arrange the resistance generators 650 on both the left and right sides. Using this configuration, control may be performed to shift the excitation timing of the left and right solenoids 651.

For example, when the internal operation unit 600 is downwardly displaced from the retracted state to the intermediate state, the drive control of the drive motor 648 is executed with the pair of left and right solenoids 651 excited and the front-rear displacement member 653 arranged rearward. When the same drive control as in is executed with the solenoid 651 on the left side excited and the solenoid 651 on the right side de-excited, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is in an inclined posture in which the left side is arranged downward with respect to the right side. It is possible to execute such an effect operation.

This effect operation can be executed without imposing a load on the internal operation unit 600 up to the operation error limit state of the internal operation unit 600. Further, instead of increasing the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 for this effect operation, the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 used at the time of the downward displacement of the internal operation unit 600 is diverted, and the excitation of the solenoid 651 is different. By executing with, the production operation is executed. Therefore, the drive pattern required for the drive motor 648 can be reduced.

Further, the timing for de-energizing the solenoid 651 on the right side is not limited to the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600. For example, the solenoids 651 on both the left and right sides may be excited in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, and the solenoid 651 on the right side may be de-excited while the internal operating unit 600 is in the intermediate state from the retracted state. In this case, the downward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 on the right side can be delayed by the frictional force, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 executes an effect operation such that the left side is arranged downward with respect to the right side. Can be done.

As an effect operation, an example from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 has been described, but it is naturally assumed that the vertical direction is reversed. That is, the above-mentioned excitation pattern of the pair of left and right solenoids 651 may be executed according to the displacement of the internal operation unit 600 from the overhanging state.

In the second embodiment, in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800 is rotated in a state where the upward displacement of the contact plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 is restricted by the front-rear displacement member 653. Although the case where the light emission effect is executed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, as a type of rotary light emitting effect executed in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, as an out-of-lottery effect different from the effect for jackpot notification executed in a state where the rotation axis RJ1 is fixed, both left and right sides. Alternatively, the rotation effect of the rotation effect device 800 may be executed while the solenoids 651 on one of the left and right sides are excited.

In this case, since the front-rear displacement member 653 is retracted from the moving path of the contacted plate 638 on the side where the solenoid 651 is excited, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the elevating plate member 630 are generated by the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating member 810. Even if the displacement is increased, the front-rear displacement member 653 does not suppress the upward displacement.

Therefore, the rotation shaft RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is easily displaced. As a result, it is possible to perform an operation effect in which the rotation light emission effect of the rotating member 810 is executed in a state where the rotation axis RJ1 is not fixed. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotation member 810 and the light emitted from the rotation member 810 in the rotation light emission effect can be obtained. Although the light emission pattern is the same, the figure visually recognized by the afterimage display of the rotating member 810 can be different.

In order to form a state in which the rotating shaft RJ1 is not fixed, the solenoids 651 on both the left and right sides may be excited or the solenoids 651 on the left and right sides may be excited, but the solenoids 651 on the left and right sides are excited. By de-energizing the solenoid 651 on the other side, it is possible to regulate the vertical displacement of the ascending plate member 630 on the non-excited side, so that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the elevating plate member 630 become excessive. It is possible to suppress the ascending displacement, and it is possible to avoid damage to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the lifting plate member 630.

In the second embodiment, the case where the rack gear portion 634 is brought close to and separated from the transmission gear 649 to change the transmission efficiency has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive motor 648 and the drive shaft may be configured to be displaceable back and forth so that the transmission gear 649 can be displaced back and forth with respect to the rack gear portion 634.

Further, the transmission gear 649 may be formed so that the diameter length of the transmission gear 649 changes in the axial direction. In this case, the transmission efficiency can be changed by displacing the transmission gear 649 or the elevating plate member 630 in the drive shaft direction.

Although the displacement of the rack gear portion 634 in a state where the meshing between the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 is maintained has been described, the displacement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack gear portion 634 may be configured to be separated from the transmission gear 649 to the extent that the mesh is disengaged. In this case, even if the drive motor 648 goes out of control, the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 are damaged by configuring the rack gear portion 634 to separate from the transmission gear 649 before the rack gear portion 634 is overloaded. Can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, the rack gear portion 634 is pressed against the transmission gear 649 side by the weight of the elevating plate member 630 to optimize the gear meshing state, while the rack gear portion 634 is pressed against the transmission gear by the driving force of the solenoid 651. The case of being pushed away from 649 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack gear portion 634 may be configured to be displaced by the driving force of the solenoid 651 in both directions regardless of the displacement direction. Further, the direction in which the driving force of the solenoid 651 is generated may be reversed. Further, the transmission gear 649 or the drive motor 648 may be configured to be displaceable in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the drive shaft.

In the second embodiment, the thickness of the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 guided through the elongated holes 672 to 674 is such that the tubular portion has an electric wiring inserted inside the tubular portion 684. Although the case where the 684 is thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686 has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the inside is not hollow but closed, the tubular portion 684 may be formed thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686, and the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed thicker than the tubular portion 684. It may be formed thick.

By forming the metal rod-shaped member 686 (member on the front side) thickly, it is possible to withstand a large area of a load generated at a position far from the central axis J1 when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted and displaced. As a result, the durability of the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be improved, so that, for example, the durability when the member is formed of a resin material can be improved.

Further, the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed with the same thickness. In this case, the clearances set in the elongated holes 672 to 674 can be designed with the same numerical values, and the degree of wear of the elongated holes 672 to 674 can be made uniform.

In the second embodiment, the case where the pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 are designed to have the same clearance in the front-rear direction with the fastening portions 632 and 633 of the elevating plate member 630 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the clearance between the lower elongated hole 612 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the elevating plate member 630 is formed to be larger than the clearance between the upper elongated hole 612 and the upper fastening portion 632 of the elevating plate member 630. You may. In this case, since the allowable width for the lower portion of the elevating plate member 630 to be displaced in the front-rear direction can be increased, the meshing state of the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 is changed by the front-rear displacement of the elevating plate member 630. It can be made easier.

In the second embodiment, the case where the second elongated hole 673 is formed as an elongated hole extending vertically has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second elongated hole 673 connected to the curved elongated hole 674 may be extended so as to be inclined downward toward the front side so that the side closer to the curved elongated hole 674 is arranged forward. good. In this case, the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided to the second elongated hole 673.

That is, it is possible to realize an operation in which the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is gradually changed in the tilting direction in the state before the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state from the retracted state.

The inclination of the second elongated hole 673 does not need to be formed from the upper end portion, but is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the vertical direction from the upper end portion to the middle, and extends in the direction of downward inclination from the middle. It may be configured. In this case, when the elevating plate member 630 is started from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be maintained, so that the base plate 60 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 collide with each other. Can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, the case where the center of gravity position G1 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged between the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity position G1 may be arranged on the opposite side of the tubular portion 684 with reference to the metal rod-shaped member 686, or may be arranged on the opposite side of the metal rod-shaped member 686 with reference to the tubular portion 684.

In the second embodiment, the case where the shape portion supporting the tubular portion 684 is formed by the elongated holes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tubular portion 684 may be configured so that the shaft can rotate with a fixed shaft.

In the second embodiment, the case where the displacement members 680 supporting the light emitting operation effect unit 700 are arranged on the left and right sides of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and are displaced in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 may be configured to be displaced in the front-rear direction or the front-rear direction and the vertical direction combined, or the displacement members 680 may be arranged on one left and right sides of the light emission operation effect unit 700. The displacement members 680 may be arranged above and below the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and may be configured to be displaced in the left-right direction or the front-rear direction.

In the second embodiment, the case where the rotation effect device 800 that rotates is adopted as the movable member arranged in the light emitting operation effect unit 700 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable member that reciprocates in the linear direction may be adopted, or a movable member that vibrates may be adopted.

In the second embodiment, the case where the support hole 764b is arranged on the lower side of the two upper and lower connected holes 764 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support holes 764b may be arranged on the upper side, or the support holes 764b may be provided on both the upper and lower sides.

When both the top and bottom of the connected holes 764 on the right side are support holes 764b and the top and bottom of the left side to be connected holes 764 are elongated holes 764a, only the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 with respect to the displacement member 680 in the left-right direction is present. It is permissible, and it is possible to suppress a change in posture in the rotation direction about the fastening portion 682 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

Further, the through hole is not limited to the elongated hole 764a, and a through hole having a shape having a larger clearance than the support hole 764b can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be formed as a perfect circular through hole having an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 684. Further, for example, as the support hole 764b, an elongated hole having a length shorter in the longitudinal direction than the elongated hole 764a may be adopted. In this case, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can perform horizontal operation in the left-right direction.

Of the shapes of the left and right connected holes 764, if the diagonally connected holes 764 are both supported holes 764b, the misalignment of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the left-right direction is also centered on the fastening portion 682. The change in posture in the rotation direction is also suppressed. Therefore, it is good if it is formed with sufficient strength so that the arrangement does not shift and the operation is controlled precisely, but if it is not, a slight malfunction will lead to damage to the light emitting operation effect unit 700. , Need attention.

In the third embodiment, the case where the opening 3892k is formed on the front side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 will be described, and in the fourth embodiment, the opening 4985k will be formed on the rear side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that both openings 3982k and 4985k are formed. In this case, the resistance to ball clogging can be improved.

Further, for example, an opening may be formed on the front side of the first passage TR1 and an opening may be formed on the rear side of the second passage TR2. Further, a merging flow path may be formed in which the spheres discharged from these openings are merged on the downstream side. In this case, since the appearance of the sphere flowing down to the left and right can be changed, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect using the sphere.

Further, for example, an opening is formed in at least one of the front side and the rear side from the first passage TR1, and an opening is formed in at least one of the left side or the right side from the second passage TR2, and the first passage is formed through each opening. The ball may be configured to be discharged from TR1 or the second passage TR2.

In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the case where the opening 985d is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the opening 985d is omitted, the distance between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 directly above the detection device SE3 is narrowed, and the left-right distance of the detection device SE3 is narrowed accordingly, so that the opening 985e, The left-right spacing of 985f may be narrowed. In this case, the left-right width at the lower end of the bulging portion 982 can be further shortened.

In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the case where a space is formed between the erection wall 982a arranged between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a 7-segment display device may be arranged and used as an effect range by the 7-segment display, or a small liquid crystal display device may be arranged.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the passage for guiding the game ball is formed on the base plate 60 and the upper connecting member 5270 on the back side of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the passage for guiding the game ball may be formed in the upper connecting member 270 and the center frame 86, may be formed in the center frame 86 and the base plate 60, or may be formed in the base plate 60. , The center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 5270 may be formed, or the base plate 60, the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 5270 may be formed.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the opening 5274a is formed in the third overhanging portion 5274 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed on any of the other overhanging portions 272, 5273 and 275-277. Further, the destination of the ball after flowing down may be different for each opening.

For example, the ball that has passed through the first opening reaches the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, and the ball that has passed through the second opening returns to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the nail KG2, and the third opening. The sphere that has passed through the above may be returned to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the curved protrusion 414. In this case, aiming at the first opening makes it easier for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, while aiming at the second opening or the third opening makes it difficult for the ball to head toward the first winning opening 64. , The ball can be easily guided to the ball guide units 457 and 459 and the specific winning opening 65a.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 reciprocates on the front side of the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 may be configured to be movable to a position (a position on the back side of the game board 13) in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 described in the second embodiment.

In this case, a state that is difficult for the player to see can be configured at two positions: a position in the retracted state arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and an upper end position of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700. Therefore, a shutter, a light guide plate, etc. for blocking the player's field of view are arranged in the second glass unit 6016b, and the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is moved in a state of blocking the player's field of view to make it difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to know which of the two positions the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is located. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the operation effect of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed as an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction halfway has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be inclined or curved in a direction toward the rear as it approaches the recessed portion 7674a instead of in the vertical direction. In this case, since the tubular portion 684 is also displaced rearward at the same time during the downward displacement, the displacement member 680 can be configured to change its posture in the forward rotation direction at the same time as the downward displacement.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed in an L-shape so as to extend rearward at the lower end portion has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed so as to extend further downward from the vertical position of the recessed portion 7674a. In this case, by entering the recessed portion 7674a, the vertical displacement of the tubular portion 684 can be regulated at an intermediate position in the vertical displacement possible range of the tubular portion 684. Even if a load due to regulation occurs, the tubular portion 684 is formed thick, so that damage can be easily avoided.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810 is in a posture that coincides with the front-rear direction in a state where the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at an intermediate position of the curved elongated hole 8674. In that state, the rotating member 810 may be rotated at high speed to execute the rotational light emission effect. Even if the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at an intermediate position of the curved elongated hole 8674, the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be maintained by restricting the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 by the resistance generator 650. , The displacement of the rotating shaft RJ1 can be suppressed.

In the eighth embodiment, since the displacement member 680 is in a posture of tilting in the forward rotation direction before tilting, the back surface side (radiating plate 812 side) of the rotating member 810 is turned toward the player side after tilting displacement. It is in a posture. Even in this case, the back surface side of the rotating member 810 is covered with a heat radiating plate 812, and the illuminated substrate is also housed inside and is not exposed.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 680 is displaced in the front-rear direction while being downwardly displaced has been described. In this case, the front-rear position of the rotation effect device 800 is tilted before the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced. It may be designed so that the position is the same as that after the operation. Thereby, for example, it is possible to reduce the design difficulty when a plurality of sets of the displacement member 680, the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and the rotation effect device 800 are stacked and arranged in the front-rear direction.

The shapes of the elongated holes 8672a, 8672b, 8673, 8674, and 8675 are not limited in any way. For example, it may be wavy or a combination of a linear hole and a wavy (curved) hole.

In the ninth embodiment, the load between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 changes depending on the posture of the displacement member 9680, so that the ease of misalignment of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 changes. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a high-friction resin material may be arranged at the pressed portion, or a high-viscosity sheet member may be arranged at the pressed portion, without depending on the design of the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1. However, one or more recesses and protrusions that fit each other may be formed at the points where they are pressed against each other.

The shape of the concave portion and the convex portion may be an uneven shape formed around a point, or may be a ridge or a concave groove formed around a straight line or a curved line. In the case of a ridge or a concave groove, the misalignment of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 in the direction along the extension direction is easy to tolerate, while the misalignment of the light emission operation effect unit 9700 in the direction intersecting the extension direction is limited. It can be made easier.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the action of setting the rotating member 810 to the proper posture is caused by the urging of the detection gear 10831 by its own weight has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture of the rotating member 810 may be strictly controlled.

Further, the rotating member 810 may be prevented from rising and operating in the backward rotation direction until the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture. For example, when the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture, the engaging portion is retracted to the left and right inward, and when the rotating member 810 is out of the proper posture, the engaging portion is provided in the rotation effect device 800, and when the rotating member 810 is out of the proper posture, the engaging portion is arranged in the rotation effect device 800. May be fitted (insertable) to the inner member 670, and the movement of the rotating member 810 in the rising direction may be restricted at the time of fitting. In this case, since it is possible to mechanically prevent the rotating member 810 from rising and operating without being in a proper posture, it is possible to prevent the rotating member 810 from being unexpectedly damaged.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the detection devices SE3 arranged on the downstream side of the first winning opening 64 are arranged on the left and right sides so as to be the same in the front-rear position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the arrangement of the detection device SE3 may be displaced back and forth.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 80 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 82 is a front view of the distribution device 700 provided on the game board 13. FIG. 83 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 80, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 80) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 81) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 99) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 80) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 80), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used, for example, when changing the stage (background image) of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 81) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. , Operated by the player.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a "sandy beach stage" and a "deep sea stage". ing. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, "sandy beach stage" → "deep sea stage" "→" Sandy beach stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sandy beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

Although detailed description will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying various stages (background images) in addition to the above-mentioned stages (background images) depending on the game situation. .. For example, when the timed time reaches a predetermined time, a dedicated effect (SP effect) can be executed for a predetermined period (3 minutes), and the SP effect is executed. During the period, a stage (background image) dedicated to SP production is displayed. In addition, a pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect) for notifying the player in advance that the result of the special symbol lottery executed based on the starting prize will be a big hit is configured to be executable, and the pre-reading effect is executed. A stage (background image) dedicated to the look-ahead effect is displayed during the period.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the function of changing the stage (background image) of the production based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, and the game depending on the situation of the game to be executed. Since it has a function of changing regardless of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the game (executed) is performed by changing the effect content executed by the player intentionally changing the stage. It is possible to suppress the production) from becoming monotonous, prevent the player from getting bored with the game early, and change the stage even at a timing not intended by the player, which is surprising to the player. You can perform a certain effect.

As a change condition for changing the stage (background image) of the production, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, a change condition that can be satisfied based on the operation of the player and a change that can be satisfied based on the time counting time. Conditions and change conditions that can be established based on the result of the special symbol lottery are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is established when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. The change conditions to be obtained, the change conditions that can be established when the number of big hits won by the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number, and the change lottery for deciding whether or not to change the stage are configured to be executable. A change condition that is established based on the result of the change lottery may be provided.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the stage type that can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22 and the stage type that is changed according to the game situation are different from each other. Is configured to make it easier for the player to understand what the changed condition is when the change is made, but the change is not limited to this and can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22. The type of the stage and the type of the stage that is changed according to the game situation may be configured to be a common type in all or part of the stage. By configuring in this way, when the stage is changed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the change of the stage, so that the game content (special symbol) after the stage is changed. You can be interested in the variable production content to show the result of the lottery.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 80), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 81) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the lower plate 50 in front view. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, the game board 13 according to the first embodiment has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, and a rail 76. , 77, general entrance 63, second entrance 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display unit 80, distribution device 700, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is the inner frame 4 ( It is attached to the back side of (see FIG. 80). The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the second entry port 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the distribution device 700 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 It is fixed by tapping screws etc. from the front side of. Further, as will be described in detail later, inside the sorting device 700, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter and a right second ball entry port 640r are provided. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82, but the ball that has entered the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 is either the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r by the distribution device 700. It is sorted into crabs (see FIG. 82).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 80) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 81.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 80) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 99) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 81) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 81) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 81) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 99), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the first embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has won the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, or the right second ball opening 640r. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball is the second ball opening 640 or the right second ball opening. When a prize is won in 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot (big hit A1 to D1), a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot (big hit E1), or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first ball slot 64, the second ball slot 640, and the right second ball slot 640r wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. The jackpot types determined here are the 10R probability variable jackpot (big hit A1), the 10R probability variable jackpot (big hit B1), the 5R probability variable jackpot (big hit C1), the 2R probability variable jackpot (big hit D1), and the 10R time saving 100 times jackpot (big hit E1). ) Is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

"10R probability variation jackpot" (big hit A1) means that after being notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by stopping and displaying in the same doublet, after the jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, It is a big hit in which the probability change state is set. Here, the probabilistic state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit by a special symbol lottery is higher than the normal state (low probability state) (high probability state of the special symbol), and the special symbol lottery is easier to be executed than in the normal state. It is a gaming state that is in a state (a high-probability state of a normal symbol). That is, the probabilistic state is a gaming state in which the special symbol lottery is easily executed and the big hit is easily won in the special symbol lottery, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. The "10R probability variation jackpot" (big hit B1) is the same jackpot as the above-mentioned (big hit A1), and the "5R probability variation jackpot" (big hit C1) is a jackpot game with respect to the above-mentioned (big hit A1). It is a big hit that differs only in that the maximum number of rounds is specified as 5 rounds, and the "2R probability variation big hit" (big hit D1) means that the maximum number of rounds of the big hit game is 2 with respect to the above-mentioned (big hit A1). It is a jackpot that differs only in the points specified in the round. And, "10R time saving 100 times jackpot" (big hit E1) is a jackpot in which a time saving state is set after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. Here, the time saving state is a game in which the probability of winning a big hit by a special symbol lottery is a normal state (low probability state), but the special symbol lottery is easier to be executed than the normal state (high probability state of a normal symbol). It is a state. That is, the time saving state is a gaming state in which the special symbol lottery is more easily executed than in the normal state, and is a gaming state in which the player is more advantageous than the normal state and more disadvantageous than the probabilistic state.

In the first embodiment, when the probability change state is set after the end of the big hit game, the probability change state is continued until the next big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, and the time saving state is set. In this case, it is configured to continue until the number of special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches 100 times (predetermined number of times). The period during which each game state continues is not limited to this, for example, when the probability change state is set, until the number of special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state reaches 100 times (predetermined number of times). It may be configured so that the probabilistic state continues, or it may be configured so that the time saving state continues until the next big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. Further, when the probability variation state is set, the condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and the condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol may be different. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol may be different. The special symbol lottery may be executed 50 times as a condition for ending, and the special symbol lottery may be executed 100 times as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol.

With this configuration, the game in the probabilistic state is executed from the time the probabilistic state is set until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and then until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. The game in the time saving state is executed, and then the game in the normal state is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game in a plurality of game states so that the degree of advantage gradually decreases, so that when the probability change state is set, the player is expected to win the big hit as soon as possible. You can let the player play the game.

Further, the game state may be changed stepwise so that the degree of advantage to the player increases as the number of special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game ends increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being less motivated to play because the period during which the jackpot is not won continues for a long time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, each of the above-mentioned big hit types (big hit A1 to big hit E1) is performed as an effect (big hit medium effect) executed by using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game. It is configured to perform different effects according to the situation. Specifically, when the jackpot type is one of jackpot B1, C1, and D1, the jackpot game is performed after notifying in advance that the probability change state will be set after the jackpot game is completed as the jackpot medium effect. A jackpot production (rank-up production) is performed to entertain the player how many rounds will continue. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot A1 or E1, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the jackpot game will continue for 10 rounds and then notify the player of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed during the jackpot game. A big hit medium production (probability change promotion production) is executed.

By configuring in this way, the player can have various expectations for the jackpot medium effect executed during the jackpot game according to the set jackpot type, so that the jackpot medium effect is produced. The effect can be enhanced.

Here, the types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the gaming states are a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and probabilistic state (special). The high-probability state of the symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol) can be set.

The "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot game is completed. In other words, it is a state in which it is easy to shift to a jackpot game state (special game state) that is advantageous to the player. Further, the "high probability state of the normal symbol" means a state in which the winning probability of the second symbol lottery is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. If the ball is won in the second symbol lottery, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 (the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened). A game is executed per figure. That is, the "high probability state of the normal symbol" is a state in which the special symbol lottery is easily executed by making it easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the normal state, that is, the "high probability state of the special symbol". Further, the "low probability state of the normal symbol" means a state in which the winning probability of the second symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is lower than that of the normal state, that is, the "high probability state of the normal symbol".

In the "high probability state of the normal symbol", not only the winning probability of the second symbol lottery is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the "normal symbol" is changed. A longer time is set compared to the "low probability state". When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probabilistic state or the time saving state in which the "high probability state of the normal symbol" is set, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed can be increased. ..

It should be noted that the control content for the electric accessory 640a in the game per game in the "high probability state of the normal symbol" is the second entrance 640 than in the game per game in the "low probability state of the normal symbol". It suffices if the ball is controlled so that the ball can easily enter the ball. For example, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640, one game per normal figure The number of times the electric accessory 640a is released may be increased from the "low probability state of the normal symbol", or the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is released during the game per normal figure may be changed. As a result, the ball may be configured to be easier to enter into the second entrance 640 than the game per game in the "low probability state of the normal symbol". Further, at least one of the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit without changing the winning probability of the second symbol lottery. May be changed. In addition, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not performed, and the winning probability of the second symbol lottery is set to "normal symbol". It may be changed so as to increase the fluctuation time compared to the "low probability state of the normal symbol", or to shorten the fluctuation time of the second symbol lottery compared to the "low probability state of the normal symbol".

In the game area, a plurality of general entry ports 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) of any one of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right second ball entry port 640r, and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 projects toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 99), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 99) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a thing. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the probability variation state and the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) than in the game state of the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol). Will be done. As a result, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery per normal figure can be performed more than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the lottery per drawing increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, the probabilistic state and the time saving state are advantageous game states for the player from the viewpoint of executing the special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal figure is increased, and the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a with respect to the normal drawing is increased at one time. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal state in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal figure may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or once. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to the hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls that flow down the game board 13 can pass through the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembling position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins (wins) a ball through the opening 710a with respect to the distribution device 700, the ball that has entered is alternately distributed to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r. Be done. When the ball wins (balls) in the first ball slot 64, the first ball slot switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball slot switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 99), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. Further, when the ball wins the second entrance 640r, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on as in the case of the second entrance 640. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 99) due to the turning on of the second entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged below the front view of the sorting device 700. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 99), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b. This second entry port 640 does not allow the game ball to enter (it is difficult) by restricting the entry of the game ball in a state where the left and right electric accessories 640a, which are normally formed in a blade shape, are upright. ), And when it hits a normal symbol, which will be described later, the electric accessory 640a rotates about 45 degrees outward as an open operation in a certain operation pattern, forming an inverted eight shape. The game ball is guided to the 2 entry port 640 so that the game ball can easily enter the 2nd entry port 640.

In addition, 5 balls are paid out as prize balls at the 1st entrance 64 and the right 2nd entrance 640r, respectively, and 2 balls are awarded at the 2nd entrance 640. It is also one of the winning openings paid out as a ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640, and the right number 2 The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the entry slot 640r is configured to be different, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the second entry slot The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the right second entrance 640r may be configured as the same number.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball is paid out when the ball flowing into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 wins a prize in the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r. However, the number of prize balls is not limited to this, and the same number of prize balls are paid out depending on, for example, when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and when a ball wins in the right second entrance 640r. In the case of the above configuration, a detection switch for detecting the inflow of a ball into the opening 710a is provided in the vicinity of the opening 710a, and a prize ball is paid when the detection switch detects the ball. It may be configured to be put out. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the time lag between the ball flowing into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 and the time when the prize ball is actually paid out. Further, the ball in the sorting device 700 is measured by measuring the flow period from when the detection switch described above detects the ball to when the ball wins a prize at the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It may be configured so that the state of the flow path can be discriminated.

Further, it may be configured to execute an effect using the flow period. In this case, the ball that has flowed into the distribution device 700 as in the present embodiment is distributed to the distribution device 700 alternately to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r. Adopting a configuration in which it is difficult for the player to grasp which entry port the inflowing ball enters, or the ball flowing into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 moves to the first entry port 64. The period required to win a prize (first ball flow period) and the period required for a ball flowing into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 to win a prize in the right second entry port 640r (second ball flow period). ) And should be configured differently. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the type of the ball entry port to be entered next by the effect using the flow period of the ball flowing into the distribution device 700. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the distribution device 700 so that the longer the flow period, the easier it is for the ball to enter the ball entry port, which is more advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the distribution device 700 always enters either the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r, that is, the distribution device 700. When the balls flow in, the prize balls are paid out and the special symbol lottery is executed. However, the result is not limited to this, and the results of the balls flowing down in the sorting device 700 are not limited to this. Depending on the situation, a privilege other than the privilege for which the prize ball is paid out (for example, execution of a special symbol lottery) may or may not be granted. With this configuration, when the ball flows into the distribution device 700, the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player can be greatly different, so that the ball flowing into the distribution device 700 flows down. The player can be more interested in the situation.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also longer than in the normal state. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize in the second entrance 640 than in the normal state.

Therefore, in the normal state, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball basically moves into the opening 710a. A big hit lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r.

On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second ball entry port 640 is reached. Since it is easy to win a prize, the ball that has entered the opening 710a is distributed to the first ball opening 64 or the right second ball opening 640r, and then to the second ball opening 640. The jackpot lottery that accompanies entering the ball will also be easier to execute. Therefore, since the chances of executing the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) are greater than in the normal state, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the normal state.

In this way, in the game area provided on the game board 13, the distribution device 700, the second entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged at the lower position of the variable display unit 80, and the game on the left side. Even when a game (left-handed game) in which a ball is launched toward an area (a game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is performed, a game on the right side (a game formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80). Even when a game (right-handed game) in which a ball is launched toward a region) is performed, the proportion of balls reaching the distribution device 700, the second entry port 640, and the variable winning device 65 is the same. It is configured. Therefore, no matter what kind of game method is used, the same degree of advantage can be given to the player, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the distribution device 700, the second entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 are located below the variable display unit 80 in the game area provided on the game board 13. Is arranged, and even when a game (left-handed game) in which a ball is launched toward a game area on the left side (a game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is performed, a game area on the right side (variable) is performed. Even when a game (right-handed game) in which a ball is launched toward a game area formed on the right side of the display unit 80 is performed, the distribution device 700, the second entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 are reached. The ratio of the balls to be played is the same, but the ball is not limited to this, and for example, when the left-handed game is played, the ball is transferred to the sorting device 700 as compared with the case where the right-handed game is played. It is configured so that the ball can easily reach the second entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 when the right-handed game is played and when the left-handed game is played. Is also good. That is, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player may be switched according to the set game state. With such a configuration, the player can change the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower side of the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, if a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) performed due to any of the winning of the first ball slot 64, the second ball slot 640, or the right second ball slot 640r. After a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed by the third symbol display device. It is displayed on 81 to indicate the occurrence of a big hit. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the front view of the sorting device 700. For example, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 80).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. The out port 66 is arranged below the sorting device 700.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in FIG. 81, the distribution device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. The through hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the opening 710a flows down and a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the second entry port 640 flows down. It is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side by the base member of the sorting device 700.

The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and is formed of the above-mentioned opening 710a located in the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a. A through hole (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and formed through in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) located below the through-hole and formed through in the front-rear direction. Formed mainly in preparation.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body having an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in the front view, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes of the winning member 730 described above.

The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward both left and right sides, a distribution member 762 arranged at the center of the inclined surfaces 761 of each other, and a distribution member 762. It is mainly provided with a throwing port formed above the.

The distribution member 762 is formed in a ring shape, and is inserted into the inside of the ring shape with three protrusions 762a projecting outward at a distance of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof. It is formed with a shaft portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around the axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inside of the ring of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intermediate member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is rotatably arranged around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball passing through the opening 710a is thrown, and is in the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the central portion is located. The ball is thrown to the opposite side in the left-right direction. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710a can be thrown in the left-right direction by the protrusion 762a in the central portion. The protrusions 762a projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the center is located due to the weight applied when the sphere passes (distribution member 762). The rotation of the distribution member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the protrusion 762a in the center of the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface, the guided sphere collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface to regulate the displacement.

The inclined surface is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as "third throwing path KR3") in which balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 described above are rolled and thrown, and the distribution member 760 It is formed with a downward slope from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the spheres distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown (rolled) to the descending end of the inclined surface 761.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so as to be inclined in a direction closer to the intermediate member so that the side surface on the back surface side increases in thickness forward toward the end. As a result, the ball that has been rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown to the end thereof is placed in the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r of the interposition member arranged in front of the distribution member 760. Can be thrown to. More specifically, a ball that is distributed to the left side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolls on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second entry port 640r.

The first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r are formed on the front side of the left and right end portions of the sorting member 760 and on the back side of the through hole of the winning member 730, respectively. Therefore, the space at both the left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, a path for passing a ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above through the first entry port 64 and sending the ball to the through hole of the winning member 730, and a right second entry port 640r. It is possible to form a path for throwing a ball into the through hole of the winning member 730.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sphere that has flowed into the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 is distributed in the left-right direction by the distribution member 462a, rolls on either the left or right third throw path KR3, and is the first. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the rolling state of the ball until it enters the ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Specifically, a part of the sorting device 700 is made of a highly permeable material (for example, polycarbonate) so that the inside of the sorting device 700 can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the situation of the ball rolling inside the distribution device 700. In addition, by destroying the internal structure of the distribution device 700, a fraudulent act is performed so that the ball flowing into the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 rolls only toward an area that is advantageous to the player. In that case, for example, when a fraudulent act is performed so as to destroy the distribution member 762a and roll the ball only on one of the third throwing paths KR3, the clerk at the amusement park can easily confirm the destruction status. Therefore, it is possible to easily minimize the damage that may occur due to fraudulent activity.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering through the opening 710a is thrown into the sorting member 760 and is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 in either the left-right direction by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. The ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the first entry port 64 when the ball is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3. Here, the game ball that has entered the first entry port 64 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the first entry port 64.

On the other hand, the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the right second entry port 640r when the ball is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3. Here, the game ball that has entered the second entry port 640 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second entry port 640r.

In this way, the game balls that have entered the opening 710a are alternately distributed to the first entry port 64 and the right second entry port 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the first entry port 64 is evenly distributed. It is possible to uniformly generate a reserved ball by inserting a game ball into the right second entry port 640r. As a result, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be generated evenly, the number of reserved balls on one side becomes the upper limit, and overflow that is not stored as the reserved balls can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, a sphere that has flowed down a specific flow path (flow from the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 to the distribution member 762a) has two flow paths (left side) by the distribution means (distribution member 762a). The configuration is used in which the balls are alternately distributed toward the third throwing path KR3 on the right side and the third throwing path KR3) on the right side, but the configuration for distributing the balls flowing down a specific flow path is not limited to this, for example. A configuration that can be distributed to three or more flow paths may be used. Further, a configuration in which the spheres are not evenly distributed to each flow path may be used. For example, by using a configuration in which the distribution member 762a is driven by an electric drive source, the spheres can be transferred to the distribution means. The distribution destination may be switched depending on the timing of arrival.

As shown in FIG. 83, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 99) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 99). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 has a set value display device 110a capable of displaying the set value, a state in which the setting change operation (and a setting confirmation operation) is accepted, and a state in which the main control device 110 is not accepted (normally). Pachinko according to the operation of the setting key 110b that can switch between the game state) and the operator (for example, the clerk in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed) in the state of accepting the setting change operation (setting change state). A setting change mechanism composed of at least a setting switch 110c capable of changing the setting value of the machine 10 is provided. A method of changing the setting using this setting changing mechanism and a method of confirming the setting will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 84.

First, the setting change procedure of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (d). As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (d), in order to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As a result, it is rotated to the ON position (see FIG. 84 (a)). That is, in order to change the setting, it is first necessary to shut off the power of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 110b rotated to the ON side, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see FIG. 84 (b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to the setting change state indicating that the setting is being changed. When the setting is changed, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a composed of the 4-digit 7-segment display. From this display content, it is possible to easily make the operator (for example, a clerk in the hall) understand that the setting has been changed to the changed state normally.

When the setting change state is entered, the set value is switched by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 84 (c)). In the first embodiment, three types of setting values of settings 1 to 3 are provided, and the larger the numerical value, the higher the jackpot probability. That is, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is the lowest (for example, 1/262 in the low probability state, 1/65 in the high probability (probability variation) state), and the jackpot probability of setting 3 is the highest (for example, 1 in the low probability state). / 218, 1/55 in a high probability state). In the setting change state, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, the setting is changed in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 .... Further, when the setting switch 110c is pressed while the set value is 3, the rotary type is configured so that the set value returns to 1. Further, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. Note that FIG. 84 (c) is a diagram showing a display mode in a state where the set value is set to "3". As shown in FIG. 84 (c), when the set value is switched to 3 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "3" indicating the setting 3 is displayed for the last digit of the set value display device 110a. Will be done.

After the operator completes the operation of switching to the desired set value, the setting change state ends by rotating the setting key 110b counterclockwise and arranging the setting key 110b in the OFF position (FIG. 84). (D)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key portion and a keyhole-shaped keyhole portion that matches the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. As a result, the key part can be inserted into the keyhole part only when the operator (for example, a clerk in the hall) performs the setting change operation, and the key part can be removed and stored when the setting change operation is completed. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized player or the like from illegally changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, so that it is possible to prevent the hall from being inflicted with an unexpected disadvantage. it can.

Then, when the setting change operation is completed, the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is restarted. In the initial setting process after restarting, a process for transmitting a setting change completion command indicating that the setting change operation is completed and a setting value command indicating the setting value determined by the setting change operation to the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. Will be executed. In addition, a process for transmitting a command (initialization command) for restarting the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113, which waits until the setting change operation is completed, is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when changing the set value of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on. That is, when the set value is changed, various control devices (main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 execute the initialization process. Since the setting change operation is performed by the operator manually pressing the setting switch 110c, the period required for the setting change operation varies greatly depending on the operation skill level of the operator and the setting value to be changed.

In such a situation, if various control devices execute the initial setting process when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the various control devices depend on the presence or absence of the setting change operation and the length of the period required for the setting change operation. An event may occur in which the end order of the initial setting processing in is different. For example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without executing the setting change operation, the initial setting process of the main control device 110 ends before the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the setting change operation is performed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in order to execute the above, an event may occur in which the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed before the initial setting process of the main control device 110.

In recent years, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute various monitoring processes in order to prevent an act (illegal act) of trying to obtain a prize ball from the pachinko machine 10 by an inappropriate method. In particular, it is configured so that strict monitoring processing is executed for actions such as turning off the power or turning on the power. That is, when a special control means (illegal board) is attached to the pachinko machine 10 as an illegal act, it is necessary to shut off the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 once, and in order to play a game using the illegal board, Since it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, strict monitoring processing is executed for turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 and turning on the power.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the content of the initialization process (process flow) executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is properly shut off and the power is turned on is fixed, so that the pachinko machine is configured. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the content (process flow) of the initialization process executed when the power of 10 is turned off or turned on is appropriate. However, as described above, if an event occurs in which the end order of the initial setting processing in the various control devices differs depending on the presence or absence of the setting change operation and the length of the period required for the setting change operation, the pachinko machine 10 can be properly used. Multiple patterns will occur in the content (process flow) of the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned off and on, and it is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on. There is a problem that it is difficult to determine whether or not the content (process flow) of the initialization process to be performed is appropriate.

Further, conventionally, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control process that affects the game result (whether or not to determine whether or not to give a prize ball to the player and whether or not to set a game state in which it is easy to give a prize ball). The main control device 110, which is the main control means, executes the process for determining By executing effects based on various commands transmitted to the lamp control device 113 and received by the voice lamp control device 113, it is easy for the player to understand the results of various control processes executed by the main control means. It is configured to notify you.

Then, in order to prevent the contents of various control processes executed by the main control means (main control device 110), that is, the contents of the main control process from being tampered with, the command transmission direction is subordinated from the main control means. It is configured in one direction to the control means. Therefore, the main control means side cannot grasp the progress status of the initial setting process on the slave control means side. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, if an event occurs in which the end order of the initial setting processing in various control devices differs depending on the presence or absence of the setting change operation and the length of the period required for the setting change operation, it is mainly caused. Even if a command for indicating the result of the main control process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in a state where the initial setting process of the control means (main control device 110) is completed, the slave control means (voice lamp control device 113) ) If the initial setting process is not completed, proper processing cannot be executed for the sent command, and an effect different from the processing content of the main control process is executed, which puzzles the player. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is completed and the initial stage of the voice lamp control device 113 regardless of whether the setting change operation is executed or not. It is configured so that the relationship with the timing at which the setting process is completed is constant. Specifically, it is a process that is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the setting change operation as the initial setting process of the main control device 110, and when the setting change operation is executed, it is executed after the setting change operation is completed. At the stage of executing the specific process, a specific command indicating that the specific process has been executed is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 side performs the initial setting process based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to execute a part and then wait for the execution of the remaining initial setting process until a specific command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

With this configuration, it is possible to fix the processing content (processing completion order) of the initial setting processing of various control devices that is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is properly turned on. Further, even when a one-way communication mode is used from the main control means (main control device 110) to the slave control means (voice lamp control device 113), appropriate processing is executed by various control devices. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 (see FIG. 99) is configured to execute the display control of the third symbol display device 81 formed by the liquid crystal display, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In that case, the boot process for activating the liquid crystal display is executed based on the power-on. The third symbol display device 81 is configured so that the display control device 114 receives a display command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 and displays an image based on the received display command. There is. As an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the frame button 22 (see FIG. 99) has been operated by the player, and the stage (see FIG. 99) is based on the determination result. A display command for changing the display mode of the background image) is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 changes the stage (background image) based on the received display command and displays the display. ..

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a function (setting function) capable of changing the set value (big hit probability), and whether or not there is a setting change operation and the period required for the setting change operation. The length of the processing period of the initial setting processing of the main control device 110 differs depending on the length of the main control device 110. Since the timing of completing the initial setting process of the main control device 110 and the timing of completing the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to be the same, the main control device 110 Depending on the length of the processing period of the initial setting process, the length of the period from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed is also set depending on whether or not there is a setting change operation. It depends on the length of the period required for the change operation.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, it is possible to give a certain relationship between the timing at which the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed and the timing at which the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed. For example, when the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed earlier than the boot process of the third symbol display device 81, or when the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed earlier than the initial setting process of the third symbol display device 81. In some cases, the boot process may complete faster.

Therefore, even when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display command for changing the display mode of the stage (background image) to the display control device 114, the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 Is not completed, the display on the stage (background image) corresponding to the transmitted display command cannot be executed, and the stage being displayed that is grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is shown. There is a problem that the stage information of the above is different from the stage actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a prohibition period for prohibiting transmission of a display command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is set. 3 A state in which the third symbol display device 81 is not started (a state in which the boot process is not completed) by configuring the symbol display device 81 to execute for a specific period longer than the period until the boot process is completed. It is possible to prevent the display command from being transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, but with such a configuration, for example, the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed. When it takes a long time to do so, that is, when the setting change operation is executed, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the display on the display control device 114 even though the third symbol display device 81 is running. Since the prohibition period in which the transmission of the command is prohibited continues, there is a problem that the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced by using the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the completion timing of the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 and the completion timing of the boot process for activating the third symbol display device 81. , Whether or not a prohibited section for prohibiting transmission of a display command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is set, and the length of the prohibited section can be determined.

With this configuration, the accuracy of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be improved, and the effect according to the content of the main control process executed by the main control means (main control means) can be improved. Can be executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a procedure (setting confirmation operation) for confirming the setting will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 (e) to 84 (g). In order to confirm the setting, first, the setting key 110b is rotated to the ON position in the state where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, as in the setting change operation (see FIG. 84 (e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, while keeping it off), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 84 (f)). When the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting value currently set for the setting value display device 110a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 84 (f), a state in which "3" is set as a set value is shown. When the confirmation of the setting by the operator is completed, the setting confirmation state is ended by rotating the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state shifts to the state in which the normal game is possible (see FIG. 82 (g)).

In the first embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be deleted so that the setting can be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, every time the setting key 110b is rotated 60 degrees, the setting is 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 ... By pulling out the key part of the setting key 110b from the keyhole part, a normal game is possible. It may be configured to return. With such a configuration, the configuration of the setting changing mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, the setting changing mechanism is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, that is, at a position that cannot be visually recognized by the player during the game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the setting change mechanism from being operated during the game. Further, when actually performing the setting change operation, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. In the open state, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft. If the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in such a situation and the return operation of the decorative accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is executed, an excessive load is applied to the opening / closing shaft and the like, resulting in damage. There is a possibility of inviting.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the return operation of the accessory is executed after the standby process of waiting for the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed. That is, it is configured so that the return operation of the accessory is not executed during the setting change operation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 is damaged due to the return operation of the accessory being executed during the setting change operation. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can be made less likely to vibrate during the setting change operation, as compared with the case where the return operation of the accessory is executed while the operator is operating the setting switch 110c. It is possible to prevent the erroneous operation of 110c from occurring.

In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 122 is always set to ON when the setting change operation is executed. Therefore, for example, the state in which the probability change state advantageous to the player is set is maintained. The setting change operation cannot be performed. That is, the game state set after the setting change operation is executed becomes the initial state (normal state). Therefore, it is possible to unify the game conditions other than the difference in the jackpot probability based on the set value for the game executed after the setting change operation is performed, so that it is easy to provide a fair game to the player. can do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 98, an effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the upper two-thirds is the main display area Dm that mainly displays the third symbol in a variable manner. The lower one-third of the area other than the above is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

In the present embodiment, as described above, by using a configuration in which each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom to display a variable display, and then is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination of symbols (display mode). , Provides the enjoyment of letting the player predict in which display mode the third symbol will be stopped and displayed in the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the display of the result of the special symbol lottery (variable display period). However, it is sufficient to dynamically display the third symbol until the third symbol (identification information) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. For example, on the effective line L1. A dynamic display mode in which a plurality of identification information is switched and displayed may be used, or a dynamic display mode in which a plurality of (four or more) identification information is moved so as to float in the display area may be used. ..

Further, according to the example shown with reference to FIG. 85, a mode in which a symbol imitating a number is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) is used as the third symbol, but the result of a special symbol lottery is displayed to the player. Other modes may be used as long as they can be shown. For example, a plurality of images imitating characters may be dynamically displayed instead of numbers, or the main display area Dm may be used. A moving image with a story may be displayed in the above, and the result of the special symbol lottery may be notified to the player based on the result of the story. That is, any mode can provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the result of the special symbol lottery by using the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the display of the lottery result. Aspects may be used.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which the hold symbol on which the change is executed is moved and displayed when the hold ball held in the main display area Dm is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). is there. The reserved symbol moved to the execution display area is displayed with a symbol larger than the reserved symbol so that the variation of the corresponding special symbol can be identified as being executed. It should be noted that, when the fluctuation is executed, the color of the symbol is changed or the pattern of the symbol is changed to suggest the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol.

The small area Ds2 is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entry port 64, the right second entry opening 640r, and the second entry opening 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and the preview effect image. Further, in the small area Ds2, a character display area C in which a character image for guiding the game content is displayed is set. In this character display area, the character's comment is displayed, and the character's facial expression and gesture are displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding the player in an easy-to-understand manner about the content of the game to be executed in the future and the content of the effect to be executed in the future. Is configured to be variably displayed. In this way, by using the specific area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as the guidance area for the game (effect), the game can be easily understood even when a plurality of pieces of information are displayed in overlapping periods. Can be provided. The detailed guidance display mode using the character display area C will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 98.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are visibly displayed, so that a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 displays the pedestal m0 for the running symbol indicating that the reserved ball corresponding to the special symbol being executed is an area to be moved and displayed. As shown in (a), when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed, a round symbol is displayed. Of the reserved symbols (round symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the round symbol displayed on the leftmost side indicating that the most reserved order is first is hidden, and then the small area is displayed. A round symbol having a diameter larger than that of the reserved symbol is displayed in Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 are displayed by moving the reserved symbols displayed side by side to the position where the hidden leftmost reserved symbol was displayed. Will be done. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as a symbol being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is started, the selected fluctuation pattern, and the like. Then, the color and the symbol of the running symbol are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed and the selected fluctuation pattern from the running symbol displayed in the small area Ds1, and the game Can improve the interest of. The pattern being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, the pattern, etc. at the start of the change, but also the effect of changing the special symbol within the period of change. For example, the timing at which the third symbol switches from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation and the reach display mode (display mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and the middle symbol is scrolled). It is executed at the timing or at the timing when a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 85 (b), in the small area Ds2, a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that the reserved symbol indicating that the variation order is the first reserved symbol is displayed is an area. It is displayed on the far left. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, the second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reserved order is second, the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 indicating that the reserved order is third, and the reserved order. The 4th reserved symbol pedestal m4 indicating that is the 4th, the 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the holding order is the 5th, and the 6th reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the holding order is the 6th. m6, the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the holding order is the 7th, and the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the holding order is the 8th are in a state where the reserved symbols are not displayed. Is also displayed.

When the number of reserved symbols is not displayed in excess of a predetermined number, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8. The reserved number suggestion symbol P is formed in a variable lid shape in which the character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5. Similarly, the character "6" indicating that the holding order is the sixth is displayed on the upper part of the 6th reserved symbol pedestal m6, and the holding order is 7 on the upper part of the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7. A variable lid shape in which the character "7" indicating that it is the second is displayed, and the character "8" indicating that the holding order is the eighth is displayed on the upper part of the pedestal m8 for the eighth reserved symbol. It is composed of the symbols of.

As shown in FIG. 85 (b), when the number of reserved symbols is 0, the number of reserved symbols suggesting symbol P spans the area from the 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the maximum number of reserved symbols is eight in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, a maximum of 4 is set for the first special symbol and a maximum of 4 is set for the second special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the maximum number is set by combining the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85B, the reserved symbol pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed in order to notify the player that the maximum number of reserved symbols that can be displayed is eight. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved symbol pedestals m1 to m8 may not be displayed.

On the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, a character display pedestal C1 indicating that the area is for displaying the advance notice character is displayed. With this configuration, even when the advance notice character is not displayed, the player can confirm the area where the character is displayed in advance, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a hold look-ahead effect, which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. This hold look-ahead effect is a state in which a new special symbol change cannot be started, for example, a state in which the special symbol change is being executed or a jackpot game is being executed, and the first entrance 64 Alternatively, the content of the reserved ball (winning information) acquired based on the game ball entering the right second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640 is before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. This is an effect for suggesting in advance the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed in the future to the player by discriminating (pre-reading) and using the discriminating result (pre-reading result).

By executing this hold look-ahead effect, the result of the special symbol lottery can be suggested to the player from a time before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. Therefore, for example, the look-ahead result is a big hit. In some cases, it is possible to suggest that the player is likely to win the jackpot for a longer period of time. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation of the jackpot winning for the player for a long period of time, and it is longer than the period (variable period) from the actual execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result. Since the look-ahead effect can be executed using the look-ahead effect period, it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect to be executed.

When it is determined that the hold look-ahead effect is to be executed based on the look-ahead result, the hold symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds in order to notify the player of the hold symbol that is the target of the hold look-ahead effect. Of these, the display mode of a specific reserved symbol is changed. On the display screen shown in FIG. 86A, the display mode of the reserved symbol (reserved symbol with the number 4) displayed on the pedestal m4 for the fourth reserved symbol is variably displayed.

Then, the display mode of the hold symbol that is the target of the hold look-ahead effect is changed at various timings, and the hold symbol (the hold symbol with the number 4) that is the target of the hold look-ahead effect is executed. When the pedestal for the middle symbol is moved to m0, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol to be the target of the reserved look-ahead effect is executed. That is, in the example using FIG. 86, the period from when the reserved symbol to be the pending look-ahead effect is displayed on the pedestal m4 for the 4th reserved symbol until the special symbol lottery is actually executed is the target. It is possible to execute the hold look-ahead effect for a period longer than the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display.

Although detailed description is omitted, the effect mode for changing the display mode of the hold symbol to be the hold look-ahead effect is determined based on the result of the look-ahead process (preliminary hit / fail judgment result) and the number of reserved balls. For example, the timing at which the reserved symbol that is the target of the hold look-ahead effect is displayed, the timing at which the display position of the hold symbol shifts (shifts), and the execution during the hold look-ahead effect. It is determined in which display mode the specific effect is variably displayed with respect to the timing when the specific effect is executed in the variable effect for showing the special symbol lottery result of the above and the timing when the player operates the frame button 22. In the hold look-ahead effect that is executed over a long period of time in this way, the player feels uncomfortable by determining the effect mode that defines the display mode to be changed at which timing during the effect period. It is possible to facilitate a series of effects that are not given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the content of the effect executed when the acquired reserved balls reach the upper limit number (8 pieces) will be described. FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit (8), and FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram showing an effect at the upper limit of hold. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen which is displayed in case.

In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, it is determined whether or not the acquired reserved balls include winning information indicating a jackpot winning, and based on the determination result, the holding upper limit time effect is executed. It is configured to do. Then, a production mode (fish school festival) for notifying that the winning information indicating the jackpot winning is included (notifying that the jackpot is won) and a production mode (chance notification) for notifying that the expectation for winning the jackpot is high. ) And, it is configured so that the effect at the upper limit of hold can be executed.

More specifically, a hold ball number command indicating that a hold ball has been acquired is output from the main control device 110, and is executed when the hold ball number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113. In the reception process (see S2208 in FIG. 145), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit based on the command for the number of reserved balls received this time (S2304), and when the upper limit is reached, the effect selection at the upper limit of hold is selected. With reference to Table 222e (see FIG. 110 (b)), the effect mode (effect pattern) to be executed is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the hold upper limit time effect can be executed in the determined effect mode, and if it is in an executable state, the hold upper limit time effect is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to various effects executed based on the special symbol lottery, the elapsed time since the power is turned on is determined based on the time information, and the elapsed time is different based on the elapsed time. It is configured so that the effect of the aspect (period effect) can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to have a plurality of pachinko machines 10 execute a period effect at the same timing. Therefore, by executing an integrated effect using the plurality of pachinko machines 10, It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect as compared with the case where the effect is executed by only one pachinko machine 10.

However, if the period during which this period effect is executed and the period during which the above-mentioned hold upper limit effect is executed overlap, the display modes of each effect are mixed, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. There was a problem that it would be done. Further, as described above, since the period effect is to execute the same effect on a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same timing, it is determined whether or not the period effect is executed according to the game situation of each pachinko machine 10. However, if the execution timing of the period effect is delayed, there is a problem that the effect of the period effect is significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for executing the look-ahead effect (hold look-ahead effect, hold upper limit time effect) is satisfied, the effect mode of the look-ahead effect that can be executed is determined, and then the look-ahead effect can be executed. Whether or not it is a situation is determined based on the time information, and if the situation cannot be executed, the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the period effect and the execution period of the look-ahead effect from overlapping, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

Furthermore, based on the number of reserved balls to be the target of the look-ahead effect and the result of the special symbol lottery executed until the end of the look-ahead effect, the upper limit period of the effect period of the look-ahead effect that can be executed is calculated and calculated. It is configured to determine whether or not the upper limit period and the period during which the period effect is executed overlap. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the look-ahead effect as compared with the case where the prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect is uniquely defined based on the execution timing of the period effect.

That is, the look-ahead effect is to execute the look-ahead process on the acquired reserved ball and notify (suggest) the player of the effect based on the look-ahead result in advance before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. ), And the execution period varies greatly depending on the number of reserved balls that are the target of the look-ahead effect. Therefore, when the prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect is specified without specifying the content (effect period) of the look-ahead effect that is actually executed, the look-ahead effect that is the longest effect period, that is, the hold ball This is a look-ahead effect that is executed over the period during which the special symbol lottery for the maximum number of (8 in this embodiment) is executed, and the period until the result of each special symbol lottery is displayed (special). Even if the longest period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the variable display period of the symbol, it is prohibited so that the period in which the look-ahead effect is executed and the period in which the period effect is executed do not overlap. It was necessary to specify the period.

By defining the prohibition period in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the look-ahead effect and the period effect from being executed in duplicate, but the prohibition period becomes unnecessarily long, and the look-ahead effect There was a problem that the execution frequency was significantly reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect period of the look-ahead effect that can be actually executed is specified, it is determined whether or not the specified effect period overlaps with the period effect, and only when it is determined that the period effect overlaps, the look-ahead It is configured to prohibit the execution of the production. With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the look-ahead effect in which a shorter effect period is set, as compared with the case where a specific prohibited period is specified.

Here, with reference to FIG. 89B, the relationship between the type of look-ahead effect and the look-ahead prohibition period will be described. FIG. 89B is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of look-ahead effect and the look-ahead prohibition period. As shown in FIG. 89B, it was determined that a prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect can be set for the period during which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed, and that the look-ahead effect is executed. When the timing corresponds to the above-mentioned prohibition period, the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited. The types of look-ahead effect include normal look-ahead that does not go through the jackpot game period (look-ahead with a relatively short look-ahead effect period) and jackpot time look-ahead through the jackpot game period (look-ahead with a relatively long look-ahead effect period). Therefore, the length of the look-ahead prohibition period is different depending on the type of look-ahead effect that can be set as the look-ahead effect to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the look-ahead effect in which a shorter effect period is set, as compared with the case where a specific prohibited period is specified.

In addition, three or more types of look-ahead effects may be provided. In this case, as an element for roughly specifying the effect period of the look-ahead effects, a special symbol variation executed during the look-ahead effects is performed in addition to the presence or absence of the jackpot game. The number of times and the special symbol fluctuation time may be used as factors.

Returning to FIG. 87 (b), the description will be continued. When the "fish school festival" is decided as the effect at the upper limit of the hold, the eight hold symbols (8 hold symbols with the numbers 1 to 8 displayed in the small area Ds2 of FIG. 87 (a)) are attached. ) Is digested, and a fish school festival production is performed as a series of productions. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the fish school festival effect is executed, the display area HR1 is formed above the main display area Dm, and the characters “fish school festival rush” are displayed as telops. Then, on the right side of the main display area Dm, the display mode in which the school of fish is waiting is displayed. Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, pseudo symbol variation that is continuously displayed in a variable manner is executed until the fish school festival effect is completed (until the special symbol that wins the jackpot is stopped and displayed).

Further, during the period when the fish school festival effect is being executed, the reserved symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds2, and is continuously displayed on the pedestal m0 for the executing symbol in the small area Ds1 until the fish school festival effect is completed. Pseudo-holding symbol tm0 is displayed. That is, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special symbol lottery has been executed during the fish school festival production. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the fish school festival production will continue. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which reserved symbol was used to win the jackpot.

In the figure shown in FIG. 87 (b), the display area HR2 and the display area HR3 are formed in the main display area Dm, and the third symbol that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the actual special symbol fluctuation is actually displayed in the display area HR3. Information indicating the number of reserved symbols is displayed in the display area HR2. As a result, the actual game situation can be notified even during the fish school festival production in which the pseudo fluctuation display and the pseudo execution symbol display are executed. When the display area HR2 and the display area HR3 are formed, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the information displayed in each display area (the actual number of reserved symbols and the fluctuation status of the third symbol). It is good to display it. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect of the fish school festival effect in which the pseudo variable display and the pseudo running symbol display are executed from being lowered.

Further, in the case where the actual number of reserved symbols and the fluctuation status of the third symbol can be notified during the fish school festival production, the area different from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, the game board 13 Depending on the lighting mode of the provided LED, the actual number of reserved symbols and the fluctuation status of the third symbol may be notified. As a result, it is surely prevented that the player who is watching the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the fish school festival production grasps the actual change in the number of reserved symbols and the change status of the third symbol. can do. Further, during the period during which the fish school festival effect is being executed, the actual number of reserved symbols and the fluctuation status of the third symbol may not be notified.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 displayed on the executing symbol pedestal m0 of the small area Ds1 during the fish school festival production is displayed in a display mode with a plurality of stars. There is. Although detailed description is omitted, the display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 is determined based on the information (the number of jackpots included in the hold) referred to when determining the effect mode of the effect at the time of the upper limit of hold. Therefore, the larger the number of stars, the higher the possibility that many jackpots are included in the hold. In addition, the display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 may be configured to be variably displayed during the production period of the fish school festival production, and in this case, the number of stars is increased during the production period of the fish school festival production. It is good to make it variable display. As a result, the player can be interested in the fish school festival effect to be executed even after the fish school festival effect is executed, that is, even after it is notified that the jackpot will be won soon. Further, as a display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 during the production period of the fish school festival effect, a variable display pattern in which the number of stars is reduced may be provided. In this case, it is possible to provide a new playability in which the fish school festival production is expected to end with a large number of stars. Further, when a variable pattern in which the number of stars is increased or decreased is provided as a display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 in a configuration such as the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment in which the end timing of the fish school festival production is difficult to understand. Since it is difficult to predict the end timing of the fish school festival production and the transition of the number of stars, always be interested in the transition status of the number of stars until the fish school festival production is completed. Can be done.

The display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 displayed during the fish school festival production may be determined based on information other than the number of jackpots in the hold. For example, the jackpot winning is first performed after the fish school festival production is executed. It may be determined based on the number of reserved symbols consumed by the time, or it may be determined based on the set values (“1” to “3”) set in the pachinko machine 10. Further, each of the above-mentioned requirements may be combined and determined. Here, when determining the display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 by combining a plurality of requirements, one requirement is advantageous to the player and the other requirement is disadvantageous to the player, and one It is preferable to configure so that the same display mode can be easily determined depending on whether the requirement is disadvantageous to the player and the other requirements are advantageous to the player.

Specifically, as a display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0, a display mode in which the number of stars is "3" is easily determined, and the number of jackpots in the hold is one, which is set in the pachinko machine 10. When the set value is 3, that is, when the requirement indicating the number of jackpots in the hold is disadvantageous to the player and the requirement indicating the set value is favorable to the player, and in the hold. When the number of jackpots is 3 and the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 is 1, that is, the requirement for indicating the number of jackpots in hold is advantageous to the player, and the set value is set. It may be configured to specify when the requirements shown are in a disadvantageous situation for the player. With this configuration, when a display mode with three stars is displayed as a display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 during the fish school festival production, the player has a low set value but many big hits. While assuming that is in the hold or the number of big hits in the hold is small but the set value is high, the fish school festival production will be watched until the big hit is actually won.

Therefore, it is predicted that the longer the period from the execution of the fish school festival production to the winning of the jackpot, the smaller the number of jackpots in the hold, and the higher the set value is expected. As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the progress of the production while predicting the advantageous degree of the plurality of requirements in a complex manner, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

The display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 displayed during the fish school festival production may be determined under other conditions, for example, a specific display mode displayed only when a plurality of requirements are advantageous (for example). , The number of stars is 7) may be specified. With this configuration, it is possible to entertain the fish school festival production with peace of mind for the player who has displayed the specific display mode.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, when the fish school festival production progresses after the display screen shown in FIG. 87 (b) is displayed and the special symbol change in which the jackpot is won is executed, the position is on the right side of the main display area Dm. A school of fish effect is executed in which the waiting school of fish moves to the left so as to cover the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and then the symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won. An effect of notifying the player that the winner has been won is executed.

In the present embodiment, the pseudo symbol variation display is executed until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the jackpot was won during the fish school festival production, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the target to be variablely displayed in the main display area Dm may be switched from the pseudo symbol to the third symbol according to the timing when the jackpot variation of the special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the effect data corresponding to the mode in which the symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect data for variablely displaying the pseudo symbol, and the amount of the effect data can be reduced. it can.

That is, when the fish school festival effect is executed, the speed is such that it is difficult for the player to identify each symbol displayed in the variable display as the effect data corresponding to the variable display of the pseudo symbol executed in the main display area Dm. Only the effect data corresponding to the mode of variable display at (high speed) is facilitated, and the pseudo symbol is fluctuated at high speed until the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol is executed. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, the variation display of the third symbol during the high-speed fluctuation is executed instead of the pseudo symbol during the high-speed fluctuation. In this case, since the variation display of the third symbol uses the variation effect that starts the high-speed variation at the start of the special symbol variation even in the normal state, the variation effect of the third symbol in the normal state (big hit variation effect). ) Is applied. As a result, it is possible to stop and display the symbol indicating the jackpot winning in the fish school festival production without using the dedicated production data. Furthermore, since the timing of switching from the pseudo symbol to the third symbol is set during high-speed fluctuation of the symbol, even if the type of symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is different at the moment of switching, the player will notice the situation. Since it is possible to make it difficult to perform, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above-mentioned example, an example is shown in which the player is configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort when switching between the pseudo-symbol variation display and the third symbol variation display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to switch between the pseudo-symbol variation display and the third symbol variation display so as to intentionally give a sense of discomfort. For example, the variation display speed is lower than the above-mentioned high speed. In a situation where the symbols are variablely displayed at a low speed so that the player can identify each symbol in the variable display, or in a situation where at least one symbol is stopped and displayed, the pseudo symbolic variable display is changed. It may be configured to switch to the variable display of three symbols. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to know that the variation display of the third symbol has been executed (the jackpot variation of the special symbol has started), so that the special symbol can be displayed. A player who wants to know the jackpot winning timing as soon as possible can pay attention to the variable display contents of the symbols executed during the fish school festival production in order to find the switching timing of the symbols.

In the present embodiment, the fish school festival effect is executed only in the situation where at least one pending symbol for winning the jackpot is included in the hold, but the jackpot is not limited to this and the jackpot is won in the hold. It may be configured to be executable only when there are two or more reserved symbols to be executed. With this configuration, the added value of the fish school festival production can be further increased. Further, the fish school festival effect may be executed even in a part (for example, 1%) when there is no jackpot hold in the hold. As a result, when the fish school festival effect is executed, there is a slight possibility that the jackpot will not be won, so that the player can play a game with a sense of tension until the jackpot is won.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the content of the period effect to be executed when the elapsed time from the power on to the pachinko machine 10 reaches a predetermined period will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has an RTC (real-time clock) for measuring the current time, and has elapsed since the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 10 based on the time information measured by the RTC. When a predetermined time (about 2 hours) elapses, a period effect (SP time) of about 3 minutes is executed. Normally, in a pachinko hall, the work of turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time is executed. Therefore, in a pachinko hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the same type are installed, the power is adjusted to a specific timing. Period production (SP time) is executed all at once. By configuring the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to perform the same period effect at the same timing in this way, the effect of the effect in the pachinko hall can be significantly improved.

In the present embodiment, the period effect is executed based on the elapsed time since the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time measured by the RTC becomes a predetermined time. In addition, it may be configured to execute a period effect. With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10 is different, or if a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 10 and it is necessary to temporarily shut off the power, a plurality of pachinko machines By configuring 10 to perform the same period effect at the same timing, the effect of the effect in the pachinko hall can be significantly improved.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 108, but in the present embodiment, the effect period in the pachinko machine 10 is set to the normal effect period, the SP time period, and the SP time period based on the time information measured by the RTC. It is configured to be switchable with the SP time preparation period, which indicates that it will arrive soon. When the normal effect period is set as the effect period, the normal effect is executed regardless of the time information measured by the RTC. In addition, when the SP time preparation period is set, the same mode of effect as the normal effect period is executed, and as a display mode indicating that the SP time period is about to come, "SP time will start soon". The comment "" is displayed as a telop in the display area HR1 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the SP time period comes when the remaining time until the SP time period reaches 30 seconds. A countdown display is executed to show the number of seconds until.

Then, when the SP time period is set, the dedicated stage (background image) is displayed, and the dedicated music is output from the audio output device 226. In the present embodiment, the switching timing of the normal production period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period is predetermined, and after the normal production period of 90 to 120 minutes, the SP time preparation period of about 2 minutes is set. After that, an SP time period of about 3 minutes is set. That is, it is stipulated that the SP time period is shorter than the normal production period. With this configuration, it is possible to add value to various effects performed during the SP time period, so that the player playing the game of the pachinko machine 10 can have the next SP time. It is possible to make the player want to continue the game until the period is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable effect executed during the SP time period corresponds to the variable effect corresponding to the variable effect executed during the normal effect period (the effect executed based on the special symbol lottery). Regardless of the result of the lottery, it is possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, when the variable effect is executed during the SP time period, the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the current set value is executed as compared with the case where the variable effect is executed during the normal effect period. It is configured to be easy. With this configuration, the player's willingness to play during the SP time period can be further enhanced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is easily executed by the variable effect executed during the SP time period. Therefore, in the state where the SP time period is set, the player who has not fired the ball (the player who has not executed the special symbol lottery) is configured so that the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. With this configuration, the player's willingness to play during the SP time period can be further enhanced.

In the game machine configured in this way, by executing many special symbol lottery during the SP time period, many setting suggestion effects can be executed, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. Although it was possible, for example, if a big hit was won immediately after the SP time period was set, many special symbol lottery could not be executed during the SP time period, and the current set value for the player. There was a problem that it became difficult to provide information for guessing. In other words, a situation that is advantageous to the player, such as winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery, creates a situation that is disadvantageous to the player (a situation where it is difficult to collect information for estimating the set value), and the big hit is won. There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced depending on the timing of the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect period (normal effect period, SP time preparation period, SP time period) set in the pachinko machine 10 at the execution timing (start timing) of the jackpot game and the end of the jackpot game Based on the production period (normal production period, SP time preparation period, SP time period) set in the pachinko machine 10 at the timing, the production mode of the jackpot game production executed during the jackpot game and the end screen of the jackpot game. It is configured to determine the display mode displayed in.

Specifically, when it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect using the variable effect due to the execution of the jackpot game, the setting suggestion effect is easily executed as the jackpot game effect. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play even if the jackpot game is executed during a period including at least the SP time period.

Here, with reference to FIG. 88 (a), the production content of the effect (period effect) executed during the SP time period (SP time) will be described. FIG. 88A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when about 50 seconds have elapsed since the SP time was set. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the SP time is set, a background image (stage) that is more brilliant than the normal production period is displayed and displayed as a background image (stage) of the main display area Dm as a period effect. In the area HR1, a comment "during SP time" is displayed as a telop as a notification mode for notifying the player that the current SP time period is in progress. Further, in the display area HR4 formed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, the remaining time display mode for indicating the remaining time of the SP time period is displayed, and in FIG. 88A, the remaining time is 2 A display mode indicating that the time is 10 minutes is displayed.

In addition, display areas HR5 and HR6 are formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and the command content (mission content) to be executed during the SP time period and the current achievement level for the mission content are displayed. To. Here, in the present embodiment, as an added value that can be given to the player during the SP time period, a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the current set value can be executed. Then, when the mission content displayed in the display areas HR5 and HR6 is cleared, the setting suggestion effect can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mission contents set during the SP time period are a mission content that is easy to achieve (first mission content) and a mission content that is harder to achieve than the first mission content (second mission content). It is configured so that one mission content can be selected from a plurality of mission contents including ,. Then, the selection ratio of each mission content is configured to be different according to the set value of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, the mission content itself set during the SP time period also includes an element for estimating the set value, and new information for estimating the set value by achieving the set mission. It is configured so that you can acquire. With this configuration, it is possible to add value (setting guessing factor) to the player who could not complete the mission during the SP time period, so that the game can be played during the SP time period. You can enthusiastically play games to go. In addition, by completing the mission, it is possible to add more value (setting guessing factor), so that the player can play the game more enthusiastically.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 88 (a), as the mission content, when the number of special symbol changes executed during the SP time period reaches 30 times, or the number of reach effects executed during the SP time period. Indicates that the mission to be achieved when the number reaches 5 times is set, and the character "number of fluctuations" indicating that the number of special symbol changes is the target is displayed in the display area HR5, and the mission "30" is displayed in the achievement number Pb indicating the number of times to achieve the above, and "5" is displayed in the current number Pa indicating the number of times executed at the present time (the number of special symbol changes). Then, the character "reach number" indicating that the number of reach effects is the target is displayed in the display area HR6, and "5" is displayed in the achievement number Pd indicating the number of times to complete the mission. "0" is displayed in the current number of times Pc indicating the number of times of execution (the number of times of reach effect).

That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 88A is in a state in which the fifth special symbol change is executed after the SP time period is set, and the reach effect is executed even once during the SP time period. It is a display screen which shows that it is not in the state.

An example of a state in which 1 minute and 5 seconds have passed since the display screen shown in FIG. 88 (a) is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b). FIG. 88B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when 2 minutes 55 seconds have elapsed since the SP time period was set. As shown in the display area HR5, the state shown in FIG. 88 (b) is a state in which the number of special symbol changes executed during the SP time period is 30 and the mission is achieved. Then, in the central part of the main display area Dm, as a value-added effect given when the mission is achieved, a treasure box 801 and a button icon 802 for guiding the player to press the frame button 22 are provided. Is displayed. When the player presses the frame button 22 in this state, the effect of opening the treasure box 801 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the effect content when the frame button 22 is pressed while the display screen shown in FIG. 88 (b) is displayed will be described. FIG. 89A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a privilege (setting estimation element) is given based on the achievement of a mission during the SP time period. FIG. 89A shows a state in which the frame button 22 is pressed while the display screen of FIG. 88B described above is displayed, and 2 seconds have elapsed, and the display area HR4 shows a state in which 2 seconds have passed. The remaining time display mode indicating that the remaining time is 2 seconds is displayed.

Then, the treasure box 801 is opened, and "A" is displayed as the setting estimation element 801a. In addition, the characters "clear" indicating that the mission corresponding to the number of special symbol changes shown in the display area HR5 has been completed are displayed.

When the mission is completed during the SP time period and the setting estimation element 801a is given (displayed), the display area HR7 is formed, and the already acquired setting estimation element 801a is displayed as a history. doing. With this configuration, when a plurality of setting estimation elements 801a are acquired during one SP time period, the set value actually set by looking at the history display displayed in the display area HR7. Can be easily predicted.

Here, the contents of the setting estimation element given to the player when the setting suggestion effect is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, as the mode of the setting guessing element that can be given to the player, the mode "A" having a low setting guessing effect, which is selected at substantially the same ratio regardless of the set value, is currently set. There is a slight possibility that the set value being set is not the most disadvantageous setting value (setting 1) for the player, and the currently set setting value is a high setting (setting 3). The mode "C" indicating that, the mode "D" indicating that the currently set setting value is likely to be a high setting (setting 3), and the currently set setting value are set high (setting). Aspect "E" indicating that 3) is determinable.

In addition, display modes corresponding to the setting estimation elements "A" to "E" are defined for each of the various effect modes executed as the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion element given by the current setting suggestion effect is first determined, and then the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the determined setting suggestion element is determined. It is configured to be done. When a plurality of setting suggestion elements can be added in one setting suggestion effect, it is preferable to predefine the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the combination of the plurality of setting suggestion elements. .. With this configuration, for example, when two aspects "D" are determined as a plurality of setting estimation elements, it is more than when one aspect "D" and one aspect "C" are determined. , It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the composite effect mode indicating that the high setting is likely to be set. Therefore, it is easier for the player to grasp the set value set when a plurality of setting guessing elements are given than when a single setting guessing element is given to the setting suggestion effect of 1. Can be executed.

The mode type of the setting estimation element is not limited to the above-mentioned modes "A" to "E", and for example, a mode type indicating that the set value is odd and an even number of set values. The mode type shown, the mode type indicating that the setting change operation has been executed, and the storage means that can store the previously set setting value are provided, and the current setting value is higher than the previously set setting value. The mode type indicating that the current set value is lower than the previously set value, the mode type indicating that the current set value is lower than the previously set value, and the like may be determinable. Further, although three types of setting values are provided as setting values of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the setting values are not limited to these, and four or more types of setting values may be set so as to be settable. By configuring the setting values of four or more types to be set in this way and increasing the mode types of the setting estimation elements, it is possible to give variation to the production mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the acquired setting estimation. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of guessing the current set value from various viewpoints based on the mode type of the element.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the setting estimation elements acquired within a predetermined period (within the SP time period) are configured to be history-displayable. In addition to this function, a plurality of setting estimation elements are estimated. When an element is acquired, each setting guess element may be offset based on a predetermined rule so that only the surplus setting guess element is displayed, or based on a plurality of acquired setting guess elements. It may be configured to display the analyzed set value prediction information. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the acquisition of too many setting estimation elements, and the more the setting estimation element is acquired, the more accurate the setting estimation is. Since it is possible to easily execute the game, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to acquire a setting guessing element.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a function of displaying the history of the setting estimation element acquired in the past, when the player ends the game, an erasing means capable of erasing the history information of the setting estimation element acquired in the past is provided. It is good to provide it. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent other players from knowing the acquired setting estimation element.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the content of the effect executed when the SP time period, which is the period effect, ends will be described. As described above, the SP time period is set based on the time information measured by the RTC. Therefore, if the SP time period ends when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation during execution is short due to the fluctuation status of the special symbol fluctuation, the SP time period is set when the residual fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation during execution is long. When it ends, there are cases where the SP time period ends without the special symbol change being executed.

Here, as described above, during the SP time period, the effect (period effect) different from that of other periods is executed, and the start timing and end timing of the period effect are specific times (specific time). ), The effect of the effect is enhanced by simultaneously executing the same effect on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

Therefore, for example, if the period effect is continued until the special symbol variation being executed ends at the end timing of the SP time period, the end timing of the period effect in each pachinko machine 10 will be different, and the effect will be produced. There was a problem that Therefore, regardless of the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol change being executed at the end timing of the SP time period, the period effect is executed in the end mode indicating that the SP time period has ended at the timing when the SP time period ends. , A technique is conceivable in which the termination mode is continued until the special symbol change during execution is completed.

By using the above-mentioned technique, it is possible to synchronize the timing at which the period effect of the end mode is executed in each pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to execute the effect with a sense of unity in the plurality of pachinko machines 10. However, for example, when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is long, the duration of the period production of the end mode is simply lengthened, and the player is asked. There was a problem that the monotonous production was reduced and the game got tired early.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the residual variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is longer than the predetermined time (20 seconds), a dedicated effect (special residual variation effect) is provided. It is configured to be executable. In this way, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied at the end timing of the period production, the special production can be executed, so that the effect of the period production can be improved, but after the period production is completed. The effect of the production can be enhanced even for the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special residual variation effect is executed according to the length of the residual variation time of the special symbol variation during execution at the end timing of the SP time period. That is, if the player who senses that the SP time period ends and stops the game just before the end of the SP time period, it becomes difficult to execute the special symbol change so as to straddle the end timing of the SP time period. Therefore, it is configured so that it is difficult to execute the special fluctuation effect.

With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically continue the game until the end of the SP time period in which the period effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a special residual variation effect, a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a set value currently set, that is, an effect including information advantageous to the player is configured to be feasible. Therefore, when the SP time period ends, the player who is motivated to acquire advantageous information is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation executed across the end timing of the SP time period. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 90A, a display screen when the special residual variation effect is executed will be described. FIG. 90A is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the period effect (SP time) is completed, and is special after the period effect is completed. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of executing a residual variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 90A, the character "SP time end" is displayed as a telop in the display area HR1 as an end guidance mode for indicating that the SP time period has ended, and remains in the display area HR4. The remaining time display mode indicating that the time is 0 seconds (end) is displayed. Then, the period until the end of the special symbol variation currently being executed (until the remaining variation time reaches 0 seconds) is the suggestion effect height at which the setting suggestion effect is executed with a high probability (higher probability than other periods). As a guidance notification mode for indicating that it is a certain period, the comment of "suggestion effect mass GET chance" is displayed in a mode in which the character J0 displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds speaks.

Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a display area HR7 is formed as a history display area for displaying the history of the effect result (effect mode) executed as the setting suggestion effect. Since the display screen shown in FIG. 90 (a) is a display screen displayed immediately after reaching the suggestion effect high accuracy period, the history of the effect result is not displayed in the display area HR7, but the suggestion effect height It is possible to display the history of a plurality of setting suggestion effects executed during the certain period.

With this configuration, when a plurality of setting suggestion effects are executed in a short period of time, at least the execution period of 1 setting suggestion effect and another setting suggestion effect different from the 1 setting suggestion effect is at least. Even if the player cannot grasp all of the plurality of setting suggestion effects being executed when a part is executed in duplicate, by grasping the contents (effect results) displayed in the history display area. It is possible to easily grasp the contents of the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed.

The display mode displayed in this history display area may be a display mode for showing the effect mode of the actually executed setting suggestion effect, or the setting suggestion content included in the actually executed setting suggestion effect. It may be a display mode for showing. Here, as an effect mode of the setting suggestion effect actually executed, for example, one character can be displayed from a plurality of characters as the setting suggestion effect, and the setting suggestion content (setting suggestion content according to the type of the displayed character). For example, if the set values are different, suggesting that they are even numbers, suggesting that they are odd numbers, or suggesting that they are not specific setting values). , It is preferable to configure the history display area to display a display mode in which the player can identify the type of the character displayed as the setting suggestion effect (for example, an icon mode imitating a character image).

When executing such a setting suggestion effect, since there are a plurality of types of effect modes for showing the same setting suggestion content, the player is set based on the plurality of display modes displayed in the history display area. It can provide fun to predict values.

In this embodiment, the display mode displayed in the display area HR7 (history display area) is displayed until a predetermined period elapses (until the end of the suggestion effect high accuracy period). All or part of the display mode displayed in the display area HR7 (history display mode) can be arbitrarily deleted (hidden) by the player operating the operation means (operation button 22). You may. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the history display corresponding to the setting suggestion effect that the player has already grasped from being continuously displayed in the display area HR7. Therefore, for example, as an effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. , When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode most advantageous to the player (the effect mode for notifying that the setting is the highest setting), the display mode indicating the effect mode is continuously displayed in the history display area. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player who is not playing the game from easily grasping the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display area HR7 is configured to be formed at a specific position in the main display area Dm, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display area HR7 is configured to be able to select an arbitrary position. You may. With this configuration, the player's self-confidence can easily grasp the display mode, and the history display area can be formed in a place that is difficult for other players to grasp.

In the present embodiment, the history display area is configured to display a display mode based on the effect mode of the executed setting suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed in, for example, the history display area. When a plurality of display modes satisfy a predetermined condition, a new display mode based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be displayed. For example, as a display mode displayed in the history display area. When a predetermined number (for example, 3) of display modes (weak suggestion modes) for which it is difficult to grasp the actual set values are displayed, the display mode (strong suggestion) is easier to grasp the actual set values than the weak suggestion modes. Aspects) may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to grasp the set value when many setting suggestion effects are executed during the suggestion effect high accuracy period. Therefore, the suggestion effect high accuracy period is given to the player. It is possible to play the game while expecting that many setting suggestion effects are executed inside.

In addition, an upper limit (for example, 5) is set for the number of display modes that can be displayed in the history display area, and the display modes are displayed up to the upper limit in correspondence with the execution order of the setting suggestion effect during the suggestion effect high accuracy period. When a strong suggestion mode is displayed based on the display of a plurality of weak suggestion modes, the plurality of weak suggestion modes are deleted and a new display mode is displayed in the history display area. It may be configured so that it can be displayed.

Further, in this case, an erasing condition different from the display condition of the strong suggestion mode may be set so as to be configured so that the weak suggestion mode is erased when the erasure condition is satisfied. It is preferable to configure so that the erasing condition is satisfied when a specific effect is executed during the certain period or when the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22. As a result, more display modes can be displayed in the history display area based on the fact that the erasure condition is satisfied, so that the player can easily predict the set value.

The display modes that are deleted from the history display area based on the fact that the deletion condition is satisfied are deleted in order from the longest display period displayed in the history display area, that is, from the display mode displayed first. It is good to configure. As a result, the display mode displayed in the long-time history display area, that is, the display mode that is likely to be grasped by the player is deleted in order, and a new display mode can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from being difficult to grasp the setting suggestion content of the setting suggestion effect because the display mode is erased immediately after being displayed in the area.

Further, the type of the display mode displayed in the history display area may be determined, and the type of the display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the actual set value (for example, the weak suggestion mode) may be deleted in order. With this configuration, it becomes easier to display a display mode in which the set value can be easily predicted as the suggestion effect high accuracy period progresses. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform the game while expecting that the suggestion effect high accuracy period continues for a long time and that many setting suggestion effects are executed during that period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90B, the effect content displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestion effect high accuracy period will be described. FIG. 90B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the suggestion effect high accuracy period.

As shown in FIG. 90B, during the suggestion effect high accuracy period, the setting suggestion effect is executed using various effects. Specifically, it is displayed on the setting suggestion effects 801a and 801b corresponding to the fluctuation effects executed in the main display area Dm, and the running symbol pedestal m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. The setting suggestion effect 801c corresponding to the reserved symbol and the setting suggestion effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 are configured to be executed.

Then, the setting suggestion contents (A to D) included in the various setting suggestion effects executed during the suggestion effect high accuracy period are displayed in the history display area of the display area HR7. Further, in the upper center of the main display area Dm, the characters "5 seconds until the end of the special zone" are displayed as the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the suggestion effect high accuracy period. That is, FIG. 90B is a display screen in a state where the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation during execution is 5 seconds.

Here, the setting suggestion contents included in each effect mode of the setting suggestion effect in the present embodiment will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured so that set values having different probabilities of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery can be set in three stages (settings 1 to 3). By turning on the power while the specific operating conditions are satisfied while the power is not turned on, the setting value can be changed to the setting change state. Then, by determining the set value by performing a determination operation for determining an arbitrary set value in the setting change state, the game can be played with the game specifications (big hit probability of the special symbol) corresponding to the determined set value. Will be executed.

As described above, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol is different depending on the set value, the operation of changing the set value executed in the setting change state is a game degree for changing the degree of advantage to the player. It is a variable operation. In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the set value, but the jackpot probability of the special symbol is used as an element (setting difference element) for varying the degree of advantage to the player. Elements other than the above may be used. For example, the ratio at which the advantageous gaming state (for example, the probability variation state) that is advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state that is set after the jackpot game is completed may be used as the setting difference factor. The probability that the result of the symbol lottery is a small hit other than the big hit and the winning game different from the big hit game is executed (small hit probability) may be used as a setting difference factor, and the advantageous gaming state (advantageous gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. For example, the winning probability of the end lottery (falling lottery) for ending the probability change state (probability of ending the probability change state and shifting to another game state) may be a setting difference element. Further, the ease of executing the special symbol lottery may be used as a setting difference factor. For example, a setting difference may be provided for the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, or the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a during the game per ordinary symbol. May be different for each setting, so that the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is attached may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the set value can be changed based on the technical idea that the degree of advantage of the player differs depending on the set value set, but the setting value is not limited to this, and the degree of advantage of the player is the same. A setting difference element may be provided so that the privilege types that are easily given to the player can be different, although the degree is high. For example, when the first set value is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery is high. When the first value is set and the rate at which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends (probability change transition rate) is set to be the first rate, and a second set value different from the first set value is set. The jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery is lower than the first value (hard to win), and the rate at which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends (probability change transition rate) is higher than the first rate. It is preferable to configure it so that it has a second ratio (the probability change state is easily set).

With this configuration, it is possible to provide different game characteristics as game specifications that can give the same degree of advantage to the player, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 91, the description continues. In the present embodiment, a setting suggestion effect including a suggestion mode for suggesting a set value by using a part or all of various effects can be executed. Specifically, FIG. 90 (b) ), The setting suggestion effects 801a and 801b corresponding to the fluctuation effects executed in the main display area Dm and the pedestal m0 for the running symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds are displayed. It is configured so that the setting suggestion effect 801c corresponding to the reserved symbol and the setting suggestion effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 are executed.

The effect mode of each setting suggestion effect is predetermined according to the mode of the base effect. For example, the setting suggestion effects 801a and 801b corresponding to the variation effect are the third symbols being changed. This is an effect in which a suggestion icon for suggesting a set value pops out from the third symbol that is displayed as stopped or stopped, and different types of suggestion icons (displayed by alphabet type in the figure) are displayed according to the setting suggestion content.

The setting suggestion effect 801c corresponding to the pedestal for the running symbol m0 has a suggestion icon in the process of changing the display mode of the running symbol (displayed as a round symbol in the figure) displayed on the pedestal for the running symbol m0. In the effect to be displayed, different types of suggestion icons (displayed by alphabet type in the figure) are displayed according to the setting suggestion contents. Further, the setting suggestion effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 is an effect in which the character J0 issues a comment, and different comments (displayed by alphabet type in the figure) are displayed according to the setting suggestion content.

That is, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect to be executed is defined in advance according to the setting suggestion content and the type of the corresponding effect. By configuring in this way, the setting suggestion effect corresponding to each effect (the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery) is more than the case where the setting suggestion effect of the same mode is executed regardless of the type of the corresponding effect. It is possible to easily have a relationship with and, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

In addition, when the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery and the effect of the corresponding setting suggestion effect are related to each other, the effect corresponding to the effect being executed is executed. In addition, it is preferable to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the effect is a setting suggestion effect or a part of the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, when an additional effect is executed for the effect being executed, the fun of predicting the set value of the pachinko machine 10 based on the effect mode of the additional effect and the special symbol being executed. Since the fun of predicting the result of the lottery can be provided to the player in duplicate, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in this case, as an effect mode of the additional effect, it is easy to be selected (execution) when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery or when a high setting (for example, setting 3) is set as a setting value of the pachinko machine 10. It is preferable to configure it so that a special effect mode can be set. With this configuration, when an additional effect is executed in a special effect mode, there is a possibility that a big hit has been won in the special symbol lottery being executed, or the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 is set. There is a high possibility that the setting value (high setting) is advantageous to the player.

Therefore, if the next jackpot game is difficult to be executed (there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be won by losing the lottery) (for example, a low probability state of the special symbol), the additional effect of the special effect mode is executed. It is expected that a person will win a big hit, and the next big hit game is likely to be executed (there is a high possibility that a big hit will be won in a special symbol lottery) (for example, a probability change state) until the next big hit game is executed (big hit). Until the conditions for executing the game are satisfied), the jackpot game ends.

Next, the content of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the types of suggestion modes included in the setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 91, as the effect pattern (suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect, in the present embodiment, five types (A to D) of effect patterns (suggestion mode) can be set and set. The effect pattern (suggestion mode) is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c described later based on the set value.

The setting suggestion effect selection table 222c is defined so that the selection ratio of each effect pattern (suggestion mode) differs according to the set value. As a result, an effect pattern (suggestion mode) in which only a specific setting value has a high selection ratio, or an effect pattern (suggestion mode) in which a plurality of setting values satisfying a predetermined condition have a higher selection ratio than other setting values. It is possible to create an effect pattern such as an effect pattern (suggestion mode) in which the selection ratio is high even with the set value of.

As shown in FIG. 91, the effect pattern A (suggestion mode A) is an effect pattern (suggestion mode) in which the selection ratio is high regardless of the set value, in other words, the set value is difficult to predict. When the setting suggestion effect including the aspect of the effect pattern A is executed, it is difficult for the player to predict the set value. Therefore, this suggestion mode is a suggestion mode (weak suggestion mode) that is disadvantageous to the player. ). It should be noted that this weak suggestion mode is defined by a certain error because it is difficult for the player to identify the difference as well as the suggestion mode in which the selection ratio is defined to be the same for each set value. The suggested mode is also a weak suggestion mode because it is more difficult for the player to predict the set value when the suggested mode is displayed than when other suggested modes are displayed.

The effect pattern B (suggestion mode B) is an effect pattern (suggestion mode) in which the selection ratio is defined so that only a specific set value (setting 1) is not selected. When the setting suggestion effect including the aspect of the effect pattern B is executed, it can be grasped that the set value is set 1, that is, the set value is not the setting value most disadvantageous to the player. In this way, even when indicating to the player that it is not a specific set value, the player can set the set value by excluding one candidate from a plurality of candidates (set values). Can be easily predicted.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode B is executed, so that the setting value (setting 1) that is most disadvantageous to the player is denied. Therefore, in the game situation that is most disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to grasp that there is no such thing. Therefore, when the suggestion mode B is first displayed as the setting suggestion effect, the set value can be predicted while the player is continuously playing the game. Further, when the suggestion mode B is displayed after the setting suggestion effect of another suggestion mode (for example, the suggestion mode for notifying that the set value is an odd number) is executed, the content of the displayed suggestion mode is displayed. By combining the above, the prediction accuracy of the set value can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern (suggestion mode) B is configured to deny the setting value (setting 1) that is most disadvantageous to the player, but the specific setting value (intermediate setting or most advantageous) is considered. It may be configured to deny a specific range (for example, settings 1 to 2), or a plurality of types of suggestion modes B (for example, suggestion mode B1 for denying setting 1 and setting 2). (B2, etc.) may be provided. For example, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the suggestion mode that denies the setting (setting 3) that is most advantageous to the player, the player who grasps the setting suggestion effect. Will quickly move to another pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player unnecessarily executes the game for a long time.

The effect pattern C (suggestion mode C) and the effect pattern D (suggestion mode D) are effect patterns (suggestion modes) in which the selection ratio is defined so that the higher the set value, the more the selection ratio is defined. It is defined that the suggestion mode D has a larger setting difference in the selection ratio than the suggestion mode D. That is, it is stipulated that a higher setting value (setting 3) is easier to execute both the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode C and the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode D than the low setting value (setting 1).

Further, since it is defined that the setting difference in the selection ratio is larger in the suggestion mode D than in the suggestion mode C, the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode D is executed with respect to the number of times the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode C is executed. As the number of times increases, it is more likely that a higher setting value is set.

In this way, as a plurality of suggestion modes that can be selected regardless of which setting value is set, the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect of each suggestion mode is compounded by making the selection ratio in each setting different. It is possible to make the player predict the set value by making a specific determination.

In addition, when a plurality of suggestion modes are provided such that the suggestion mode C and the suggestion mode D described above have a higher selection ratio as the higher setting value is set, the selection ratio of the suggestion mode C in each setting value is used. It is preferable to specify each selection ratio so that the difference between the selection ratio of the suggestion mode D and the higher the set value becomes larger. As a result, the higher the set value is set, the more likely it is that a difference will occur in the number of executions between the suggestion mode C and the suggestion mode D, so that the player can easily predict the set value.

On the other hand, each selection ratio may be defined so that the difference between the selection ratio of the suggestion mode C and the selection ratio of the suggestion mode D in each set value is equal. With this configuration, the total number of executions of the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode C and the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode D is higher in the case where the set value is higher than in the case where the set value is low. Therefore, for the player, the set value is predicted by referring only to the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode D, or the total number of executions of the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode C and the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode D. Since the player can select whether to predict the set value by referring to the above, or to predict the set value by judging both times in combination, increase the variation for predicting the set value. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The effect pattern E (suggestion mode E) can be selected only when the setting 3 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player is set in the pachinko machine 10 (very rarely selected in cases other than the setting 3). It is a production pattern (suggestion mode). That is, when the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode E is executed, it is possible to easily notify that the setting value (setting 3) that is most advantageous to the player is set.

Although detailed description will be described later, this suggestion mode E is defined so that the selection ratio is extremely low as compared with other suggestion modes, and when the pachinko machine 10 of setting 3 is played all day long. Even so, the selection ratio is defined so that the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode E is executed is about 50%. By defining the selection ratio as low in this way, the player who has executed the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode E is notified that the most advantageous setting value (setting 3) is set for the player (setting 3). (Suggestion), and at the same time, it is possible to provide a sense of superiority about executing an effect with a low execution probability.

Further, by lowering the rate at which the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode E is executed, it is possible to leave the possibility that the setting 3 is set even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode E is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the passage of time from the power-on of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment and the flow of the period effect to be executed will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the passage of time from the power-on and the flow of the fluctuation effect, and FIG. 92 (a) is a transition diagram showing the passage of time from the power-on, FIG. 92 (b). Is a diagram showing the effect period at each time, and FIG. 92 (c) is a diagram showing the variation pattern A as an example showing the relationship between the period in which the special symbol variation is executed and the effect period. FIG. 92 (d) is a diagram showing a variation pattern B as an example showing the relationship between the period in which the special symbol variation is executed and the effect period.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured to set different production periods based on the elapsed time from the power-on, and the production period is a period production (SP time) for a predetermined period (3 minutes). The effect period (SP time period) in which the effect) is executed can be set. Since this period effect (SP time effect) is an effect that is executed based on the elapsed time from the power-on regardless of the presence or absence of special symbol fluctuations, it is decided that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 will execute the period effect all at once. Become. By executing the effect with a sense of unity by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in this way, it is possible to execute the effect having an impact on the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, since the effect mode executed as the period effect is the effect mode in which the pachinko machine 10 is completed by itself, when the period effect is executed simultaneously by the plurality of pachinko machines 10, each pachinko machine Although the same effect mode is executed in 10, the same effect mode is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality (3 types) of effect mode types can be set as the effect mode of the period effect, and the adjacent pachinko machines 10 are set to 3. It may be configured so that one period effect is executed by using the machine. In this case, as the production mode types of the period production, the first production mode type corresponding to the left pachinko machine 10 among the three machines, the second production mode type corresponding to the central pachinko machine 10 among the three machines, and 3 It is preferable to prepare a third effect mode type corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 on the right side of the table in advance so that the effect type can be individually determined according to the installation status of the pachinko machine 10 to be installed.

As a result, it is possible to set the effect mode type for the installed pachinko machine 10, and when three pachinko machines 10 are used to perform the effect for one period, the effect type is set in order. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect of the period effect is not reduced.

In this case, as the production mode type of the period production, there are a large number of production mode types corresponding to the period production completed by one unit and a production mode type corresponding to the period production completed by a small number of units (for example, three units). It is preferable to configure the production mode type corresponding to the period production completed by the units (for example, 20 units) so as to be selectable. With this configuration, it is possible to set the effect mode of the period effect according to the installation status of the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect according to the installation status.

Further, in the present embodiment, the SP time preparation period is set as an effect period for notifying the player in advance that the SP time period has arrived. Specifically, the SP time preparation period is set in the period from when the elapsed time from the power-on is 2 minutes before the start timing of the SP time period until the SP time period is set. This SP time preparation period informs the player in advance that the SP time period will be set soon in an easy-to-understand manner.

During this SP time preparation period, in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, an effect similar to the normal effect executed in the normal effect period is executed, and the normal effect is executed. The remaining period (remaining time) until the SP time period is set is displayed on the execution screen of the effect. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand the remaining time until the period effect is executed. For example, a break is taken within the remaining time until the period effect is executed. Since it can be taken, it is possible to provide a player-friendly playability.

As shown in FIG. 92A, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the elapsed time is measured based on the time measuring device (RTC) 292. Then, when the elapsed time has passed 88 minutes, the SP time preparation period for indicating to the player that the production period (SP time period) set between the elapsed time of 90 minutes and 93 minutes has arrived is the elapsed time. It is set within the range of 88 minutes to 90 minutes of elapsed time. Then, when the first production period (SP time period) ends, the production period in which the normal production is executed is set again. After that, the SP preparation period, the SP time period, and the normal period are set in order based on the elapsed time.

It should be noted that each main effect period set based on the elapsed time is configured to be set based on the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 108) described later. That is, the effect switching table 222b defines a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the information timed by the time measuring device 292, and is configured to execute the effect based on the selected effect mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92B, various effect periods set based on the elapsed time from the power-on and the contents of the effect executed in the effect period will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 92A, in the present embodiment, the production period is repeatedly set in the order of the normal period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period based on the elapsed time from the power-on. When the normal period is set as the effect period, the normal effect (see FIGS. 86 and 87) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed by each pachinko machine 10 is executed. To.

Then, during the SP time preparation period, the same normal effect as during the normal period is executed, but a part of the display screen is used to inform the player that the SP time period will soon come. As a guidance mode for this, the comment "Soon to enter SP time" is displayed. Further, when the remaining time of the SP time preparation period is 30 seconds, in addition to the above-mentioned guidance mode, the remaining time notification that specifically indicates the remaining time until the SP time period arrives rather than the guidance mode. The countdown display, which is an aspect, is executed.

This countdown display is a display for showing the remaining time in seconds until the SP time period is actually set, and the SP time period is set based on the time information timed by the timekeeping device 292. The countdown display for 30 seconds is executed so that the countdown display becomes 0 seconds at the same timing.

By executing the countdown display in this way, the timing at which the period effect (SP time effect) during the SP time period is started is overlooked, and the effect with a sense of unity using the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is preferably experienced. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that cannot be done.

In addition, during the SP time preparation period, the characters "SP time preparation in progress" indicating that the SP time preparation period is currently in progress are displayed as telops on a part (for example, the upper part) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. To. This telop display is configured to be displayed on both the special symbol changing screen in which the special symbol change is executed and the demo standby screen in which the special symbol variation is not executed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the SP time period will be set soon (the period effect is executed) even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is not playing the game, so that the player who wants to perform the game during the period effect. However, the pachinko machine 10 on which the period effect is executed can be easily found.

Then, when the SP time period is set, the period effect (SP time effect) is executed. In the present embodiment, as the SP time effect, a special background (see FIG. 88) is displayed, and an effect that makes the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value easier to execute than other effect periods is executed. It is configured. During this SP time period, the characters "SP time in progress" indicating that the current SP time period is in progress are displayed as telops on a part (for example, the upper part) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 88). (A) Display area HR1).

Next, refer to FIGS. 92 (c) and 92 (d) for the relationship between the end timing of the SP time period, the end timing of the variable effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, and the content of the effect to be executed. Will be explained. As described above, the SP time period is set based on the elapsed time from the power-on, and the period does not change depending on whether or not the special symbol change is executed and the remaining time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the SP time period will end during the execution of the special symbol change. In this case, if the normal production is started at the timing when the SP time period ends (the timing when the normal period is set), the player says that the fluctuation production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation during execution is suddenly switched. There was a problem that it confused. It is also conceivable to continue (extend) the period effect (SP time effect) until the special symbol change that is being executed ends when the SP time period ends. In this case, a plurality of pachinko machines There is a problem that the end timing of the period production executed as the production with a sense of unity in 10 is different depending on the situation of the special symbol change of each pachinko machine 10, and the production effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in a state where the special symbol change is executed at the end timing of the SP time period, the remaining time (remaining fluctuation time) of the special symbol change is determined, and the length of the remaining fluctuation time is long. It is configured to determine different production modes according to the situation. Specifically, when the residual variation time at the end timing of the SP time period is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), the display mode indicating the end of the SP time period is continuously displayed, and the residual variation is displayed. When the time is a predetermined time or more (for example, 5 seconds or more), the period until the remaining fluctuation time elapses becomes a special zone (see FIG. 90B), and the setting suggestion effect is easily executed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution is suddenly switched. In addition, it is possible to prevent the period effect (SP time effect) from being continued (extended) for a long time and the effect of the period effect executed as a united effect on the plurality of pachinko machines 10 from being lowered. be able to.

Further, when the residual fluctuation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the setting suggestion effect is performed by using the residual variation time compared to other periods. Since it is possible to set a specialized mode that is easy to execute, the timing at which the SP time period in which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed ends, that is, the specific period in which the privilege that is advantageous to the player is given is set. There is a special mode in which a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given depending on the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, even if it is the timing to end and the player's motivation to play may decrease in the past. Since it is set, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the player to be able to notify the end information for indicating the timing at which the SP time period ends and the residual variation time information for indicating the residual variation time of the special symbol variation during execution. .. With this configuration, it is possible to easily predict the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol variation at the end of the SP time period during the SP time period, so that the content of the effect to be executed later for the player Can be easily predicted, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided. Further, when the player grasps that the special symbol change being executed is stopped and displayed immediately before the end timing of the SP time period, the SP time period ends during the period of the next special symbol change to be executed. Since the player can recognize in advance that there is a high possibility of this, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of expecting that a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be executed next.

Furthermore, in order to make it easier to set the special mode, the game is interrupted during the SP time period, and the player is allowed to perform the game adjusted so that the special symbol change is started just before the end of the SP time period. Is possible. Therefore, the game in which many special symbol lottery is executed during the SP time period to execute many setting suggestion effects, and the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the SP time period to make it easier to set the special mode. It is possible to reduce the number (it is difficult for the setting suggestion effect to be executed during the SP time period), and to let the player select the game to be executed by many setting suggestion effects during the special mode period, which improves the interest of the game. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95, the effect contents in the high-speed fluctuation mode in which a short fluctuation time (for example, 1.5 seconds) can be easily selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a shorter fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation in the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. It is configured to be easy.

More specifically, in the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640 is opened more than in the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the second ball enters. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the mouth 640. That is, the high-probability state of the normal symbol is configured so that the right to execute the special symbol lottery is more easily acquired than the low-probability state of the normal symbol. The right to execute the special symbol lottery is configured to be memorable (hold memorable) up to a predetermined number.

Therefore, while the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the situation where the ball enters the second entry port 640 while the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit, that is, the execution of the special symbol lottery. In order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the inability to memorize the new execution right even though the opportunity to acquire the right has been established, a short period of time By facilitating the selection of special symbol fluctuations, the number of special symbol lottery that can be performed per unit time is increased.

It should be noted that even in a state in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, that is, a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entry port 640, a short fluctuation time can be easily selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation. If this happens, it is easy for the special symbol change to end in a state where the right to execute the special symbol lottery has not been acquired (held and not stored), and the player's willingness to play is reduced. In the present embodiment, the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set makes it easier to execute the special symbol variation with a shorter fluctuation time than the state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. With this configuration, it is possible to easily increase the number of special symbol lottery that can be executed per unit time, and the period during which the special symbol change is not executed becomes unnecessarily long, and the player's willingness to play is increased. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, a predetermined period (a period in which the special symbol variation is executed 80 times) elapses after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the period has not passed. With this configuration, when a high probability state (time saving state, probability change state) of a normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, a short-time special symbol change is executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege (prize ball) due to the execution of a plurality of jackpot games in a short period of time.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a game state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is set, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with a game specification in which the probability change state continues until the next jackpot game is executed. Therefore, when the probability change state is set, it is confirmed that the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the jackpot is won. In this state, if the period during which the big hit is not won in the special symbol lottery becomes long, the player is forced to play a game that wastes time, and there is a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed 80 times after the probability change state is set, that is, the predetermined period is set without winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state. If it has passed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is shorter than the period before the predetermined period elapses (the period from the setting of the probability variation state to the execution of the special symbol lottery 80 times). It is configured so that the fluctuation time can be easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, from continuing unnecessarily for a long time.

FIG. 93A shows an example of a display screen displayed during the high-speed fluctuation period set when a predetermined period (the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed 80 times) elapses after the probability change state is set. It is a figure. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the display area HR1, “high-speed fluctuation” is used as a guidance mode for indicating that a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. Characters are displayed as telop. Then, in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, a display mode in which the character J0 emits a "speed-up" line is displayed as a mode for showing that the special symbol variation becomes a short variation. By informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the sudden shortening of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation.

In the figure shown in FIG. 93 (a), the game is that the high-speed fluctuation period is set in the state where the high-speed fluctuation period is set (the state in which the 81st special symbol fluctuation is started after the probability change state is set). Although the display screen for notifying the person is shown, the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is not limited to this, for example, the 75th special symbol change after the probability change state is set. When it is started, that is, at a timing prior to the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period (the high-speed fluctuation period is set), the player is notified in advance that the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period will soon occur. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can grasp in advance the entry into the high-speed fluctuation period, so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation suddenly shortens and the player may be confused. Can be suppressed.

When a prior notification configuration that can notify the player of the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period in advance is used, for example, the special figure hold is pre-read and the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is performed based on the pre-reading result. It is preferable to configure it so that advance notification is executed when it is confirmed that the operation is to be performed. Specifically, it is determined based on the pre-reading result of holding the special figure that the transition condition to the high-speed fluctuation period (execution of 80 special symbol lottery) is satisfied, and the transition condition to the high-speed fluctuation period is satisfied. If it is determined in advance (when it is determined in advance that the results of the special symbol lottery executed before the transition condition is satisfied are all out of order), the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period may be notified.

With this configuration, a situation occurs in which the high-speed fluctuation period is not set (a situation in which a big hit is won) even though the player is notified (advance notification) that the high-speed fluctuation period can be entered. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time (for example, 1.5 seconds to 12 seconds) shorter than other periods can be set during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery or the acquisition is obtained. It is configured so that different fluctuation times are selected according to the type of fluctuation pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the variation time) having a different hit expectation even for a special symbol variation executed during the high-speed fluctuation period.

Here, for example, as the first special symbol variation executed after a high-speed fluctuation period in which a variation pattern of a short time (for example, a variation time of 1.5 seconds) is easily selected as a special symbol variation is set, other than a short time. When a fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation time of 6 seconds) is selected, a state in which the display screen shown in FIG. 93 (a) is displayed, that is, a state in which the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation period has been entered. In, a situation occurs in which high-speed fluctuation (1.5-second fluctuation) is not executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, a fluctuation time of a different length (for example,) is used in order to execute a fluctuation effect that causes the player to expect a jackpot winning according to the selected fluctuation pattern. , 6 seconds or 12 seconds) can be selected, so the above-mentioned situation (high-speed fluctuation (1.5-second fluctuation) is not executed in the state of notifying the player that the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period has occurred). ) Can occur. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may be out of order because the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol is not executed even though the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol is notified. There was a problem that the player was distrusted and the motivation to play was reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol variation is executed after the high-speed fluctuation period is set, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation can be discriminated, and based on the discrimination result. The timing of notifying that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set (shifting to the high-speed fluctuation period) is configured to be different. Specifically, if the first special symbol fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation period is set is not a high-speed fluctuation (1.5-second fluctuation), it is configured so as not to notify that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set. ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem caused by the fact that the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol is not executed even though the notification that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set has been notified.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set, that is, when the first special symbol fluctuation is the jackpot fluctuation, the fluctuation of the jackpot fluctuation It is configured to execute a special symbol variation (variation effect) a plurality of times in a pseudo manner using a time (for example, 12 seconds). Specifically, for a special symbol fluctuation of 12 seconds, a pseudo high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is executed four times, and then a jackpot fluctuation of 6 seconds is executed.

With this configuration, even if a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can display multiple times (4 times). After the pseudo high-speed fluctuation is executed, the pseudo jackpot fluctuation (6 seconds) will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to make the player think that the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol has been executed during the high-speed fluctuation period.

Here, with reference to FIG. 93 (b), the display contents displayed when the first special symbol fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation period is set is other than the high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) will be described. To do. In FIG. 93 (b), the variation time (6 seconds) other than the high-speed variation (1.5 seconds) is selected in the 81st special symbol variation (special symbol variation in which the high-speed variation period is set) in the probability variation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen which is displayed when it is done.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), if the special symbol fluctuation that is executed first after the high-speed fluctuation period is set is not the high-speed fluctuation (1.5-second fluctuation), the high-speed fluctuation period is set. Is "preparing for high-speed fluctuation" in the display area HR1 as a guidance mode for guiding the player that the high-speed fluctuation period will be set soon, instead of the display mode for notifying the player (see FIG. 93A). Character is displayed as a telop.

In this way, even when the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is actually performed, the high-speed fluctuation period is set by displaying "Preparing for high-speed fluctuation" until the first high-speed fluctuation is executed. Despite notifying that, it is possible to suppress a problem caused by the fact that the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol is not executed. In addition, the guidance mode shown in FIG. 93B may be configured to be displayed from a time point before the high-speed fluctuation period is actually set.

Further, the situation shown in FIG. 93B is a situation that occurs only when a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation is set in the first special symbol fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation period is set. When a situation occurs (when the telop display of "preparing for high-speed fluctuation" is executed), the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be more easily executed than during other high-speed fluctuation periods. In this way, in a specific period in which a specific fluctuation pattern is easily selected, when a fluctuation pattern other than the specific fluctuation pattern is selected, a privilege that is more likely to be given to the player than when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected. By providing the above, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable regardless of which variation pattern is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the content of the effect executed when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set will be described. FIG. 94 (a) shows a pseudo-high-speed fluctuation executed when a jackpot fluctuation (12 seconds) is selected in the 81st special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation in which a high-speed fluctuation period is set) in the probability variation state. It is the figure which showed the example of the display screen of the effect (1.5 seconds), and FIG. 94 (b) showed the example of the display screen of the pseudo hit variation effect (6 seconds) executed after the end of the pseudo high-speed variation. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the first special symbol fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation period is set is a jackpot fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds, a pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect of 1.5 seconds is 4 After being executed once, it is configured to execute a pseudo-hit fluctuation effect for 6 seconds. That is, the pseudo-variation is performed so as to make the player think that the pseudo-variation of 1.5 seconds is executed four times and the pseudo-variation of 6 seconds is executed once for the period in which the special symbol variation of 12 seconds is executed once. It is configured so that the production is executed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the characters “during high-speed fluctuation” are displayed as telops as in FIG. 93 (a). Then, after 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the third symbol variation is pseudo-stop displayed (in the figure, wavy lines are attached to the left and right of the third symbol). That is, it is the same except that the stop display mode of the third symbol is slightly different (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to easily identify it) with respect to the case where the high-speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is actually executed. Fluctuation production is executed.

In the present embodiment, if the third symbol is completely stopped and displayed during the period when the actual special symbol fluctuation is not stopped and displayed, the player may be confused. Therefore, the pseudo stop display is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a stop display mode in which the third symbol is completely stopped may be displayed at the stop timing of the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect. In this case, the main display area may be displayed. As a symbol that fluctuates near the center of Dm, instead of the third symbol (the symbol that is displayed in a variable manner in response to the fluctuation status of the special symbol), the effect symbol for production is used, and the actual third symbol is used. The symbols may be configured to be variablely displayed in different regions (for example, regions other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81).

Then, when the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect (4 times) is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the pseudo-hit variation effect for 6 seconds is executed. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the variation effect for five times in a pseudo manner for the period in which only one special symbol variation is actually executed, a high-speed fluctuation period is set for the player. In this case, the high-speed fluctuation effect (pseudo-high-speed variation effect) can be reliably executed. Further, since the pseudo high-speed fluctuation is executed four times over 6 seconds, it is possible to secure a time for the player to recognize the character "high-speed fluctuation in progress" displayed in the display area HR1.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-high-speed fluctuation effect is configured to be executed four times, but the number of executions of the pseudo-high-speed variation effect is not limited to this, for example, the number of executions is It may be configured to execute the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect so as to be 3 times or less or more than 4 times. Further, when a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 15 seconds and 20 seconds) can be selected as a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is lengthened. It is preferable to configure so as to determine the number of executions of the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect and the content of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the flow of the effect executed when the high-speed fluctuation period in the present embodiment is set will be described. FIG. 95 (a-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol lottery) and the selected fluctuation time when the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is completed. It is a figure which showed the case where the high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) was executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, and FIG. 95 (a-2) shows the effect set in the situation shown in FIG. 95 (a-1). It is a figure which showed the transition of a mode. FIG. 95 (b-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol lottery) and the selected fluctuation time when the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is completed. It is a figure which showed the case where the non-high-speed fluctuation (6 seconds) was executed at the first time of the high-speed fluctuation period, and FIG. 95 (b-2) is set in the situation shown in FIG. 95 (b-1). It is a figure which showed the transition of the production mode. FIG. 95 (c-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol lottery) and the selected fluctuation time when the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is completed. It is a figure which showed the case where the jackpot fluctuation (12 seconds) was executed at the first time of the high-speed fluctuation period, and FIG. 95 (c-2) is the effect set in the situation shown in FIG. 95 (c-1). It is a figure which showed the transition of a mode.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a-1), in the present embodiment, the period from the setting of the probability variation state to the execution of the special symbol variation 80 times (probability variation 1st period) and the special symbol variation after 81 times. Is configured to be different from the period in which is executed (probability variation 2nd period) and the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of special symbol variation, and in the probability variation 1st period, it is in the normal state. Although the fluctuation time is shorter than when is set, a fluctuation pattern table in which a relatively long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than during the probability variation second period described later is referred to, and in the probability variation second period, the probability variation first It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern table in which a shorter fluctuation time than during the period is easily selected is referred to. The details of the fluctuation pattern table referred to in each period will be described later with reference to FIG. 104.

That is, in the probabilistic first period from the setting of the probabilistic state to the elapse of the predetermined period, the special symbol variation is executed in a relatively longer fluctuation time than the probabilistic second period after the predetermined period elapses. It is configured. With this configuration, the interval between jackpot games can be lengthened as compared with the case where the same fluctuation time as in the second probability variation period is selected immediately after the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a privilege (prize ball) in a short time by executing the jackpot game a plurality of times in a short time. In other words, it is possible to prevent the gaming situation (probability change state), which is advantageous to the player, from ending in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a-2), when the high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is executed in the second probable change period (the 81st and subsequent special symbol fluctuation periods), the 81st special symbol fluctuation A guidance mode (see FIG. 93A) for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation period is set at the start timing of the above is displayed. Since this high-speed fluctuation period is set until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 1000 times, the special symbol fluctuation will fluctuate at high speed until the next big hit is actually won. Therefore, even though the probability variation state, which is a high probability state of the special symbol, is set, the player who has executed the special symbol lottery 80 times or more without winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery is per unit time. Since the number of times of special symbol lottery can be increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, in FIG. 95 (b-1), the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation in the second period of probability variation (the first special symbol variation in the high-speed fluctuation period), that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the 81st rotation is the variation time 6. It is an out-of-second fluctuation, and shows a pattern in which a high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is executed at the 82nd rotation.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (b-2), a guidance mode for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation period is set at the 81st rotation special symbol fluctuation start timing (see FIG. 93 (a)). ) Is displayed, even though the high-speed fluctuation period has been entered, the player who executes the high-speed fluctuation may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the high-speed fluctuation is actually performed after the high-speed fluctuation period is set. Preparation for informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation period will be set (shifting to the high-speed fluctuation period) soon until the execution of (the period until the 82nd special symbol change is executed). The advance guidance mode (see FIG. 93B) is displayed as the notification. Then, a guidance mode for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation period is set at the 82nd special symbol fluctuation start timing, that is, at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation is first executed after the high-speed fluctuation period is set. (See FIG. 93 (a)) is displayed.

As a result, the notification of entry into the high-speed fluctuation period is executed at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed, so that the player can be easily notified. In this embodiment, the preparation notification is performed using the period from the setting of the high-speed fluctuation period to the actual execution of the high-speed fluctuation, and the high-speed fluctuation is suddenly executed for the player. This suppresses the occurrence of situations where it becomes difficult to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, but it is not limited to this, and the period from the setting of the high-speed fluctuation period to the actual execution of the high-speed fluctuation is , It may be configured to execute the same variation effect as the first period of probability variation. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand from which timing the rush notification is executed to the high-speed fluctuation period.

Next, in FIG. 95 (C-1), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation in the second period of probability variation (the first special symbol variation in the high-speed fluctuation period), that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the 81st rotation is the fluctuation time. It shows a pattern of 12-second jackpot fluctuations.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (c-2), a guidance mode for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation period is set at the 81st rotation special symbol fluctuation start timing (see FIG. 93 (a)). ) Is displayed, and the pseudo-variation effect is executed using the special symbol variation period (12 seconds) at the 81st rotation. Specifically, the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect (see FIG. 94 (a)) is executed four times using the first six seconds, and the pseudo jackpot variation effect (see FIG. 94 (b)) is used for the latter six seconds. )) Is executed. In other words, during the 12-second special symbol fluctuation period, a pseudo-variation effect is executed as if four high-speed fluctuations (1.5 seconds) and one jackpot fluctuation (6 seconds) were executed. , The jackpot game is executed when the special symbol fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) of 12 seconds is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, even if the first special symbol variation in the second period of probability variation is a jackpot variation, the player can experience the variation effect (high-speed variation effect) in the second period of probability variation. The effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the inrush notification timing of the high-speed fluctuation period is different based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation in the second period of the probability variation, but other configurations are used. It may be used. For example, in addition to the first special symbol variation (81st special symbol variation) in the second period of probability variation, the 82nd special symbol variation also has a variation time of 6 seconds as a result of prior determination. If it is determined that, the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect is executed eight times using 12 seconds, which is the total time of the 81st special symbol variation and the 82nd special symbol variation, and the 81st special symbol variation is performed. It may be configured to execute a guidance notification (see FIG. 93 (a)) for informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has been entered at the start timing of the symbol fluctuation.

Further, the guidance notification may be executed at a specific timing during the fluctuation period of the first special symbol variation (81st special symbol variation) in the second probabilistic variation period. For example, the 81st special symbol variation may be executed. When the fluctuation time of is long (for example, 30 seconds), the same fluctuation effect as in the first probability variation period is executed for the first 24 seconds, and the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect is executed four times in the remaining 6 seconds. It may be configured to execute the guidance notification 24 seconds after the start of the 81st special symbol change. By configuring the guidance notification to be executable at a specific timing during the special symbol fluctuation in this way, the number of pseudo-high-speed fluctuation effects can be arbitrarily set, so that many pseudo-high-speed fluctuation effects are unnecessarily executed. It is possible to suppress the storage.

In the present embodiment, when the second probability variation period is set, a configuration is used in which a guidance notification is executed to notify the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has been entered, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, for example. Guidance for notifying that a high-speed fluctuation period has been entered at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation when a short fluctuation time is selected at the end of the first probability variation period (79th or 80th special symbol fluctuation). It may be configured to execute the notification.

In this way, the first fluctuation time is different from the first fluctuation time from the state in which the first fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, not the timing at which the fluctuation pattern table referred to when actually selecting the fluctuation pattern is switched. 2 In a state where the condition for easily selecting the fluctuation time is easily satisfied, or in a state where the condition is satisfied, the second fluctuation time or the fluctuation time closer to the second fluctuation time than the first fluctuation time is selected. By notifying the player that the second fluctuation time has entered a period in which it is easy to select based on this, the notification content and the actual special symbol fluctuation time can be matched, and the player can perform an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the timing of executing the guidance notification for informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been entered is delayed in the state where the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, the high-speed fluctuation mode is soon set. It is configured to execute a preparatory notification to indicate that, but it is not limited to this, and guidance for informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been entered at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set. When the notification is executed, the preparation notification may be executed before the high-speed fluctuation mode is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98, the contents of the effect during the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, a basic effect for showing the progress of the jackpot game to the player is executed. The content of this basic effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (a). Furthermore, when the amount of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period in which the player is in an advantageous state (time saving state, probability change state, jackpot game) continues, reaches a predetermined number (200 units). , Perform a predetermined number acquisition effect as an effect to congratulate the player. The content of the predetermined number acquisition effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b). Further, when the predetermined number acquisition effect is executed, the additional privilege effect for granting the additional privilege to the predetermined condition (when the relationship between the number of rounds and the number of prize balls satisfies the specific condition) is executed. The content of this additional privilege effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. In addition, on the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends and the end screen effect suggesting the set value are executed. This end screen effect is configured so that the effect mode differs depending on the timing (whether or not it overlaps with the period effect) when the jackpot game is executed. For details, see FIG. 98. Will be described later.

First, with reference to FIG. 96A, the contents of the basic effect during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 96A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 96A, the display area HR11 and the display area HR12 are formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm during the jackpot game. The display area HR11 is a display area for indicating the current number of rounds, and the current number of rounds (“2” is displayed in the figure) is displayed as the round number notification mode. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 96A is a display screen in which the second round of the jackpot game is being executed. In this embodiment, only the current number of rounds is displayed as the round number notification mode.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds the current jackpot game will continue, but the maximum number of rounds in the display area HR11, that is, the current jackpot game is executed without limitation. The number of rounds (the number of round games) may also be configured to be noticeable. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of how long the jackpot game will continue in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the jackpot game can be executed with peace of mind. In this case, a part (for example, 5 rounds) of the maximum number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) executed in this jackpot game is displayed as the maximum number of rounds, and the update condition (for example, 5 rounds) is displayed during the jackpot game. For example, the maximum number of rounds may be updated and displayed to 10 rounds based on the fact that the update condition (update condition that is satisfied when the fourth round is completed) is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

The display area HR12 is a display area for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the current jackpot game, and as a mode for notifying the number of prize balls during the jackpot game, the number of prize balls acquired during the current jackpot game (in the figure). "Displaying" 255 GET ") is displayed. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 96A is a display screen in the middle of the second round, in which 255 prize balls have been paid out during the current jackpot game. Also in this display area HR12, the estimated total number of prize balls assumed in this jackpot game, that is, the maximum number of rounds executed in this jackpot game and the maximum number of rounds executed in this jackpot game can be obtained in one round game. The total number of prize balls calculated based on the number of prize balls may be displayed in advance on the display screen. With this configuration, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in this jackpot game can be grasped in advance, and the number of prize balls actually obtained is larger or smaller than the expected number of prize balls. It becomes possible for the player to analyze the prize. Therefore, when the number of prize balls actually acquired is larger than the expected number of prize balls, it is considered that the pachinko machine 10 is more advantageous to the player, and the player can enthusiastically play the game. .. Further, when the expected number of prize balls is larger than the number of prize balls actually acquired, the player can be made to consider the future game while considering the movement to another pachinko machine 10.

A display area HR13 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and a combination of third symbols stopped and displayed when a big hit is won is displayed. That is, in the display area HR13, the history of the jackpot symbol (“666” is displayed in the figure) is displayed. Below the display area HR13, a display area HR14 and a display area HR15 are formed, and "960" is set in the display area HR14 as a total winning prize ball notification mode indicating the total amount of winning balls paid out during the advantageous period. It is displayed. The total number of prize balls won indicates the total number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 111 during the advantageous period in which the player is in an advantageous state (time saving state, probability change state, big hit game). For example, when a probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game (first time), a jackpot is won during the probability change state, and the jackpot game (second time) is executed again, the second jackpot game is executed. As the total winning prize ball notification mode displayed inside, the number of prize balls paid out in the first jackpot game, the number of prize balls paid out during the probability change state, and the number of prize balls paid out during the second jackpot game. Information indicating the total value with the number of prize balls won is displayed.

With this configuration, if the jackpot game is executed multiple times during the advantageous period, the number of prize balls paid out in the multiple jackpot games is displayed in total, so that once. It is possible to display the number of prize balls that cannot be obtained in the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a superiority complex by displaying a large number of prize balls to the player who has continued the advantageous period for a long time.

In the present embodiment, all the prize balls paid out during the advantageous period, that is, balls to the general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, etc. during the probabilistic state or the time saving state. Since the total number of prize balls won is displayed by adding the number of prize balls paid out based on the number of balls entered, if the probability change state elapses for a long time without winning a big hit. Since the total number of prize balls won can be increased, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced for a long period of time when the big hit is not won in the special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state. be able to.

In addition, the number of prize balls added to the total number of prize balls may be configured to be only the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game executed during the advantageous period. As a result, the player can easily grasp the total value of the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls actually paid out by the payout control device 111 can be displayed, but the payout is not limited to this, and it has been determined that, for example, the payout control device 111 pays out. Even if it is configured to add the number of prize balls based on the number of prize balls, that is, the payout instruction (payout command) for paying out the prize balls from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. good. In this case, compared to the case where the number of prize balls is additionally displayed after the prize balls are actually paid out, the prize ball payout condition is satisfied (it is detected that the ball has entered the entrance). Since the time lag until the number of prize balls is added and displayed can be reduced, pay close attention to the flow status of the balls on the game board 13 (the status of the balls entering (winning) into each entry port (winning opening)). It is possible to add and display the total number of prize balls won without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display based on the number of prize balls can be executed, but the display is not limited to this, and the number obtained by subtracting the number of fired balls from the number of prize balls, that is, the number of balls possessed by the player The number of balls corresponding to the increase may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the amount of balls actually increased in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the display area HR15, "second time" is displayed as a continuous chan number display mode for indicating the number of times the jackpot game is executed (number of consecutive chans) during the advantageous period. That is, FIG. 96A shows a display screen during the second (second consecutive chan) jackpot game during the advantageous period.

In the present embodiment, all the jackpot games executed during the advantageous period are added and displayed as the number of consecutive chans, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of types of jackpot games are executed. In the possible pachinko machine 10, only the number of executions of the jackpot game (big hit game of 5 rounds or more) in which the amount of the privilege that can be given to the player is a predetermined amount or more may be additionally displayed. In addition, information indicating the content of the executed jackpot game may be added and displayed to the continuous chan number display mode.

The content of the basic effect (basic display) displayed on the display screen during the jackpot game has been described above with reference to FIG. 96 (a), but the display mode related to the information indicating each element of the above-mentioned basic effect. In a period other than the jackpot game, for example, during the advantageous period and the jackpot game is not executed (the period during which the special symbol change can be executed), among the above-mentioned elements of the basic effect, the total winning prize ball It may be configured to display a display mode related to information indicating a number.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96 (b), the production content of the predetermined number acquisition effect executed during the jackpot game will be described. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, an opening effect executed corresponding to the opening period of the jackpot game, a round effect executed corresponding to the round game period of the jackpot game, and a jackpot The ending effect, which is executed according to the ending period of the game, is configured to be at least feasible.

The round game period, which is the period during which the round effect is executed, is a period during which the ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, as a part of the round production executed during this round game period, a predetermined number acquisition production is executed to congratulate that the total number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous period has reached a predetermined number. It is configured to be possible. Specifically, at the timing when the round game is started, the total number of prize balls already acquired is read out, and it is determined whether the total number of prize balls that can be won can reach a predetermined number during the round game executed this time. .. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined number can be reached, the effect mode of the round effect corresponding to the predetermined number acquisition effect is determined. In this way, by determining the timing at which the total number of prize balls can reach the predetermined number before the total number of prize balls actually reaches the predetermined number, during the next round game to be executed. It is possible to specify whether or not it is necessary to execute the predetermined number acquisition effect.

Therefore, when determining the effect mode of the round effect, it is possible to easily determine the effect mode corresponding to the presence or absence of the predetermined number acquisition effect.

As shown in FIG. 96B, when the predetermined number acquisition effect is executed, the effect mode in which the character 810 imitating a rabbit appears with the placard 811 is displayed in the substantially center of the main display area Dm. .. Then, when the total number of winning prize balls reaches a predetermined number (1000 in the figure), the placard 811 is raised and the display surface displayed as "1000" is displayed.

That is, in the round effect corresponding to the round game in which the predetermined number acquisition effect can be executed, the effect in which the character 810 appears is executed in advance, so that the predetermined number acquisition effect (“1000”” is not given to the player. The effect of holding up the placard 811 on which the characters are written) can be executed. Further, since it is possible to specify a round game in which the predetermined number acquisition effect cannot be executed, for example, the character 810 appears as an effect mode of the round effect corresponding to the round game in which the predetermined number acquisition effect cannot be executed. Since it is possible to determine the mode of effect that is not produced, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by increasing the variation of the round effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, an additional privilege effect is executed in which an additional privilege is given according to a combination of the total number of prize balls displayed in the predetermined number acquisition effect and the number of rounds in which the predetermined number acquisition effect is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 96 (b), the combination of the number of rounds is "3" and the total number of prize balls won is "1000" satisfies the execution condition of the additional privilege effect. , The treasure bag 811a for suggesting that the additional privilege effect is executed is displayed in connection with the placard 811.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97A, an additional privilege effect is executed in which the ball 812 with the character "certain" appears as an additional privilege mode for showing the additional privilege as the contents of the treasure bag 811a. The additional privilege mode indicated by the ball 812 with the character "probability" indicates that a probabilistic state, which is an advantageous gaming state favorable to the player, is set after the end of the jackpot game this time. In this embodiment, various types of benefits can be given to the player as additional privilege modes, and the contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 (b).

In this way, by deciding whether or not to grant the additional privilege to the player according to the combination of the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the total number of winning prize balls, the additional privilege game is executed for the player. Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing of the game, it is possible to expect that an additional privilege effect will be executed for each round effect during the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the additional privilege effect can be executed during the round effect in which at least a predetermined number of acquisition effects are executed, the player is attempted to win a large number of balls during the jackpot game. You can enthusiastically play games. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is inserted into each entry port in a state where a probability change state or a time saving state is set as the total number of prize balls to be won is also added. Therefore, for example, it is possible to adjust the total number of winning prize balls until the jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery).

Therefore, in the past, the player played a game (ball) while the variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is likely to be a big hit is being executed, or while the number of reserved memories of the special symbol is the upper limit. It is possible to facilitate continuous game play for the purpose of adjusting the total number of winning prize balls even during a period in which the game is likely to be temporarily interrupted, and the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure a situation in which the additional privilege effect is likely to be executed during the jackpot game so that the guide effect that can be guided to the player before the jackpot game is executed can be executed. It is configured to display the total number of prize balls won during the special symbol change period in the time saving state, and when the total number of prize balls won at the timing when the jackpot game starts is within a specific range, it is easy to execute the additional privilege effect. It is preferable to configure the player to be notified of the fact. More specifically, the jackpot game is executed when it is specified that the additional privilege effect is executed when the timing when the total number of winning prize balls reaches 1000 is the first round of the jackpot game. During the special symbol fluctuation period, which is prior to the above, the jackpot game is executed in the range where the total number of prize balls won is "910-990", so that the additional privilege effect is likely to be executed. It is good to configure it to. With this configuration, the player can be made to play a game for increasing the total number of prize balls won by using the period until the jackpot game is started.

In addition, the guidance notification for facilitating the execution of the above-mentioned additional privilege effect may be executed during the jackpot game. With this configuration, the balls are moved to the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the round game so that a combination of the number of rounds in which the additional privilege effect is executed and the total number of winning balls is created. It is possible to provide a novel playability of playing a game so as not to win a prize (no more prize balls are paid out). In addition, the operation of the game can be improved by performing a game for increasing the number of prize balls during the interval period set between the round games.

Here, the types of benefits given to the player during the additional privilege production will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (b). On the display screen shown in FIG. 97 (a) described above, the ball 812 with the character "probability" is displayed as an additional privilege mode, and the probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game is completed. (Probability change promotion mode) is displayed, but in addition to that, when the ball 812 with the character "10" is displayed, the number of round games executed during this jackpot game is the number of round games played by the player. If a mode (round promotion mode) indicating that the number of rounds is "10 rounds", which is the most advantageous number of rounds, or a ball 812 with the letters "high" is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 is set. When a mode (high setting notification mode) indicating that the set value is set to be advantageous to the player (high setting) or a ball 812 with the characters "ream" is displayed, , It is possible to set a mode (holding sequence mode) indicating that the lottery result is a big hit in the reserved memory of the acquired special symbol (special symbol holding).

By configuring the additional privilege mode so that a plurality of types can be set in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which there is no privilege to be given to the player even though the execution condition of the additional privilege effect is satisfied. can do. In addition, in this embodiment, as the additional privilege given to the player when the additional privilege production is executed, only the privilege for showing the game situation advantageous to the player is targeted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the privilege image that can be provided to the player can be given only when the additional privilege effect is executed, or the right to switch the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be given. It may be configured. In addition, information for indicating a game situation that is disadvantageous to the player may be provided as an additional privilege.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the content of the end screen effect displayed on the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 98 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the end screen effect when the end screen of the jackpot game is displayed during the SP time (during the SP time period), and FIG. 98 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the end screen effect during the jackpot game. It is a figure which showed an example of the end screen effect when the SP time (SP time period) ends.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the more the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is executed during the SP time period, the easier it is to execute the setting suggestion effect. That is, when the jackpot game is executed during the SP time period, it is more difficult to execute the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) than when the jackpot game is not executed during the SP time period, so that the SP time It becomes difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect during the period.

In this case, even if the jackpot game, which is a game situation that is advantageous to the player, is executed, if the execution period of the jackpot game overlaps with the SP time period, the situation is disadvantageous to the player (setting suggestion effect). There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced due to the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to execute. In particular, when a jackpot game with a large number of rounds, which is normally advantageous to the player, is executed, there is a high possibility that the SP time period and the jackpot game period overlap as the jackpot game period becomes longer. Therefore, since the above-mentioned problems are likely to occur, among the jackpot games, when the jackpot game (big hit game with many rounds) that is more advantageous to the player is executed, other jackpot games (comparison of the number of rounds) are performed. There is a risk that a new problem that has never existed in the past will occur, in which the player's willingness to play is lower than when a small number of jackpot games are executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the end screen effect executed at the end of the jackpot game, and the end screen is further configured according to the overlapping situation between the jackpot game period and the SP time period. It is configured so that the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect executed as the effect can be different.

Specifically, if it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect during the SP time period due to the execution of the jackpot game (the situation in which the number of executions of the special symbol change is reduced), it is another situation. More than in the case, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect (end screen setting suggestion effect) executed as the end screen effect is configured to be more likely to be an effect mode advantageous to the player. More specifically, as an effect mode of the end screen setting suggestion effect, a plurality of setting suggestion effects are configured to be easily executed in duplicate.

With this configuration, even if the jackpot game is executed at a timing when it becomes difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect during the SP time period, the setting suggestion effect is complemented by the end screen effect of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced based on the execution of the jackpot game.

When the end screen effect of the big hit game is executed, the game state notification mode for notifying the player of the game state set after the end of the hit game on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the set value are suggested. The setting suggestion mode for this is displayed, and in the figure shown in FIG. 98 (a), the player indicates that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends as the game state notification mode. The comment "one more time" is displayed as an aspect for notifying the user. That is, the game state notification mode for notifying the player that the high probability state of the special symbol is set until the jackpot game is executed again is displayed.

If it is indicated that the time saving state (time saving 100 times) is set after the jackpot game is completed as the game state notification mode, the comment "chance 100 times" is displayed. That is, in order to notify the player that the game state is more favorable to the player than the normal state (time saving state), and the period during which the game state continues is 100 times (special figure variation 100 times). Aspects are displayed. In this way, by notifying the degree of advantage when the game state set after the jackpot game ends is compared with the game state (normal state) that is most disadvantageous to the player, the game state set after the jackpot game ends can be set. It is possible to make the player easily understand and predict.

Here, even if the game state notification mode displayed in the end screen effect is "chance 100 times", that is, the notification mode corresponding to the case where the time saving state is set is displayed, the notification target is It is preferable to configure so as to leave a possibility that a gaming state (probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state is set. With this configuration, the player who is displayed as "chance 100 times" as the game state notification mode is satisfied until the end (the end condition of the time saving state (when the special symbol variation reaches 100 times). It is possible to play the game while expecting that the probabilistic state is set (until the end condition) is satisfied. In this case, at the stage where the end condition of the time saving state can be satisfied, it is preferable to notify the player that the actually set gaming state is not the time saving state but the probability changing state. As a result, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic state is set until the time saving state ends. In addition, in the case where the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, when the notification mode corresponding to the time saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, it is for suggesting that the actual game state is the probability change state. It is preferable to configure the suggestion effect so that it can be executed within the period until the end condition of the time saving state can be satisfied. As a result, the player who is playing the game while expecting that the probability change state is set pays close attention to the effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the frequency at which the notification mode corresponding to the game state different from the actually set game state is displayed may be configured to be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10, for example. A setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, setting 3) is set as a game state that is actually set than a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, setting 1) is set. Is configured so that the frequency of displaying notification modes corresponding to different gaming states is low. With this configuration, when the notification mode corresponding to the time saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, the possibility that the time saving state is actually set is a set value advantageous to the player (for example, setting 3). ) Is set, it will be higher.

Therefore, after the notification mode corresponding to the time saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the more events occur in which the game state shifts to the normal state, the more advantageous the setting value is for the player. It is possible to increase the possibility that (for example, setting 3) is set. In this way, when a condition disadvantageous to the player (for example, the end of the time saving state) is satisfied as the game executed in the pachinko machine 10, information advantageous to the player (for example, high setting notification (suggestion)) By configuring the game so that it is easy to provide the game, it is possible to prevent the player from being repeatedly disadvantaged and the player's motivation to play is significantly reduced.

Not limited to this, when a setting value that is more disadvantageous to the player (for example, setting 1) is set than when a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, setting 3) is set. It is preferable that the notification mode corresponding to the game state different from the actually set game state is displayed less frequently. With this configuration, conditions advantageous to the player (for example, a condition for notifying that a probability change state is set, a condition for executing a high setting notification (suggestion)) can be executed in duplicate. Therefore, for example, a more advantageous privilege can be given to a player who has a high setting value set. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game while expecting the player to be given many advantageous benefits.

Returning to FIG. 98 (b), the description will continue. When it is determined that the end period of the jackpot game has passed the SP time period, that is, the SP time period is set during the jackpot game or before the jackpot game, and the timing of ending the SP period is during the jackpot game. In some cases, it is not possible (difficult) to execute the special symbol change during the SP time period after the jackpot game ends, so a plurality of setting suggestion effects are set during the end screen effect (FIG. 98 (Fig. 98) b) See).

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 138) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 135) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 134) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

In the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, non-reach deviation (disengagement length A, deviation short A), reach deviation type), variable pattern selection The variable type counter CS1 used for the above and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 138). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and a special symbol holding common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable type counter are set according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the right second ball entry port 640r.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535), reaches the maximum value (for example, 65535 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 65535), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 65535, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 65535. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 138).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is the value of the special hit random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol jackpot than that of the low probability (special). It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be big hits different in this way, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102 (a)) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102 (a)) for the low probability of the special symbol are , Is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , The maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99) is reached and then returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of alignment. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. .. In the present embodiment, five types of jackpots are set, "big hit A1", "big hit B1", "big hit C1", "big hit D1", and "big hit E1", and the special hit type counter C2 is used. One of "big hit A1", "big hit B1", "big hit C1", "big hit D1", and "big hit E1" is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol. The details of the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described later with reference to the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 102 (a)).

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 103, the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type defines the same (common) contents in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. There is. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery having the same degree of advantage to the player is executed when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to be done. With this configuration, no matter which special symbol lottery is executed, there is no difference in the benefits given to the player (providing the jackpot game), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. be able to.

Not limited to this, as the jackpot type selection table 202d, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the second special symbol are referred to in response to the lottery of the first special symbol. Special figure 2 The jackpot type selection table 202d2 is defined, and the jackpot type that can be selected in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is different, or the selection ratio is different, so that the first special symbol is different. The lottery and the second special symbol lottery may be configured so that the degree of advantage is different. In this case, when the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) which is the initial state is set as the game state, the second special symbol lottery in which the execution opportunity is relatively difficult to be established is better. , It is preferable to configure it so that the degree of advantage is higher than that of the first special symbol lottery. As a result, the player who is playing the game in the initial state is ambitious while aiming to set a different game state (a game state in which the execution trigger of the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be established than in the normal state). Can be made to play a game.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 described above determine a rough display mode such as so-called short-time disconnection, long-term disconnection, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The reach type and details of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 based on the fluctuation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 138) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 104) that stores the random value that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol variation from the values (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 102 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 102 (b)) is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability of hitting the normal symbol from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the normal symbol is in the time saving state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. Further, the hit type of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long-time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability game state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state with an open time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit to be done. Further, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with the opening time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed in the probabilistic period during the short time in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to this, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r at the time of a long hit, and the variation in the second special symbol during the normal game. The display can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the change of the game effect by the variable display of the second special symbol in which the fresh notice display and the like are displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), if the value of the acquired random number counter C4 for normal hit is any of 5 to 6 at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the hit of the normal symbol is obtained. It is determined that there is. On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit. In the present embodiment, when a winning game is won in a normal symbol lottery, a different game per game is executed according to a set game state, but the game is not limited to this, for example. If you win a game per game with a low probability state of a normal symbol set, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 (short hit), and the game per game (short hit) is more difficult than the short hit. A game per game (long hit) that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 may be configured to be feasible.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "5, 6", the electric accessory 640a is opened (opened) only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 102 (b)) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right second entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640 is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 138).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

Further, the setting switch 110c and the setting key 110b are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 performs a process of changing the set value based on a signal output in response to an operation on the setting key 110b or the setting switch 110c. Execute the process to display the set value. Since the contents of various operations using the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c have been described above with reference to FIG. 84, the description thereof will be omitted.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle is turned off (not operated) to stop the firing of the ball. The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a touch sensor 290, a firing sensor 293, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 83). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 101 (a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101 (a), the ROM 202 in the first embodiment has a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a normal symbol per random number table 202c, and a jackpot type selection table 202d. It is composed of at least a pattern scenario table 202e.

First, the details of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). This special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is a data table that is referred to when executing a lottery of special symbols, and the range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot is the state and setting of the special symbol. It is specified for each value. FIG. 102A is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a), 250 random values (counter values) of "0 to 249" are set for the set value "1" as random values (counter values) determined to be jackpots of the special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol. It is set, and 275 pieces of "0 to 274" are set for the set value "2", and 300 pieces of "0 to 299" are set for the set value "3". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit of the special symbol in the probabilistic game state (special game state) is "0 to 999" with respect to the set value "1". 1000 pieces are set, 1100 pieces of "0 to 1099" are set for the set value "2", and 1200 pieces of "0 to 1199" are set for the set value "3".

In the present embodiment, since there are 65536 possible values of the random number counter per first, which is "0 to 65535", the setting "1" is set, and the big hit is obtained in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning (big hit probability) is about 1/262, and the big hit probability is about 1/65 in the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, when the setting "2" is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/238 in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the jackpot probability is about 1/60 in the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, when the setting "3" is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/218 in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the jackpot probability is about 1/55 in the high probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, the setting "1" is the setting value (disadvantageous setting value) that is the most difficult to win the big hit, and the setting "3" is the setting value (advantageous setting value) that is the easiest to win the big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is four times higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol regardless of which setting value is set. It is configured to be. In other words, regardless of which setting value is set, the same privilege (a privilege to make it easier to win a big hit) when the transition from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol is made. Is configured to be provided to the player. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the set values of a plurality of stages can be set, the privilege given when the probability state of the special symbol is switched can be made uniform regardless of the set value. , It is possible to prevent the game content from being excessively different depending on the set value.

Depending on the set value, the privilege content given when the transition from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol may be different. For example, the setting "3" may be different from the setting "1". May be configured so that the degree of variability of the jackpot probability when shifting from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol is larger, and in the case of the setting "1", the special symbol The jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is quadrupled with respect to the jackpot probability in the low probability state, and when the setting is "3", the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is in the high probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured so that the jackpot probability is 6 times. With this configuration, the degree of advantage of the setting "3", which is an advantageous setting for the disadvantage setting "1", can be further increased, so that an advantageous setting value is set for the player. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game with the pachinko machine 10 that is being used.

In the present embodiment, the set value provided in the pachinko machine 10 is set to three stages, but the set value is not limited to this, and the set value may be set to two stages or four or more stages (for example, six stages). good. Further, in the present embodiment, a setting difference is provided for the jackpot probability of the special symbol, but the setting difference is not limited to this, for example, the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, the setting probability of the probability change state, the period during which the probability change state continues, A setting difference may be provided for various elements in which the degree of advantage of the game, such as the game content of the jackpot game, can be changed. Even in such a case, since it is possible to provide the player with a different degree of advantage according to the set value, the pachinko machine 10 in which the advantageous set value is set for the player You can enthusiastically play a game to play a game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the details of the above-mentioned random number table 202c per ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 102 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is defined as "5, 6" as the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the hit of the normal symbol. Has been done. On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state of the normal symbol, the range in which the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "5 to 204" is defined as the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the hit of the normal symbol.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to the low probability (1/120). On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to the high probability (1 / 1.2). As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the game per game based on the winning of the normal symbol in the time saving state.

Next, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 103, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 39", and the jackpot A1 (10R probability variation jackpot) is defined in association with the range of "40, 41". , The jackpot B1 (10R probability variation jackpot) is defined in association with the range of "42 to 47", and the jackpot C1 (5R probability variation jackpot) is defined in association with the range of "48 to 59". , The jackpot D1 (2R probability variation jackpot) is defined in association with each other, and the jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, time saving 100 times) is associated with the range of "60 to 99". Therefore, the probabilistic jackpot at a rate of 60% and the gaming state after the jackpot ends are set to the most advantageous probabilistic gaming state for the player, and the normal jackpot at a rate of 40% and the gaming state after the jackpot ends. It is set to a time-saving gaming state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the gaming state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 103 and described above, the jackpot A1 and the jackpot B1 are defined as the jackpot types in which the jackpot game (10R probability variation jackpot) having the same contents is executed. That is, the same jackpot game is executed regardless of whether the jackpot A1 is selected as the jackpot type or the jackpot B1 is selected. By defining different jackpot types for the same jackpot game in this way, when a command (winning command, hit-related command, etc.) for indicating the jackpot type is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot type It is possible to execute different jackpot game effects according to the situation.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot A1 is selected as the jackpot type and when the jackpot E1 is selected, it is notified that the jackpot game is a 10-round jackpot game. After that, the jackpot game effect that can execute the effect (probability change promotion effect) for suggesting the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, when jackpot B1, jackpot C1, or jackpot D1 is selected as the jackpot type, it suggests how many rounds the jackpot game will continue after notifying that the probability change state will be set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that a jackpot game effect that can execute the effect (round promotion effect) is executed.

In this way, when a plurality of types of jackpot game effects (probability change promotion effect, round promotion effect) having different meanings are executed as the jackpot game effects, any of the jackpot game effects can be executed. If the 10R probability variation jackpot) is specified by one jackpot type, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (winning command, hit-related command, etc.) for indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot, Which jackpot game effect is to be executed is randomly determined, and there is a problem that it is difficult to fix the ratio of the 10R probability variation jackpot in each jackpot game effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, two types of jackpots (big hit A1 and jackpot B1) indicating a 10R probability variation jackpot are provided, and when the jackpot A1 is selected, the probability variation promotion effect is executed. The processing rule on the voice lamp control device 113 side is stipulated so that the round promotion effect is executed when the jackpot B1 is selected.

With this configuration, the ratio of each jackpot game in each jackpot game production can be matched with the selection ratio of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d. Specifically, when the probability variation promotion effect is executed (when jackpot A1 and jackpot E1 are selected), the percentage at which the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends is 50%. In addition, when the round promotion effect is executed (when jackpot B1, jackpot C1, and jackpot D1 are selected), 10R jackpot is executed at a rate of 10%, and 5R jackpot is executed at a rate of 30%. Then, the 2R jackpot will be executed at a rate of 60%.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202b in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a). FIG. 104A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202b according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 104 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202b in the first embodiment is used to select a variation pattern according to the lottery result when a lottery of special symbols is executed in a normal state. When the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the reference variation pattern selection table 202b1 and the probability variation state and the time reduction state, the time reduction / probability variation variation referred to for selecting the variation pattern according to the lottery result. It is referred to when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the pattern table 202b2 and the probability variation state, and is specified for high-speed variation in which the variation time shorter than the time saving / probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 is easily selected. It is composed of at least a variation pattern table 202b3.

First, the details of the above-described conventional variation pattern table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (b). FIG. 104 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the variation patterns. It is stipulated.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the hit / fail determination result is correct, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds with respect to the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49". The hit variation A is defined in association with each other, and the hit variation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is associated with the range of "50 to 99", and the variation is defined in the range of "100 to 198". The hit variation C for 90 seconds is specified in association with the time. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 25% (50/199), and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds at a rate of about 25% (50/199). Is set to, and the fluctuation time is set to 90 seconds at a rate of about 50% (99/199).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is out of order, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the deviation variation A of 5 seconds with respect to the range of "0 to 149", and "150 to". The deviation time B of 20 seconds is associated with the range of "194", and the deviation variation C of 60 seconds is associated with the range of "195-198". ing. For this reason, if the player loses the lottery for a special symbol in the normal game state, the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds at a rate of about 75% (150/199), and at a rate of about 23% (45/199). The fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds, and the fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds at a rate of about 2% (4/199).

In this way, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, it is configured so that a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is more easily selected than when it is a miss, so that the first symbol and the third symbol are selected. The longer the variable display is, the higher the expectation for the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104 (c), the details of the time saving / probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 described above will be described. FIG. 104 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation variation pattern table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 104 (c), when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the hit fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is generated with respect to the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 being “0 to 49”. It is defined in association with each other, and the fluctuation time B per 60 seconds is associated with the range of "50 to 198". Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 25% (50/199), and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds at a rate of about 75% (149/199). Is set to.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is out of order, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the deviation variation D of 3 seconds with respect to the range of "0 to 179", and "180 to". A deviation variation B having a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is associated with the range of "197", and an deviation variation C with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with "198". For this reason, if the player loses the lottery for a special symbol in the normal game state, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds at a rate of about 90% (150/199), and at a rate of about 9% (18/199). The fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds, and the fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds at a rate of about 0.5% (1/199).

In this way, when the time saving / probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 is referred to, a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected as compared with the case where the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is referenced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, the game can be sharpened.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed fluctuation in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the short hit fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is associated with the range in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”. It is defined, and a short hit variation B with a variation time of 12 seconds is associated with the range of "100 to 198". Therefore, in the probabilistic state, if the special symbol lottery wins (big hit) in the state where the fluctuation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed fluctuation is referred to, the fluctuation time is about 50% (100/199). Is set to 6 seconds, and the fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds at a rate of about 50% (99/199).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination result is out of alignment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the short deviation variation A of 1.5 seconds with respect to the range of "0 to 189". A short deviation variation B with a variation time of 6 seconds is defined in association with the range of "190 to 198". Therefore, in the probabilistic state, when the fluctuation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed fluctuation is referred to and the special symbol is not drawn by lottery, the fluctuation time is 6 seconds at a rate of about 50% (100/199). Is set to, and the fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds at a rate of about 50% (99/199).

In the present embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the change pattern of the special symbol change is selected according to the jackpot type that triggers the setting of the probability change state and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation). The variation pattern table referred to at the time is configured to switch between the variation pattern table 202b2 for time saving / probability variation and the variation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed variation, and the variation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 106) described later. ) Is configured to switch the fluctuation pattern table according to the specified contents.

As a result, it is easy to select the first probability variation period in which the fluctuation pattern of the relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time relatively shorter than the first probability variation period for the period in which the probability variation state is set. It is possible to set the probability change second period. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table is set so as to suppress a situation in which the number of executions of the jackpot game per unit time is excessively increased by continuously selecting the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time after the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to switch or switch the fluctuation pattern so as to increase the number of special symbol lottery per unit time when the probability change state continues for a long time without winning the big hit.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, the above-mentioned two types of fluctuation pattern tables can be referred to, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of fluctuation pattern tables can be referred to. It may be configured as possible. Further, the gaming state in which a plurality of types of variation pattern tables can be referred to is not limited to the probability variation state, and a plurality of types of variation pattern tables may be configured to be referenceable in other gaming states.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 106. The variation pattern scenario table 202f defines a variation pattern table that is referred to according to the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot game is completed, and corresponds to the previously executed jackpot game. Different scenarios are defined according to the jackpot type and the game state set at the time of the previous jackpot winning.

Specifically, when the probability change state is set based on the jackpot A1, the range of the number of special symbol lottery "1 to 80 times" executed after the jackpot game is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Refers to the time saving / probability variation variation pattern table 202b2, the range of "81 times to 999 times" refers to the high speed variation variation pattern table 202b3, and the range of "1000 times to" is the time reduction / probability variation variation. A variation pattern scenario with which the pattern table 202b2 is referenced is defined.

Further, when the probability variation state is set based on the jackpots B1, C1 and D1, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the number of special symbol lottery "1" executed after the jackpot game is completed. The variation pattern table 202b2 for time saving / probability variation is referred to in the range of "80 times to 80 times", and the variation pattern table 202b3 for high speed variation is referred to in the range of "81 times to 999 times", and the range of "1000 times to". The variation pattern scenario in which the variation pattern table 202b2 for time reduction / probability variation is referred to is defined, and when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time reduction state or the probability variation state, a special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is specified. The fluctuation pattern scenario in which the fluctuation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed fluctuation is referred to in the range of the number of lottery "1 to 999 times" and the fluctuation pattern table 202b2 for time saving / probability variation is referred to in the range of "1000 times to" is defined. Has been done.

Furthermore, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot E1, the time saving is within the range of the number of special symbol lottery "1 to 100 times" executed after the jackpot game is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The variation pattern table 202b2 for probability variation is referred to, and the variation pattern scenario in which the variation pattern table 202b1 for normal use is referred to is defined in the range of "101 times to".

Although not shown, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, when the initialization process of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, a dedicated fluctuation pattern scenario ( The variable pattern table for reset) is referred to, and the variable pattern table 202b1 for normal use is referred to in the range of the number of special symbol lottery "1 to 100 times" executed after the initialization process. A fluctuation pattern scenario in which the fluctuation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed fluctuation is referred to in the range of "101 times to 110 times" and the fluctuation pattern table 202b1 for normal use is referred to in the range of "111 times to" is defined. That is, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated, such as when the setting change operation is executed, the normal state which is the initial state is set as the game state, and the number of special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is 100. When the number of times is exceeded, the fluctuation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed fluctuation is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected to shift to a specific period.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 after the setting is changed will execute high-speed fluctuation when the number of special symbol lottery executed without winning the jackpot exceeds 100 times. .. Therefore, when a fluctuation pattern in which high-speed fluctuation is executed is set as a fluctuation pattern of special symbol fluctuation in the pachinko machine 10 in which the normal state is set, the set value may be changed for the player. Can be predicted.

It should be noted that a plurality of fluctuation pattern scenarios (initial fluctuation pattern scenarios) that can be selected after the initialization processing are provided, and for example, there are cases where the set value "1" is set and cases where the set value "3" is set. , Different initial time variation pattern scenarios may be configured to be selected (easily selected). By configuring in this way, it is predicted that the setting has been changed by grasping that the initial time fluctuation pattern scenario is set, and based on the type of the set initial time fluctuation pattern scenario. It is possible to predict the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on (when the initialization process is executed), the initial time variation pattern scenario is set, but the present embodiment is limited to this. It may be configured so that the initial time variation pattern scenario is set when the setting change operation is performed. As a result, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated without performing the setting change operation, a variation pattern scenario different from that when the setting change operation is performed is set, so that the player is executed. By grasping the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation to be performed, it is possible to make it easier to predict whether or not the setting is changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101 (b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 101B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 101 (b), the RAM 203 in the first embodiment includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol. 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, set value storage area 203g, winning state storage area 203h, fluctuation number counter 203i, and time saving It has a counter 203j, a variation execution flag 203k, a probability variation flag 203m, a jackpot medium flag 203n, a variation order storage area 203p, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A random number counter C4 is normally stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) Is vacant, and the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in the other hold areas are stored. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed.

The value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning a prize in the right second entrance 640r, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 receives a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c.

The set value storage area 203 g is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, if "00H" is stored as data in the set value storage area 203g, it means that the set value "1" is set, and if "01H" is stored as data, it means that "01H" is stored. It indicates that the set value "2" is set, and if "02H" is stored as data, it indicates that the set value "3" is set. When executing the lottery of the special symbol, the data of the set value storage area 203g is read out, and the lottery of the special symbol (big hit lottery) is executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102 (a)), the range of random numbers corresponding to the set values indicated by the data in the set value storage area 203g and the first hit random number stored in the execution area. A special symbol lottery is executed by comparing with the value of the counter C1. The initial value of the set value storage area 203g is set to "00H", and each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, "01H" → "02H" and "01H" The value is updated in increments of "02H", and when the setting switch 110c is further pressed while the data is "02H", the data is updated to "01H". When the power is turned on with the pressing of the RAM clear switch 122, all the data in the RAM 203 is reset (cleared) to the initial value. Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the set value storage area 203g is also reset to the initial value "00H". That is, even if only the RAM clear operation is performed without executing the setting change operation, the setting 1 can be changed. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

The winning state storage area 203h is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability variation flag 203m is off), the winning state storage area 203h is normally used. "00H" is stored as information indicating the state. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability variation flag 203m is off), the time saving state is set in the winning state storage area 203h. "01H" is stored as the information to be shown. If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is in the probabilistic state (if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is 1 or more and the probabilistic flag 203m is on), the probabilistic state is set in the winning state storage area 203h. "02H" is stored as the information to be shown. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203h is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

The fluctuation number counter 203i is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol variation, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol variation.

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and a jackpot of the special symbol is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a new value is set according to the big hit type regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to execute the variation of the first special symbol or the variation of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the variation is started according to the order in which the balls are entered into the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r (the order in which the balls are reserved and stored). Here, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the variation execution determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is stored in the variation order described later. Based on the order data of the reserved storage stored in the area 203p, it is determined whether the variation stored next is the reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the determination result is obtained. The corresponding variable execution flag 203k is set on according to.

The probability change flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability change state. This probability change flag 203m is set to on when the probability change state is set. The probability variation flag 203m is set when it is determined in the process of S1113 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 that the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot E (S1113). : No) is set to on. Further, in the process of S220 in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off when the variation display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit is stopped.

The jackpot flag 203n is a flag indicating that the gaming state is in the jackpot game. The jackpot middle flag 203n is set to on when the start of the jackpot game is set in the process of S221 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off in the process of S1117 executed when the jackpot end timing is reached (S1110: Yes). ..

The variable order storage area 203p is used when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball slot 640r or the second ball slot 640 and is stored as a hold ball (hold memory). This is the area where the reserved order is stored. In the present embodiment, the variation of the special symbol is configured to be executed in the order in which the special symbol is reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not executed with priority. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute the first ball entry port 64 and the right second entry ball port 640r, so that the fluctuations are started in the order in which they are held and stored. As a result, even when the special symbol changes, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed alternately, and only one of the reserved balls is digested, so that the reserved ball of the special symbol is released. It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, stored data, and the like necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details will be omitted.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 134) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 101A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation pattern selection table 222a, an effect switching table 222b, a setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, a look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d, and a hold upper limit effect selection. At least the table 222e, the effect execution number selection table 222f, the mission selection table 222g, the promotion point selection table 222h, and the promotion effect selection table 222i are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, and a counter value for selection (not shown) is acquired to determine one fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is based on, for example, information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation time, stop symbol, presence / absence of reach effect, lottery result). It contains information to indicate the type of game to be executed). Then, in order to execute the variation effect of the third symbol in the variation pattern corresponding to the corresponding special symbol variation, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the variation pattern selection table 222a when the variation pattern command is received. The fluctuation pattern (variation pattern for production) is determined.

The effect switching table 222b is a data table that is referred to when switching the effect period based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the time measuring device 292. In the present embodiment, different effects can be executed according to the set effect period. Then, the effect switching table 222b is used to select an effect period for executing the effect (effect mode) performed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

The determination of the effect mode is performed in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 of FIG. 158) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the determination value of the effect switching table 222b shown in FIG. The effect period is specified according to the elapsed time T (see S3602 in FIG. 158) determined based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timekeeping device 292 (see S3603 in FIG. 158).

FIG. 108 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the effect switching table 222b stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 108, in the effect switching table 222b, the type of the effect period is defined in association with the value of the elapsed time T after the power is turned on to the game machine.

In the present embodiment, the normal production period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period can be set as the production period. The SP time period is an effect period in which a dedicated effect mode is determined based on the timed time, and is a period in which an effect with a sense of unity (period effect) is executed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Then, the normal production period is a period in which an independent production is executed in each pachinko machine 10 according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Further, the SP time preparation period is a period in which the same effect as the normal effect period is executed, and is a preparation period for notifying the player that the SP time period will be set soon. Therefore, during the SP time preparation period, a guidance mode for guiding that the SP time period is approaching is provided on a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in which the same effect as the normal effect period is executed. Is displayed.

In the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111) of FIG. 158, when the value of the elapsed time T indicates the normal effect period, the period effect in-progress flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, is set. It is turned off, and the information for indicating that the SP time period stored in the storage area provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is being cleared is cleared. Then, based on these processing results, the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 is in the normal effect mode (the effect mode of the effect executed during the normal effect period). Will be done. On the other hand, when the value of the elapsed time T indicates the SP time period, the period effect during period flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to ON, and further, the display control device 114 Information indicating that the SP time period is in progress is stored in the storage area provided in the work RAM 233. Then, based on these processing results, the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 is performed in a special effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 108, in the present embodiment, the normal effect period is set for most of the time measured by the time measuring device 292, and the period for which the SP time period is set is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to experience the period production (SP time production) that is executed during the SP time period. Therefore, the player is enthusiastic about playing the game during the SP time period. Can be done. Further, although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the timekeeping device 292 is configured to execute different effects during the SP time period according to the number of times the SP time period is set after the timekeeping is started. In the first SP time period after the timekeeping device 292 starts timing, the music A is played, and the period production (SP time production) is executed in the production mode according to the music A. Then, in the second SP time period after the timekeeping device 292 starts timing, the music B different from the music A is played, and the period production (SP time production) is executed in the production mode according to the music B. To.

Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to execute the SP time effect at various timings.

Explaining in detail the contents defined in the effect switching table 222b, the effect switching table 222b has an elapsed time T (elapsed time since the power is turned on) calculated based on the timed contents of the time measuring device 292. The production period is specified according to the above, the normal production period is specified in the range where the elapsed time T is 88 minutes or less, the SP time preparation period is specified in the range of 88 minutes to 90 minutes, and 90 minutes to 93 minutes. The SP time period (for music A) is specified in the range of minutes. Then, the normal production period is defined again in the range of 93 minutes to 213 minutes, the SP time preparation period is defined in the range of 213 minutes to 215 minutes, and the SP time period is defined in the range of 215 minutes to 219 minutes. (For music B) is specified.

After that, the normal production period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period are defined for the elapsed time.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the SP time period is defined to be different depending on the mode of the effect to be performed. That is, it is specified that the SP time period is 3 minutes when the SP time period for the music A is set, and the SP time period is 4 minutes when the SP time period for the music B is set. There is. With this configuration, the SP time period corresponding to the length of the music to be played can be easily set.

On the other hand, the length of the SP time preparation period is the same (2 minutes) regardless of which SP time period is set. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the effect data for setting the effect mode dedicated to the SP time preparation period (for example, the telop display of "soon to enter the SP period").

Further, during the SP time preparation period, in addition to the guidance mode for informing the player that the period for which the SP time period is set is approaching, the SP executed during the SP time period set next. A prediction mode for notifying the player of the production mode of the time effect may also be set. In this case, as the advance notice mode, for example, a mode such as "next time, music B start" is used in which the player can grasp a part of the production (music to be played) to be executed during the next SP time period. Be done.

In the present embodiment, the SP time preparation period can be set in a period (2 minutes) before the SP time period is set, but the SP time preparation period is not limited to this. It may be configured to always display the notification mode for notifying the player of the remaining time until the SP time period is set during the normal production period without setting. In this case, since it is possible for the player to know that the remaining time until the next SP time period is set is long, the SP time is given to the player who desires to play during the SP time period. It is possible to secure a long preparation period for playing a game during the period. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress that the game cannot be played during the SP time period and the motivation for the game is lowered.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the remaining time until the SP time period is set is displayed during the SP time preparation period without displaying the remaining time until the SP time period is set during the normal production period. By configuring so as to do so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the SP time period is set. Therefore, it is possible to have the player who is playing the game during the normal production period continue to play the game while expecting that the SP time period is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, a period in which a unified effect (period effect) is executed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 and a period in which an independent effect (normal effect) is executed in each pachinko machine 10 are set. It is configured to be settable, and moreover, it is configured to be able to set multiple types of production modes as the production mode of the period production, but it is not limited to this, and it is possible to set multiple types of production modes for the normal production. It may be configured.

In this case, a predetermined effect lottery may be executed when the normal effect period is set, and the effect content may be determined based on the effect result. With this configuration, it is possible to execute different effects based on the information timed by the timekeeping device 292 even for the normal effect, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the period production with a sense of unity in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the same production period is set for each pachinko machine 10 according to the elapsed time T from the power-on. The content of the effect switching table 222b is defined so as to be performed, but the content is not limited to this, and for example, the timing at which the SP time preparation period is set differs depending on the set value, or the SP time period is set. It may be configured to have different timings.

More specifically, when the set value is set high, the timing at which the guidance mode (telop display) is displayed and the notification voice are displayed during the SP time preparation period, as compared with the case where the set value is low. The specified contents of the effect switching table 222b may be configured to be different according to the set value so that the output timing of the above is likely to be delayed.

With this configuration, on the premise that a plurality of pachinko machines 10 perform a period production with a sense of unity, the player is given a production without a sense of unity (delayed production) intentionally. On the other hand, it is possible to give some sense of discomfort. In the above example, since the high setting is configured so that the delay effect is more easily executed than the low setting, the player is asked from the timing when the SP time preparation period is set. You can watch the effect being performed.

Further, it is difficult to grasp that the period effect is executed with a delay only by one pachinko machine 10, but the period effect is produced by comparing with the period effect executed by a plurality of adjacent pachinko machines 10. It is possible to easily grasp that the execution timing of is delayed. Therefore, it is possible to make an interest in the period production executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

When executing the above-mentioned delayed effect, instead of delaying all the effects to be executed, a normal effect timing is set as the execution timing of the effect, and a part of the effect (for example, audio) is set. It may be configured to shift (delay) the execution timing only, or it may be configured to accelerate the execution timing of some of the effects.

In FIG. 108, the correspondence between the elapsed time T and the production period when the elapsed time T is 339 minutes or later is omitted, but in reality, even after 339 minutes, the special production period of 2 minutes and 50 It is set so that the normal production period of minutes is repeated alternately. The range of the elapsed time T in the effect switching table 222b needs to be set at least for the business hours of one day in the hall. For example, the elapsed time T and the effect are set in the range of less than 1440 minutes (24 hours). The correspondence with the period may be set, or the correspondence with several days may be set. Further, the types of the production period are not necessarily limited to the three types of the normal production period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period, and even if four or more types of production periods having different modes of the performance to be executed are provided. good.

Further, although the present embodiment defines a table in which the type of the effect period is specified for each value of the elapsed time T, it is not always necessary to prepare a table corresponding to all the values of T. For example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T, which is the normal production period, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T, which is the SP time period, are defined one by one, and the value of the elapsed time T is defined. When it is out of the range, a predetermined value may be added to the specified range of the value of the elapsed time T. As a specific example, for example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal production period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50:00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the SP time period is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes. When the value of the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the normal production period and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the SP time period are defined as 00 seconds. 60 minutes 00 seconds may be added to each, and control may be performed so as to reset the type of the effect period in the range of the value of the elapsed time T from 60 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds.

More specifically, in the effect switching table 222b, the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50:00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the SP time period is Only the information that it is from 50 minutes 00 seconds to 6 minutes 00 seconds is specified. Then, based on the power-on, the information defined in the effect switching table 222b is duplicated in a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the duplicated information. Then, when the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, which is the maximum value of the elapsed time T specified in the duplicated information, 6 minutes 00 seconds is added to the duplicated information to make a new value. Update to information. That is, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal production period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 110 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the special production period is 110 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds. It is updated with the information that there is. After that, every time 60 minutes and 00 seconds elapse, it is controlled to add 60 minutes and 00 seconds to the duplicated information and update it with new information, and the production period is based on the updated information and the elapsed time T. Determine the type of.

In this case, since the amount of data in the effect switching table 222b is reduced, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of ROM 222 can be reduced.

The setting suggestion effect selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to for selecting the effect mode (effect pattern) when executing the setting suggestion effect, and is a set value and an acquired effect counter. Different effect patterns (effect modes) are defined according to the value of 223 g.

The setting suggestion effect selection table 222c only defines the effect pattern, and the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect actually executed based on the type of the setting suggestion effect and the selected effect pattern is determined. It is determined. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed by various effects (see FIG. 90B), and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to each effect. Therefore, if the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c is specified to a specific effect mode, there is a problem that the specified effect amount increases and the data amount of the RAM 222 increases. Further, when the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c determines a specific effect mode, that is, which effect is used to execute the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is switched to another effect. There was a problem that it became difficult to execute and it was difficult to increase the variation of the production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only the effect pattern (setting suggestion content) of the setting suggestion effect is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to set an effect mode according to the determined effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect for the effect on which the setting suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, for example, the right to execute the setting suggestion effect. Only can be acquired in advance, and the acquired execution right can be used by the player for any production. Therefore, when increasing the variation of the effect, the processing load can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed using the effect pattern selected in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c can be used. A storage means capable of storing a plurality of the selected effect patterns and a generation means capable of generating a new effect pattern by adding up the plurality of effect patterns stored in the storage means are provided, and the generation thereof is provided. The setting suggestion effect based on the effect pattern generated by the means may be configured to be executable.

In this case, the effect pattern generated by the generation means may be configured to be an effect pattern that can specifically suggest a set value rather than the effect pattern defined in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c. For example, pachinko. When the setting value of the machine 10 is configured to be set in 6 stages, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c has an effect pattern in which the set value can be narrowed down to at most 2 types (for example,). An effect pattern indicating setting 1 or 6 (an effect pattern indicating setting 2 or 6) is defined, and as an effect pattern to be generated, an effect pattern (for example, setting 6 or the like) capable of specifically notifying a set value is generated. It is good to configure it so that it is done. With this configuration, the generation means generates a new effect pattern, which makes it easier for the player to grasp the set value. Therefore, while expecting that the generation means will generate a new effect pattern. It is possible to enthusiastically perform a game (a game for acquiring the right to execute a setting suggestion effect).

Further, in this case, the player can select whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect with the effect pattern selected in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c by using the execution right stored in the storage means. You may. With this configuration, the current setting value can be determined or set in a complex manner by executing many setting suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects that are difficult to understand) that cannot specifically notify the set value. By reducing the number of times the suggestion effect is executed, the player can select whether to aim for the execution of the setting suggestion effect (easy-to-understand setting suggestion effect) that can specifically notify the set value.

Further, it is preferable to set an upper limit on the period in which the execution right of the setting suggestion effect can be stored in the storage means. In that case, the execution right is erased by the erasing means, or a discriminating means capable of discriminating the elapsed period from being stored is provided, and the predetermined elapsed period (for example, 1 hour elapse or execution of a special symbol lottery) is executed by the discriminating means. When it is determined that the number of times of reaching 100 times has passed, the execution right may be deleted by the erasing means. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a game property to the selection of whether or not to generate a new effect pattern by the generation means. That is, by giving the possibility that the execution right is erased by the erasing means, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect (easy-to-understand setting suggestion effect) that can specifically notify the set value. It is possible to give a great meaning to the selection result of which setting suggestion effect is to be executed by the person.

As shown in FIG. 109, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c defines five types of effect patterns A to effect pattern E, and when setting 1 is set, the acquired effect counter. "Production pattern A" is selected in the range of "35-79", "Selection pattern C" is selected in the range of "80-94", and "Production pattern D" is selected in the range of "95-99". Is stipulated to be. It is stipulated that the setting suggestion effect is not executed when the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g is in the range of "0 to 34".

When setting 2 is set, the acquired effect counter 223 g has an "effect pattern A" in the range of "5 to 49" and a "effect pattern B" in the range of "50 to 74". , "Production pattern C" is selected in the range of "75 to 89", and "Production pattern D" is selected in the range of "90 to 99". In addition, when the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is "0 to 4", it is stipulated that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Further, when setting 3 is set, the acquired effect counter 223 g has an "effect pattern A" in the range of "0 to 44" and a "effect pattern B" in the range of "45 to 64". , "Direction pattern C" is selected in the range of "65-84", "Direction pattern D" is selected in the range of "85-96", and "Direction pattern E" is selected in the range of "99-99". It is stipulated.

That is, the effect pattern A is an effect pattern (default effect pattern) that is selected with the same selection ratio (45%) regardless of which set value is set. When an effect based on this default effect pattern is executed, it is not possible to suggest the setting from the effect mode, but it is possible to grasp that the setting suggestion effect has been executed. Therefore, by determining the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed, for example, the set value can be predicted based on the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed within a predetermined period, or the total number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed can be predicted. It provides information that can be used as a reference when predicting a set value by analyzing the number of setting suggestion effects executed in a specific effect pattern.

Further, the effect pattern B is an effect pattern that cannot be selected in the setting 1, that is, an effect pattern in which the setting 1 is denied at the time of execution. This effect pattern B is an effect pattern for notifying the player of a set value that has not been set. That is, although the effect pattern B does not directly notify the set value, it is an effect pattern that can advance the setting estimation by combining it with the information of the other execution suggestion effect.

The effect pattern C is an effect pattern in which the high setting is easier to select than the low setting, but the difference in the selection ratio is small, so that the set value is difficult to predict. Similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern C, the effect pattern D is an effect pattern in which the high setting is easier to select than the low setting, and the selection ratio is defined to be larger than that of the above-mentioned effect pattern C. There is. That is, the setting pattern C and the effect pattern D are the effects that can be expected to be set higher as they are executed.

Finally, the effect pattern E is an effect pattern that can be selected only when the high setting (setting 3) is set. When the effect based on this effect pattern is executed, the maximum setting (setting "3) is fixed, so that the appearance rate is set to be lower than that of other effect patterns. It is possible to solve the problem that the set value is immediately grasped.

The look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when selecting a period for which execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited, and the execution condition of the look-ahead effect is set based on the winning information command output from the main control device 110. It is referred to when it is determined that it has been established. When it is determined that the selected look-ahead prohibition period and the SP time period overlap, the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited.

In this look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d, a prohibition period that differs based on the hold position of the reserved symbol (holding the effect target) for which the look-ahead effect is executed, the presence or absence of a jackpot winning within the look-ahead effect period, and the number of jackpot wins Is stipulated. With this configuration, the first look-ahead effect including the jackpot winning effect, which tends to lengthen the look-ahead effect period, and the second look-ahead effect, which tends to shorten the look-ahead effect period compared to the first look-ahead effect because the jackpot winning is not included. You can change the look-ahead prohibition period with.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that increases the variation of the effect to be executed and enhances the effect of the effect by executing various effects based on different execution triggers. In such a pachinko machine 10, since a plurality of effects are executed by the establishment of different triggers, a plurality of effects may be executed in duplicate depending on the execution timing of each effect, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. There was a problem that it would end up. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, when an execution opportunity for executing a specific effect is established, the execution status of another effect is determined, and whether or not the specific effect is executed is determined based on the determination result. By doing so, there is something that suppresses the execution of effects that are difficult for the player to understand.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine 10, in order to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand, the execution of a specific effect is prohibited more than necessary, and the effect of the effect is suitably enhanced. There was a problem that it could not be done. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the execution trigger of a specific effect is established, the execution period of the specific effect is calculated, and the overlap period with other effects is predicted based on the calculation result. It is configured to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the prediction result. Furthermore, when calculating the execution period of a specific effect, the presence or absence of a big hit and the hold of the effect target are included as factors that make a big difference in the effect period of the specific effect (look-ahead effect). It is configured in.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy when calculating the execution period of a specific effect (look-ahead effect), and execute the specific effect (look-ahead effect) even at the timing when the execution of the specific effect is conventionally prohibited. This makes it possible to preferably enhance the effect of the pachinko machine 10.

When the contents specified in the look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d are specifically explained with reference to FIG. 110 (a), the effect target hold is "1", and the jackpot during the look-ahead effect period is "Yes". When the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibition period is "460 seconds", and when the production target hold is "1" and the jackpot during the look-ahead production period is "none", the prohibition period is "110 seconds". Is stipulated. In addition, when the production target hold is "2", the jackpot during the look-ahead production period is "Yes", and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibited period is "480 seconds" and the number of jackpots is "2". In the case, "830 seconds" is specified as the prohibited period, and "130 seconds" is specified as the prohibited period when the production target hold is "2" and the jackpot during the look-ahead production period is "none". There is.

Furthermore, if the production target hold is "3", the jackpot during the look-ahead production period is "Yes", and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibited period is "500 seconds" and the number of jackpots is "2 or more". In the case of, the execution of the look-ahead effect is unconditionally prohibited, and if the effect target hold is "3" and the jackpot during the look-ahead effect period is "none", "150 seconds" is specified as the prohibited period. .. If the production target hold is "4", the jackpot during the look-ahead production period is "Yes", and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibited period is "520 seconds" and the number of jackpots is "2 or more". In the case of, the execution of the look-ahead effect is unconditionally prohibited, and if the effect target hold is "4" and the jackpot during the look-ahead effect period is "none", "170 seconds" is specified as the prohibited period. ..

That is, when the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is established based on the information included in the received winning command, the larger the hold position of the special figure hold for which the execution trigger is established, that is, the look-ahead effect in which the look-ahead effect is executed. As the number of special symbol lottery executed during the period increases, the look-ahead effect period tends to be longer inevitably, so the prohibition period is stipulated longer. More specifically, the prohibition period is defined so that there is no problem even when the maximum fluctuation time (20 seconds) of the special symbol variation that can be executed during the look-ahead effect period is set.

Further, when the jackpot game can be executed during the look-ahead effect period, that is, when the look-ahead effect is executed with the jackpot game in between, the prohibition period is taken into consideration in consideration of the jackpot game period in addition to the special symbol variation period. Is stipulated, and a longer prohibition period is stipulated when the jackpot game is executed than when the jackpot game is not executed. In this way, the length of the pre-reading effect prohibition period can be greatly different depending on whether or not the jackpot game is executed. In addition, when a plurality of big hits are included in the look-ahead effect period, the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited without determining the degree of overlap between the look-ahead effect prohibition period and the SP time period. ing. As a result, when a situation occurs in which the look-ahead prohibition period can be lengthened, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect without determining the degree of overlap with the SP time period. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be prohibited. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the control processing executed in.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is established, the maximum time of the look-ahead effect that can be executed is calculated, and the SP time period is set until the maximum time elapses. In this case, by prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect, the SP time period is set during the look-ahead effect, and a configuration that can suppress the execution of the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a correction process for correcting the calculated maximum time of the look-ahead effect may be made executable. That is, with respect to the execution period of the look-ahead effect calculated based on the maximum time, the maximum time of the look-ahead effect is set based on the information indicating the effect period of the look-ahead effect actually executed (a part of the period of the look-ahead effect). It may be configured to be corrected gradually. As a result, the accuracy of calculating the maximum time of the look-ahead effect that can be actually executed can be improved, so that it is possible to easily specify the period during which the look-ahead effect can be executed without overlapping with other effects. ..

The hold upper limit value effect selection table 222e is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the hold upper limit effect effect to be executed when the number of stored symbols reaches the upper limit number (8). Different effect patterns based on whether or not there is a hold symbol (win hold) that wins a big hit in the hold stored symbols, the number of hit hold exists, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g. (Direction mode) is specified.

Specifically, when there is a hit hold and the number of hit holds is 1, the effect pattern of "upper limit notification" is set in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g is "0 to 44". , The production pattern of "chance announcement" is defined in the range of "45 to 69", and the production pattern of "fish school festival" is defined in the range of "70 to 99". In addition, when there is a hit hold and the number of hit holds is 2, the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g is in the range of "0 to 39", and the effect pattern of "chance notification" is "40". In the range of "~ 99", the production pattern of "Fish School Festival" is defined respectively. Further, when there is a hit hold and the number of hit holds is 3 or more, the effect pattern of the "fish school festival" is set in the range of "0 to 99" in the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g. It is stipulated.

On the other hand, when there is no hit hold, the acquired effect counter 223 g value is in the range of "0 to 64", and the effect pattern of "upper limit notification" is in the range of "65 to 99", "chance notification". The production patterns of are specified respectively.

The effect execution number selection table 222f is a data table that is referred to when the number of setting suggestion effects (effect execution number) to be executed during the specialization mode is determined when the specialization mode is entered. , Various numbers are defined based on the length of the special mode remaining period (special figure remaining fluctuation time) at the time of entering the special mode, the set value, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g.

Here, the contents defined in the effect execution number selection table 222f will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect execution number selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 111, in the effect execution number selection table 222f, a different number is defined as the effect execution number based on the set value, the remaining period of the specialization mode, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g. There is.

The mission selection table 222g is a data table that is referred to when determining the mission content to be executed during the SP time period, and is a different mission (effect pattern) depending on the set value and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g. Is stipulated. That is, it is possible to make the player predict the set value according to the content of the mission executed during the SP time period. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the content of the selected mission is achieved, the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value is executed.

Therefore, in a series of effects (mission effects), it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a plurality of timings, that is, when the mission content is displayed and when the mission is achieved.

Here, the contents of the mission selection table 222g will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the mission selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 112, in the mission selection table 222g, four types of production patterns (mission contents) are defined according to the set value and the value of the acquired effect counter 223g. The four types of mission contents that are defined have different selection rates according to the set values, and the contents that have different mission achievement difficulty levels are defined.

The promotion point selection table 222h is a data table that is referred to when selecting the production mode of the round production in the jackpot game production, and as shown in FIG. 113, the jackpot type, the number of displayed acquired balls, and the number of rounds. A different number of points (number of points granted) is specified in correspondence with. Based on the number of points given here, the effect mode of the round effect during the round effect is determined by referring to the promotion effect selection table 222i described later (see FIG. 114).

The promotion effect selection table 222i is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect content of the promotion effect to be executed based on the number of granted points acquired by referring to the promotion point selection table 222h and the value of the effect counter 223 g. Therefore, the larger the total value (total points) of the number of points to be granted, the larger the amount of benefits given to the player, and the promotion effect is executed with the effect content (see FIG. 114).

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , Winning information storage area 223f, effect counter 223g, effect state storage area 223h, setting value storage area 223i, setting changing flag 223j, executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k, acquired ball number storage area 223n, period production flag 223p , Mission information storage area 223q, time information storage area 223r, operation invalid timer 223s, continuous notice execution flag 223t, continuous notice counter 223u, background mode storage area 223v, special mode middle flag 223w, round number counter 223x, character display flag At least 223y and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is a variation display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first reserved ball number counter in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the special symbol up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and the number of reserved balls such as when the winning information command is received or when the fluctuation pattern command is received is Update according to the timing of increase / decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , When a winning information command is received, a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the second special symbol variation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol, It is updated according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and causes the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, when the main control device 110 detects the start winning and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or when the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and subtracts the number of reserved balls. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203d is used from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b. , A display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the values of the ball number counter 223b are displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made. When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process of the main process executed by the MPU 221. Will be done. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command of a special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The prize information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to the first area). It has 4 areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first entry port 64 or the second entry entry 640 is detected in the main control device 110, the special hit random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning prize, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to four areas (first area ~) corresponding to the type of the entry port (first entry opening 64 or second entry opening 640) in which the entry is detected. Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 110 is based on various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the starting prize is performed. Although the configuration in which the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is included in the various information predicted in response to the start winning. Is included in the setting means for setting the winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and the received winning information command. A configuration may be provided in which a determination means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is properly stored.

Further, in the first embodiment, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 when a new start winning is generated. However, the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the timing when the starting prize is won, it is periodically performed. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol changes start (or At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In the present embodiment, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a look-ahead effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing the display color of the reserved symbol is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (look-ahead effects) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f, the player can be asked about each reserved ball even before the variable display is started. You can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 98. It should be noted that each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, 1 is added and updated.

In the present embodiment, the counters used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, selecting various effects, etc. are collectively referred to as the effect counter 223 g, and the effect counter 223 g is composed of a plurality of counters. , Each counter is configured so that its value is periodically updated by the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but each counter is updated so that the updated values do not overlap. The contents are configured so that they are not synchronized. That is, the value is updated under the same conditions, but the updated value is composed of a plurality of counters that are not related to each other. Then, when selecting the mode of various effects, it is configured to refer to the values of different counters. With this configuration, when a plurality of production modes are determined within the same process, the production modes of the plurality of effects are determined based on the same counter value, and the variation of the effects is reduced. It can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the effect counter 223 g is provided with a plurality of counters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined calculation process is executed for the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g, and the calculation result is obtained. Based on this, it may be configured to select various modes of effect, and in this case, it may be configured to execute a predetermined arithmetic process when reading the value of the effect counter 223 g. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the variation of the effect from being reduced even when a plurality of effect modes are selected based on the same counter value of the effect counter 223 g.

The effect state storage area 223h is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect state (effect content) determined by various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is determined by the various control processes. The contents (information) that have been made are stored. Then, by reading out the information stored in the effect state storage area 223h, the effect mode corresponding to the determined effect state is set.

By storing the effect state (effect content) in the effect state storage area 223h, even if the timing for determining the effect state (effect content) and the timing for setting the effect mode are different, the determined effect It is possible to reliably set the effect mode corresponding to the state (effect content).

The set value storage area 223i is a storage area for storing the set value based on the information when the information about the set value output from the main control device 110 is received. Specifically, when a status command including information on the set value is set (see S913 in FIG. 135) in the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 135) and the status command is received, it is received. The set value is specified based on the information included in the status command, and the information indicating the specified set value is stored in the set value storage area 223i.

Then, the information stored in the set value storage area 223i is referred to when determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. Although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the setting change operation for changing the setting value is executed, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to always need to be turned on. After the setting change operation is completed, the status command including the information about the setting value is set. Further, every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (every time the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 135) is executed), a state command containing information on the set value is voiced from the main control device 110. It is configured to be output to the lamp control device 113. With this configuration, even if the information regarding the set value is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only at a limited timing such as when the power is turned on, the voice lamp control device 113 side. You can surely grasp the current setting value with.

Further, by minimizing the chance that the information on the set value is output, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally acquiring the information on the set value. Further, in the present embodiment, the signal indicating the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 is not directly output to the outside, but the information related to the set value is output, so that the pachinko machine 10 is illegally acquired by any chance. Even so, since it becomes difficult to specify the set value indicated by the information, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally acquiring the information related to the set value. In addition, in the present embodiment, information on the set value is set by using a part of the state command for indicating the game state (for example, the upper bit that tends to be an empty bit among the 8 bits for generating the state command). Since it is more difficult to specify the setting value indicated by the output information than when the information about the setting value is output alone, the act of illegally acquiring the information about the setting value is performed. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the information for indicating the set value is stored in the set value storage area 223i instead of the value indicating the installation value, the information stored in the set value storage area 223i is illegally acquired. Even if it is done, it becomes difficult to specify the set value indicated by the output information, so that it is possible to suppress an act of illegally acquiring the information related to the set value.

In the present embodiment, a dedicated storage area called the set value storage area 223i is provided as a storage area for storing information related to the set value (information for indicating the set value), but the present invention is not limited to this. A storage area that is configured to store information for indicating a set value using a part of another storage area (free area) and stores information about the set value (information for indicating a set value). The indicated address may be configured to be stored in a specific area. In this case, the area for storing information about the set value (information for indicating the set value) may be changed periodically or irregularly. Then it is good.

Further, it is preferable that the information related to the set value is processed according to a predetermined rule in accordance with the specifications of the storage area for storing the information related to the set value (information for indicating the set value). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a set value is illegally acquired based on the information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The setting changing flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the setting is being changed, and is set to ON when a changing command indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the main controller 110. (See S2073 in FIG. 142). Then, it is referred to in the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142) (see S2071 in FIG. 142), and is set to off when it is determined that the change completion command indicating that the setting change is completed has been received (see S2071 in FIG. 142). See S2077).

By providing the setting changing flag 223j, the operation status of the setting change operation executed by the main control device 110 can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, so that the setting change operation is completed. The process of the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142) executed during the period can be switched according to the operation status of the setting change operation. Therefore, the processing load of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the contents of the setting suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game, and when the setting suggestion effect is set as a part of the round effect. Information indicating the production mode (production content) is stored in the storage. Then, the information stored when selecting the effect mode of the end screen effect executed in the ending period of the jackpot game is referred to. In the present embodiment, in order to equalize the information given to the player by the setting suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game, the end screen effect is created based on the content of the setting suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game. It is configured to determine the content of the setting suggestion effect to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the production amount (the amount of information for predicting the set value) of the setting suggestion effect provided to the player in one jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced or the setting suggestion effect being excessively executed in one jackpot game because the setting suggestion effect is not executed at all.

Then, after determining the effect mode of the end screen effect, the information stored in the executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k is cleared.

The acquired ball number storage area 223n is a storage area for cumulatively storing the paid out prize balls, and when a prize information command including information indicating the number of prize balls is received from the main control device 110, the winning information command is received. The number of prize balls is cumulatively stored based on the information contained in the command. In the acquired ball number storage area 223n, the number of prize balls paid out during an advantageous period advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state, a probability change state, and a jackpot game, is cumulatively stored. Then, the stored information is cleared when the advantageous period ends, that is, when the gaming state shifts to the normal state.

The information stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n is referred to when updating the mode of displaying the acquired ball number for notifying the player of the number of balls paid out during the advantageous period. In the present embodiment, the information stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period ends, but the advantage period is not limited to this, for example, the advantageous period ends. After that, the information may be cleared based on the fact that a predetermined condition (a condition that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times) is satisfied. With this configuration, if the advantageous period is set again immediately after the end of one advantageous period, the number of acquired balls will be displayed with the content that inherits the number of prize balls acquired during the previous advantageous period. (Pullback display) is possible. Therefore, a player who wants to display a large number of balls as an acquisition number display can enthusiastically play a game aiming at the next big hit game even after the advantageous period ends.

The period effect during effect flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the SP time effect is being executed, and the elapsed time T calculated based on the time information measured by the timekeeping device 292 is the SP time period. If so, it will be set to on. Then, the elapsed time is set to off when the SP time period has elapsed and the end condition of the SP time effect is satisfied.

When the period effect in-progress flag 223p is set to on, when setting the effect mode of the variable effect, the effect mode dedicated to the period effect (SP time effect) is set, or the third symbol display device 81 The background image displayed on the display surface of is a dedicated background image.

The mission information storage area 223q is a recording area for storing the effect mode (mission content) of the mission effect executed as the SP time effect and the degree of achievement of the mission, and is a mission when the SP time effect is executed. The effect content determined by referring to the selection table 222g is stored. Then, information for indicating the degree of achievement of the mission, which is updated every time the special symbol lottery is executed during the SP time period (every time the variable effect is executed), is updated and stored.

The time information storage area 223r is an area in which the time information (timekeeping information) of the timekeeping device 292 is stored when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The current time information (timekeeping information) acquired from the timekeeping device 292 is stored in the time acquisition process (see S2011 in FIG. 141) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221. The stored timekeeping information calculates the elapsed time T from the power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process of the main process executed by the MPU 221 (see S2111 in FIG. 158), and is the normal production period or the SP period (see S2111 in FIG. 158). It is used to determine whether it is the SP time period (see S3604 in FIG. 158). Since the contents stored in the RAM 223 are not backed up, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 223f is cleared when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the type of the effect period is determined based on the time information acquired from the time measuring device 292 at the time of the start-up process and stored in the time information storage area 223r, a plurality of pachinko machines in the hall are used. If the timing at which the start-up process is performed is matched in the machine 10, the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the timing for storing the time information is matched in the time information storage area 223r, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted, so that the elapsed time can be adjusted. It is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the SP time period based on T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the SP time period based on the elapsed time T. As a result, the persons involved in the hall can align the production period of each pachinko machine 10 simply by turning on the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 all at once. Therefore, some pachinko machines 10 have a normal production period, and other pachinko machines 10 have an SP time period, so that the player playing the game can perform the production in a different production mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent people from feeling uncomfortable about what they are doing. As a method of turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time, for example, an island composed of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is provided, and an external power source capable of turning on the power for each island is provided. It should be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the time measuring device 292, and the type of the production period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired at the time of the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process ( The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in S2111), and the type of the effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the time measuring device 292 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to aged deterioration or the like, the time information deviated from each other is not directly used for determining the type of the production period, but the passage of time. Since it can be converted into a relative value of time T and used for determining the type of production period, the influence of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the SP time period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the SP time period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T can be matched. Therefore, since the production period of each pachinko machine 10 can be aligned, some pachinko machines 10 have a normal production period, and other pachinko machines 10 have an SP time period, so that the player playing the game can play the game. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from feeling uncomfortable when the production is performed in a different production mode from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

The operation invalid timer 223s is a counter for setting a period during which the operation to the frame button 22 is not effectively determined, and the operation to the frame button 22 is valid during the period when the value is set in the operation invalid timer 223s. Not determined (invalid). The operation invalid timer 223s is set to a value indicating a predetermined period (5 seconds) when the end timing of the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is earlier than the end timing of the boot process of the third symbol display device 81. ..

With this configuration, the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined in a state where the boot process is not completed, that is, a state in which necessary information cannot be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the operation result for the frame button 22 specified on the voice lamp control device 113 side and the operation result for the frame button 22 specified on the display control device 114 side (third symbol display device 81 side) are different. It can be suppressed that it ends up.

The continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is a flag for indicating that the look-ahead effect is being executed, and is set to on when the look-ahead effect is executed. Then, it is set to off by executing the special symbol variation that is the target of the look-ahead effect.

The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, and the like in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 144) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 83). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 134).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The timekeeping device 292 is connected to the main control device 110 and is configured to have a real-time clock (RTC) capable of measuring the current time. Here, the configuration of the timekeeping device 292 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. 115 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the timekeeping device 292. The timekeeping device 292 has an input / output port 350, a device control unit 351 and a register 352. Further, a power supply 293 for the timekeeping device is connected to the timekeeping device 292. The power supply 293 for the timekeeping device is a power source dedicated to the timekeeping device 292, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the timekeeping device 292 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. A button type battery is used for the power supply 293 for the timekeeping device.

An input / output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to the device control unit 351 of the timekeeping device 292. The input / output port 350 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to be able to communicate with each other. The device control unit 351 uses (controls) the register 352 to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and executing an alarm at a set time. Here, as shown in FIG. 116, the register 352 has a register table including a plurality of registers. This register table includes a timekeeping register 352a and an input time storage area 352b. That is, as shown in FIG. 115, the register 352 of the timekeeping device 292 is provided with at least a timekeeping register 352a and a closing time storage area 352b.

The timekeeping register 352a is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every second. Further, the input time storage area 352b is a storage area in which various information such as timekeeping information can be written and the stored information can be overwritten. The on-time storage area 352b is an area in which the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 223ba of the RAM 203 is written when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure in the main processing executed by the MPU 221.

Here, the register table included in the register 352 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. 116, the register 352 can hold up to 8 bits of data at each of the 15 addresses 0H to EH in the register table. Of these addresses, addresses 0H to 6H correspond to the timekeeping register 352a, and each address represents seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years.

The details of the timekeeping register 352b will be described by taking the address 0H representing seconds as an example. Bit 7 at address 0H is a fixed L-fixed, non-rewritable bit, and the current number of seconds is expressed using bits 0 to 6. The symbol "○" attached to bit 7 of FIG. 116 is a symbol indicating that the bit is not rewritable, and has the same meaning at other addresses. In addition, bits 0 to bit 6 correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively, and the number of seconds in the current time depends on whether each bit is H or L. It is shown if there is.

For example, when the number of seconds in the current time is 5 seconds, bit0 representing 1 second and bit2 representing 4 seconds are both H, and bits 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are all L. Thereby, it can be expressed that 5 seconds, which is the sum of the number of seconds represented by the bit of H, is the number of seconds of the current time. When the number of seconds in the current time is 29 seconds, bit0 representing 1 second, bit3 representing 8 seconds, and bit5 representing 20 seconds are H, and bits 1, 2, 4, and 6 are all L. Become. Thereby, it can be expressed that 29 seconds, which is the sum of the number of seconds represented by the bit of H, is the number of seconds of the current time.

Address 1H representing minutes, address 2H representing hours, address 4H representing days, address 5H representing months, and address 6H representing years also correspond to bits that are H, as with address 0H that represents seconds. The current time is represented by the sum of the numbers. Regarding the address 6H representing the year, the last two digits of the Christian era are represented, and the first two digits of the Christian era are fixed at 20. That is, the address 6H representing the year can represent only the period between 2000 and 2099.

Regarding the address 3H representing the day of the week, bits 0 to bit 6 correspond to Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday, respectively, one of the bits becomes H, and the other bits become L. It is possible to express a specific day of the week by becoming. For example, if the present is Wednesday, bit3 will be H and bits0,1,2,4,5,6 will be L.

The addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the input time storage area 352b, and can store up to 3 bytes of data. A register for storing seconds (corresponding to address 7H), a register for storing minutes (corresponding to address 8H), and a register for storing time (corresponding to address 9H) are allocated to the input time storage area 352b by 1 byte each. ing. Further, the correspondence between each bit and the seconds, minutes, and hours is the same as that of the addresses 0H to 2H.

That is, bits 0 to bit 6 of the register storing seconds correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively, and bits 0 to bit 6 of the register storing minutes correspond to each other. , 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, 40 minutes, respectively, and bits 0 to bit 5 of the time storage register are 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, and 3 respectively. It corresponds to hours, 10 hours, and 20 hours. In addition, in FIG. 116, a symbol "●" is attached to all bits, but this is a symbol indicating that the bit is capable of rewriting and reading information, and at other addresses. Has the same meaning.

The correspondence between each bit of the timekeeping register 352a and the input time storage area 352b and the number of seconds, the number of minutes, or the like is not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment. For example, a power of 2 may be associated with the numerical value of each bit. Further, in the present embodiment, the input time storage area 352b is composed of 3 bytes, but for example, the number of bytes may be reduced by storing only the hour and minute values as the time information to be stored. Further, the number of bytes may be increased by adding a register capable of storing milliseconds in addition to seconds, minutes, and hours. Further, instead of storing the timekeeping information in the input time storage area 352b, a storage means such as a RAM may be provided outside the timekeeping device 292. In this case, the power supply to the storage means may be configured to be performed by the power supply for the timekeeping device 293, or a power supply dedicated to the storage means may be provided separately.

The addresses AH to CH are registers used to output an alarm signal at a set time, and the addresses DH and EH are registers capable of outputting an interrupt signal at each set cycle. When the alarm function and the interrupt function are not used, the addresses AH to EH can be used as the input time storage area 352b instead of the addresses 7H to 9H. In this case, since 3 bytes of addresses 7H to 9H can be reduced, the number of registers can be reduced, so that the price of the timekeeping device 262 can be reduced.

Note that FIG. 116 shows only the registers assigned to the addresses 0H to EH, but in addition to these, registers assigned addresses other than 0H to EH are provided, for example, an alarm function or an alarm function. A register or the like for changing the setting of the interrupt function or the like is provided.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 262, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 262 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 262.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer processing, the time required for the boot processing can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 160) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 161) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 123) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 162 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 160).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 118). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64, the fluctuating image at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be instructed. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 117, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 120, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. FIG. 120 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” with respect to the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage”.

As shown in FIG. 120, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, so that the third symbol display device 81 smoothly displays the image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 sets the position between the first position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 120A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but in doing so, the resident video RAM 235 As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 120A to 120B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 117) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area by using the image data of the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

Returning to FIG. 117, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 85) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variation effect after the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, or the second ball entry port 640. However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying an image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background mode storage area 233k, an execution effect storage area 233l, a set value storage area 233m, a display update flag 233n, a rear image change flag 233w, and a rear image discrimination flag 233x.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball enters the second ball. The easier it is to enter the ball mouth 640, the more prize balls will be. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is not reduced. Therefore, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is reduced. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit with a special pattern without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 121) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 123) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 122). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 122).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 122, in the example of FIG. 122). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 123) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 123, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 118 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 sets it on in the main process (see FIG. 160) (see S6005 in FIG. 160). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 172 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 162 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 162 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 162 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See S6309 in 162 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 163 to 168) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 169 to 171) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6305 in FIG. 172 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 172 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 173) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 123), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 123) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 123) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (S6303 in FIG. 169). (See), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 171) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 123) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 123, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other image contents to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 162 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 169). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 160) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 173) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7713 in FIG. 173). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 173). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 174).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 162 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S7802 in FIG. 174).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 168 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 173), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 173). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 168 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the setting change operation for changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being executed will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to set a set value of 1 from a plurality of set values having different jackpot winning probabilities by special symbol lottery, and a specific operation for the pachinko machine 10 ( By turning on the power while the setting key 110b (rotation operation) is executed, the setting change operation for changing the set value during the start-up process of the main control device 110 can be executed.

When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, power is supplied from the power supply device 115 (see FIG. 99) to various control devices, and each control device is configured to execute a start-up process. There is. Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, that is, the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting change operation is not executed when the power is turned on, a process based on the operator's operation (setting change operation is performed during the start-up process of each control device). Since the process to be executed) is not executed, the required time is substantially constant when the start-up process of each control device is normally executed. Therefore, since the rising order of each control device (the order in which the rising process ends) can be specified, it is sufficient to execute the processing in accordance with the specified order. However, in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 Since the setting change operation can be executed during the start-up process of the main control device 110, the start-up process of the main control device 110 is better than the start-up process of the display control device 114 (third symbol display device) depending on the period required for the setting change operation. There may be a case where the process ends before the boot process of 81) and a case where the process ends after the process.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, different display screens can be displayed according to the processing status of other control devices at the time when the boot processing by the display control device 114 is completed. With this configuration, the current processing status can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by visually recognizing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boot process of the display control device 114 is executed, and FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing a boot process of the display control device 114. Is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the setting change operation is being executed, and FIG. 119 (c) shows that the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed. FIG. 119 (d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the setting change operation is completed but the start-up process of the main control unit 110 is being executed in the state. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen which is displayed when the boot process of the control device 114 is completed, and the start-up process of a main control device 110 and a voice lamp control device 113 is completed.

As shown in FIG. 119 (a), when the boot process by the display control device 114 is executed, a display image in which a color bar is displayed is displayed on the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81. , Color bars are displayed to correctly adjust the color tone displayed on the liquid crystal display, for example, in the order of white, yellow, cyan, magenta, red, blue, black, that is, in descending order of brightness. The SMPTE color bars and the like composed of the RGB3 primary colors and their complementary colors are displayed side by side.

The display contents displayed on the display screen are used for checking the linearity of the transmission system, the amplitude of the color signal frequency band, and the phase characteristics. As a result, the boot process of the display control device 114 can be properly executed. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a), the test color bar is displayed as a still image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a moving image in which the display position of the color bar is periodically switched is displayed. It may be configured. With this configuration, the operator can easily grasp whether the image information that is periodically switched is normally displayed (whether it is frozen or not) by visually recognizing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

Then, when the display control device 114 finishes the boot process, a command (boot completion command) indicating that the boot process is finished is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the current setting change status by receiving a command output from the main control device 110 to indicate that the setting is being changed and a command to indicate that the setting change is completed. Based on the reception of the boot completion command output from the display control device 114, the information for showing the display image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the state where the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is not completed, the information (display command) for showing the display image cannot be output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Therefore, if no display command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed, the image shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed. That is, the display control device 114 stores the initial display image data with the characters "setting being changed" as the initial display image to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 after the boot process is completed. After determining that the boot process has been completed, it is determined whether or not a display command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined that the display command has not been received, it means that the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 has not been completed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), "setting is being changed". The initial display image data with the characters of is displayed.

Here, for example, when the setting change operation is not executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, each RAM is initialized by each MPU and stored in each ROM. The startup process for executing the initial control process based on the existing information is executed, and the time spent for executing this initial control process is the boot process of the display control device 114, that is, the liquid crystal display. The time is much shorter than the time spent in the process for activating the configured third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, when the boot process is completed by the display control device 114, the display command indicating the display command (initial setting in progress (startup process in progress)) and the initial setting completed (startup process completed) from the voice lamp control device 113. If the display command) indicating is not output, it means that the setting change operation has been executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display image shown in FIG. 119 (b) is configured to be the initial display image.

With this configuration, when the display command is not output from the voice lamp control device 113 when the boot process is completed by the display control device 114, the notification mode for indicating the current situation is displayed. be able to.

Further, when a display command indicating that the setting change is completed is output from the voice lamp control device 113 when the boot process is completed by the display control device 114, the display image shown in FIG. 119 (c) is displayed. When the display command is displayed and a display command indicating that the initial setting is completed is output from the voice lamp control device 113 when the boot process is completed by the display control device 114, it is normal as shown in FIG. 119 (d). The standby screen (demo screen) is displayed.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 124 to 139. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (299 in the present embodiment, respectively). , 99, 239), clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning of the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 to 130.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 131 and 133. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 124), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the jackpot is on. The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value (S203) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is acquired (S203). .. After acquiring the value of each counter, the variation execution determination process is executed (S204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126, but in this variation execution determination process (S204), a process of determining a special symbol in the next variation order is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the next fluctuation order determined by the variation execution determination process (S204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (S205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol). If so, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S206), and the reserved ball command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S206). S207). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 138) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (S209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209), processing such as selection of a fluctuation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed.

When it is determined in the process of S205 that the next variation sequence determined in the variation execution determination process (S204) is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S205: No), the special figure 2 (second special). It is determined whether or not the variation is executed in the symbol) (S210). If it is not the variable execution of the special figure 2 (S210: No), that is, the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of the variable execution in the special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same processing as that for the holding ball of the special symbol 1 described above is performed for the holding ball of the special symbol 2.

Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (S211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation. Set a number command (S212). In the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 138) described later, which is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 by the hold ball number command set here and executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213). In the process of S213, the data stored in the hold areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (S214). The special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S215: No) has not elapsed, the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 127 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. 128. When this special symbol change start processing is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery of special symbols will be held. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special hit type counter. Depending on the value of C2, it is determined whether the jackpot A1, the jackpot B1, the jackpot C1, the jackpot D1, or the jackpot E1.

In this embodiment, the colors of the LEDs to be lit by the first symbol display device 37 are different based on the lottery result. For example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot C is reached, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S218). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S218: Yes), the start of the big hit is set (S219), the probability variation flag 203m is turned off, and the values of the time saving medium counter 203j and the fluctuation number counter 203i are set to 0. (S220). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to on (S221), the stop command is set (S225), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability game state is set, the electric support game state (short-time game state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S218, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more (S222), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203j. If is 1 or more (S222: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S223), and the value of the fluctuation number counter 203i is added by 1 (S224). Next, the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is 0 (S222: No), the processing of S223 is skipped, the processing of S225 is executed, and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and is a process executed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in which execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

In the variation execution determination process (S204), first, the variation execution flag 203k is set to off (“0” as a value) to initialize (S241), and the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is stored. Acquire data (S242). Next, the data in the variable order storage area 203p is shifted (S243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S244). If the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S244: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (S245), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S244, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 1 (S244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the variable execution in the special figure 2. (S246), when it is determined that the variable execution is performed in the special figure 2 (S246: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (S247), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S246 that the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in FIG. 2 (S246: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and is a process of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S251). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S252). The determination as to whether or not the probability variation period is reached is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203m is on. The probability variation flag 203m is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A1, the jackpot B1, the jackpot C1, and the jackpot D1 (S1113: see FIG. 139). On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game (S220: see FIG. 125).

If it is determined in the process of S252 that the current gaming state is in the probable change state (S252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S253. In the processing of S253, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102 (a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained. Acquire (S253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 65536 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As described above, as the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol in the probabilistic game state (special game state), when the current set value is set to "1", 1000 pieces of "0 to 999" Is set, and when the current setting value is set to "2", 1100 pieces of "0 to 1099" are set. When the current set value is set to "3", 1200 pieces of "0 to 1199" are set as random values that serve as jackpots for special symbols. When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S255.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol (S252: No), the process of S254 is executed. In the process of S254, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 65535 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. When the current set value is set to "1", 250 "0 to 249" are set as the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol in the normal game state (low probability game state). When the current setting value is set to "2", 275 of "0 to 274" are set. When the current set value is set to "3", 300 pieces of "0 to 299" are set as random values that serve as jackpots for special symbols. When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S255.

In the processing of S255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S253 or S254 is the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are displayed. (S255), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251. Based on the above, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the jackpots of five types of special symbols (big hit A1, jackpot). Among B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (10R probability variation jackpot), and if it is "40,41", it is a jackpot B1 (10R). If it is in the range of "42 to 47", it is determined that it is a jackpot C1 (5R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "48 to 59", it is a jackpot D1 (2R probability variation jackpot). ), And if it is in the range of "60 to 99", it is determined that the jackpot is E1 (10R normal jackpot, 100 times shorter time) (see FIG. 103).

In the process of S256, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1). .. Further, the jackpot type (big hit A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type can be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S255: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S257). In the process of S257, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

After executing the process of S256 or S257, the value of the fluctuation count counter 203i is then acquired (S258), and the value of the acquired fluctuation counter 203i is referred to based on the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202e. The variation pattern table is determined (S259). In the present embodiment, as described above, the variation pattern table to be referred to in the variation pattern selection table 202b is determined based on the value of the variation counter 203i and the variation pattern scenario table 202e. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S259, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and in the process of S253 or S254 in the third symbol display device 81. The fluctuation time until the third symbol is stopped is determined in the display mode for showing the acquired lottery result.

For example, the previous jackpot type is one of jackpot B1 (10R probability variation jackpot), jackpot C1 (5R probability variation jackpot), and jackpot D1 (2R probability variation jackpot), and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot is the normal gaming state. If the value of the fluctuation count counter 203i acquired in the process of S258 is a range value of 1 to 80 times, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined with reference to the time saving / probability variation table 202b2. Then, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) is determined based on the hit / fail determination result acquired in the process of S253 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. For example, in the process of S259, when the variation pattern table for time saving / probability variation is determined as the variation pattern table, the hit / fail determination result acquired in the process of S253 is a hit, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ". When the value is in the range of 0 to 49, "hit fluctuation A" is set as the fluctuation pattern, and "20 seconds" is set as the fluctuation time. (See FIG. 104 (c)).

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the fluctuation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the result of the hit / fail determination. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode is the off-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode within the same fluctuation time. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

Next, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table determined in the process of S259 (S260). Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S260 is set (S261). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S261 is set (S262). When the processing of S262 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S214). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and is a process of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (S214), as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b acquired by the process of S271 is stored in the execution area. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (S271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S272). If it is determined that the gaming state is in the probability variation period (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since it is in a probabilistic state, the process proceeds to S273. In the process of S273, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 65536 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As described above, when the game state is during the probability variation period (high probability game state), the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set to "1" as the current set value. , 1000 pieces of "0 to 999" are set, and when "2" is set, 1100 pieces of "0 to 1099" are set. When "3" is set as the current set value, 1200 of "0 to 1199" are set as random values that serve as jackpots for special symbols. When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S275.

On the other hand, in the process of S272, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic state (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability ( S274). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 65536 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. When the game state is during the normal period (low probability game state), the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is "0 to 249" when "1" is set as the current set value. 250 pieces are set, and when "2" is set, 275 pieces of "0 to 274" are set. When the current set value is "3", 300 pieces of "0 to 299" are set as random values that serve as jackpots for special symbols. When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S275.

In the processing of S275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S273 or S274 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S275), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S275: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S271 (S276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the jackpots of five types of special symbols (big hit A1, jackpot). Among B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A1 (10R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "40,41", the jackpot B1 It is determined that it is (10R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "42 to 47", it is determined that it is jackpot C1 (5R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "48 to 59", it is jackpot D1 (2R). It is determined that it is a probabilistic jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, 100 times shorter time) (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in the process of S275, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S275: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S277). In the process of S277, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

After executing the process of S276 or S277, the value of the variation counter 203i is then acquired (S278), and the value of the variation counter 203i acquired in the process of S278 is based on the variation pattern scenario table 202e. The variation pattern table to be referred to is determined (S279). In the present embodiment, as described above, the variation pattern table to be referred to in the variation pattern selection table 202b is determined based on the value of the variation counter 203i and the variation pattern scenario table 202e. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S279, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and in the process of S273 or S274 in the third symbol display device 81. The fluctuation time until the third symbol is stopped is determined in the display mode for showing the acquired lottery result.

For example, the previous jackpot type is either jackpot B1 (10R probability variation jackpot), jackpot C1 (5R probability variation jackpot), or jackpot D1 (2R probability variation jackpot), and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot is the normal gaming state. If the value of the fluctuation count counter 203i acquired in the process of S258 is a range value of 1 to 80 times, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined with reference to the time saving / probability variation table 202b2. Then, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) is determined based on the hit / fail determination result acquired in the process of S253 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. For example, in the process of S259, when the variation pattern table for time saving / probability variation is determined as the variation pattern table, the hit / fail determination result acquired in the process of S253 is a hit, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ". When the value is in the range of 0 to 49, "hit fluctuation A" is set as the fluctuation pattern, and "20 seconds" is set as the fluctuation time.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the fluctuation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the result of the hit / fail determination. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode is the off-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode within the same fluctuation time. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

Next, in the process of S279, the variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern table (S280), and the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S280 is set (S. S281). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S281 is set (S282). When the processing of S282 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process (S105: see FIG. 129) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S303). On the other hand, in the process of S301, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64 (S301: No), the processes of S302 to S308 and S320 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S309. To do.

Then, in the process of S303, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S303: No), the over winning information command is set (S304), and the process proceeds to the process of S309. On the other hand, in the processing of S303, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is added by 1. S305). Then, a hold ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S306).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 138) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S306, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 124) described above. Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first free holding area (holding area 1 to holding area 4) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S307). In the process of S307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold area 2 is set, if the value is 2, the hold area 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the hold area 4 is set as the first area. Next, special figure 1 is set at the lowest position of the variable order storage area 203p (S308), and the look-ahead process (S320) is executed. The look-ahead process (S320) will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

Next, with respect to S309 to S316, for each of the processes of S301 to S308 and S320 described above, the process for winning the first ball opening 64 is applied to the right second ball opening 640r or the second ball opening 640. Since the same processing is executed only by changing to the processing for winning a prize, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins in the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are also stored as reserved balls. It is acquired and stored in the empty hold area of the corresponding special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b.

In this way, the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter similar to the first special symbol are also applied to the second special symbol based on the entry into the right second entry port 640r or the second entry port 640. By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The hit probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the process of S308 or the process of S316, the look-ahead process (S320) is executed. The details of the look-ahead process (S320) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 130 as described above, but to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r and the second entry port 640. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the incoming ball, the process of determining in advance the result of each lottery executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored can be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game. It can be suppressed.

Next, the look-ahead process (S320), which is one of the start winning processes (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S320).

In the look-ahead process (S320), first, the hit / fail determination at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (S351). In this pass / fail determination, the same processing as the processing of S255 in the above-mentioned special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209: see FIG. 127) and the processing of S275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S214: see FIG. 128) is executed. .. It should be noted that this hit / fail judgment is the pass / fail judgment (discrimination) at the start of fluctuation (S255 processing in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209: see FIG. 127), S275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S214: see FIG. 128)). It corresponds to the pre-judgment (pre-judgment) that is executed before the process). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (S352). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (S352: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired (determined) from the variation pattern selection table 202b based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 (S352: Yes). S353). Next, the winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type (S354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S352 that the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect (S352: No), the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. Acquire (S355). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, the winning information command is set from the winning command table 202e (S356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. The hit / fail judgment result and the hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, based on the winning command, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the color of the reserved symbol to a color that notifies the winning / failing result of the reserved ball in advance. It is possible to execute an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the holding ball). Further, as the winning command, one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S401). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S402: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S405:). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S407). In the process of S407, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S408).

Next, the normal symbol variation start process is executed (S409), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 132, but the normal symbol (second symbol) is determined to be correct or not, and the fluctuation period (variable time or time) of the ordinary symbol is based on the result of the determination. (Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, a process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (operation pattern of the game per normal figure) corresponding to the hit type is performed. Run.

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S410). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S432 or the process of S433 in FIG. 132 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S410 (S410: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S410, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S411). In the process of S411, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S426 of FIG. 132, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S434 in FIG. 132, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S411, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 138) is executed next. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S426 or S434 of FIG. 132. In the present embodiment, one type of hit type is usually set as the symbol hit type, but one or more types of hit types such as long-time hit and short-time hit may be set. In such a configuration, the “○” symbol indicating the hit displayed on the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed (for example, if it is a long-time hit, the symbol corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is lit and displayed. It is advisable to configure it so that it is "◎", "○" if it is a normal hit, and "△" if it is a short-time hit. With this configuration, the player can determine the hit type of the normal symbol in the display mode, and can provide an easy-to-understand game.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S412). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S412: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S413), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S412, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 138) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S429 or the process of S430 of FIG. 132 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S412, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S412: No), the process of S413 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process (S408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (S408). This normal symbol variation start process (S408) sets the setting at the start of the variation of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124). It is a process to be executed.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S421). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S421: Yes), the process proceeds to S424. In the process of S421, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S421: No), it is determined whether or not it is during the probability change or the time reduction (S422). If it is neither probable change nor time saving (S422: No), the process proceeds to S424.

If the probability change is in progress or the time is shortened (S422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol, so that the normal obtained by the process of S408 in FIG. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C4 and the random number table 202c per normal symbol (see FIG. 102 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S423). Specifically, the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol (see FIG. 102 (b)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 102 (b)).

In the processing of S424, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. , Based on the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol (see FIG. 102 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S424). Specifically, the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol (see FIG. 102 (b)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,7 to 239". , It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 102 (b)).

In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entering opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entry opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second entry opening 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second entry opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 is maximized (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S423 or S424 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S425), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S425: Yes). , Set the display mode at the time of hit (S426). In the process of S425, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the probable change or the time reduction (S427). When it is determined that the current gaming state is in the probable change or the time reduction (S427: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is in the jackpot (S428). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S428: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 0.2 seconds. Is set to (S429), and the process proceeds to S431. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set. Further, in the processing of S427, even when it is determined that the current gaming state is not probable change or time reduction (S427: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2. Along with setting in seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S429), and the process proceeds to S431.

On the other hand, in the processing of S428, unless the special symbol is a big hit (S428: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2. It is set to times (S430), and the process proceeds to S431.

On the other hand, in the process of S425, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S425: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S434). In the process of S434, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S431.

In the process of S431, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S431), and if the probability change is in progress (S431: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S432). , End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S431 that the probability change is not in progress (S4311: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S433), and this process is terminated. To do. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), determines whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and if the sphere has passed, a random number per normal hit. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S501). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S501: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S503). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is added by 1 (S504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S505), and this process ends. In the process of S505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). A description of the initial setting process (S901) will be described later with reference to FIG. 136, but for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is arranged in the on position (S904). When it is determined in the process of S904 that the setting key 110b is arranged in the on position (S904: Yes), it means that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set. The set value control process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S905), and the process proceeds to the process of S912 described later. Details of this set value control process (S905) will be described later with reference to FIG. 137. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S904 that the setting key 110b is not in the on position (S904: No), the process proceeds to the process of S906.

In the process of S906, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S906), and if it is turned on (S906: Yes), the process shifts to S915. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S906: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S907), and the power failure occurrence information must be stored. If (S907: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process is shifted to S915.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S907: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S908), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S909: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S915 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 138, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S915). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S916, S917) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S916, S917) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S916, S917) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S912.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S906: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S907: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S909: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S910). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S911), and the process proceeds to S912. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S912, an initialization command indicating the effect permission is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, a state command indicating the current game state is set (S913), interrupt permission is set (S914), and the process proceeds to the main process.

Next, the initial setting process (S901), which is one of the start-up processes (see FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the contents of this initial setting process (S901).

In the initial setting process (S901), first, a start-up command for indicating that the power has been turned on is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S951). The voice lamp control device 113 does not execute the start-up process until it is determined that the start-up command set here has been received. Next, other initial setting processing is executed (S952), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the content of the set value control process (S905), which is one of the start-up processes (see FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of the set value control process (S905).

As shown in FIG. 137, in the set value control process (S905), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) is turned on (S971), and if it is turned on (S971: Yes). ), A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S972). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S973, S974) of the RAM 203. In the RAM initialization process (S973, S974), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared (S973), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S974). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, a changing command indicating that the setting is being changed is transmitted (S975), and the process shifts to S976.

In the process of S976, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed) (S976). In the process of S976, when it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed) (S976: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the data of the set value storage area 203 g (S977), and the process of S978. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S976, if it is determined that the setting switch is off (S976: No), the process of S977 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S978.

In the process of S978, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position (S978). When it is determined that the setting key 110b is arranged in the off position (S978: Yes), a change completion command indicating the completion of the setting change is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S979), and this process ends. That is, the setting change state is terminated, and the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 135). As a result, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which normal games can be played.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S978 that the setting key 110b is not arranged at the off position (S978: No), the process returns to the process of S976. That is, each process of S976 to S978 is repeated until it is determined that the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position in the process of S978.

If it is determined in the process of S971 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S971: No), a payout return command is first transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S980), and then the set value storage area is used. Read out 203 g of data (S981). When the processing of S981 is completed, next, the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting value display device 110a (S982), a status command indicating the setting confirmation status is set (S983), and the setting key 110b is pressed. It is determined whether or not it is arranged in the off position (S984). If it is determined in the process of S984 that the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position (S984: Yes), this process ends as it is. In other words, it shifts to the playable state. On the other hand, in the process of S984, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not arranged at the off position (S984: No), the process of S984 is repeatedly executed. That is, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is placed in the off position.

By executing this set value control process (S905: see FIG. 137), the set value can be changed according to the operation of the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. Further, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is arranged in the off position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 and S1021 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 124) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 125) and the start winning prize processing (see FIG. 129) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and a prize ball command indicating the read prize ball count is set (S1021). Next, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed, and the jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). The details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005), when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S413 of the normal symbol variation process (S106: see FIG. 131), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. To do.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, the variation pattern is set by the process of S260 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209: see FIG. 127) or the process of S280 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214: see FIG. 128). In that case, the first symbol display device 37 starts the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (S1006), by the process of S260 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209: see FIG. 127) or the process of S280 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214: see FIG. 128). When the fluctuation time corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the processing of S256 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209: see FIG. 127). Alternatively, the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of S257, the process of S276 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214: see FIG. 128), or the process of S277. Stop display (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process (S1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S432 or the process of S433 of the normal symbol variation start process (S408: see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device. The variable display is started at 83. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S411 of the normal symbol change process (S106: see FIG. 131), the second symbol display device 83 executes the process. The stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S426 or the process of S434 of the normal symbol variation start process (S408: see FIG. 132) after ending the variation display. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on 83.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). The initial value of the random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 134 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 138), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (big hit) is executed. Opening port) This is a process for releasing or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1104: see FIG. 139), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). When the processing of S219 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 125) is executed, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, and the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set. (S1116), this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 138) executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1102). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1102, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1102: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1102, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is released (S1104), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1105). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 138) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if it is not the timing to start a new number of rounds (S1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are formed. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1106, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1107), and this processing is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, when the special gaming state (10 rounds, 5 rounds, or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1108, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending command is set (S1109), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 138) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if it is not the ending start timing (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing at which a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1110: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1110 that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1110: Yes), in the processing of S1111, it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is the jackpot E1 (S1111). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot E1 (10R time reduction 100 times jackpot) (S1111: Yes), the value of the time reduction medium counter 203j is set to 100 (S1112). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to off (S1115), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot E1 (S1111: No), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S1113), and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to 65536 (S1114). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to off (S1115), and this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 159. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a start-up command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2001). If it is determined that the start-up command has not been received (S2001: No), the process of S2001 is repeated. That is, the start-up process is not executed until the start-up command is received from the main control device 110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start-up command has been received (S2001: Yes), the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S2002). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2118 (see FIG. 143) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2003). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 143, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2115 in FIG. 143), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2118. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2003: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2118 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2004).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2005. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2004: Yes), the process proceeds to S2005 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2004: No), the process proceeds to S2009.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2004: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2005. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2118 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2004: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S2209.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2003: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2118, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2006: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2007). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2006: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2008), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2009). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 143). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2118 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the operation is started after the power failure of S2118 is completed after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (S2009: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S2010) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the process proceeds to the process of S2011.

In the process of S2011, the process of the time acquisition process (S2011) is executed. A detailed description of this time acquisition process (S2011) will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, but it is a process for storing the time when the power is turned on, and is based on the stored time information and the stored time information. A period effect such as an SP time period is set based on the elapsed period. Next, the standby process is executed (S2012). A detailed description of the standby process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 142, but after executing the process of setting change completion S2012 from the main controller 110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010) and an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S2009 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S2009 is performed via the processing of S2005 to S2007. This is the case when the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2009: No), after skipping S2010, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, executing the processes of S2011 and S2012 described above, and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2013), Set interrupt permission (S2014) and move to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2010 is that when the processing of S2009 is reached via the processing of S2005 to S2007, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2005. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, the time acquisition process (S2011) executed by the MPU 221 in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 141. This time acquisition process (S2011) is a process for storing the time when the power is turned on. The time information acquired by this process is used to determine the elapsed time since the power was turned on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158) performed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later. Be done.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this time acquisition process (S1011). When the time acquisition process (S1011) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) is turned on (S2051), and if it is not turned on (S2051: No), the timekeeping device. The current time information is acquired from the timekeeping register 352a of 262 (S2054), and the process shifts to S2055.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S2051: Yes), the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262 is read (S2052), and the input time storage area 352b is read. It is determined whether the time information is stored in (S2053). As a result, when it is determined that the time information is not stored (S2053: No), the current time information is acquired from the timekeeping register 352a of the timekeeping device 262 (S2054), and the process shifts to S2055. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time information is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timekeeping device 262 (S2053: Yes), the process of S2054 is skipped and the process shifts to S2055.

In the process of S2055, the time information read in the process of S2052 or the process of S2054 is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 (S2055), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since the time information for determining the type of the effect period is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 by this process, the timing at which the start-up process is performed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall can be determined. If they are combined, the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r of each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. If the timing for storing the time information is matched in the time information storage area 223r, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. It is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T. As a result, the persons concerned in the hall can arrange the production period of each pachinko machine 10 simply by turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall all at once. Therefore, some pachinko machines 10 have a normal production period, and other pachinko machines 10 have a special production period, so that the player playing the game can perform the production in a different production mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent people from feeling uncomfortable about what they are doing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the time measuring device 262, and the type of the production period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired at the time of the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process are performed. The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the room, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the time measuring device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to aged deterioration or the like, the time information deviated from each other is not directly used for determining the type of the production period, but the passage of time. Since it can be converted into a relative value of time T and used for determining the type of production period, the influence of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the production period of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, some pachinko machines 10 have a normal production period, and other pachinko machines 10 have a special production period, so that the player playing the game can play the game. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from feeling uncomfortable when the production is performed in a different production mode from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, the off state), the time information when the power is turned on is obtained. The time information stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM is stored in the time information storage area 223r, and the time information stored in the time information storage area 223r is used when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off in the main process (FIG. 143) described later. It is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262. Since the timekeeping device 262 operates based on the power supply from the power supply 263 for the timekeeping device even when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power failure state, the pachinko machine 10 can use the time information stored in the on-time storage area 352b. It is retained even during a power failure. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the on time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262 instead of the current time information. The time information held even during the power failure state is read out and stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223.

As a result, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 needs to be replaced due to a failure, or when an on-site inspection is performed, it becomes necessary to turn off one pachinko machine 10 during business. However, simply by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off last time, it is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 by the time acquisition process. The time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262 when the power is cut off can be stored again in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223. Therefore, if the power is turned on all at once with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, one pachinko machine 10 is subsequently turned off. However, by simply turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10, the time information when the power is turned on all at once can be stored in the time information storage area 223r. Before and after the power is turned on, the elapsed time T can be determined based on the same time information. Therefore, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal production period to the special production period and the timing of switching from the special production period to the normal production period based on the same elapsed time T as other gaming machines, so that the power is cut off. Only the pachinko machine 10 can prevent the timing of switching the production mode from being shifted, and the player playing the game feels uncomfortable that the production is performed in a different production mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It can be suppressed that it is lost.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is detected in the time acquisition process (see S1011 in FIG. 141) that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, it is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timekeeping device 262. The time information is read out (see S2052) and controlled to be stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 (see S2055), but the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, a switch means dedicated to the time acquisition process different from the RAM erase switch 122 is provided, and in the time acquisition process (S1011), when the switch means is turned on, the input time storage area of the time measuring device 262 is provided. It may be configured to read the time information stored in 352b.

As a result, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262 is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 while retaining the information stored in the RAM 203 before the power is cut off. Can be done. Therefore, even if the holding ball is in the power-off state with the remaining ball, or even if the power is cut off during the high-probability state of the special symbol, it remains based on the power-on again. Since it is possible to suppress the disappearance of the reserved ball or the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player.

Further, instead of using a switch means such as the RAM erase switch 122, when the time measured by the time measuring device 262 is in a predetermined time zone, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262 is stored. It may be configured to read. In this case, as the predetermined time zone, the business hours of the hall may be set, for example, from 10:00 to 22:45.

As a result, the employee of the hall turns on the pachinko machine 10 which was turned off during business hours without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 due to a mistake, and the power is turned on again. It is possible to prevent the elapsed time T from being stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 233 and being displaced from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the timing at which the production period is switched between the pachinko machine 10 that has been turned off during business hours and the pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. Further, since the time information stored in the time information storage area 233f is selected according to the time information (timekeeping information) measured by the time measuring device 262, the employees in the hall perform a special operation when turning on the power. There is no need to do this, and the labor of hall employees can be reduced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to store the time information read in the process of S2052 or the process of S2054 in the time information storage area 223r, but instead of this, it is provided in the register 352. It may be configured to be stored in an unused bit of the register table (see FIG. 116). The unused bits referred to here refer to, for example, the bits 6 of the address BH and the bits 4 to 7 of the address EH, and among the bits marked with "●" in FIG. 116, other than the input time storage area 352b. Refers to the bit of. As described above, these bits are bits that can rewrite and read information, and even if the data is rewritten, they do not affect the operation of the timekeeping device 262 at all. As a result, the register table provided in the register 352 can be used efficiently, so that the address assigned to the input time storage area 352b can be reduced.

Specifically, for example, information representing seconds is stored in bits 0 to bit 6 of address 7H, information representing minutes is stored in bits 7 of address 7H and bits 0 to bit 5 of address 8H, and bits 6 and bit 7 of addresses 8H, And the information representing the time may be stored in bits 4 to 7 of the address EH. As a result, the address 9H that is not used for storing data can be reduced, and the capacity of the register 352 can be reduced, so that the price of the timekeeping device 262 can be reduced.

In the register table provided in the register 352 of the present embodiment, in FIG. 116, the bits marked with "○" are L-fixed and non-rewritable bits, but these "○" codes are used. The bit marked with "○" may be rewritable, and the time information read in the process of S2052 or the process of S2054 may be stored in the bit marked with "○". As a result, the register table can be used more efficiently than storing the time information only in the bits marked with "●", so that the capacity of the register 352 can be further reduced, and the timekeeping device can be used. It is possible to further reduce the price of 262.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, a standby process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of the standby process (S2012). This standby process (S2012) is started until the change completion command indicating that the setting change is completed is received when the changing command indicating that the setting is changed is received from the main control unit 110. This is a process for waiting for the completion of the process.

In the standby process (S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag 223j is on (S2071). When it is determined that the setting changing flag 223j is not on (S2071: No), it is determined whether or not the changing command has been received (S2072). This changing command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 after the initial setting of the RAM is executed when the setting key 110b is in the on position, and is a command for indicating that the setting is being changed. (S975: see FIG. 137). If it is determined that the changing command has been received in the processing of S2072 (S2072: Yes), the setting changing flag 223j is set to ON (S2073), and the process proceeds to S2074.

By setting the setting changing flag 223j to ON, the standby process (S2012) can be continued until it is determined that the change completion command has been received in the process of S2076 described later. On the other hand, in the processing of S2071, when it is determined that the setting changing flag 223j is not on (S2071: No), or in the processing of S2072, it is determined that the changing command is not received from the main control unit 110. (S2072: No), the process proceeds to S2074.

In the process of S2074, it is determined whether or not the initialization command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2074). This initialization command is a command transmitted in the start-up process (see FIG. 135) of the main control device 110 to indicate the effect permission. If it is determined that the initialization command has not been received in the process of S2074 (S2074: No), the process of starting up the main control device 110 has not been completed, so the process returns to the process of S2071 described above. On the other hand, in the process of S2074, when it is determined that the initialization command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2074: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2075.

In the process of S2075, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag 223j is on (S2075). When it is determined that the setting changing flag 223j is on (S2075: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change completion command has been received (S2076). This change completion command is a command transmitted when it is determined that the setting key 110b is in the off position in the setting value control process (S508: see FIG. 137) of the main control device 110, and is used to indicate the setting change. This is a command (S979: see FIG. 137).

If it is determined that the change completion command has been received in the process of S2076 (S2076: Yes), the setting changing flag 223j is set to off (S2077), and the process proceeds to the process of S2078. On the other hand, in the process of S2076, when it is determined that the change completion command has not been received (S2076: No), the process of S2076 is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the change completion command has been received. By controlling in this way, the main process is not executed until the setting control process is completed and the setting key 110b is detected at the off position. On the other hand, in the process of S2075, when it is determined that the setting changing flag 223j is off (S2075: No), the processes of S2076 and S2077 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2078. In the process of S2078, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the operation invalid timer 223s (S2078), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2113, the variation display setting process of S2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 157.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to the process of S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S2110 is completed, the elapsed time confirmation processing is executed (S2111). The elapsed time confirmation process (S2111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 158. When the processing of S2111 is completed, the command determination processing is executed (S2113). The command determination process (S2113) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 144. After the command determination process (S2113) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

When the processing of S2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off process is executed (S2118). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 143) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 144), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2202), the variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2203), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (S2204). When a stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2206), and this process is terminated. ..

If the stop type command is not received in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command is received (S2207). When the hold ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the hold ball number command process is executed (S2208), and this process ends. A detailed description of the held ball number command process (S2208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 145.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol is received (S2209). When the winning command of the special symbol is received (S2209: Yes), the winning command receiving process is started (S2210), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning command receiving process (S2210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 147, but based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, the winning / failing determination result of the reserved special symbol, the variation type, etc. The pre-determination for determining is executed, and the setting process for executing each hold effect determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2208, when the winning command of the special symbol is not received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot related command is received (S2211). When it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S2211: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S2212), and this process ends. A detailed description of the jackpot-related process (S2212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

On the other hand, in the process of S2211, when it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop process is executed (S2214), and this process ends. A detailed description of the stop process (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 150.

On the other hand, in the process of S2213, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether or not the boot completion command has been received (S2215). If it is determined that the boot completion command has been received (S2215: Yes), the boot completion process (S2216) is executed to end this process. A detailed description of the boot completion process (S2216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. On the other hand, if it is determined that the boot completion command has not been received (S2215: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2261), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the details of the hold ball number command process (S2208), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number command processing (S2208). In this hold ball number command process (S2208), a process of extracting the hold ball number and storing it in the special symbol hold ball number counter based on the received hold ball number command, and setting of a continuous notice effect executed at the hold upper limit. Etc. are done.

In the hold ball number command process (S2208), first, the hold ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol hold ball number counter (S2301). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution flag 223t is on, that is, whether or not the continuous notice execution is currently being executed (S2302). If it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is on (S2302: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223j is not on (S2302: No), the period effecting flag 223p is on, that is, the period during which the period effect is being executed as the current game situation. It is determined whether or not it is (S2303). If it is determined that the flag 223p during the period production is on (S2303: Yes), this process is terminated as it is because it is not the period during which the continuous advance notice can be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2302 that the flag 223p during the period production is not on (S2303: No), it is determined whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number storage counter stored in the processing of S2301 is the upper limit. (S2304).

If it is determined in the process of S2304 that the value of the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter is not the upper limit (S2304: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the stored special symbol reserved ball count counter is the upper limit value (S2304: Yes), the hold upper limit effect selection table 222e (see FIG. 110 (b)) is referred to to perform the hold upper limit effect. Determine (S2305). As described above, the effect selection table 222e at the time of the upper limit of the hold defines the effect content to be selected based on the number of jackpots in the hold and the effect counter 223 g. Next, the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306) is executed, and the process shifts to the process of S2307.

Here, with reference to FIG. 146, the details of the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306), which is one process in the hold ball number command process (S2208: FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. .. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306). This look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306) is a process for discriminating between the period during which the SP time effect is executed and the execution period of the continuous effect, and prohibiting the execution of the continuous advance notice effect when they overlap.

In the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306), first, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read out (S2401). Next, based on the information read in the process of S2401, the contents of the winning information to be digested before the winning information to be the target of the look-ahead effect are extracted (S2402), and the extracted contents and the look-ahead prohibition period selection table are extracted. The look-ahead prohibition period is determined based on 222d (see FIG. 110A) (S2403).

Next, the SP time period in which the SP time effect is executed is specified based on the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 223r (S2404). Next, it is determined whether the look-ahead prohibition period determined in the process of S2403 and the SP time period specified in the process of S2404 overlap (S2405). When it is determined that the look-ahead prohibition period and the SP time period do not overlap (S2405: No), the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined (S2406), and the content of the hold upper limit effect to be executed is stored in the effect state storage area 223h. (S2407), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2405, when it is determined that the read-ahead prohibition period and the SP time period overlap (S2405), the look-ahead effect cannot be executed, so the processes of S2406 and S2407 are skipped and the present process is terminated. To do.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 145. After executing the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306), it is determined whether to execute the hold upper limit effect (S2307). The execution of the hold upper limit effect is determined when it is determined in the above-described pre-reading effect execution determination process (S2306) that the pre-reading prohibition period and the SP time period do not overlap. If it is determined in the process of S2307 that the hold upper limit time effect is to be executed (S2307: Yes), the content of the hold upper limit time effect to be executed is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2308).

After executing the process of S2308, next, the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is set to ON (S2309), and the number of times until the special figure change corresponding to the target winning information is set in the continuous advance notice counter 223u (S2310). This process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the effect at the upper limit of hold is not executed (S2307: No), the processing of S2308 to S2310 is skipped, and this processing is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the start period of the SP time effect and the effect period of the continuous notice overlap, the execution of the continuous notice effect is prohibited, but the SP time effect is not limited to this. The time until the start period of the above and the continuous notice effect period overlap may be calculated, and the continuous notice effect that does not overlap may be executed. With such a configuration, the period up to the start period of the SP time production can be effectively utilized, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

Further, even if the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period overlap, even if each effect is executed in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand, such as dividing the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the details of the winning command receiving process (S2210), which is one of the command determination processes (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command reception process (S2210).

In the winning command receiving process (S2210), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the jackpot, the probability change, or the time saving (S2501). When it is determined that the current gaming state is either during the jackpot, during the probability change, or during the time reduction (S2501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning ball command has been received. (S2502). When it is determined that the winning ball command has been received (S2502: Yes), the prize ball information indicated by the received command is stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n (S2503), and the process proceeds to S2504.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not in any of the gaming states during the jackpot, the probability change, or the time reduction (that is, the normal state) (S2501: No). Alternatively, in the process of S2502, when it is determined that the winning ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S2502: No), the above-mentioned process of S2503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2504.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the game state is any of the game states during the jackpot, the probability change, or the time reduction, the prize ball information is provided in the RAM 223. It is configured to be stored in the number storage area 223n, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball information may be stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n based on the prize ball command received only during the jackpot. Good. With such a configuration, the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the number of prize balls is stored in the winning ball number storage area 223n, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of launched balls is counted and the difference from the number of paid out prize balls. The number may be calculated and stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n. With this configuration, the value of the acquired ball number storage area 223n referred to when the promotion effect is executed can be different depending on the game method of the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the process of S2504, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f (S2504). Next, it is determined whether or not the period production flag 223p is on (S2505). If it is determined that the flag 223p during the period production is on (S2505: Yes), the production of the SP time period is being executed, and the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2505, when it is determined that the period effect in-progress flag 223p is not on (S2505: No), it is determined whether the continuous advance notice effect execution flag 223t is on (S2506). If it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is on (S2506: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2506 that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is not on (S2506: No), the winning information set in the winning information storage area 223f in the processing of S2504 is extracted (S2507). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the process of S2507 contains information indicating a look-ahead effect (S2508). If it is determined that the extracted winning information does not include information indicating the look-ahead effect (S2508: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2508, when it is determined that the extracted winning information includes information indicating the look-ahead effect (S2508: Yes), the above-mentioned look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306: see FIG. 146) is executed (S2509). (S2306)), the process proceeds to S2510. In the process of S2510, it is determined whether to execute the look-ahead effect (S2510). If it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not executed (S2510: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2510, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (S2510: Yes), it is determined whether to execute the look-ahead effect in the variable effect executed this time (S2511). When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be executed in the variable effect executed this time (S2511: Yes), the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is set to ON (S2512), and the process proceeds to S2514. On the other hand, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not executed in the variable effect executed this time (S2511: No), a display command for changing the display mode of the target reserved symbol is set (S2513), and S2514. Move to the processing of.

After executing the process of S2512 or S2513, the content of the determined look-ahead effect is then stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2514), and the number of times until the special figure change corresponding to the target winning information is continuously performed. The value of the notice counter 223u is set (S2515), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the details of the jackpot-related process (S2212), which is one of the command determination processes (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related processing (S2212). This jackpot-related process (S2212) is a process executed when a hit-related command is received from the main control device 110.

In the jackpot-related process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2601). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2601: Yes), the opening command for display is set (S2602), and then the current period production status is stored in the production state storage area 223h (S2603). End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2601, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2601: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2604). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2604: Yes), the round number counter 223x is added by 1 (S2605), and then the round effect setting process is executed (S2606). A detailed description of this round effect setting process (S2606) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149. After executing the round effect setting process (S2606), the display round number command is set (S2607) based on the round number counter 223x, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the round effect setting process (S2606), which is one of the jackpot-related processes (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device, will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect setting process (S2606).

In the round effect setting process (S2606), first, the acquired information stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n is read out (S2701). Next, the expected value is calculated by adding the number of balls that can be acquired during the round executed this time to the read acquired information (S2702). Then, based on the calculated expected value, the number of points to be given in the round to be executed this time is determined with reference to the promotion point selection table 222h (see FIG. 113) (S2703). Next, the effect mode during the round is determined based on the number of points granted in the process of S2703 and the promotion effect selection table 222i (see FIG. 114) (S2704).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode determined in the process of S2704 (S2705). When it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed (S2705: Yes), the execution content is stored in the executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k (S2706), and then the information indicating the determined effect content is shown. Is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2707), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2705 that the setting suggestion effect is not executed (S2705: No), the process of S2706 is skipped, the process of S2707 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Return to FIG. 148 to continue the description. In the process of S2604, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2604: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2608). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2608: Yes), the effect information executed during the jackpot stored in the effect state storage area 223h is read (S2609), and then the executed setting suggestion is performed. The information stored in the effect storage area 223k is read out (S2610). Then, the period effect status at the start of the jackpot is read from the effect state storage area 223h (S2611), and then the current period effect status and the display ending command corresponding to the information read in the processes of S2609 to S2611 are set. (S2612), the information of the executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k is cleared (S2614), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2608, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2608: No), this process ends as it is.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the content of the setting suggestion effect to be executed at the ending of the jackpot is determined based on the start timing of the jackpot game and the progress of the period effect at the start of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, when the player knows that the jackpot game will be executed by the look-ahead effect, the player does not just wait for the time until the jackpot is won, but also the period effect. Since it is possible to be interested in the timing at which the jackpot game starts, the time until the jackpot is won can be concentrated on the game.

In the present embodiment, the content of the setting suggestion effect is determined based on the progress of the period effect at the start of the jackpot game and the start of the jackpot, but the jackpot is not limited to this. The content of the setting suggestion effect may be determined in a complex manner, including the start timing of the special figure fluctuation.

Further, instead of the start of the jackpot game, the content of the setting suggestion effect may be determined based on the start of a specific round and the progress of the period effect. With this configuration, the player can be interested in the setting suggestion effect for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the details of the stop process (S2214), which is one of the command determination processes (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop process (S2214). This stop process (S2214) is a process executed when a stop command is received from the main control unit 110.

In the stop process (S2214), first, it is determined whether the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223u is larger than 0 (S2801). When it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is larger than 0 (S2801: Yes), the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is subtracted by 1 (S2802). Next, it is determined whether the value of the subtracted continuous advance notice counter 223u is 0 (S2803). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 (S2803: Yes), the continuous notice execution flag 223t is set to off (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223u is not greater than 0 in the processing of S2801 (S2801: No), or the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223u is not 0 in the processing of S2803 (S2803). : No), the process proceeds to S2805.

In the process of S2805, it is determined whether the flag 223w in the special mode is on (S2805). When it is determined that the special mode flag 223w is on (S2805: Yes), the special mode flag 223w is set to off (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2807. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the flag 223w in the special mode is not on (S2805: No), the process of S2806 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2807.

In the process of S2807, it is determined whether the stop command received this time is a stop command indicating the stop of the final fluctuation in the time saving state (S2807). When it is determined that the stop command received this time is a stop command indicating the final fluctuation of the time reduction state (S2807: Yes), a display end command for indicating the time reduction end is set (S2808). Next, the information of the acquired ball number storage area 223n is cleared (S2809), and the process proceeds to S2810. On the other hand, in the process of S2807, when it is determined that the change of the special symbol this time is not the final change of the time saving (S2807: No), the processes of S2808 and S2809 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2810.

In the present embodiment, the value of the acquired ball number storage area 223n is cleared when the stop command of the final fluctuation of the time saving is received, but the specific condition is satisfied without limitation. In this case, the value of the acquired ball number storage area 223n may not be cleared, and the acquired information stored this time may be referred to at the next big hit game. In this way, by increasing the values that can be referred to, it is possible to give a wider range by setting the promotion effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In the process of S2810, it is determined whether the character display flag 223y is on (S2810). When it is determined that the character display flag 223y is set to ON (S2810: Yes), the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 109) defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device is referred to. The production mode is determined (S2811). Next, a display command for indicating the character corresponding to the effect mode determined in the process of S2811 is set (S2812), and the character display flag 223y is set to off (S2813). Then, the stop display of the third symbol corresponding to the stop command received this time is set (S2814), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2810, when it is determined that the character display flag 223y is not on (S2810: No), the processes of S2811 to S2813 are skipped, the above-mentioned process of S2814 is executed, and this process is terminated. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the details of the boot completion process (S2216), which is one of the command determination processes (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the boot completion process (S2216). This boot completion process (S2216) is a process in which the button operation invalid period is released when a boot completion command is received from the display control device 114.

In the boot completion process (S2216), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation invalid timer 223s is larger than 0 (S2901). When it is determined that the operation invalid timer 223s is a value larger than 0 (S2901: Yes), the value of the operation invalid timer 223s is reset to 0 (S2902) to indicate that the button operation is enabled. A display command is set (S2903), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2901 when it is determined that the value of the operation invalid timer 223s is not a value larger than 0 (S2901: No), the processes of S2902 and S2903 are skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

The timing at which the button operation invalid period is cleared is not limited to this, and when a process in which a different operation period is set depending on the situation, such as an accessory operation process when the power is turned on, is executed, the accessory When the operation process and the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 are completed, the button operation invalid period may be canceled. Further, the button operation invalid period is not limited to the one set by the timer, but is set by using a flag or the like, and is configured to be released when the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed and the boot completion command is received. You may.

Next, the variation display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2114). This variation display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 143) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (S2114: FIG. 152), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3001: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, in S3008, Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to off (S3002), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set. , Obtained from RAM 223 (S3003).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is on (S3004). When it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is not on (S3004: No), the effect mode setting process is executed (S3005), and the process proceeds to the process of S3007. A detailed description of the effect mode setting process (S3005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 153. When it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is on (S3004: Yes), the effect mode is determined based on the variation pattern acquired in the process of S3003 and the continuous notice effect (S3006).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3007). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3008.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3008). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3008: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3008: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3009), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (S3010). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3011), and the stop type effect setting process is executed (S3012). ), The process proceeds to S3013. The details of the stop type effect setting process (S3012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

In the process of S3013, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3013). .. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S3013 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the effect mode setting process (S3005) executed by the variable display setting process (S2114: see FIG. 152) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect mode setting process. This effect mode setting process (S3005) is a process for setting a high-speed fluctuation effect during a time reduction or a probability change, or a process for setting an effect for an SP time period.

In the effect mode setting process (S3005), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S3101). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S3101: No), the time saving / probability change effect setting process is executed (S3102), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 154, a time saving / probability variation effect setting process (S3102), which is one process in the effect mode setting process (S3005: see FIG. 153) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. To do. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the details of the time saving / probability variation effect setting process (S3102).

In the time reduction / probability change effect setting process (S3102), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation this time is the time reduction state or the 81st rotation after shifting to the probability change state (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure variation this time is not the 81st rotation (S3201: No), the corresponding effect mode is determined (S3202), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3201, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state or the 81st rotation after shifting to the probability change state (S3201: Yes), the number of seconds of change in the special figure variation to be started this time is It is determined whether it is 1.5 seconds (S3203). When it is determined that the fluctuation number of seconds of the special figure fluctuation to be started this time is 1.5 seconds (S3203: Yes), the corresponding production mode is determined (S3204), and a display command indicating the entry into the high-speed fluctuation mode is issued. Set (S3205) and end this process. When the display command indicating the entry into the high-speed fluctuation mode is set for the display control device 113, the display screen shown in FIG. 93 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the fluctuation number of seconds of the special figure fluctuation starting this time is not 1.5 seconds (S3203: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation number of seconds is 12 seconds (S3206). .. If it is determined that the number of fluctuating seconds is not 12 seconds (S3206: No), the above-mentioned process of S3202 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3206, when it is determined that the fluctuation number of seconds of the special figure fluctuation this time is 12 seconds (S3206: Yes), the 1.5-second fluctuation is 4 times and the 6-second fluctuation is 1 time. (12 seconds in total) is determined (S3207), the above-mentioned process of S3205 is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state and the fluctuation in the shifted gaming state reaches 81 rotations, the high-speed fluctuation mode is entered. However, there is a problem that if a long fluctuation such as a jackpot fluctuation is executed immediately after the effect of entering the high-speed fluctuation mode is executed, the player feels uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variation of 12 seconds is executed at the 81st rotation, the variation of 12 seconds is executed at 1.5 seconds × 4 times of short variation and the jackpot variation effect of 6 seconds is executed at high speed. Execute the variable mode rush effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a natural effect.

When the 81st rotation is a long fluctuation, the game is not limited to executing the fluctuation effect by dividing it into short fluctuations as described above, and different benefits such as a special mode other than the high speed fluctuation mode (for example, a setting suggestion mode) are played. It may be configured to be given to a person. With this configuration, the production can be diversified, and the player can also get joy by obtaining unexpected benefits, and can improve the motivation to continue the game.

Further, when the 81st point is a long fluctuation, the rush effect of the high speed fluctuation mode may not be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not give a sense of discomfort.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 153. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3101 that the current gaming state is the normal state, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is on ( S3103). If it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is on (S3103: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223t is not on (S3103: No), it is determined whether or not the period production flag 223p is on (S3104). If it is determined that the period effect in-progress flag 223p is on (S3104: Yes), the period effect setting process is executed (S3105), the corresponding effect mode is determined (S3106), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag 223p during the period production is not on (S3104: No), the above-mentioned processing of S3106 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a period effect setting process (S3105), which is one process in the effect mode setting process (S3005: see FIG. 153) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the period effect setting process (S3105). In this period effect setting process (S3105), a process for setting the execution of the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the number of reach and the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the SP time period.

In the period effect setting process (S3105), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation executed this time is a jackpot fluctuation (S3301). When it is determined that the special figure variation to be executed this time is a jackpot variation (S3301: Yes), an effect mode for showing the jackpot winning is determined (S3312), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3301, when it is determined that the fluctuation executed this time is not a jackpot fluctuation (S3301: No), it is specified whether the fluctuation pattern of this time is reach based on the acquired fluctuation pattern (S3302). .. Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of S3302 is a reach fluctuation (S3303). When it is determined that the reach variation occurs (S3303: Yes), the value indicating the number of reach of the mission information storage area 223q is updated (S3304).

Next, it is determined whether the updated reach count is the same value as the number set in the mission information storage area 223q (S3305). When it is determined that the updated reach count is the same value as the set count (S3305: Yes), the effect mode is determined with reference to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c (S3306). Next, a display command for indicating the determined effect mode is set (S3307), and the process proceeds to S3308. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, when it is determined that the number of reach and the number of sets are not the same value (S3305: No), the processes of S3306 and S3307 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3308.

Next, the value indicating the number of fluctuations in the mission information storage area 223q is updated (S3308). Then, it is determined whether the updated number of fluctuations and the set number of times are the same value (S3309). When it is determined that the updated number of fluctuations and the set number of times are the same value (S3309: Yes), the effect mode is determined with reference to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c (S3310), and the determined effect mode is shown. A display command for this is set (S3311), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if it is determined that the number of fluctuations and the number of sets are not the same value (S3309: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the SP time period and the number of reach thereof. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the game while wishing that the player executes more fluctuations during the SP time period, so that the player's motivation to play can be improved.

As an execution condition of the setting suggestion effect executed during the SP time effect period, it may be executed based on the total of the variable times executed during the SP time effect period. With this configuration, even if a special drawing lottery with a long fluctuation time is executed and the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to have expectations for future games.

In addition, the executed effect result is stored as points, the player decides whether or not to use the stored points, and based on the points, a highly reliable setting suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured as follows. In this way, the degree of freedom of the game can be improved by letting the player himself decide the timing of viewing the setting suggestion effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, a stop type effect setting process (S3012), which is one of the variable display setting processes (S2114: see FIG. 152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type effect setting process (S3012). This stop type effect setting process (S3012) is a process for executing a specific setting suggestion effect when the stop type of the special figure variation is out of reach during the period effect.

When the stop type effect setting process (S3012) is executed, first, the period effect flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to ON, that is, the period effect is currently being performed. Is determined (S3401). If it is determined that the flag 223p during the period production is not on (S3401: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that the flag 223p during the period production is on (S3401: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3402.

In the process of S3402, it is determined whether or not the stop type of the special figure variation executed this time is out of reach (S3402). If it is determined that the stop type of the special figure fluctuation is not out of reach (S3402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type of the special figure fluctuation is out of reach (S3402: Yes), the character display flag 223y is set to ON (S3403), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 143) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of the advance notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation invalid timer 223s is larger than 0, that is, whether the invalid period of the button operation is set (S3501). When it is determined that the value of the operation invalid timer 223s is larger than 0 (S3501: Yes), the operation invalid period of the frame button 22 is reached, and this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the operation invalid timer is not a value larger than 0, that is, it is not the operation invalid period of the frame button 22 (S3501: No), it is determined whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3501: No). S3502). If it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S3502: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3502, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S3502: No), it is determined whether the advance notice effect is being executed (S3503). If it is determined that the advance notice effect is in progress (S3503: Yes), a display advance notice display command indicating the advance notice effect determined by the lottery is set for the display control device 114 (S3504), and the present process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S3503, when it is determined that the advance notice effect is not being executed (S3503: No), the background mode is added by 1 and set to the background mode storage area 223v (S3505), and in the processing of S3505. A display switching command for the variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set for the display control device 114 (S3506), and this process is terminated.

The number of times the frame button 22 is pressed may be stored by providing a counter or the like, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the total number of times. Further, when the long press effect of the frame button 22 is executed, the time when the player presses and holds the frame button 22 is measured, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the total time. You may. With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically participate in the effect of pressing the frame button 22, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the details of the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 143) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111). In this elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), a process for setting the current effect period is executed based on the current time information and the elapsed time since the power is turned on.

In the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), first, the current time information to be timed by the time measuring device 292 (see FIG. 99) is read (S3601), and then the elapsed time T from the power-on is calculated (S3602). ). Then, based on the elapsed time T calculated in the process of S3602, the current effect period is specified from the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 108) (S3603).

Next, in the process of S3603, it is determined whether the effect period specified from the effect switching table 222b is the SP time period (S3604). When it is determined that the specified production period is the SP time period (S3604: Yes), it is determined whether the period production flag 223p is on, that is, whether the SP time period has already been set (S3605). .. When it is determined that the flag 223p during the period production is on (S3605: Yes), it is not necessary to set the SP time period, so this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3605, when it is determined that the period effecting flag 223p is not on (S3605: No), the period effecting flag 223p is set to on (S3606), and the period shifts to the SP time period. A rear image change command for indicating is set for the display control device 114 (S3607), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3604, when it is determined that the specified effect period is not the SP time period (S3604: No), it is determined whether or not the special mode in-progress flag 223w is on (S3608).

If it is determined in the process of S3608 that the flag 223w in the special mode is on (S3608: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3608 that the special mode in-progress flag 223w is not on (S3608: No), the period production in-progress flag 223p is on, that is, the end of the SP time period is currently set. Determine if it is done. (S3609). When it is determined that the period production flag 223p is on, that is, the end of the SP time period is not set (S3609: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S3610). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3610: Yes), the special mode setting process (S3611) is executed, and this process is terminated. A detailed description of this specialized mode setting process (S3611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the process of S3610, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S3610: No), the period effect flag 223p is set to off (S3612), and then the current gaming state is being probable changed. Is determined (S3613). When it is determined that the current gaming state is in the probable change (S3613: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 91) suggesting the set value is determined by lottery (S3616), and the process proceeds to S3615. On the other hand, in the process of S3613, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the probable change (S3614), the effect is produced by referring to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The aspect is determined (S3614), and the process proceeds to S3615. In the process of S3615, a display command corresponding to the effect mode determined in the process of S3614 or the process of S3616 is set (S3615), a command for displaying a rear image is set (S3617), and the process proceeds to the process of S3618. ..

In the present embodiment, when the special figure is not changing at the end of the SP time period and the game state is in the probable change state, as a setting suggestion effect, the game state is in the probable change state at the end of the SP time period. It is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect with higher reliability than when there is none. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the SP time period in a probable state and to have a new game property of executing the game while wanting to see a highly reliable setting suggestion effect, which makes the game more interesting. Can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is displayed at the end of the SP time period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion effect is executed at the start of the SP time period. You may. With this configuration, for a player who is thinking of stopping the game before the start of the SP time period, let's continue the game until the start of the SP time period and continue the game until the setting suggestion effect is seen. It is possible to have the motivation to continue the game.

Further, as described above, it is configured to execute a highly reliable setting suggestion effect based on the game state at the end of the SP time period, but the game is not limited to this, and the game during the SP time period executed this time is not limited to this. Based on the result, a highly reliable setting suggestion effect may be executed at the end of the SP time period.

In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to determine whether the game state has changed a plurality of times during the current SP time period, and to execute a highly reliable setting suggestion effect based on the result. .. For example, during the current SP time period, if the gaming state shifts twice (for example, shifts from the normal state to the time saving state and then to the probability change state), the gaming state shifts once, or the gaming state changes. Perform a highly reliable suggestion effect compared to the case without migration. With this configuration, the player wins as many jackpots as possible during the SP time period and executes the game while hoping that the game state shifts more, so that the player is ambitious during the SP time period. You can participate in the game.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, when it is determined that the period production flag 223p is not on (S3609: No), or after the above-mentioned process of S3617 is executed, the remaining time until the SP time period is calculated. (S3618). Then, the information indicating the remaining time until the SP time period calculated in the process of S3618 is stored in the time information storage area 223r (S3619), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the special mode setting process (S3610), which is one of the elapsed time confirmation processes (S211: see FIG. 158) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special mode setting process (S3610). This special mode setting process (S3610) is a process executed when the special symbol changes at the end timing of the SP time period, and the setting suggestion effect is produced in the special symbol change period after the end of the SP time period. This is a process for setting a mode that is easy to execute.

In the special mode setting process (S3610), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol being executed is longer than 5 seconds (S3701). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol being executed is shorter than 5 seconds (S3701: No), the special mode effect cannot be set in the remaining fluctuation time, so this process is terminated as it is. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol being executed is longer than 5 seconds (S3701: Yes), a display command for indicating the entry into the special mode is set (S3702). , The flag 223w in the special mode is set to on (S3703), and the process proceeds to the process of S3704.

In the process of S3704, the number of executions of the suggestion effect in the specialization mode is determined with reference to the effect execution number selection table 222f (see FIG. 111) provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3704). Next, a display command for adding the execution of the suggestion effect is set for the special figure fluctuation effect being executed (S3705), and the executed setting effect storage area 223k is executed during the special mode of this time. The type of suggestion effect to be produced is stored (S3506), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect of the special symbol is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the SP time period, the effect to be executed can be switched based on the length of the remaining variation period. It is configured so that it can be done. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort, such as the end effect of the SP time period being suddenly switched.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing at the end timing of the SP time period, and whether or not the special mode effect is executed is determined according to the remaining period. However, it is not limited to this, and at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not it is executed across the end timing of the SP time period, and the special mode is set at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result. May be good. With this configuration, more time can be set as the specialized mode, so that a wider variety of production modes can be provided to the player.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 174. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 160, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after designating the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 160) is completed. The start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 160) is set (S6105), a completion command for indicating the completion of the boot process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6106), and the boot program. Ends the execution of, and ends this boot process.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 161, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6106 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes S6103 to S6106 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S6103 to S6106 may be executed without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 160. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 172 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 172 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 162 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 162 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the special figure entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (a). FIG. 162 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the third symbol is not the image at the time of power-on but the normal production image. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 163 to 168.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 123 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 174.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, big hit E, front-back off reach, The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete deviation other than front-rear deviation) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 168, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 163, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 164 (a). FIG. 164 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main controller. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 163. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 164 (b). FIG. 164 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A to E, reach out, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601). , The change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the production is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 163, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 165 (a). FIG. 165 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 163, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 165 (b). FIG. 165 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 163. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 163, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a variable stop command (S6414: Yes), the variable stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (a). FIG. 167 (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2114 in FIG. 152), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. The display stop command (display stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern (timing when the main control unit 110 sets the stop command). It shows various display commands set in the normal stop command) and the stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2214 in FIG. 150).

In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 163, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is displayed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the broadcast command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the notification command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (b). FIG. 167 (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command was output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 received the command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to read the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the present embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, the command is not limited to this, and related commands such as a light emission command other than the display command, a voice output command, and an accessory drive command are once received, and the display control device 114 processes. It may be configured to output the related command to the corresponding control device with the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in.

Returning to FIG. 163, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to on, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the back image type of is set to off (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 163. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (b). FIG. 168 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7102, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 163. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 164 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 164 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 164 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 169, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing such as are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 169. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 169 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162 (b)), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 172 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 173.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 162 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 162 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 163 to 168) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 169 to 171) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set to draw the image. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 173) (see S7501: No in FIG. 172 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S7702), and if it is the transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the processing of S7706 that the transfer processing has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 123) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 162 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<About the second embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 184. The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has a look-ahead effect period and SP time when a look-ahead effect is executed as a jackpot game in-process effect executed during the jackpot game with respect to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the content of the effect to be executed is different based on the degree of overlap with the period, and the rest is the same. The detailed description of the same contents as those of the first embodiment described above will be omitted.

Here, in the first embodiment described above, when setting the prohibition period of the look-ahead effect executed as a part of the special figure variation effect, the execution period of the look-ahead effect that can be executed is calculated, and the calculation result and SP It was configured to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect when the time period overlaps. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the prohibition period is set also for the look-ahead effect executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead effect executed during the jackpot game from overlapping with the SP time period, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period overlap, the effect mode of the look-ahead effect is changed to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. It is configured as follows.

<About the production contents in the second embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177, the content of the characteristic effect among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when the lucky effect, which is one of the privilege effects executed during the jackpot game, is started. As shown in FIG. 175 (a), in the present embodiment, when the first round game (first round game) of the jackpot game is started, the characters "Lucky effect lottery start" are displayed. This lucky effect is a privilege effect executed during the jackpot game, and is an effect for notifying the player that there is a special figure hold (hit hold) for winning the big hit in the acquired special figure hold. This is an effect for notifying the player whether or not (hold continuous effect) is executed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, even if the lucky production lottery is won, the hold continuous production may not be executed depending on the game status (SP time period setting status) after the jackpot game is completed. In such a case, as an effect mode of the lucky effect, an effect mode indicating that an effect (alternative effect) other than the hold continuous effect is executed is set.

FIG. 175 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an effect mode for notifying the player that the hold continuous effect is executed is set as the effect mode of the lucky effect. .. As shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the hold ream effect is executed, the effect in which the character 810 holds the placard 1811 with the characters "hold ream" is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the jackpot will be won again after the jackpot game is completed.

In the figure shown in FIG. 175 (b), the lucky effect is started during the first round game period, and the effect result of the lucky effect is displayed during the round game period. , Not limited to this, the lucky effect may be started at any timing during the jackpot game, or the effect result of the lucky effect may be displayed in a round different from the round in which the lucky effect was started. good. Further, in this case, the rounds in which the lucky effect is likely to be started may be configured to be different depending on the set value, or may be configured to be different based on the effect result of the lucky effect.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to know when the lucky effect will be executed. In addition, a jackpot game in which the lucky effect is not executed may be configured to be executable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176 (a), the production contents of the hold continuous production will be described. In the present embodiment, the hold continuous production is started from the ending period of the jackpot game, and after the end of the jackpot game, the hold continuous production is executed for a period until the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery. Then, as an effect mode of the hold continuous effect, an effect mode in which many fish (fish school) move the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from right to left is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the characters "fish school festival rush" indicating that the hold continuous production is executed on the end screen of the jackpot game are displayed, and on the right side of the display screen. The image of the school of fish waiting is displayed.

Then, on the special symbol change screen during the fish school festival, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), after the effect of the fish school moving from right to left is executed, the third symbol shows the jackpot winning display mode (stop display mode). It is stopped and displayed at 777).

In this way, by executing the hold continuous effect during the big hit game, it is possible to notify the player that the big hit game will be executed (holding continuous) during the previous big hit game period. , The player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect period in which the hold continuous effect is executed and the SP time period are determined to overlap, the overlap period is less than a predetermined period (2 seconds). Is configured to switch and execute the effect mode of the hold continuous effect from the normal effect mode (see FIG. 176 (b)) to the shortened effect mode.

FIG. 177 is a display screen for showing a shortened effect mode of the hold continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 177, when the shortened effect mode is set, after the effect of moving the school of fish from right to left is executed on the display screen before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect is executed. An effect of temporarily stopping the third symbol in a stop display mode indicating a big hit is executed. That is, when the timing when the SP time period is set and the hold continuous effect period slightly overlap, the timing indicating the effect result of the hold continuous effect is before the timing when the SP time period is set (2 seconds). It is configured to be (before). As a result, it is possible to easily execute the hold continuous effect without overlapping with the SP time period.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. First, the contents of ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 178 (a). FIG. 178 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 178 (a), the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the look-ahead regulation period table 222aa and the alternative effect selection table 222ab are added. , Other than that, it is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The look-ahead restriction period table 222aa is a data table that is referred to when calculating the production period of the hold continuous effect executed during the jackpot game, and an opportunity to execute the hold continuous effect by the lottery of the lucky effect is established. It is referred to when calculating the effect period when it is determined that the effect has been achieved.

In the present embodiment, as the game period of the jackpot game, it is used for one jackpot game based on the number of round games executed during the jackpot game and the maximum time (30 seconds) that can be spent in one round game. It is configured to calculate the maximum time that can be performed and to calculate the hold continuous production period in consideration of the maximum time. Then, it is determined whether or not the SP time period is set within the maximum time, and if it is determined that the SP time period is not set, the hold continuous effect is executed. With this configuration, no matter how the game is played during the jackpot game, the SP time period and the hold continuous production period do not overlap, so it is difficult for the player to understand. It is possible to suppress the execution of the effect.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the maximum time of the jackpot game is compared with the SP time period, but the maximum time of the jackpot game is corrected according to the progress of the jackpot game without limitation. It may be configured to execute the process. In this case, when a new round game is executed in the jackpot game, the production period of the pending continuous production is corrected based on the number of remaining round games and the maximum time (30 seconds) that can be spent in each round game. Just do it. With this configuration, when one round game is completed in less than 30 seconds, that is, before 30 seconds elapse, nine balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a to win the round game. Since the maximum time of the jackpot game can be variably calculated in response to the case where the end condition of is satisfied, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the hold continuous effect.

Further, in this case, at the start timing of the jackpot game, the SP time period and the hold continuous production period overlap, so that the SP time period and the hold continuous production period do not overlap according to the progress of the jackpot game. There is a possibility of transitioning to. When such a situation occurs, it is better to configure the hold continuous effect with a privilege that is advantageous to the player to be executable, rather than determining that the hold continuous effect can be executed at the start timing of the jackpot game. For example, in addition to the hold continuous effect, it is preferable to add a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a set value as a privilege. Further, it is preferable to provide a condition notification means for notifying the player during the jackpot game of the game conditions for transitioning from the state in which the SP time period and the hold continuous production period overlap to the state in which they do not overlap. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire various benefits and to establish the game conditions notified by the condition notification means.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with the technical idea of eliminating the overlapping relationship with the SP time period by accelerating the hold continuous production period. However, unlike this, for example, the start of the hold continuous production The configuration may be based on the technical idea of executing the hold continuous effect after the SP time period ends by delaying the period. For example, when the hold continuous effect is executed from a specific timing (ending period) of the jackpot game. In addition, when the first game in which the running jackpot game is advanced earlier is executed, the execution timing of the hold continuous production overlaps with the SP time period, and the second game in which the jackpot game is advanced later than the first game. When it is determined that the execution timing of the hold continuous effect does not overlap with the SP time period, a guidance mode for prompting the player to perform a second game (for example, a game that does not fire a ball) is displayed. It may be configured to do so.

Here, the contents of the look-ahead regulation period table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the contents specified in the look-ahead regulation period table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 179, in the look-ahead regulation period table 222aa, the regulation target period (seconds) is based on the position of the special figure hold that is the target of the look-ahead effect (holding continuous effect) and the number of jackpots within the look-ahead effect period. ) Is specified.

Specifically, when the effect target hold is "1", that is, a pre-reading effect (hold continuous effect) indicating that the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game is completed is executed. "440 seconds", which is the sum of the maximum period in one big hit game and the maximum period in one special symbol change, is defined as the regulated period. If the SP time period is not set within this regulated period, even if the look-ahead effect is executed, the SP time period is not set during the look-ahead effect period, which is easy for the player to understand. A production can be provided.

Below, when the production target hold is "2" and the number of jackpots during the period is "1", the regulation target period is "880 seconds", the production target hold is "3" and the number of jackpots during the period is "1". In that case, "900 seconds" is specified as the regulated period, and "1250 seconds" is specified as the regulated period when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", and the production target hold is "4" and the jackpot within the period. When the number is "1", "920 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", "1270 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and the number of jackpots within the period is In the case of "3", "1620 seconds" is specified as the regulated period.

In addition, when the production target hold is "5" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the regulated period is "940 seconds", and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the regulated period is set. If "1290 seconds" is specified and the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1640 seconds" is specified as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is set. "1990 seconds" is specified. When the production target hold is "6" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the regulated period is "960 seconds", and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the regulated period is "1310". If "seconds" is specified and the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1660 seconds" is specified as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is "2010". "Seconds" is specified, and when the number of jackpots within the period is "5", "2360 seconds" is specified as the regulated period.

When the production target hold is "7" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the regulated period is "980 seconds", and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the regulated period is "1330". If "seconds" is specified and the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1680 seconds" is specified as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is "2030". If "seconds" is specified and the number of jackpots within the period is "5", "2380 seconds" is specified as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "6", the regulated period is "2730". Seconds are specified. Then, when the production target hold is "8" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the regulated period is "1000 seconds", and when the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the regulated period is set. If "1350 seconds" is specified and the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1700 seconds" is specified as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is set. If "2050 seconds" is specified and the number of jackpots within the period is "5", "2400 seconds" is specified as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "6", the regulated period is set. "2750 seconds" is specified, and when the number of jackpots within the period is "7", "3000 seconds" is specified as the regulated period.

With this configuration, as a look-ahead effect (holding continuous effect) executed during the jackpot game, when the hold continuous effect can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games, until the end of the hold continuous effect. By determining in advance whether or not the SP time period is set, it is possible to provide the player with the hold continuous effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

The alternative effect selection table 222ab shows the effect mode of the lucky effect and the hold sequence effect when it is determined that the execution trigger of the hold sequence effect has been established in the lucky effect, and the execution of the hold sequence effect is prohibited. It is a data table referred to when selecting an alternative effect mode to be executed instead of.

Here, with reference to FIG. 180, a detailed description of the alternative effect selection table 222ab will be given. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing the contents specified in the alternative effect selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 180, the alternative effect selection table 222ab shows the number of jackpot wins (number of jackpots within the period) that can occur within the target period of the look-ahead effect (lucky effect), the look-ahead effect period, and the SP time period. Different production modes are defined corresponding to the length of the overlapping period and the acquired value of the effect counter 223g. The various effect modes defined in the alternative effect selection table 222ab are feasible effect modes, and the effect mode determined when the execution conditions of the determined effect mode are satisfied is used as the alternative effect. It is configured to be executed.

More specifically, when the number of jackpots (the number of jackpots within the period) is "1 to 3" and the overlapping period is "2 to 10 seconds", the range of the acquired effect counter 223g is "0 to 69". When "overlapping mode" is specified in the range of, "setting suggestion" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", "no effect" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and the overlapping period is "10 to 30 seconds". Is "setting suggestion" in the range of "0 to 69", "no effect" in the range of "70 to 89", and "overlapping mode" in the range of "90 to 99". Is specified, and when the overlapping period is "30 seconds or more", the range of the acquired effect counter 223 g is "no effect" in the range of "0 to 89", and "forced hold ream" is in the range of "90 to 99". Is stipulated.

When the number of jackpots (the number of jackpots within the period) is "4 to" and the overlapping period is "2 to 10 seconds", the range of the acquired effect counter 223g is "overlapping" in the range of "0 to 69". When the "aspect" is defined as "setting suggestion" in the range of "70 to 89", "forced hold ream" in the range of "90 to 99", and the overlapping period is "10", the acquired production counter The range of 223 g is defined as "forced hold ream" in the range of "0 to 89", and "no effect" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

As described above, when the overlapping period is within 2 seconds, the shortened hold continuous effect described with reference to FIG. 177 is executed, and therefore, it is not specified in the alternative effect selection table 222ab.

Here, when "setting suggestion" is selected as the effect mode of the alternative effect, the hold continuous effect is not executed, and instead, the set value is used by using the period until the SP time period is set. When the setting suggestion mode for suggesting the above to the player is determined and the "overlapping mode" is selected, the lucky effect (look-ahead effect) and the display content shown in FIG. 185 (b) described later are used. , The display area is divided into the SP time effect (period effect), and the effect mode in which both effects are executed in duplicate is determined.

In addition, when "forced hold ream" is selected, even if the SP time period is set, there is an effect mode for forcibly executing the hold ream effect as a lucky effect without executing the SP time effect. It is determined. That is, when "forced hold continuous" is selected, the SP time effect is not executed and the hold continuous effect is continuously executed while the SP time effect is being executed by the surrounding pachinko machines 10. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that gives the player a great sense of discomfort. If "No effect" is selected, the alternative effect is not executed.

As described above, in the alternative effect selection table 222ab, the number of jackpot wins (number of jackpots within the period) that can occur within the target period of the look-ahead effect (lucky effect), the look-ahead effect period, and the SP time period overlap. It is configured so that a plurality of production modes can be selected according to the length of the period and the value of the acquired production counter 223g. The larger the number of jackpots within the period, that is, the number of times the jackpot can be won, the more "forced hold". It is configured so that the production mode of "ream" can be easily selected. Therefore, when "forced hold ream" is selected and the SP time effect is not executed and the hold ream effect is continuously executed while the SP time effect is being executed by the surrounding pachinko machines 10. It is possible to notify the player that many jackpots can be won.

Further, the selection ratio of other production modes is different depending on the length of the overlap period between the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period. Therefore, the effect mode selected (easily selected) as the alternative effect can be different depending on the timing at which the look-ahead effect is executed, so that the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the shorter the overlapping period between the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period, the easier it is to select the "overlapping mode" as an alternative effect. Therefore, by executing each effect in the overlapping mode, the effect of the effect is enhanced. However, since it is possible to make it difficult for each effect to be executed in an overlapping manner for a long time, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot-related process 2 (see S2252 in FIG. 181) is performed instead of the jackpot-related process (see S2212 in FIG. 148) with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the round effect setting process (S2606 in FIG. 149) is performed. The difference is that the round effect setting process 2 (see S2651 in FIG. 182) is executed instead of the above), and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of the jackpot-related processing 2 (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the jackpot-related processing 2 (S2252). The jackpot-related process 2 (S2252) receives the processing content executed when the round number command is received and the ending command for the jackpot-related process (see S2212 in FIG. 148) of the first embodiment described above. It differs from the processing content executed when it is executed in that a part of it is changed, and it is the same except for that. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot-related process 2 (S2252) is executed, the same processes of S2603 to S2605 as the above-mentioned jackpot-related process (see S2212 in FIG. 148) are executed, and when the process of S2605 is completed, the round effect setting process 2 ( S2651) is executed, and then the same process of S2607 as the above-mentioned jackpot related process (see S2212 of FIG. 148) is executed, and then this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the round effect setting process 2 executed in the process of S2651 will be described later with reference to FIG. 182.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received in the processing of S2604 (S2604: No), then it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2608), and it is determined that the ending command has been received. (S2608: Yes) determines whether the hold continuous effect execution flag 223aa is set to on, that is, whether the hold continuous effect is executed as the end screen effect executed during the ending period (S2652), and is held. When it is determined that the continuous production execution flag 223aa is set to ON (S2652: Yes), the background mode for the pending continuous production (background mode for the fish school festival) is stored in the background mode storage area 223v (S2653). , The display ending command is set (S2654), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2655), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the round effect setting processing 2 (S2651) will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the round effect setting processing 2 (S2651). In this round effect setting process 2 (S2651), the execution condition of the hold continuous effect is satisfied when the first round game is started with respect to the above-mentioned round effect setting process (see S2606 in FIG. 149). The difference is that a process for determining whether or not is added, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the round effect setting process 2 (S2651) is executed, first, based on the value of the round number counter 223x, it is determined whether the round to be executed this time is the first round (S2751), not the first round. When it is determined (S2751: No), the same processing of S2701 to S2707 as the round effect setting processing of the first embodiment described above (see S2606 of FIG. 149) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that this round is the first round (S2751: Yes), the hold continuous effect setting process is executed (S2752), and then the hold continuous effect setting process is performed by the process of S2752. It is determined whether the execution of is decided (S2753). If it is determined in the process of S2753 that the execution of the hold continuous effect is determined (S2753: Yes), the hold continuous effect execution flag 223aa is set to on (S2754), and the process proceeds to the process of S2701 described above.

If it is determined in the process of S2753 that the execution of the hold continuous effect is not determined (S2753: No), the process of S2754 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2701.

In the present embodiment, the process for determining the execution of the hold continuous effect (hold continuous effect setting process) is configured to be executable in the first round, but is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. It may be configured to be executed by the number of rounds. For example, the pending continuous production is performed at the execution timing of the number of rounds (8th round) in which only the jackpot game for which a specific jackpot type (big hit A1, B1) is set is executed. It may be configured to execute the setting process. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the hold continuous effect setting process according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when the jackpot game with a short number of rounds is executed, the hold continuous effect is executed. Even if it is not done, it is possible to have the hold ream play the game after the big hit game is completed while expecting it.

In addition, during one big hit game, the hold continuous effect setting process is configured to be executable multiple times (for example, the first round and the eighth round), and is determined by the hold continuous effect setting process executed last. It may be configured so that the production mode is finally determined based on the content. In this case, even when the information indicating the jackpot winning is included in the special figure hold newly acquired during the jackpot game, the hold continuous effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the processing content of the hold continuous effect setting process (S2752) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the hold continuous effect setting process (S2752). In this hold continuous effect setting process (S2752), a process for determining whether or not the execution condition of the hold continuous effect is satisfied, and a process for determining whether or not the execution condition of the hold continuous effect is satisfied, and when the execution condition of the hold continuous effect is satisfied, the hold continuous effect A process for calculating the effect period and determining the effect mode to be actually executed based on the degree of overlap with the SP time period is executed.

When the hold continuous production setting process (S2752) is executed, first, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read (S3801), and the jackpot winning information (big hit winning) included in the read information is read. The information shown) is specified in association with the storage position stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S3802). That is, in the process of S3802, whether or not the acquired special figure hold is a winning hold is specified in correspondence with the hold storage order (execution order of the special symbol lottery).

When the processing of S3802 is completed, the execution period of the hold continuous effect is calculated with reference to the look-ahead restriction period selection table 222aa (S3803), and then the timekeeping stored in the timekeeping information storage area (time information storage area) 223r. The SP period (SP time period) in which the SP time effect is executed is specified based on the information (S3804).

Next, it is determined whether or not the effect period of the hold continuous effect calculated in the process of S3803 and the SP period specified in the process of S3804 overlap (S3805), and if it is determined that they do not overlap (S3805: No), The execution of the hold continuous effect is determined (S3806), and this process is terminated. That is, even if the hold continuous effect that fully uses the calculated effect period of the hold continuous effect is executed, if it is determined that the SP time effect is not executed during the effect period of the hold continuous effect, the hold sequence is executed. Execute the production as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3805, when it is determined that they are duplicated (S3805: Yes), an alternative effect setting process for setting an alternative effect to be executed instead of the hold continuous effect is executed (S3807), and this process is terminated. ..

Here, the processing contents of the alternative effect setting processing (S3807) will be described with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the alternative effect setting process (S3807). In this alternative effect setting process (S3807), the number of jackpot wins (number of jackpots within the period) that can occur within the target period of the look-ahead effect (lucky effect), the length of the overlap period between the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period , A process for determining an alternative effect of a different effect mode is executed in correspondence with the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g.

When the alternative effect setting process (S3807) is executed, first, the overlapping status (overlapping period) between the effect period of the hold continuous effect and the SP period (SP time period) is determined (S3901), and based on the determination result of S3901. It is determined whether the overlapping period is within 2 seconds (S3902). In the process of S3902, if it is determined that the time is within 2 seconds (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the hold continuous effect is executed before the SP time effect (S3903), and the hold continuous effect is executed. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed first (S3903: Yes), the execution of the shortened hold continuous effect is determined (S3904), and this process is terminated.

Here, when the shortened hold continuous effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 177, the shortened effect mode in which the effect result of the hold continuous effect is displayed is determined before the SP time period is set. In this way, when the overlapping period is short, by configuring to execute the process of shortening one of the production periods, a plurality of productions are executed in duplicate, and the production that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. It can be suppressed that it ends up.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that the overlapping period is 2 seconds or more (S3902: No), the effect mode of the alternative effect is determined with reference to the alternative effect selection table 222ab (S3905). It is determined to execute various effects according to the effect mode (S3907, S3908), and this process is terminated.

<About the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, a modified example using the technical idea in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment described above, when the pre-reading effect period and the SP time period overlap, the player does not get confused even if each effect is executed in duplicate (overlapping effect mode). The technical idea that can execute each production was described.

This technical idea may be used for the look-ahead effect in the first embodiment described above, that is, the look-ahead effect executed in response to the special symbol variation.

Specifically, if the player enters the SP time preparation period during the execution period of the "fish school festival" which is a look-ahead effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 185 (a) is displayed. After that, when the SP time period is set, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), the effect mode (fish school image) of the fish school festival moves to the display area HR1, and the look-ahead effect is executed in the display area HR1. The overlapping effect mode to be performed is set. That is, in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, by executing the period effect (SP time effect) that is synchronously executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be displayed. The look-ahead effect is continuously executed by using a part of the main display area Dm (display area HR1) while executing the effect with a sense of unity.

By dividing the area in which each effect is executed in this way, even if a plurality of effects are duplicated and executed for the player, the contents of the effect are confused and the effect is difficult for the player to understand. Can be suppressed from being executed.

In this modified example, the display area of the SP time effect is made larger than the display area of the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display area of the look-ahead effect is configured to be larger than the SP time effect. Alternatively, the size of the look-ahead effect effect area (display area HR1) may be different depending on the effect result of the look-ahead effect (whether or not a jackpot is won). For example, the effect result of the look-ahead effect is the player. It is preferable to configure the effect area to be larger when the result is favorable (winning a favorable jackpot) than when the result is disadvantageous to the player (winning a disadvantageous jackpot). With this configuration, only when the SP time period and the look-ahead effect period overlap, the player can predict the effect result of the look-ahead effect based on the size of the effect area. It is possible to make the player interested in the execution timing of.

Further, in this modification, both the SP time effect and the look-ahead effect are configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution periods of the effects overlap. May be configured to display any of the effects on the display screen of a display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device) other than the third symbol display device 81, or for decoration provided in the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured to execute any of the effects by using the accessory of. In this case, since the effect can be executed in a dedicated effect mode that is set only when the SP time effect period and the look-ahead effect period overlap, each effect is executed for the player who wants to experience various effects. The player can be interested in the timing.

<About the third embodiment>
Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 194. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, by configuring the setting suggestion effect to be executable using various effects, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the execution is executed. It was possible to make the player interested in the various productions to be performed and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the execution condition in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed can be notified in advance to the player, and the player plays the game so that the execution condition is satisfied. It is different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above in that a configuration for facilitating the execution of the setting suggestion effect is added. The other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

<About the production contents in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 186, the content of the characteristic effect among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the hold storage of the first special symbol (special figure 1 hold) and the hold storage of the second special symbol (special figure) in the state where the normal state is set. 2) and are memorable in the order of acquisition, and a maximum of 8 reserved symbols for indicating the number of stored memorized items can be displayed.

Then, when the hold change effect, which is an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol, is executed and the display mode of the reserved symbol becomes the specific display mode, during the period during which the specific display mode is displayed, By acquiring a predetermined number (for example, 6 or more) of reserved memories, the setting suggestion effect can be executed by using the display mode of the reserved symbols.

With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to make the player execute a lot of setting suggestion effects and acquire a lot of reserved memories.

Further, in the third embodiment, a variable scenario of the hold change effect can be set so as to change the hold symbol displayed in the above-mentioned specific display mode to a different display mode, and the specific display mode can be set. The period until the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed in is executed, or the period until the specific display mode is switched to a different display mode can be set as the period during which the setting suggestion effect is easily executed. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the period in which the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed continues. Therefore, the player is enthusiastically playing the game immediately after the reserved symbol of the specific display mode is displayed. Can be done.

In addition, as a variable scenario of the hold change effect, it is possible to set a variable scenario in which the display mode of the hold symbol displayed in the specific display mode is changed to a special display mode that is more advantageous to the player than the specific display mode. When the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed to the special display mode, the range of the reserved symbol on which the setting suggestion effect is executed is larger than that when the reserved symbol of the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to expand. With this configuration, when a variable effect that changes the display mode is executed for the reserved symbol in the specific display mode, the display mode is changed to the special display mode, which is more advantageous to the player (setting suggestion effect). Is created, or the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode, and the player is made to pay attention to whether a disadvantageous state (a state in which the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be executed) is created. Can be done.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, also in the third embodiment, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold is advantageous to the player by using the hold change effect as in the first embodiment described above. It is structured so that it can be suggested that the result is a good result (big hit winning). That is, when the hold change effect is executed, either a display mode that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery for the hold or a display mode for changing the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect can be displayed. doing. Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player depending on the effect result of the hold change effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 186, the effect content of the pending change effect will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed to the specific display mode by the hold change effect, and FIG. 186 (b) is a diagram showing the specific display mode. FIG. 186 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when eight hold memories are acquired while the hold symbol of is displayed, and FIG. 186 (c) shows a specific display mode normally displayed by a hold change effect. FIG. 186 (d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the mode is changed, and FIG. 186 (d) shows a case where the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed from the specific display mode to the special display mode by the hold change effect. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed in.

As shown in FIG. 186 (a), when the reserved symbol of the specific display mode (displayed in the display mode with “?” In the figure) is displayed on the reserved symbol pedestal m4, the area of the reserved pedestal m6 to m8. That is, the area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures of 6 to 8 is displayed as a "special symbol display zone" as a guidance mode for guiding the player to be an area in which the setting suggestion effect is executed. .. Then, a comment "Please save the hold while there is a?" Is displayed as a guidance mode for the character J0 to encourage the player to acquire the special figure hold.

If the number of special symbols held is 6 or more during the period when this special symbol display zone is displayed, a setting suggestion effect using the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed in the area of the holding pedestals m6 to m8 is executed. Will be done. Specifically, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, the reserved symbol is displayed in a display mode for suggesting the currently set set value. In this case as well, as in the first embodiment described above, the effect pattern (setting suggestion content) is determined with reference to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, and the reserved symbol is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the effect pattern. To.

As a result, when a specific display mode (display mode with?) Is displayed as the display mode of the reserved symbol, a large amount of reserved memory is acquired for the player, and a setting suggestion using the display mode of the reserved symbol is used. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to execute the production.

Here, if a predetermined number (6) or more of special figure reservations are acquired during the period in which the specific display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), a setting suggestion effect using the display mode of each reserved symbol is produced. Is executed. In the figure shown in FIG. 186 (b), the display mode of the effect pattern A (displayed in the display mode with “A” in the figure) with respect to the hold symbol of the sixth hold pedestal m6 is the seventh hold pedestal. The display mode of the effect pattern B (displayed in the display mode with "B" in the figure) is displayed for the m7 and the hold symbol of the eighth hold pedestal.

Then, the mode in which the character J0 issues a comment of "A × 1, B × 2 GET!" As a comment for indicating the history information of each display mode (effect result of the setting suggestion effect) displayed in the special symbol display zone. History display is executed. As a result, the display position of the reserved symbol in the specific display mode moves (shifts) based on the execution of the special symbol change, so that even when the reserved symbol is newly displayed in the special symbol display zone, the special symbol display zone It is possible to inform the player of the whole picture of the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the above in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, when the reserved symbol in which the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is set in the area of the special symbol display zone is moved (shifted) to the outside of the special symbol display zone, the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Is configured to be cleared. Therefore, up to three display modes of the reserved symbols displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect can be displayed on the display screen. In this way, by configuring the display mode of the reserved symbol outside the special symbol display zone to be different from the display mode corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, the display mode of the setting suggestion effect displayed in the special symbol display zone can be changed. You need to remember. Therefore, it is possible for a player who has been playing for a long time to easily grasp the production modes of many setting suggestion effects.

Further, when the hold change effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 186 (b) and the hold symbol displayed in the specific display mode changes to the normal display mode (displayed by a black circle in the figure), the hold symbol is changed. Since the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect used is not satisfied (the specific display mode is not displayed), the display of the special symbol display zone is erased and set as shown in FIG. 186 (c). A mode in which the character J0 issues a "end" comment is displayed as a comment indicating that the period in which the suggestion effect is likely to be executed has ended.

On the other hand, when the hold change effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 186 (b) and the hold symbol displayed in the specific display mode changes to the special display mode (displayed with a star in the figure), FIG. As shown in d), the range (special symbol display zone) of the reserved symbol on which the setting suggestion effect is executed is enlarged and displayed as compared with the case where the reserved symbol of the specific display mode is displayed. With this configuration, when a variable effect that changes the display mode is executed for the reserved symbol in the specific display mode, the display mode is changed to the special display mode, which is more advantageous to the player (setting suggestion effect). Is created, or the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode, and the player is made to pay attention to whether a disadvantageous state (a state in which the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be executed) is created. Can be done.

<About the electrical configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, the contents of ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (a). FIG. 187 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the pending change effect selection table 222ba is added, and is the same except for the addition. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The hold change effect selection table 222ba is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect scenario of the hold change effect executed as one of the look-ahead effects, and is a hold change that changes the display mode of the hold symbol as the look-ahead effect. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed (see S2508 in FIG. 191), it is referred to in the pending change effect setting process (see S2560 in FIG. 192) to be executed.

The change pattern of the hold change effect selected with reference to the hold change effect selection table 222ba is stored in the hold change pattern storage area 112bb, and it is determined that the change timing of the hold symbol is based on the stored hold change pattern. If this is the case, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed to the display mode defined in the hold change pattern.

Here, the contents of the pending change effect selection table 222ba will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the hold change effect selection table 222ba. As shown in FIG. 188, in the hold change effect selection table 222ba, four types of hold are made in correspondence with the hit / fail determination result indicated by the special figure hold that is the target of the hold change effect and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g. The change pattern is specified.

Specifically, in the range where the hit / fail determination result of the target hold is a hit and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g is in the range of "0 to 59", "Pattern 1" is obtained as the hold change pattern, and the acquired effect counter 223 g. In the range where the value of is "60 to 89", "Pattern 2" is set as the pending change pattern, and in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is "90 to 98", "Pattern 3" is set as the pending change pattern. , Is stipulated.

On the other hand, in the range where the hit / fail judgment result of the target hold is out of the range and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g is in the range of "0 to 69", the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g is set to "Pattern 4" as the hold change pattern. In the range of "70 to 89", "Pattern 1" is defined as the pending change pattern, and in the range of the acquired effect counter 223g value of "90 to 98", "Pattern 2" is defined as the pending change pattern. ing.

Here, the contents of each pending change pattern will be described. In "Pattern 1", the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) 2 seconds after the hold symbol indicating that the target hold has been acquired is displayed, and the special symbol change corresponding to the target hold changes. It is a pending change pattern in which the first aspect is continuously marked until it is executed.

In "Pattern 2", the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special symbol change is started after the hold symbol indicating that the target hold has been acquired is displayed. This is a hold change pattern in which the first aspect is continuously displayed until the special symbol change corresponding to the target hold is executed.

In "Pattern 3", the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special symbol change is started after the hold symbol indicating that the target hold has been acquired is displayed. The display mode changes to the second mode (special display mode) at the timing when the third special symbol change (the next special symbol change) is started, and continues until the special symbol change corresponding to the target hold is executed. The second aspect is the pending change pattern marked.

In "Pattern 4", the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special symbol change is started, and the second special symbol change (sequential special symbol change) is started. This is a pending change pattern in which the display mode changes from the first mode (specific display mode) to the third mode (normal display mode) at the timing.

In this way, by configuring the special symbol display zone to be displayed differently according to the selected pending change pattern, which period the special symbol display zone is displayed to the player is It can be difficult to understand whether it will continue to some extent. Therefore, immediately after the special symbol display zone is displayed, the game can be enthusiastically performed to acquire the special symbol hold.

<Regarding the control process in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 to 194, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, with respect to the above-described first embodiment, the reserved ball number command processing (see S2258 in FIG. 189) is performed instead of the reserved ball number command receiving process (see S2208 in FIG. 145), and the winning command receiving process (see S2258 in FIG. 189). The winning command reception process 3 (see S2260 in FIG. 191) is replaced with the variable display setting process 3 (see S2146 in FIG. 191) instead of S2210 in FIG. 147, and the variable display setting process 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 193) is replaced with the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 152). , The liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 194) is executed instead of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110 in FIG. 143), and the other processes are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the content of the control process of the reserved ball number command process 3 (S2258) will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the reserved ball number command processing 3 (S2258). As shown in FIG. 189, in the hold ball number command process 3 (S2258), the hold state setting process (S2351) is added to the hold ball number command reception process (see S2208 in FIG. 145). Is different, and the others are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the hold mode setting process (S2351) will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the holding mode setting process (S2351). In this hold mode setting process (S2351), when displaying a new hold symbol, it is determined whether the hold symbol to be displayed this time is in the special symbol display zone (special display zone), and the display is based on the determination result. A process for determining the mode (effect mode) is executed.

When the hold mode setting process (S2351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special hold effect executing flag 223ba is set to ON (S4001), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4001:). Yes), then the stored value, that is, the value stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter in the process of S2301 executed in the reserved ball number command process 3 (see S2258 in FIG. 189) (number number). It is determined whether or not the special display zone (information for indicating whether the special figure is on hold) corresponds to the currently set special display zone (special symbol display zone) (S4002).

If it is determined in the processing of S4002 that it is in the special display zone (S4002: Yes), the current hold is held with reference to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222b in order to determine the display mode of the reserved symbol as the setting suggestion effect. The effect pattern (effect mode) used for the symbol display is determined (S4003), a display command for indicating the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (S4004), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing content of the winning command receiving process 3 (S2260) will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the winning command receiving process 3 (S2260). In the winning command receiving process 3 (S2260), when it is determined that the pre-reading effect other than the variable effect is executed for the above-mentioned winning command receiving process (see S2210 in FIG. 147) (S2508: No), the hold change effect The difference is that the setting process (S2560 of FIG. 192) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the processing content of the hold change effect setting process (S2560) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the pending change effect setting process (S2560). In this hold change effect setting process (S2560), when the hold change effect is executed, a process for determining the hold change pattern (change scenario) is executed.

When the hold change effect setting process (S2560) is executed, first, the hold change pattern is determined by referring to the hold change effect selection table 222ba (S4101), and the determined hold change pattern is stored in the hold change pattern storage area 223bb. (S4102), and it is determined whether the stored hold change pattern includes the special hold effect (the effect in which the special symbol display zone is displayed) (S4103).

Then, when it is determined that the special hold effect is included (S4103: Yes), the special hold effect execution flag 223ba is set to on (S4104), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special hold effect is not included in the process of S4103 (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2164) will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the variation display setting processing 3 (S2164). This variation display setting process 3 (S2164) differs from the above-mentioned variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 152) in that a process related to a special hold effect (see FIG. 186) is added, and other than that. It is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 3 (S2164) is executed, first, the same processes of S3001 to S3003 as the above-mentioned variation display setting process (see S2114 of FIG. 152) are executed. Then, when the processing of S3003 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the special hold effect executing flag 223ba is set to ON (S4201), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4201: Yes), It is determined whether the change this time is a change related to the target hold of the special hold effect (S4202), and if it is determined to be a change related to the target hold (S4202: Yes), the special hold effect executing flag 223ba is set. It is set to off (S4203), and thereafter, the same processes of S3004 to S3013 as the above-mentioned variable display setting process (see S2114 of FIG. 152) are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special hold effect executing flag 223ba is not set to on, that is, the special hold effect is not executed (S4201: No), or in the process of S4202, a special Target of hold effect When it is determined that a change not related to hold, that is, a special symbol change other than the special symbol change corresponding to the hold symbol subject to the special hold effect is executed (S4202: No), the process of S4203 is performed. Is skipped, and the same processes of S3004 to S3013 as the above-mentioned variable display setting process (see S2114 of FIG. 152) are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing content of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (S2160) will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (S2160). The liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (S2160) is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 143) of the voice lamp control device 113, and the content of the effect being executed is periodically displayed. The process for updating is executed. For example, when a production scenario for changing the progress of the production based on the elapsed time is determined and the production mode is changed based on the production scenario, the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (S2160) is used. When the elapsed time is specified and it is determined that the specified elapsed time matches the variable timing of the effect mode specified in the effect scenario, a display command for changing the effect mode is set.

<About the fourth embodiment>
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern selection table 222a is defined so as to select different variation patterns according to the set gaming state, and the rate at which the reach-out effect is executed differs depending on the gaming state. It was configured to allow. Then, when the out-of-reach effect is executed during the SP time period, the setting suggestion effect is executed as a privilege. Then, in the gaming state where it is difficult to execute the out-of-reach effect, it is more difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect as the variable effect. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect is executed by using another effect. That is, regardless of which game state is set, the number of setting suggestion effects executed during the SP time period is set to be equal.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, even in a state where the same gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set, it is possible to change the ratio at which the out-of-reach effect is selected. .. Specifically, the background mode can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22, and even if the same variation pattern is selected according to the selected background mode, the reach is reached. It is configured so that the execution frequency of the production (out-of-reach production) is different.

In this way, by configuring so that the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect is different depending on the background mode selected by the player, it is possible to make the expectation of the jackpot winning when the reach effect is executed different. Therefore, the player who wants to see the reach effect regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won selects the background mode in which the reach effect (out-of-reach effect) is frequently executed, and the player who wants to raise the jackpot expectation of the reach effect is the reach. By selecting a background mode in which the execution frequency of the effect (out-of-reach effect) is low, the game can be performed with the desired effect.

Further, as in the first embodiment described above, when the reach-out effect is executed during the SP time period, the setting suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is increased. Can also be selected by the player. Therefore, a player who knows the set value that has already been set has a frequency of executing the setting suggestion effect in order to make it difficult for another player (a player who is playing a game next to him) to grasp the set value. A player who wants to select a low background mode and quickly grasp the set value can select a background mode in which the setting suggestion effect is frequently executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in a state in which the execution frequency of the reach effect is low (a state in which it is difficult to execute the reach-out effect), as a setting suggestion effect, the player can easily predict the currently set setting value (strong suggestion). Aspect) is configured to be easy to select, and in a state where the reach effect is frequently executed (a state in which the reach-out effect is easily executed), the player predicts the currently set value as the setting suggestion effect. It is configured so that a difficult production mode (weak suggestion mode) can be easily selected. With this configuration, the player is allowed to select a game in which the setting suggestion effect is easily executed but the weak suggestion mode is easily selected, and a game in which the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be executed but the strong suggestion mode is easily selected. It becomes possible.

That is, in the present embodiment, the technical idea is not to equalize the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed, but to equalize the amount of information for predicting the set value acquired by the player by the execution suggestion effect. Based on this, it is an invention made.

Further, as an invention based on the present technical idea, it is preferable that the stronger the suggestion mode is selected as the game situation that is less frequently realized occurs. For example, a plurality of jackpot games are executed during one SP time period. In some cases, it may be configured so that the strongly suggestive mode can be easily selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player information that makes it easy to predict the set value by creating a rarer game situation, so that the player can play various games. It is possible to play a game while devising ways to create a situation.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 222 configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the RAM 223 configuration are changed. The other configurations are the same, that is, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of each electrical configuration of the display control device 113. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195 (a), the ROM 222 of the present embodiment is provided with the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca instead of the variation pattern selection table 222a with respect to the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above, and is newly completed. The difference is that the aspect selection table 222cc is added, and the other aspects are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca is a data table referred to when selecting an effect pattern of the variation effect to be executed based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the variation pattern selection table 222a described above. Is. In the first embodiment described above, the detailed description thereof has been omitted, but the effect patterns of various variation effects are associated with the received information indicating the variation pattern, the current game state, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g. Is stipulated.

Here, the detailed contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 196. FIG. 196 is a diagram schematically showing characteristic specified contents among the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca. Although detailed description is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects, and the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca corresponds to the received variation pattern command. The types of various reach effects are specified.

As shown in FIG. 196, the variable pattern selection 4 table 222ca shows the current game state (the game state according to the selected background mode in addition to the probability states of the special symbol and the normal symbol) and the main control device. Various variation effect patterns are defined corresponding to the variation pattern type received from 110 and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g.

Specifically, the game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "sandy beach stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "various hits", that is, the main control device. When the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b of 110 is hit variation A to hit variation C, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g (the entire range of the effect counter 223 g that can be acquired). On the other hand, "various hits" are stipulated as variable effects.

Although detailed illustration is omitted in FIG. 196, in reality, a plurality of types of variation effects (reach effect) correspond to the length of the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g. ), Any variable effect (reach effect) is specified. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponding to the winning of the special symbol is received, the result of the variation effect is the result indicating the winning of the big hit, so that the out-of-reach effect is not executed.

Next, the gaming state is "normal 1", that is, the gaming state is the normal state, the background mode is "sandy beach stage", and the received variation pattern is "off variation A", that is, the main control device 110. When the fluctuation pattern selected with reference to the normal fluctuation pattern table 202b1 is the deviation fluctuation A (variation time 5 seconds), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g (the effect counter 223 g that can be acquired). (For the entire range), "short deviation" is specified as a variable effect. When this "short deviation" is selected, the reach effect is not executed, and the variation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out is Will be executed.

The gaming state is "normal 1", that is, the gaming state is the normal state, the background mode is "sandy beach stage", and the received variation pattern is "off variation B", that is, for normal use of the main control device 110. When the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern table 202b1 is out of alignment variation B (variation time 20 seconds), the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 49", and the variation effect is produced. As a variation effect, "out of reach" is specified for the range of "50 to 98". When "Middle out" is selected, the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order without the reach effect being executed after the effect of inciting whether or not the reach effect is executed as the variable effect is executed. A variation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed is executed in a display mode for indicating that there is.

Here, as a specific example of the variation effect corresponding to the "middle deviation", after the third symbol is temporarily stopped in the display mode indicating the deviation (other than the display mode indicating the jackpot winning), the third symbol is changed again. By executing the pseudo-variation effect to make the player expect the reach effect to be executed, and by temporarily slowing down the fluctuation speed of the third symbol during the variation display, the above-mentioned short deviation can be achieved. There is a variation effect that raises the expectation that the reach effect is executed (a part of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination in which the reach effect is executed) rather than the corresponding variation effect.

In each of the production modes corresponding to such "center-off" variation effects, the same production modes are set halfway in the reach-off effects and the reach-hit effects. With this configuration, when the variation effect of the center is executed, the variation effect executed for the player is set to any of "out of center", "out of reach", and "per reach". It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the variable effect is executed based on the basis.

In addition, as a specific example of the variation effect corresponding to "reach loss", a pseudo stop in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating that the third symbol is out (other than a display mode indicating a jackpot winning), and then the third symbol is changed again. After making the player expect that the reach effect is executed by executing the variation effect, the variation effect in which the reach effect is executed and the fluctuation speed of the third symbol in the variation display are temporarily reduced. By doing so, after raising the degree of expectation that the reach effect will be executed (a part of the third symbol will be stopped and displayed in the combination in which the reach effect will be executed) rather than the variable effect corresponding to the short deviation described above. There is a variable effect that executes the reach effect.

Then, the gaming state is "normal 1", that is, the gaming state is the normal state, the background mode is "sandy beach stage", and the received variation pattern is "off variation C", that is, the main control device 110. When the fluctuation pattern selected with reference to the normal fluctuation pattern table 202b1 is the deviation variation C (variation time 60 seconds), “reach loss” is displayed as the variation effect regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g. It is stipulated. That is, when the deviation variation C is selected, the variation effect of the reach deviation is always executed.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is "normal 2", that is, the gaming state is the normal state, the background mode is "deep sea stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "various hits", that is, the main control device. When the variation patterns selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b of 110 are hit variation A to hit variation C, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g (the entire range of the effect counter 223 g that can be acquired). On the other hand, "various hits" are stipulated as variable effects. Since the content of the variation effect executed when "various hits" is selected as the variation effect is the same as the case of the above-mentioned normal 1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The gaming state is "normal 2", that is, the gaming state is the normal state, the background mode is "deep sea stage", and the received variation pattern is "off variation A", that is, for normal use of the main controller 110. When the fluctuation pattern selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern table 202b1 is out of deviation fluctuation A (variation time 5 seconds), the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 49", and the variation effect is produced. "Short deviation" is defined as, and "reach deviation" is defined as a variable effect for the range of "50 to 98".

In the reach deviation effect executed for the deviation variation A, the reach effect is executed immediately after the third symbol variation is executed (2 seconds later), and the third is displayed in a display mode indicating the reach deviation 2 seconds later. A variable effect in which the symbol is stopped and displayed is executed. That is, a variable effect is executed for the purpose of increasing the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect, not for the purpose of enhancing the effect of the effect by inciting whether or not the player wins the jackpot. When the reach effect (reach out effect) is executed in such a short time, for example, when the variable effect is executed, one of the three third symbols is stopped and displayed. It is preferable to configure the system so that the reach state can be reached in a short time by immediately stopping and displaying the other one third symbol in the same display mode as the third symbol with the stop display. In this way, by configuring so as to create a reach state without displaying all the third symbols in a variable manner, it is possible to create a reach state in a short time in an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand. In this case, for example, the character "LOCK" is added as a notification mode for notifying the player that the third symbol that is not variablely displayed is not variablely displayed (it remains stopped and displayed). Add an icon. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that there is a third symbol that is not displayed in a variable manner.

The gaming state is "normal 2", that is, the gaming state is the normal state, the background mode is "deep sea stage", and the received variation pattern is "off variation B", that is, for normal use of the main controller 110. When the fluctuation pattern selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern table 202b1 is out of deviation fluctuation B (variation time 20 seconds), the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 9", and the variation effect is produced. As a variation effect, "out of reach" is specified for the range of "10 to 98". Then, when the received fluctuation pattern is "outside fluctuation C", that is, when the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, "out of reach" is defined as the fluctuation effect regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g. That is, when the deviation variation C is selected, the variation effect of the reach deviation is always executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the normal state is set, the frequency at which the out-of-reach effect is executed differs depending on the selected background mode. Specifically, when "deep sea stage" is selected (normally 2), the out-of-reach effect is more effective than when "sandy beach stage" is selected as the background mode (normally 1). It is configured to be easy to execute. Therefore, even when the same game state (normal state) is set, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the reach off effect and the reach effect different, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get tired of. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the background mode can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22, and the execution frequency of the reach effect (out-of-reach effect) is changed according to the set background mode. However, the configuration for making the execution frequency of the reach effect (out-of-reach effect) different is not limited to this. For example, the number of special symbol lottery executed without changing the game state is a predetermined number of times ( For example, the background mode may be switched when the time (50 times) is reached, or the background mode is switched when the time measured by the time measuring device 292 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 1:00 pm). In the case of having a plurality of jackpot types in which a specific game state (for example, a probability variation state) is set after the jackpot game ends, a plurality of jackpot types in which a specific game state is set after the jackpot game ends. Of the jackpot types, different background modes are set when the first jackpot type is set and when the second jackpot type is set and when a specific gaming state is set. Is also good.

In this way, even if the specifications do not allow the player to arbitrarily select the background mode, the player can be made to execute a game in which the reach effect is executed at different frequencies, so that the player gets tired of it. It is possible to provide a game that does not come.

Next, when the game state is the time saving state or the probability change state, the variation effect is defined so that the same variation effect is executed regardless of the background mode, and the game state is "time reduction / probability change". That is, when the game state is the time saving state or the probability changing state and the received fluctuation pattern is "various hits", that is, it is selected with reference to the time saving / probability changing fluctuation pattern table 202b2 of the main control device 110. When the fluctuation patterns are hit variation A and hit variation B, "various hits" are used as the variation effect regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g (for the entire range of the effect counter 223 g that can be acquired). It is stipulated. Since the content of the variation effect executed when "various hits" is selected as the variation effect is the same as the case of the above-mentioned normal 1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, when the received fluctuation pattern is "outside variation D", that is, the variation pattern selected by referring to the time reduction / probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 of the main controller 110 is out of order variation D (variation time 3 seconds). In the case of, "short deviation" is defined as a variable effect regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g (for the entire range of the acquired effect counter 223 g). That is, in the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time of 3 seconds, the reach effect is not executed, and the variation effect in which the third symbol indicating the deviation is stopped and displayed is executed.

When the received fluctuation pattern is "outside variation B, C", that is, the variation pattern selected with reference to the time reduction / probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 of the main controller 110 is outlier variation B (variation time 20 seconds). Alternatively, in the case of deviation variation C (variation time 60 seconds), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223g (for the entire range of the acquisitionable effect counter 223g), the variation effect is "out of reach". Is stipulated.

Further, when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the high-speed variation mode is set, the variation effect is defined so that the same variation effect is executed regardless of the background mode, and the game state is "probability variation high speed". Refer to the "variation period", that is, when the gaming state is in the probability variation state and the high-speed variation mode, and the received variation patterns are "various hits", that is, the variation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed variation of the main controller 110. When the variation patterns selected in the above steps are the short hit variation A and the short hit variation B, the variation effect is produced regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g (for the entire range of the acquireable effect counter 223 g). "Various hits" are stipulated as. Since the content of the variation effect executed when "various hits" is selected as the variation effect is the same as the case of the above-mentioned normal 1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, when the received fluctuation pattern is "various deviations", that is, the fluctuation pattern selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed fluctuation of the main controller 110 is a short deviation fluctuation A (variation time 1.5 seconds). ), In the case of short deviation variation B (variation time 6 seconds), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 g (for the entire range of the acquireable effect counter 223 g), the variation effect is "short deviation". Is stipulated. That is, during the high-speed fluctuation mode, the out-of-reach effect is not executed, and it is notified that the jackpot has been won when the reach effect is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of executing the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the control process of the main control device 110, the gaming state (currently set gaming state or background mode). It is configured so that different variable effects can be determined based on the above, and the execution frequency of the reach effect (out-of-reach effect) is different depending on the game state.

As a game state, the normal state is the most frequent execution of the reach effect (reach out effect), that is, when a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is executed, the reach is performed as an effect mode of the variable effect for showing the lottery result. It is configured so that the effect is executed most frequently, and then the reach effect is executed in the order of time saving state and probability change state. Further, even when the probability change state is set, the reach off effect is not executed in the high-speed fluctuation mode. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly define the execution frequency of the reach-out effect in each game state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 195 (a). The end time mode selection table 222cc is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect content (suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the period effect (SP time effect), and is the start timing of the period effect. Different suggestion modes are defined corresponding to the game state in the above and the game state at the end timing of the period effect.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the period effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed based on the variable effect than when the period effect is not executed. It is configured as follows. More specifically, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the period effect and the number of times the reach effect is executed, or the setting suggestion effect is executed when the reach out effect is executed. It is configured to do.

That is, during the SP time period in which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed, a large amount of information for causing the player to predict the set value is provided, so that a privilege (setting suggestion information) advantageous to the player is provided. It will be a privilege period that will be easily granted. However, this SP time period is a period set based on the timekeeping result by the timekeeping device 292, and is set regardless of the actual game content. Therefore, for example, the SP time period is set during the jackpot game. In some cases, the SP time period may be set during a game state (high-speed fluctuation mode) in which it is difficult to execute the out-of-reach effect.

In this way, even when the SP time period is set, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced because the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the game situation during the SP time period. was there.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the effect (effect at the end of the period effect) can be executed in an effect mode that suggests the set value at the end timing of the SP time period, and the effect mode at the end of the period effect is set. , The game state at the time when the SP time period is set (the probability state of the special symbol, the probability state of the normal symbol, the background mode, the state of the game specified by whether or not the jackpot game is in progress) and the SP time period have ended. It is configured to be determined based on the game state at the time.

Specifically, when the SP time period is in a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variation effect, the period effect ends than in the game state in which the setting suggestion effect based on the variation effect is easily executed. It is configured so that the setting suggestion effect can be easily executed in a mode (strong suggestion mode) in which the set value can be easily predicted during the time effect. That is, when the game during the SP time period is executed in a situation where it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect of the strong suggestion mode is likely to be executed at the end timing of the SP time period. With this configuration, information (setting estimation element) for predicting the set value can be uniformly given to the player who played the game during the SP time period regardless of the game state. Therefore, no matter what kind of game state the SP time period is set, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 197, the contents of the termination mode selection table 222cc will be described. FIG. 197 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the end mode selection table 222cc. The end time mode selection table 222cc is a data table referred to when selecting the suggestion mode of the setting suggestion effect executed on the end screen of the SP time period (SP time effect), and predicts the set value. Five levels of suggestion modes (minimum suggestion mode, low suggestion mode, medium suggestion mode, high suggestion mode, and highest suggestion mode) are the gaming state at the start of the SP period and the gaming state at the end of the SP time period. It is specified to be selected according to the combination with.

Specifically, when the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1" and the game state at the end is "normal 1", the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period When the "low suggestion mode" as the mode (setting suggestion mode) is that the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1" and the gaming state at the end is "normal 2", the end of the SP time period The "low suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect that is sometimes executed, the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1", and the game state at the end is "time reduction / probability change". In some cases, the "medium suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period, and the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1", and at the end. When the gaming state of is "high-speed fluctuation", the "high suggestion mode" as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is the game state at the start of the SP time period. Is "normal 1" and the gaming state at the end is "big hit", the "high suggestion mode" is set as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period. It is stipulated that each is selected.

When the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2" and the game state at the end is "normal 1", the suggestion mode of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period (setting suggestion mode). ) Is set to be executed at the end of the SP time period when the "low suggestion mode" is the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2" and the game state at the end is "normal 2". When the "minimum suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the suggestion effect, the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2", and the game state at the end is "time reduction / probability change". The "medium suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period, the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2", and the game state at the end is "normal 2". In the case of "high-speed fluctuation", the "high suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period, and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2". Then, when the game state at the end is "big hit", "high suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period. It is stipulated in.

Further, when the game state at the start of the SP time period is "time reduction / probability change" and the game state at the end is "normal 1 and normal 2", the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period When the "medium suggestion mode" as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) is "time reduction / probability change" at the start of the SP time period and "time reduction / probability change" at the end of the SP time period, the SP time "High suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the period, the game state at the start of the SP time period is "time reduction / probability change", and the game state at the end is "high speed". In the case of "variation", the "highest suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period, and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "time reduction / probability change". Then, when the game state at the end is "big hit", the "highest suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period. It is stipulated in.

When the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "high-speed fluctuation" and the gaming state at the end is "high-speed fluctuation", the suggestion mode of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period (setting suggestion mode). ), The "highest suggestion mode" is a setting to be executed at the end of the SP time period when the game state at the start of the SP time period is "high-speed fluctuation" and the game state at the end is "big hit". When the "highest suggestion mode" as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the suggestion effect is "high speed fluctuation" at the start of the SP time period and "high speed fluctuation, other than during jackpot" at the end of the game state. Is a "high suggestion mode" as a suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period, a game state at the start of the SP time period is "big hit", and a game at the end. When the state is "big hit", "confirmed notification" is set as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period, and the game state at the start of the SP time period is "big hit". In "Medium", when the game state at the end is "other than the jackpot", "High suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period. It is stipulated to be done.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 198) is executed instead of the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158). However, everything else is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the elapsed time confirmation processing 4 (S2171). The elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) is for setting the display mode of the end screen displayed at the end of the period effect (SP time effect) with respect to the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158) described above. The difference is that the contents of the processing of are different, and the other points are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 198, when the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) is executed, the same processes of S3601 to S3607 as the above-mentioned elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 of FIG. 158) are executed, and the process of S3607 is executed. When finished, next, the current gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area 223ca (S3761), and this processing is terminated. In the processing of S3761, the probability state of the special symbol and the probability state of the normal symbol are set as the current game state, that is, the game state set at the start timing of the SP period (SP time period) in which the period effect is executed. In addition, the game includes information indicating the type of the selected background mode (sandy beach stage, deep sea stage), information indicating whether or not the high-speed fluctuation mode is in progress, and information indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. The state information is stored in the game state storage area 223ca. Here, the game state information stored in the game state storage area 223ca is referred to when determining the display mode of the end screen displayed at the end of the period effect.

Further, in the processing of S3604, if it is determined that the current production period is not the SP period (SP time period) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the special mode in-progress flag 223w is set to ON. (S3608), if it is determined that the special mode flag 223w is not set to ON (S3608: No), it is determined whether the period effect flag 223p is set to ON (S3609).

In the process of S3609, the period effect during effect flag 223p is set to on, that is, the period effect indicating that the SP period (SP time period) is currently finished and the SP time effect is being executed. When it is determined that the middle flag 223p remains on (timing for setting the end of the period effect) (S3609: Yes), then it is determined whether the special symbol change is being executed. (S3610), when it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3610: Yes), the same process of S3611 as the above-mentioned elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 of FIG. 158) is executed, and this process is terminated. .. Although detailed description is omitted, in the process of S3611, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol variation executed at the end timing of the SP time period (SP period) (the special symbol variation being executed from the end of the SP time period is A process for determining the effect mode to be executed during the residual fluctuation time is executed according to the period until the stop display is displayed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3610 that the special figure is not changing (S3610: No), then the end screen setting process is executed (S3762), and the period effecting flag 223p is set to off (S3612). , A back image change command for switching the background image type of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the background image indicating the SP time period to the background image indicating the normal effect period is set (S3613), and then the above-mentioned The same processes of S3614 and S3615 as the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the end screen setting process (S3762) will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the end screen setting process (S3762). In the end screen setting process (S3762), in the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 198) described above, the condition for ending the period effect (SP time effect) (SP time period ends and the special figure changes). It is executed when (the effect is stopped and displayed) is established, and the display mode displayed on the end screen of the SP time effect differs depending on the game state (game situation) during the SP time period. A process for determining the display mode is executed.

When the end screen setting process (S3762) is executed, first, the game state at the start of the period effect from the game state storage area 223ca, that is, the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 198) of S3761. The game state stored in the process and the current game state are read (S4401), and each game state read in the process of S4401 (the game state at the start of the period effect and the game state at the end of the period effect). Based on the above, the setting suggestion mode to be displayed on the period effect end screen is determined with reference to the end mode selection table 222 kb (S4402).

Then, a display command for indicating the determined setting suggestion mode and the display mode corresponding to the current gaming state is set (S4403), and this process is terminated.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect is changed to make the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect different. However, the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect is not limited to this. The frequency at which the setting suggestion effect is executed may be variably configured when the out-of-reach effect is selected without changing.

In this case, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach-off effect is executed to encourage the player to perform the suggestion notice effect, and whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the effect result of the suggestion notice effect. It is preferable to configure it so as to notify the player. As a result, even if the out-of-reach effect in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is executed, it is possible to expect that the setting suggestion effect is executed until the end by executing the suggestion notice effect. You can be interested in the production to be done.

Further, when the suggestion notice effect is executed, it is preferable to configure the effect so that a revival mode in which the reach-out effect is switched to the reach-per-reach effect can be executed as the effect result. After the three symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination different from the jackpot winning, the suggestion notice effect is executed, and when the first effect is executed as the suggestion notice effect, the setting suggestion effect is executed and the second effect is executed. If this is done, the setting suggestion effect is not executed and the variation effect ends as it is, and when the third effect is executed, the third symbol that has stopped coming off is re-variated to indicate the jackpot winning. It is preferable to configure the third symbol to be stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, when the suggestion notice effect is executed, not only the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect but also the big hit winning can be expected, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 202. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the processing contents of various processes (various start-up processes) executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 are different. Except for the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, various control devices such as the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 are activated and executed by the main control device 110. When the start-up command set in the start-up process (see FIG. 135) is output to the voice lamp control device 113 and the start-up command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the start-up command. It was configured so that the startup process was started.

That is, the execution timing of the start-up process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be the timing when the start-up command is received from the main control device 110, not when the power is turned on. As a result, it is possible to have a certain relationship between the execution period of the start-up process of the main control device 110 and the execution period of the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113. For example, the start-up process is caused by the failure of the main control device 110. When a situation occurs in which the raising process is not executed, it is possible to prevent only the raising process of the voice lamp control device 113 from being executed.

Further, since the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 cannot proceed unless the start-up command output from the main control device 110 is received, for example, a malicious player replaces the regular main control device 110. When a non-regular main control device is attached to perform an illegal game, the number of information (commands) required to operate the pachinko machine 10 can be increased to make it difficult to perform the illegal game. there were.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the power supply device 115 is configured to supply predetermined power to various control devices all at once, and the power supply device 115 supplies the power. When various control devices receive the predetermined electric power, the start-up process is executed. That is, based on the power supply timing from the power supply device 115 to the various control devices, the execution timing of the start-up process executed by the various control devices can be made to have a certain relationship.

With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process for outputting the start-up command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and it is possible to simplify the control process in the main control device 110. ..

From the time the power is turned on until the predetermined power is supplied by the power supply device 115, it is necessary to take a start-up period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V in series) and stabilizes. There is. Then, when the predetermined power is supplied, the reset signal is also output (the processing content is reset when the predetermined power is first supplied after the startup). As a result, even if a problem occurs in which a small amount of power is output to various control devices during the start-up period until the predetermined power is supplied and control processing such as start-up processing is executed. The problem can be surely solved.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a boot completion command for indicating that the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed is received from the display control device 114 in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113. When the boot completion command is received during the start-up process, that is, before the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed, the boot of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. When the process is completed, the process for setting the operation invalid period for invalidating the operation for the frame button 22 (the process for setting the operation invalid timer 223s) is skipped.

With this configuration, for example, by spending time on the setting change operation, the time from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed becomes long. It is possible to reduce the load of the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the case (when the period until the boot processing of the third symbol display device 81 is completed is longer).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 200, the contents of the processing executed by the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a process in which a part of the start-up process is changed is executed with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the other steps are the same. The same processing contents are the same, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the start-up processing of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 200, when the start-up process is executed, the initial setting process (S951) is executed, and other than that, the same process (S902 to S917) as in the above-described first embodiment is executed.

Here, the process of S951 is different from the above-mentioned initial setting process (S901) in that the process for setting the start-up command for outputting to the voice lamp control device 113 is not executed. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the information indicating that the start-up process of the main control device 110 has been executed is not output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202, the contents of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the start-up process (see FIG. 201) is executed instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 140) with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the start-up process (see FIG. 201). The difference is that the standby process 5 (see S2051 in FIG. 202) is executed instead of the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142) executed in. The other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 201, when the start-up process is executed, the standby process 5 is first executed (S2051), and then the same processes of S2002 to S2014 as the above-mentioned start-up process (see FIG. 140) are executed. , Ends the end of this process.

Next, the processing content of (S2051) of the standby process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the standby process 5 (S2051). The standby process 5 (S2051) is different from the standby process of the first embodiment described above (see S2012 in FIG. 142) in that a process related to receiving a boot completion command is added, and is the same except for the above. .. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the standby process 5 (S2051) is executed, first, the same processes of S2071 to S2077 as the standby process of the first embodiment described above (see S2012 of FIG. 142) are executed, and then the output is output from the display control device 114. It is determined whether or not the boot completion command is received (S2091). If it is determined that the boot completion command has been received in the process of S2091 (S2091: Yes), a display command for indicating that the button operation is valid is set (S2092), and the process proceeds to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S2091 when it is determined that the boot completion command has not been received (S2091: No), the same process of S2078 as the standby process of the first embodiment described above (see S2012 of FIG. 142) is executed. Then move to the main process.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in the start-up process (see FIG. 201) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, a process capable of determining that the boot completion command has been received is executed. If the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed before the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed, the operation invalid timer 223s is set. Processing can be eliminated. Therefore, the process for starting up the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified. Further, when the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed before the boot process of the third symbol display device 81, the operation invalid timer 223s is set as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to prohibit the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) from being effectively determined before the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed.

In this embodiment, it is prohibited to effectively determine the operation to the operation means (frame button 22) by setting a value for indicating a predetermined period (5 seconds) for the operation invalid timer 223s. It is configured to set the period to be used. Then, as the value set in the operation invalid timer 223s, a period longer than the period required for the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 to be completed is set.

With this configuration, control is performed so that the operation to the operation means (frame button 22) is unconditionally invalid until the value set in the operation invalid timer 223s is updated to 0. The process for starting up the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Not limited to this configuration, for example, when it is determined that the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is not completed when the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed, the state is shown. The standby flag is set to on, the standby flag is set to off when it is determined that the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and the frame is set while the standby flag is set to on. It may be configured so that the operation to the button 22 is invalid. With this configuration, it is necessary to add a process for periodically determining the setting status of the standby flag. However, which of the process of starting up the voice lamp control device 113 and the process of booting the third symbol display device 81 The operation to the frame button 22 is surely invalidated until the time when the frame button 22 is finished, and the frame button 22 is surely set to the timing when both the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 and the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 are finished. The operation can be effectively determined.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine (specify) whether or not there is an operation on the operation means (frame button 22) and the operation content, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. The display control device 114 may be configured so that the presence / absence of an operation on the operation means (frame button 22) and the operation content can be determined. In this case, in the state where the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed and the start-up process is not completed, that is, the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. After that, the operation to the frame button 22 can be effectively determined, but the first state in which the start-up process of all the control devices is not completed and the start-up process of all the control devices of the pachinko machine 10 The processing content for the operation of the frame button 22 may be changed in the second state in which the game is completed and the game can be played normally.

Specifically, during the first state (during the setting change operation), when the frame button 22 is operated, a process of executing the volume adjustment of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and during the second state (during the gaming state), the process is executed. When the frame button 22 is operated, in addition to the process of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to execute the process of selecting the background mode and the process related to the variation effect. In this way, by switching the processing content to be executed when the frame button 22 is operated according to the activation status of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to execute only the operation suitable for the activation status.

<About the sixth embodiment>
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 207. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, when determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, the effect period of the look-ahead effect that can be executed this time is calculated, and the calculated effect period and the SP time period are combined. It is configured to discriminate the overlapping relationship and determine whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed and the effect mode based on the determination result. In this configuration, when the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is established, the look-ahead effect is calculated as much as possible by determining the overlapping relationship with the SP time period after calculating the effect period of the look-ahead effect in detail. However, regardless of the timing when the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is established, it is necessary to execute the process for determining the overlapping relationship with the SP time period, and the voice There is a problem that the processing load of the control process executed by the lamp control device 113 increases.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the time counting period after the power is turned on can be specified based on the time information measured by the time measuring device 292, and the SP time period and pre-reading are made with respect to the time measuring period. It is configured to specify a prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect so that the effect period does not overlap with the effect period (it is difficult).

That is, when the timekeeping period enters the period in which the look-ahead effect is prohibited, the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited without determining whether or not the execution opportunity of the look-ahead effect has been established. In this way, by prescribing the period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect (pre-reading prohibition period) for the timekeeping period, the look-ahead effect and the SP time effect are executed in duplicate, and the player can understand. It is possible to simplify the process for prohibiting (suppressing) the execution of a difficult effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, different look-ahead prohibition periods are stipulated based on the number of special figures on hold and whether or not a jackpot is won in the hold. That is, look-ahead is prohibited until the look-ahead effect is executed, or when the jackpot game is executed during the look-ahead effect, until the look-ahead effect is executed, or when the jackpot game is not executed during the look-ahead effect. It is configured so that the length of the period is different.

In this way, as the look-ahead effect to be executed (possibly) in the future, when the period until the look-ahead effect is executed is long, or the effect pattern with a long look-ahead effect period itself and the period until the look-ahead effect is executed. Is short, or by separating the effect pattern from which the look-ahead effect period itself is short and defining the look-ahead prohibition period corresponding to each pattern, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead prohibition period from becoming unnecessarily long. Therefore, the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the look-ahead effect period is set to the first pattern (when the period until the look-ahead effect is executed is long, or the look-ahead effect period itself is long) depending on whether or not the jackpot is won. It is configured to be divided into a second pattern (when the period until the look-ahead effect is executed is short, or when the look-ahead effect period itself is short).

As a result, in a situation where it is possible that the look-ahead effect period becomes longer (the period until the look-ahead effect is executed becomes longer) due to the jackpot game period being related, a long look-ahead prohibition period is referred to, and the jackpot game Short look-ahead prohibition periods are referenced in situations where the periods are not relevant. By using the long period of the jackpot game period as a judgment material for identifying the look-ahead effect period, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead prohibition period from becoming unnecessarily long. Therefore, the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the special feature that was won this time is before the determination of whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed, which is different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. Based on the position of the figure hold (number of special figure hold) and the presence or absence of the jackpot winning in the acquired special figure hold, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the process of determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed when the pre-reading prohibition period is in progress, so that the process is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The processing load of control processing can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the presence or absence of a jackpot winning (presence or absence of a jackpot game period) is used as an element for specifying the look-ahead prohibition period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot to be executed is executed. The type of game (number of rounds) may be an element, and as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to each special symbol reservation, information indicating the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) or more is set is provided. The determination result of whether or not a predetermined number (for example, one) or more of the stored special figure reservations are stored may be used as an element. In other words, when the look-ahead effect is executed based on the special figure hold acquired this time, the corresponding look-ahead prohibition period can be specified using information that can roughly specify when the look-ahead effect period is set. It should be configured.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 205. The sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed, and is the same except for the above. A detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted. First, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 203, the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment provides the effect switching 6 table 222fa instead of the effect switching table 222b with respect to the above-described first embodiment. The difference is that the look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222fb is provided in place of the look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d, and the other aspects are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect switching 6 table 222fa is referred to when switching the effect period based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the time measuring device 292, similarly to the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 108) of the first embodiment described above. It is a data table. In the present embodiment, different effects can be executed according to the set effect period. Then, the effect switching 6 table 222fa is used to select an effect period for executing the effect (effect mode) performed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. Further, in the data table in which the pre-reading prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the process for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed (pre-reading effect execution determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 207)) is specified in addition to the effect period. is there.

This effect switching 6 table 222fa is referred to when a command for indicating that new prize information (special figure hold) has been acquired is received, and when it is determined that the pre-reading prohibition period is applicable, the pre-reading effect is executed. The determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 207) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading effect execution determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 207) from being executed during the pre-reading prohibition period, so that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is simplified. can do.

Here, the detailed contents of the effect switching 6 table 222fa will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect switching 6 table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 204, the effect switching 6 table 222fa defines the pre-reading prohibition period by a plurality of types (prohibition level) in addition to the effect period with respect to the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 108). Is different. This prohibition level is determined by referring to the look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb described later, and is a special feature when a command for indicating that new prize information (special figure pending) has been acquired is received. Figure It is configured so that different types are determined according to the hold status.

More specifically, as the special figure holding status, the jackpot game is performed in the period until the number of acquired special figure holding balls (1 to 8) and the special symbol change corresponding to the target special figure holding are executed. Is configured so that the prohibition level is determined based on the judgment result of whether or not (whether or not the special figure hold other than the special figure hold acquired this time contains information indicating the jackpot winning). doing. Then, based on the determined prohibition level and the current elapsed time T (elapsed time since the power is turned on), it is determined whether or not the read-ahead prohibition period is applicable, and if it is determined that the read-ahead prohibition period is applicable, the look-ahead is determined. The effect execution determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 207) is skipped.

Here, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents defined in the effect switching 6 table 222fa will be specifically described. The elapsed time T calculated based on the timekeeping contents of the timekeeping device 292 (after the power is turned on). The production period is defined according to the elapsed time), and the normal production period is defined in the range where the elapsed time T is 88 minutes or less.

Then, among the elapsed time T for which the normal production period is defined, in the range where the elapsed time T is within 83 minutes, that is, in the range where the grace period until the SP time period is set is 7 minutes or more, the jackpot game Even if it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect including the period or the look-ahead effect to be executed after the jackpot game ends (even if a long look-ahead effect period is set), the SP time period and the look-ahead effect period cannot overlap. Since it is a range, "no prohibition" is stipulated.

In addition, among the elapsed time T for which the normal production period is specified, in the range where the elapsed time T is 83 minutes to 85 minutes and 10 seconds, "prohibition level 5" is set and the elapsed time T is 85 minutes and 10 seconds to 85 minutes. "Forbidden level 4" is in the range of 30 seconds, and "Forbidden level 3" is in the range of elapsed time T of 85 minutes 30 seconds to 85 minutes 50 seconds, and the elapsed time T is 85 minutes 50 seconds to 86 minutes. "Prohibition level 2" is defined in the range of 10 seconds, and "Prohibition level 1" is defined in the range of elapsed time T of 86 minutes 10 seconds to 88 minutes.

Then, the SP time preparation period is defined in the range where the elapsed time T is 88 minutes to 90 minutes, and "pre-reading prohibited" is defined during the SP time preparation period, and the elapsed time T is in the range of 90 minutes to 93 minutes. The SP time period (for music A) is specified in. Hereinafter, similarly to the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 108) of the first embodiment described above, the normal effect period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period are defined for the elapsed time, respectively, the SP time. Different types of kinsoku levels are defined, depending on the length of the grace period before the period is set.

The look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb is a data table that is referred to when determining the type (prohibition level) of the corresponding look-ahead prohibition period, and is the number of special figure reservations to be determined (the storage position of the target hold). Different levels of kinsoku are defined based on the information indicating whether or not there is a big hit during the period (whether or not there is a big hit in the special figure hold other than the target hold). That is, in this look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb, the period (the period during which the look-ahead effect can be executed) until the special symbol change corresponding to the target hold is executed (until the look-ahead effect is completed) is the number of special figure reservations. It is roughly specified based on the presence or absence of the jackpot game, and it is configured to determine whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed in the specified period.

Therefore, as the value of the target hold increases, many special symbol holds are executed before the special symbol change corresponding to the target hold is executed, so that the period during which the look-ahead effect can be executed becomes longer. As a prohibition level, a type with a long look-ahead prohibition period (high level prohibition type) can be easily determined. Similarly, if the jackpot game is executed before the special symbol change corresponding to the target hold is executed, the period until the special symbol change corresponding to the target hold is executed becomes longer (big hit). By (after the end of the game), the period during which the look-ahead effect can be executed becomes longer, so that a type with a long look-ahead prohibition period (a high-level prohibition type) can be easily determined as the prohibition level.

On the other hand, the smaller the value of the target hold, or if there is no information indicating the jackpot winning in the special figure hold, the period until the special symbol change corresponding to the target hold is executed becomes shorter, so the prohibition level As a result, it becomes easier to determine the type with a short look-ahead prohibition period (low-level prohibition type).

Specifically, if the target hold is "1" and the jackpot winning during the period is "Yes", "Level 5" is stipulated as a prohibition level, and the jackpot winning during the period is "None". In the case of, the prohibition level "level 1" is stipulated. In addition, if the target hold is "2" and the jackpot winning during the period is "Yes", "Level 5" is stipulated as a prohibition level, and if the jackpot winning during the period is "None", , The prohibition level "level 2" is stipulated. If the target hold is "3" and the jackpot winning during the period is "Yes", "Level 5" is stipulated as the prohibition level, and if the jackpot winning during the period is "None", it is prohibited. Level "Level 3" is specified. In addition, if the target hold is "4" and the jackpot winning during the period is "Yes", "Level 5" is stipulated as a prohibition level, and if the jackpot winning during the period is "None", , The prohibition level "level 4" is stipulated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. In the sixth embodiment, the pre-reading effect execution decision process 6 (see S2376 in FIG. 206) is received instead of the pre-reading effect execution decision process (see S2306 in FIG. 146) with respect to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the winning command receiving process 6 (see S2280 in FIG. 207) is executed instead of the process (see S2210 in FIG. 147), and the other processes are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376) will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376). In this look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376), the information stored (held and stored) in the winning information storage area 223f is read, and the number of stored information (the number of special figure reserved balls) and the jackpot It is configured to execute a process of specifying the presence or absence of information indicating winning, and based on the process result, execute a process of determining whether or not the current read-ahead prohibition period is in effect.

That is, as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the effect mode (effect period) of the look-ahead effect that can be actually executed is determined, and the determined effect period of the look-ahead effect overlaps with the SP time period. Rather than determining whether to do so, the period during which the look-ahead effect can be executed is roughly specified based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, and the prohibition level corresponding to the specified period is determined and determined. It is configured to determine whether or not the kinsoku level is the specified timing based on the elapsed time T. Then, if the determined prohibition level is specified, the process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the process of determining the effect mode of the look-ahead effect are skipped, and the determined prohibition level is specified. If the timing is not set, the process of determining whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed and the process of determining the effect mode of the look-ahead effect can be executed.

With this configuration, it is not necessary to execute in advance the process of determining the effect mode of the look-ahead effect that may not be executed. Therefore, the control process (various effect contents) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 The processing load of (processing for determining) can be reduced.

When this look-ahead effect execution decision process 6 (S2376) is executed, first, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, information for showing the fluctuation pattern, special The information corresponding to the counter value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (information for indicating the number of reserved balls)) is read (S2401), and then based on the processing of S2401. The information corresponding to the prize information command received before the prize information command received this time, that is, the information corresponding to the prize information command in which the special symbol change is executed before the prize information command received this time is a big hit. It is extracted whether or not the information indicating the winning is included (S2402).

That is, in the process of S2402, there is a possibility that the jackpot game is executed before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command that is the target of the pre-reading effect execution determination process 6 (S2376) is executed. Information (look-ahead jackpot information) that is referred to when determining whether or not is extracted.

Then, when the processing of S2402 is completed, the current prohibition level (no prohibition, prohibition) is next based on the contents (various information) extracted by the processing of S2401 and S2402 and the look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb. Levels 1 to 5 (pre-reading prohibited) are determined (S2471), the current prohibition level is specified by referring to the effect switching 6 table 223fa (S2472), and the prohibition level determined by the processing of S2471 is the current prohibition level. It is possible to determine whether it is specified as a prohibition level (S2473), and if it is determined that it is specified (S2473), execute a look-ahead effect for the special figure hold corresponding to the winning information command received this time. Since it is in an impossible (difficult) state, the process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect (S2475) and the process of determining the effect mode of the look-ahead effect (S2476 to S2479) are skipped, and this process is performed as it is. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2473, if it is determined that the prohibition level determined in the processing of S2471 is not defined as the current prohibition level (S2473: No), a special figure corresponding to the winning information command received this time is provided. It is determined whether to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold (S2474), and if it is determined not to execute the look-ahead effect (S2474: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Further, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, that is, when it is determined that the received winning information command contains information for executing the look-ahead effect (S2474: Yes), the look-ahead effect to be executed this time is determined. , It is determined whether it is a look-ahead effect (a look-ahead effect using a plurality of variable effects) using a variable effect (a variable effect executed in response to a special symbol variation) (S2475), and a look-ahead effect using the variable effect. When it is determined that (S2475: Yes), the continuous advance notice 223t is set to on (S2476), the content of the determined look-ahead effect is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2478), and the target of the look-ahead effect is set. The number of times (number of fluctuations) up to the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) corresponding to the winning information is set in the continuous advance notice counter 223u (S2479), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2475, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not executed (the hold look-ahead effect is executed) in the variable effect (S2475; No), a display command for changing the display mode of the target reserved symbol Is set, and this process ends.

Here, the production mode of the pre-reading effect described above will be described. Specifically, as a look-ahead effect using the effect period of the variation effect corresponding to three consecutive special symbol fluctuations, the look-ahead effect was executed in the first variation effect (first variation effect). (For example, a display mode that displays a number that is counted down each time a new fluctuation effect (special symbol variation) is executed, or a display mode that displays a number that is counted down each time a new variation effect (special symbol variation) is executed. A display mode for displaying a variable display mode in which the color is variable, and a display mode for indicating to the player that the look-ahead effect is in progress (a display mode in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a so-called chance eye) are displayed. Then, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the look-ahead effect has been executed. Then, in the variable effect (second variable effect) to be executed next, the look-ahead display mode for indicating that the look-ahead effect has been executed is variably displayed or continuously displayed to continue the look-ahead effect. Is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Finally, in the final variation effect (third variation effect), it is confirmed that this variation effect is the change effect (special symbol variation that is an element that determines the effect content of the look-ahead effect) that is the target of the look-ahead effect. A look-ahead effect for displaying the look-ahead result display mode for showing is executed.

In this way, by executing the look-ahead effect using the variable effect, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the look-ahead effect will continue, and the effect result for each variable effect executed during the look-ahead effect. Is displayed, the player expects that when the effect result of the variable effect is displayed, the variable effect this time is a variable effect indicating the look-ahead result, and the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a big hit. At the same time, it can be expected that the look-ahead effect will continue, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The timing of displaying the display mode for notifying the player that the variable effect is being performed in the look-ahead effect in an easy-to-understand manner may be the start timing or the end timing of the target variable effect. That is, any timing can be used as long as the player can be made aware that the variable effect is being performed in the look-ahead effect between the start of the variable effect and the start of the next variable effect. ..

Further, as the period for displaying the display mode for informing the player that the pre-reading effect is a variable effect in an easy-to-understand manner, all the periods during which the pre-reading effect is executed may be set, or a specific timing may be set. (For example, the timing at which the third symbol starts the fluctuation or the timing at which the fluctuation is stopped) may be displayed. Further, it may be configured to be displayed so as to straddle a plurality of variable effects.

In this way, by changing the timing and display period for displaying the display mode for informing the player that the pre-reading effect is a variable effect in an easy-to-understand manner, the pre-reading effect is started for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the effect and the variable effect that the look-ahead effect has ended, and it is possible to provide an unexpected effect, for example, a look-ahead effect that is actually continuing while making the person think that the look-ahead effect has ended. It will be possible. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, in the look-ahead effect using the variable effect, the larger the number of variable effects (the number of special symbol changes) that is the target of the look-ahead effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. ing. With this configuration, the player pays attention to the number of variable effects (number of special symbol fluctuations) executed during the look-ahead effect, so that the variable effect in which the look-ahead effect is started for the player In addition, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game by making it difficult to grasp the variable effect for which the look-ahead effect has been completed.

On the other hand, as the look-ahead effect that is executed without using the variable effect, the hold look-ahead effect (see FIG. 86) using the hold symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. As shown in FIG. 86, this hold look-ahead effect is held in a state in which the player is informed of the hold symbol (special symbol change) that is the target of the look-ahead effect (the effect result of the look-ahead effect is displayed) in an easy-to-understand manner. By changing the display mode of the symbol, an effect of increasing the expectation that the effect result of the look-ahead effect is a big hit is executed. That is, in the pre-reading effect using the above-mentioned variable effect, the pre-reading effect is continued every time the variable effect is completed by making it difficult for the player to understand which reserved symbol (special symbol variation) is the target of the pre-reading effect. While the effect of the hold look-ahead effect was enhanced, the display mode of the hold symbol was a big hit before the special symbol change corresponding to the hold symbol that was the target of the look-ahead effect was executed. The effect of the effect is enhanced by expecting the display to be displayed in a display mode in which the expectation of winning is high.

In this way, by configuring so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by different factors depending on the mode of the pre-reading effect to be executed, the effect to be executed becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. It can be suppressed. Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the look-ahead effect of different modes as described above, information on the mode of the look-ahead effect executed in the past (execution count, execution content, effect result (h / wrong determination result)). May be configured to provide a storage means that can be temporarily stored and determine the mode of the look-ahead effect to be newly executed based on the information stored in the storage means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the mode of the look-ahead effect from being biased and the content of the effect to be executed becoming monotonous.

Next, the processing content of the winning command receiving process 6 (S2280) will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the winning command receiving process 6 (S2280). As shown in FIG. 207, the winning command receiving process 6 (S2280) in the present embodiment is the pre-reading effect execution determination process 6 with respect to the winning command receiving process (see S2210 in FIG. 147) of the first embodiment described above. (See S2276 in FIG. 206) is different in that it is configured to be executable.

When the winning command receiving process 6 (S2280) is executed, first, the same processing of S2501 to S2506 as the winning command receiving process of the first embodiment described above (see S2210 in FIG. 147) is executed, and then the look-ahead effect is produced. The process of execution decision process 6 (S2509 (S2376)) is executed, and this process is terminated.

The process related to S251 to S2515 executed in the winning command receiving process (see S2210 in FIG. 147) of the first embodiment described above is the pre-reading effect execution determination process 6 (FIG. 206) in the sixth embodiment. Since it is configured to be executed in (see S2376), it is omitted in this figure. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306 in FIG. 146) can be executed based on the discrimination results at the two timings, and the sixth embodiment also has the same two timings. The look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376 in FIG. 206) is configured to be executable based on the determination result in the above, but the processing content on the side where the execution timing (trigger required for execution) is the same. (Detailed description of the processing content shown in FIG. 145) is omitted.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 216. The seventh embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the content of the pseudo-variation effect (see FIG. 15A) executed in the high-speed variation mode is different, and other than that. Are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, that is, by switching the type of the fluctuation pattern table referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation of the fluctuation time is relatively short. When the high-speed fluctuation pattern table, which makes it easy to select a pattern, is referred to, if the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. Despite this, special symbol fluctuations may be executed in fluctuation patterns other than high-speed fluctuations, and in order to solve the problem that the player feels uncomfortable, the high-speed fluctuation mode is supported. In addition to the high-speed fluctuation pattern table being set, the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set on the condition that the fluctuation pattern actually determined is high-speed fluctuation.

That is, when the special symbol fluctuation actually fluctuates at high speed, the player is configured to be notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, and the content notified to the player matches the actual game content. It was configured so that the player could be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the state where the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation is determined by referring to the high-speed fluctuation pattern table, the deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is determined as a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation (variation time 1.5 seconds). In that case, it is configured to display the characters "Preparing for high-speed fluctuation" to notify the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode is about to arrive without notifying that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. (See FIG. 94 (b)). That is, internally, it is configured to delay the timing of notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, even though the game state has shifted to the gaming state in which the high-speed fluctuation pattern table is referenced. .. Then, until the fluctuation pattern of the high-speed fluctuation (variation time 1.5 seconds) is determined, the notification timing for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set is delayed.

Further, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is determined as a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation (variation time 1.5 seconds), a notification that the high-speed fluctuation mode is set as described above is notified. If the process of delaying the timing is executed, the jackpot game will be started without letting the player know that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set even though the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. , As a notification mode for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, a notification mode that can give a privilege to the player (setting suggestion mode, value-added production video that cannot be seen elsewhere, etc. ) Can be set in the pachinko machine 10, but the player loses the opportunity to acquire the privilege by winning the jackpot even though the privilege can be acquired, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the first embodiment described above, the result of the special symbol lottery executed immediately after the high-speed fluctuation mode is set is the jackpot winning, and the fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation (for example, the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of 12 seconds). ) Is determined, a notification mode is set to indicate that the high-speed fluctuation mode is set at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation (12-second fluctuation) is started, and during the 12-second fluctuation period, a notification mode is set. It was configured to execute a pseudo-variation effect (see FIG. 94). That is, during one special symbol change period, it is possible to execute a variation effect as if a plurality of special symbol changes were executed.

Here, in the pseudo-variation effect (12 seconds) executed in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), the pseudo-displacement variation effect of 1.5 seconds is performed four times for 6 seconds as the variation effect. It is configured to execute the pseudo-variation effect in which the pseudo-hit variation effect of 1 is executed once, and after the player is executed the special figure variation (off variation) of 1.5 seconds four times, 6 It was possible to make it seem that the special symbol fluctuation (hit fluctuation) of seconds was executed once, but in reality, it fluctuates multiple times (5 times in total) during one special symbol fluctuation period. Since only the effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), it is understood that the display number of the reserved symbols for indicating the number of special figure reservations does not change, and the player is executed the pseudo-variable effect. There was a problem that it would be done.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when the pseudo-variation effect is executed as the variation effect, the display area of the reserved symbol for indicating the number of special figure reservations is switched, and the reserved symbol before the switching is displayed. It is configured to display a pseudo-holding symbol for production in the display area that was used. The pseudo-holding symbol is configured so that the number of displays is variable (decreased) each time the pseudo-variation effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect in which the pseudo-holding symbol is reduced by one each time the pseudo-variation effect is executed, and the player is given a pseudo-variation effect during the execution. It can be difficult to tell if there is one.

Further, since the actual number of reserved special figures is displayed in another display area, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the actual number of reserved special figures is suddenly not displayed. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of pseudo-holding symbols displayed decreases due to the execution of the pseudo-variation effect and a vacancy occurs in the display area for displaying the quasi-holding symbol, the vacant display area is used for setting. It is configured so that the suggestion effect can be executed. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, when a winning information command containing the winning information of a new special symbol is received while the empty display area is generated, a new pseudo-holding symbol is displayed in the empty display area. It is configured to execute the setting suggestion effect using the display mode of the new pseudo-holding symbol.

That is, when a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 during the period in which the display number of the pseudo-holding symbol is changed according to the number of executions of the pseudo variation effect. Is configured to perform an effect that increases the number of pseudo-holding symbols displayed. By configuring in this way, the variable situation of the pseudo-effect executed by using the pseudo-variable effect and the pseudo-holding symbol becomes the variable situation of the effect executed by using the actual variable effect and the reserved symbol. It is possible to make it easy to approximate, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the variation effect being executed is a pseudo variation effect.

In addition, a pseudo-variation effect is executed while the number of special figure reservations has reached the upper limit, and a prize information command that includes prize information of a new special symbol when a vacant display area is generated during the pseudo-variation effect. Is received, that is, if the prize information command received this time is prize information (overflow prize information) that cannot be stored as a new special figure hold, the prize information that can be stored as a new special figure hold ( It is configured so that the display mode corresponding to the mode (strong suggestion mode) in which the player can easily predict the set value is more easily displayed than in the case of the normal winning information).

With this configuration, even if the actual number of reserved special figures has reached the upper limit, the player willingly move to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is possible to perform a game in which the ball is inserted, and the operation of the game can be improved.

<About the production contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 7th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 208 and 209, as a characteristic effect content among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-variation effect executed in the high-speed fluctuation mode I will explain the contents of the production. The first implementation described above describes the notification mode for notifying that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, the conditions under which the pseudo-variation effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode, and the basic effect contents in the pseudo-variation effect. Since it is the same as the form, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 208A, the display contents during the first pseudo-variation effect (1.5-second off pseudo-variation) among the pseudo-variation effects executed in the high-speed fluctuation mode will be described. FIG. 208 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first pseudo-variation effect among the pseudo-variation effects executed in the high-speed fluctuation mode. As shown in FIG. 208 (a), the display screen displayed during the present effect is relative to the display screen (see FIG. 94 (a)) displayed during the pseudo-variation effect according to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the display content of the sub display area Ds is changed and the display content of a part of the main display area Dm is changed, and the other points are the same. The same display contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 208 (a), when the pseudo-variation effect is executed, the pseudo-hold symbol gm0 for the effect is replaced with the hold symbol display for indicating the number of special figure reservations displayed in the sub-display area Ds. ~ Gm4 is displayed. Then, as a guidance mode indicating that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, the comment "speed UP" is displayed in a mode in which the character J0 is emitting.

Further, a display area HR2 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and a value of "4" is displayed as a hold number display mode for indicating an actual special figure hold number. That is, the figure shown in FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which the number of special figures reserved is four.

Then, when the second pseudo-variation effect (1.5-second deviation) is executed from the state shown in FIG. 208 (a) (the state in which the first pseudo-variation effect is completed), FIG. 208 (b) The display screen shown in is displayed. FIG. 208 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second pseudo-variation effect among the pseudo-variation effects executed in the high-speed fluctuation mode.

As shown in FIG. 208 (b), when a new (second) pseudo-variation effect is executed, the pseudo-holding symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is displayed as a slide. As a result, the first pseudo-holding symbol gm0 was displayed on the pedestal m0 for the running symbol during the execution of the first pseudo-variation effect, but it corresponds to the new (second) pseudo-variation effect. The second pseudo-holding symbol gm1 is displayed on the pedestal m0 for the executing symbol. Then, the third pseudo-holding symbol gm2 to the fifth pseudo-holding symbol gm4 are also slide-displayed in order, and an empty display area is generated in the pedestal m4 for the fourth pseudo-holding symbol.

Then, a flag icon with the characters "special symbol display zone" is displayed as a notification mode to indicate that the empty display area generated in the fourth reserved symbol pedestal m4 becomes the execution area of the setting suggestion effect. A display mode in which the character J0 issues a comment of "zone appearance" is displayed. Since the detailed effect content regarding the special symbol display zone is the same as that of the third embodiment (see FIG. 186) described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the state shown in FIG. 208 (b) is a state in which the special symbol fluctuation during execution is continuously fluctuating in the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), it is formed in the main display area Dm. The number of special figure reservations displayed in the display area HR2 remains "4".

In the state shown in FIG. 208 (b), when the player enters the ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a new pseudo-holding symbol is suggested to be set in the special symbol display zone. It is displayed in a display mode including the mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the contents of the reserved symbol display in the high-speed fluctuation mode will be described. FIG. 209 (a) is a diagram showing a transition status of the game mode (game status) of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 209 (b) is a diagram showing a transition status of the number of special symbol fluctuations. (C) is a diagram showing an outline of the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 209 (d) is a transition of the number of reserved balls (special symbol reserved number) of the special symbol. FIG. 209 (e) is a diagram showing the transition status of the display mode of the small display area (hold display area) Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 209 (f) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display area (switching display area) HR2 of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Since the flow of shifting from the probability variation mode to the high-speed variation mode is the same as that of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 95), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Until the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, as shown in FIG. 209 (e), the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1. Then, even when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, if the determined special figure fluctuation time is 1.5 seconds (high-speed fluctuation), the number corresponding to the special figure hold number is held in the hold display area Ds1. The symbol is continuously displayed (the special symbol hold display period is set).

On the other hand, when the non-high-speed fluctuation (12-second jackpot fluctuation in the figure) is set while the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, the pseudo-variation effect is executed and the pseudo-hold symbol is set in the hold display area Ds1. Is displayed, and the number of reserved special figures is displayed in the switching display area HR2.

As shown in FIG. 209 (e), when the pseudo-holding symbol is displayed, the display number is subtracted and displayed each time the pseudo-variation effect is executed. Since the pseudo-variation effect is executed five times during the variation period of the 82nd special symbol variation (12-second jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. 209 (d), the number of special symbols reserved during the pseudo-variation effect. Is not displayed as a subtraction.

In this state, when a new prize (starting prize of the special figure) occurs, the number of special figure reservations is additionally displayed and the pseudo-holding symbol is also additionally displayed. Then, when the pseudo-holding symbol is additionally displayed, a new pseudo-holding symbol is displayed in the special symbol display zone shown in FIG. 208 (b), so that the setting suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 209, in the present embodiment, the special figure hold or pseudo hold symbol is always displayed in the hold display area Ds1. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable when displaying the pseudo-holding symbol. Further, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand that the pseudo-variation effect is being executed, the hold display area Ds1 is hidden when the pseudo-variation effect is executed (whether or not the special figure hold number is subtracted and displayed). In order to make it difficult to discriminate, the special figure reserved symbol is not displayed), which does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209 (e), as the initial display mode when the pseudo-holding symbol is displayed, the number of special figure holdings displayed in the immediately preceding hold display area Ds1 is supported. It is configured to set the display mode. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort when the symbol to be displayed is switched.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment will be described. The seventh embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the third embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed, and is otherwise the same. .. The detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 210 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 210, the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 187 (b)). ), The pseudo-hold display in-display flag 223ga and the pseudo free area storage area 223gb are newly provided, and are the same except for the above. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pseudo-holding display in-display flag 223ga is a flag for indicating that the pseudo-holding symbol gm is displayed in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-variation effect, and is set to on when displaying the pseudo-holding symbol gm. Then, it is referred to when it is determined whether or not the pseudo effect using the pseudo-hold symbol gm is executed, and indicates that the special symbol change is stopped and displayed while the pseudo-hold display in-display flag 223ga is set to ON. Set to off when a stop command is received.

In the pseudo free area storage area 223 gb, information indicating that the pseudo hold symbol gm slides (shifts) and a free display area is generated while the pseudo effect using the pseudo hold symbol gm is being executed is stored. The number of empty display areas, that is, the number in which the pseudo-reserved symbol gm can be newly displayed is stored.

The information stored in the pseudo free area storage area 223 gb is newly added when a new free display area occurs, that is, when the pseudo hold symbol gm slides (shifts) in response to the execution of the pseudo variation effect. It is updated according to the number of free display areas generated in, and is updated when a new pseudo-pending symbol is displayed.

<Regarding the content of control processing in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the content of the control process in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 216. In the seventh embodiment, a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from that of the third embodiment described above, and the other control process contents are the same. .. The content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is the winning command in place of the winning command receiving process 3 (see S2260 in FIG. 191) with respect to the third embodiment described above. The reception process 7 (see S22690 in FIG. 211) is replaced with the stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 150), and the stop process 7 (see S2294 in FIG. 212) is replaced with the time saving / probability variation effect setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 154). Instead of the time saving / probability variation effect setting process 7 (see S3192 in FIG. 214), the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 194) is replaced with the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (see S2190 in FIG. 215). , It differs in that it is executed, and otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the processing content of the winning command receiving process 7 (S2290) will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the winning command receiving process 7 (S2290). When the winning command receiving process 7 (S2290) determines that the period effect in-period flag 223p is set to ON for the winning command receiving process 3 (see S2260 of FIG. 191) of the third embodiment described above. (S2502: Yes) is different in that the content of the process executed is different, and is the same except for the difference. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning command reception process 7 (S2290) is executed, first, the winning information indicated by the received command is stored (set) in the winning information storage area 223f (S2501), and whether the period production flag 223p is on or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the SP time is currently being produced (S2502). Then, when it is determined that the flag 223p during the period production is not set on (set to off) (S2502: No), the winning command receiving process 3 of the third embodiment described above (S2260 in FIG. 191) is performed. The same processes of S2503 to S2512 and S2560 as in (see) are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2502, when it is determined that the period production flag 223p is on (S2502: Yes), then it is determined whether the current high-speed fluctuation is in progress (S2591), and the high-speed fluctuation is in progress. If it is determined (S2591: Yes), the high-speed display winning effect setting process for setting the effect mode when the winning command is received during the high-speed fluctuation is executed (S2592), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2591 that the current state is not during high-speed fluctuation (S2591: No), the process of S2592 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the winning effect setting process (S2592) during high-speed display will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the winning effect setting process (S2592) during high-speed display. This high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592) issues a winning command during high-speed fluctuation (during special symbol fluctuation in a state where the high-speed fluctuation mode is set) in the winning command receiving process 7 (see S2290 in FIG. 211). This is the process that is executed when it is determined that the message has been received.

In this high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592), a process for setting an effect for displaying a pseudo-holding symbol in a pseudo-empty area is executed. Here, when displaying a normal hold symbol, the received hold is performed in the hold ball number command process (see S2208 in FIG. 145) that is executed when the hold ball number command output from the main control device 110 is received. The number of reserved balls included in the number of balls command is extracted, and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is updated to the extracted number of reserved balls. (S2301 in FIG. 145), the process of displaying the reserved symbol in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is executed so as to correspond to the updated value, but the number of special symbol reserved balls increases in the pseudo reserved symbol. The number displayed not only when the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, but also when the number of special figure reserved balls does not increase (when the overflow prize is won). Is configured to be able to increase, so that it is executed when a winning information command output from the main control device 110 is received.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the configuration, and the display number of the pseudo-holding symbol may be increased only when the hold ball number command is received, as in the normal hold symbol display, or the game. The number of pseudo-holding symbols displayed may be increased when a person executes a specific operation on the frame button 22. That is, since the pseudo-holding symbol is not a display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but a display mode in which the pseudo-holding symbol is subtracted according to the number of executions of the pseudo-variation effect, each time a new pseudo-variation effect is executed. The number of displays may be variable (subtracted), and the number of displays may be variable (added) according to other requirements.

When the high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo hold display flag 223ga is set to ON (S4501), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4501). S4501: Yes), then, the winning information command received this time can be a special figure winning, that is, a special symbol lottery execution trigger (first entry opening 64, second entry opening 640, right second). It is determined whether the command is a winning information command set based on the entry of the ball into the entry opening 640r (S4502), and if it is determined that the special figure is a winning (S4502: Yes), the pseudo free area is stored. Based on the information stored in the area 223 gb, it is determined whether or not there is a pseudo free area (S4503).

In the processing of S4503, if it is determined that there is a pseudo free area (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure winning that is received this time is an overflow winning (S4504), and if it is determined that there is an overflow winning (S4504). S4504: Yes), as a setting suggestion effect to be executed for the pseudo free area, a display mode corresponding to a suggestion mode (high suggestion mode) in which the player can easily predict the set value is determined (S4505), and then the processing of S4505 is performed. The information of the pseudo free area stored in the pseudo free area storage area 223 gb is updated (S4507) in correspondence with the pseudo free area in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4504, when it is determined that the prize is not an overflow prize (S4504: No), it is difficult for the player to predict the set value as the setting suggestion effect to be executed for the pseudo free area (low suggestion mode). (S4506), and then the information of the pseudo free area stored in the pseudo free area storage area 223 gb corresponding to the pseudo free area in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the process of S4505. Is updated (S4507), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing content of the stop processing 7 (S2294) will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the stop processing 7 (S2294). This stop process 7 (S2294) differs from the above-mentioned stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 150) in that a process when the pseudo hold display flag 223ga is set to ON is added, and other than that. Are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in FIG. 213, for convenience of explanation, the processes S2801 to S2804 executed in the stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 150) are shown in place of the processes in S2894, but the contents of the processes actually executed are shown. They are the same, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop process 7 (S2294) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo hold display flag 223ga is set to ON (S2891), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S2891: Yes). , The pseudo hold display flag 223ga is set to off (S2892), and the information stored in the pseudo free area storage area 223gb is cleared (erased) (S2893). After that, the same SP time period 2805 to S2813 as the above-mentioned stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 150) is executed, other processes are executed (S2894), and the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2814). ), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2891 that the pseudo hold display flag 223ga is not set to ON (S2891: No), the processes of S2892 and S2893 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2805.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the processing content of the time saving / probability variation effect setting process 7 (S3192) will be described. FIG. 214 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the time saving / probability variation effect setting process 7 (S3192). In the time saving / probability variation effect setting process 7 (S3192), an effect mode corresponding to the pseudo variation effect is determined with respect to the time reduction / probability variation effect setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 154) of the first embodiment described above. In this case, the difference is that a process for determining the effect mode for displaying the pseudo-holding symbol is added, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving / probability variation effect setting process 7 (S3192) is executed, the same processing of S3201 to S3206 as the time saving / probability variation effect setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 154) of the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, when the processing of S3206 is completed, that is, for a fluctuation pattern (non-high-speed fluctuation pattern) having a fluctuation time of 12 seconds in the high-speed fluctuation mode, a processing for determining an effect mode that is a pseudo-variation effect (S3206). Next, the effect mode for displaying the pseudo-holding symbol is determined (S3291), the pseudo-holding display flag 223ga is set to ON (S3292), and the process proceeds to S3205.

In the process of S3291, the display area of the reserved symbol for showing the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is switched to the display area dedicated during the pseudo-variation effect (see the display area HR2 of FIG. 208 (a)), and the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed. An effect mode for switching to a display mode dedicated to the pseudo-variation effect (display mode indicated by a number displayed in the display area HR2 of FIG. 208 (a)) and a display area in which the reserved symbol before switching is displayed ( The effect mode for displaying the pseudo-holding symbol in the sub-display area Ds) of FIG. 208 (a) is determined. In this way, by configuring so that the effect mode of the pseudo-holding symbol display is also determined in accordance with the process of determining the effect mode of the pseudo-variation effect, the execution timing of the pseudo-variation effect and the execution timing of the pseudo-hold symbol display are determined. And, can be synchronized, so that it is possible to perform an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

When the pseudo-variable effect and the effect using the pseudo-holding symbol are executed, the background image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the dedicated background image, and the pseudo-holding symbol is displayed. It is preferable that the display mode of the above is different from the display mode of the normal reserved symbol, and the display mode is configured to correspond to the dedicated background image.

Next, the processing content of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190) will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190). The liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190) is in a state in which the pseudo hold display in-progress flag 223ga is set to ON for the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 194) of the third embodiment described above. It differs in that the processing executed in is added, and is the same except for that. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190) is executed, first, the same processes as the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 194) of the third embodiment described above are executed, and then the processes S4301 to S4312 are executed. , It is determined whether the pseudo-holding display flag 223ga is set to ON (S4391), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4391; Yes), the effect content in the state where the pseudo-holding symbol is displayed. The pseudo hold effect setting process for determining the above is executed (S4392), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4391, if it is determined that the pseudo-hold display in-flag 223ga is not set to ON (S4391: No), the process of S4392 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the processing content of the pseudo hold effect setting process (S4392) executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190 of FIG. 215) will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart for showing the processing content of the pseudo hold effect setting process (S4392). In this pseudo-hold effect setting process (S4392), a process for switching the effect mode of various effects being executed is executed according to the elapsed time.

When the pseudo-hold effect setting process (S4392) is executed, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo-variation (pseudo-variation effect) (S4601), and if it is determined that it is the start timing (S4602), a new pseudo is determined. Since it is the timing when the variation effect is executed, the slide display mode for sliding movement (shifting) the display position of the pseudo-holding symbol is determined (S4602) in accordance with the execution of the pseudo variation (pseudo variation effect), and the pseudo variation effect is executed. If it is determined whether there is a pseudo free display area in the reserved symbol display area (S4603) and if it is determined that there is a pseudo free display area (S4603: Yes), it is simulated according to the contents of the pseudo free area after the slide movement. The information stored in the free area storage area 223 gb is updated (S4604), and this process ends. Further, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the pseudo variation (pseudo variation effect) (S4601: No), or when it is determined in the process of S4603 that the pseudo free area does not exist (S4603: No). Terminates this process as it is.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-holding symbol whose display number is subtracted corresponding to the execution of the pseudo-variation effect is displayed by switching to the holding symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, in the case where the pseudo-variation effect is executed a plurality of times during one special symbol change period, one pseudo-variation is performed for one special symbol variation. It is possible to make the player think that the variable effect is being executed.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-held symbol is configured to be displayed by using the display area in which the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed, and the pseudo-variation effect is executed. During the period of time, the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in another display area. As a result, the pseudo-holding symbol can be displayed to the player without any discomfort.

Further, during the pseudo-variation effect, the pseudo-holding symbol is configured to be displayed in a display mode that is easier for the player to grasp than the holding symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the increase / decrease in the number of pseudo-held symbols displayed, rather than the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied with respect to the pseudo empty display area generated when the number of pseudo-holding symbols displayed decreases (when the slide is moved) due to the execution of the pseudo-variation effect (when the pseudo-holding symbol is displayed). It is configured to display a new pseudo-holding symbol when the ball enters the entry slot that triggers the execution of the special symbol lottery). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo-holding symbol is a holding symbol for indicating the number of holdings of the special symbol.

Further, when the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed while the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, that is, the pseudo free area is displayed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit. In this case, the ball is configured to be able to display a new pseudo-holding symbol based on the entry (overflow winning) to the entry opening that triggers the execution of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo-holding symbol is a holding symbol for indicating the number of holdings of the special symbol.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect can be executed by using the display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol displayed in the pseudo-free area. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-variation effect is as if it were a special symbol variation effect by reducing the number of displayed symbols (pseudo-hold symbol) each time the pseudo-variation effect is executed. It was configured to make it easier for the player to think as if it were there, but in order to prevent the player from easily grasping that the pseudo-variation effect is being executed, other configurations may be used. Well, for example, by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol for showing the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the number of displayed reserved symbols for showing the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is executed when the pseudo-variation effect is executed. In this case, for example, when the pseudo-variation effect is executed while four reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol are displayed, four are used. By changing the display mode of the reserved symbol of the eye to a display mode that is more difficult for the player to grasp than usual, it is configured to execute an effect that makes the player think that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is three. Is also good.

Here, as a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp, for example, by making the display enlargement ratio of the fourth reserved symbol smaller than the display enlargement ratio of the other reserved symbols, the display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp is Or, by making the transparency of the 4th reserved symbol higher than the transparency of the other reserved symbols, the display mode is difficult for the player to grasp, or the display color of the 4th reserved symbol is changed to the other reserved symbols. It is conceivable that the display mode may be difficult for the player to grasp by making the color closer to the color of the background image than the display color of. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to think that the pseudo-variation effect is a special symbol variation effect without using the pseudo-holding symbol, so that the pseudo-variation effect can be given to the player. It is possible to reduce the processing load for executing without discomfort and the production data capacity.

In the present embodiment, a reserved symbol (pseudo-reserved symbol) is used as a display target whose display number changes according to the execution of the pseudo-variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other display modes can be used. Is also good. Further, in the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-holding symbol is continuously displayed while the pseudo-variation effect is being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the pseudo-variation effect is executed. It suffices to execute an effect of reducing the number of display modes of the target display mode (pseudo-holding symbol) according to the timing, and the target display mode is temporarily hidden after the number of displays is reduced. It may be configured as.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of pseudo-holding symbols displayed when the pseudo-variation effect is executed is configured to be displayed as the number of display corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, so that the special symbol is displayed. It is configured to switch from the hold symbol indicating the number of reserved balls to the pseudo hold symbol without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pseudo hold is based on the number of executions of the pseudo fluctuation effect. The initial number of symbols to be displayed may be determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo empty display area is formed, it is configured to be a special symbol display zone in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed only within the range of the pseudo empty display area. Without limitation, a predetermined range or the entire range of the display area behind the display area in which the pseudo free area is formed may be used as the special symbol display zone.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the effect content (variable content of the number of displays) of the pseudo-holding symbol in the case of executing the pseudo-variation effect a plurality of times using the entire period of one special symbol variation has been described. The technical idea used in the seventh embodiment may be used for other techniques, for example, when executing three or more pseudo-variation effects using two or more consecutive variation periods of special symbol variation. Various technical ideas described in the seventh embodiment may be applied.

Further, when the pseudo-variation effect is executed once for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, the number of reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is reduced during the pseudo-variation effect, so that the variation during execution is executed. As a technical idea for suppressing the player from easily grasping that the effect is a pseudo-variable effect, the technical idea of the seventh embodiment described above, that is, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol Instead of, a technique may be used in which a pseudo-holding symbol is displayed and the number of the pseudo-holding symbols displayed is variable (decreased) based on the number of executions of the pseudo-variation effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping that the variable effect being executed is a pseudo variable effect.

<About the eighth embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 217. The eighth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the regulation content during the setting change is different and the display content is also different, and the other aspects are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, the boot process of the display control device 114 is being executed while the process of changing the set value of the game machine is being executed, that is, in the state where the start-up process of the main control device 110 is not completed. Since the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is not completed regardless of the progress of the above, the operation of the operation means such as the frame button 22 is set to be invalid. On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are provided as the operation means, and even during the setting change operation, the operation for one of the operation means (second frame button 22b) is performed. It differs in that it is configured so that it can be effectively identified.

Specifically, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 140), it waits for the main control device 110 to output a command (initialization command) indicating that the setting change operation is completed. The first operation valid setting process for effectively setting the operation of the second frame button 22b is executed in the stage prior to the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142). In this first operation valid setting process, the setting process for effectively determining the operation of only a part of the plurality of operating means included in the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

Then, in the process executed after the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142), the second operation valid setting process that enables the operation to all the operation means is configured to be executable.

Here, the operating means for which the operation is effectively determined in the first operation valid setting process is an operating means capable of executing an operation other than the operation of writing information to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, that is, some kind of operation means. To perform an operation (change operation) for changing some information (for example, changing the volume or brightness), not an operation means for determining change information (for example, information indicating the result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment). (Frame button 22b) corresponds to.

That is, even during the setting change operation, the operation for changing the volume and brightness is effectively determined, but the operation for determining the changed volume and brightness (writing to the storage area of RAM 223) (determination). The operation means (frame button 22a) for performing the operation) is configured to be effective after the setting change operation is completed. With this configuration, even during the setting change operation, it is possible to execute the change operation for changing the information, so that it is possible to execute a plurality of operations in duplicate, and the work can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

Here, in the state where the setting change operation is being executed, there are cases where the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed and cases where it is not completed, and when the boot process is not completed, the first Since the information related to the change operation is not displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, there is a problem that it is difficult for the operator to grasp how much the change operation is executed when the change operation is executed. Further, even when the boot process is completed, the operator is facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting change operation is being executed, and the third symbol Since it is difficult to visually recognize the display surface of the display device 81, it is difficult to grasp the content of the change operation by visually recognizing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the volume output from the voice output device 226 is changed according to the change operation during the setting change, so that the operator can easily grasp the operation degree of the change operation. There is. With this configuration, it is possible for the operator facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to grasp the content of the change operation by voice, so that a plurality of operations can be performed in duplicate. , Work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the environmental status notification is switched between the default environmental status (initial volume level) set in the initialized state and the environmental status changed by the change operation (changed volume level). (Audio output) is configured to be executable. As a result, compared to the case where only the environmental condition changed by the change operation (volume level after the change) is notified, the environmental condition after the change can be grasped relatively, so that the content of the change operation can be visually grasped. In a situation where it is difficult to grasp, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to grasp the content of the change operation.

Here, with reference to FIG. 217, the display contents displayed during the setting change operation in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 217 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen during setting change, and FIG. 217 (b) schematically shows a display screen when the volume level is changed during setting change. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the setting change operation is executed in the state where the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as "setting is being changed". The characters are displayed, and in the display area HR31, information indicating an operating means that can be operated by the operator and an operating means that cannot be operated in the current situation is displayed. In the figure shown in FIG. 217 (a), information indicating that the frame button 22b (indicated by a triangle mark in the figure) is valid and the frame button 22a (indicated by a circle mark in the figure) is invalid is displayed. ing. As a result, it is possible to inform the operating means that can be operated at the present time in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, in the display area HR30, a display mode indicating the volume level is displayed as the default environmental information set in the initial state, and in the figure, the volume level of the second stage out of the three levels of volume is the default. A display mode indicating that the information is set as environmental information is displayed. This volume level indicates that the magnitude of the volume output from the audio output device 226 can be changed by changing the stage, and when the volume level is raised, the volume output from the audio output device 226 is increased. growing. In FIG. 217 (a), the number filled with black indicates the volume level, and the state where all three are filled with black indicates the volume level 3 at which the maximum volume is output.

Further, during the setting change, the message "setting is being changed" is output from the voice output device 226 at the default volume level as a notification mode for notifying by voice that the current situation is being changed. It is configured as follows. As a result, for a worker who is located at a position where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized (for example, a worker who is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in order to execute a setting change operation). It is possible to inform the situation of the above in an easy-to-understand manner. Moreover, even if the setting change operation is performed illegally, the situation can be detected quickly.

In the present embodiment, since the operation to the frame button 22b is effectively determined during the setting change, the volume level can be changed even during the setting change. Therefore, the frame is displayed on the display screen. A display mode for notifying that the volume level can be changed by operating the button 22b is displayed.

The display contents shown in FIG. 217 (a) are all commands indicating the state output from the voice lamp control device 113 (for example, the start-up process is completed) in the state where the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed. The image data is stored as the default image (initial image) displayed when the command indicating that the command has been executed or the command indicating that the setting change process has been completed is not received. Since the description of this initial image is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the frame button 22b is operated in the state shown in FIG. 217 (a), as shown in FIG. 217 (b), the characters being adjusted are displayed and the volume level corresponding to the change operation ( A display mode indicating the volume level 3) is displayed in the display area HR30. Then, the voice output device 226 switches between the default volume level (volume level 2) and the changed volume level (volume level 3), and alternately outputs the message "setting is being changed". As a result, for a worker who is located at a position where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized (for example, a worker who is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in order to execute a setting change operation). It is possible to inform the situation of the above in an easy-to-understand manner. Moreover, even if the setting change operation is performed illegally, the situation can be detected quickly.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, even when the setting is being changed, that is, even when all the initialization processing (start-up processing) of the pachinko machine 10 is not completed, among the operating means By configuring some of the operating means to be effectively discriminable, it is possible to execute a plurality of operations in duplicate, and it is possible to improve work efficiency.

In the eighth embodiment, the operation invalid period is set to be different for a plurality of types of operation means while the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is being changed, but the timing for setting the operation invalid period is , Not only during the setting change of the pachinko machine 10, but also during the initialization process, or when the operator executes a specific operation while the initialization process of the pachinko machine 10 is completed, it is usually performed. It may be a period in which the game is switched to a set state different from the playable state, or a period in which the pachinko machine 10 causes an abnormality and the game is temporarily disabled. Further, in the normal playable state, the operation invalid period may be set for the period during which the effect (freeze effect) that makes the effect to be executed appear to have stopped in the middle is executed. , The time measured by the time measuring device 292 may be a period exceeding a specific time (for example, the closing time of the amusement park).

<About another example of setting suggestion production>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is made different according to the set period, and the setting suggestion effect is executed within each period. That is, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined at the execution frequency corresponding to the set period, and the determined setting suggestion effect is executed within the period.

On the other hand, in this alternative example, the period for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect and the period for actually executing the setting suggestion effect can be made different.

Specifically, it is established when a specific condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won or when the number of reach reaches a predetermined number (3 times)) in a specific period (for example, during the SP time period or a probability change state). When the condition to be performed) is satisfied, a display mode (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle lacking pieces) that can be an element indicating the setting suggestion effect is displayed as an execution right of the setting suggestion effect.

Next, additional information (for example, a puzzle piece) can be acquired in a state where the execution right of the setting suggestion effect is established. More specifically, the means for determining whether or not to acquire additional information based on the operation on the operating means, and the number of prize balls acquired in the period after the execution right is established are a predetermined number of units (for example, 1000). Provide acquisition means to acquire additional information when reaching (individual units).

Then, in the state where the execution right of the setting suggestion effect is established, every time additional information is acquired, it is added to the display mode that can be an element indicating the setting suggestion effect (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle lacking pieces). An effect in which a display mode (element) corresponding to information is added is executed. Then, when a sufficient amount of additional information is added, a display mode for suggesting the set value is formed (the setting suggestion effect is executed).

With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the player who has acquired the right to execute the setting suggestion effect within a specific period to continuously play the game until the setting suggestion effect is executed. Can improve the operation of.

When using the configuration of another example described above, it is advisable to set an upper limit on the period for holding the right to execute the setting suggestion effect. As a result, the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to execute the setting suggestion effect within the period in which the right to execute the setting suggestion effect is held.

In addition, when an upper limit is set for the period for holding the right to execute the setting suggestion effect, an extension condition for extending the upper limit period (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the reach effect of a specific mode is executed, or When it is determined that the extension condition is satisfied by configuring the condition that is satisfied when a specific operation is performed on the operation means and the condition that is satisfied when a jackpot of a specific jackpot type is won). , It is preferable to configure to execute the process of extending the upper limit period. By configuring in this way, the player is enthusiastically played a game in order to execute the setting suggestion effect within the period in which the right to execute the setting suggestion effect is held, and the upper limit period is extended. A game aimed at facilitating the execution of the suggestion effect can also be performed, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

In addition, if a special condition different from the extension condition (for example, a pending ream) is satisfied, the upper limit period may be abolished.

Further, when the upper limit period can be set, the remaining period up to the upper limit period may be notified. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, as a display mode that can be an element indicating a fixed suggestion effect (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle lacking pieces), it is preferable to set a display mode in which the setting can be gradually estimated each time additional information is added. .. As a result, the player can be made to predict the set value even in a state where all the additional information cannot be acquired.

<Definition of setting suggestion effect>
Next, another example of the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect used in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. Here, the setting suggestion effect is not only an effect intended to provide the player with information for indicating the set value, but also all the effect modes selected based on the information regarding the set value are set. It corresponds to the suggestion production.

In addition, the execution of the effect means not only displaying the display mode that the player can see, as described in each of the above-described embodiments, but also the mode that the player does not display the display mode that can be seen. It is included in the concept of execution of.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, an example of displaying a specific display mode as a setting suggestion effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of individually set display modes may be displayed in duplicate. Therefore, a mode in which the player is made to guess the set value is also included in the concept of the setting suggestion effect.

<First modification>
Next, a first modification relating to the process related to the operation on the operating means during the start-up process described in the first embodiment and the eighth embodiment will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation invalid period is set for the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) provided on the front side (see FIG. 81) of the pachinko machine 10. The operating means may be provided on the back side (see FIG. 83) of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the operating means (management operating means) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate (difficult), and the pachinko machine 10 is operated by the operator. It is good to use it as a management operation means that can set the environment.

Specifically, the volume level and brightness adjustment range that can be set by the player operating the operating means such as the frame button 22 can be limited by the operation of the management operating means operating means, or the player can control the operating means. It is preferable to configure the pachinko machine 10 to change the effect mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 so that the type of effect mode that can be selected by the custom selection is restricted by the operation of the management operation means operation means.

Then, the above-mentioned operating means and the management operating means are configured so that the operation invalid period during the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 can be set differently, and the management operating means is more invalid than the operating means. It is preferable to configure so that the period is short (the invalid period is not set).

<Second modification>
Next, a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 96 (b) of the first embodiment described above will be described with respect to the effect content during the round game executed during the jackpot game.

In the first embodiment described above, as an effect mode of the round effect executed during the round game, the number of rounds in which the number of acquired balls can reach a predetermined number unit (200 units) is specified, and the effect mode of the round effect is specified. As a result, the production mode of the round effect is determined based on the correspondence between the number of rounds executed and the number of acquired balls displayed.

On the other hand, in the second modification, a determination means for determining in which round of the jackpot game the promotion effect is to be executed is provided, and a storage means capable of storing the determined number of rounds is provided. Then, among the number of rounds specified by the specific means for specifying the number of rounds in which the number of acquired balls can reach a predetermined number unit (200 units), the promotion effect is performed by the number of rounds after the number of rounds stored in the storage means. Provide an execution means to execute.

With this configuration, the promotion effect can be executed in synchronization with the number of rounds in which the predetermined number acquisition effect that congratulates that the number of acquired balls has reached the predetermined number unit is executed.

Here, in the second modification, as the predetermined number acquisition effect, different effect modes (for example, different character types and different comment types (dialogs, etc.)) are made according to the number of acquired balls. When it is specified that the number of round games in which a predetermined number of acquisition effects are executed is to be executed, the effect mode is determined and the determined effect mode is supported. Generated moving image data or still image data, execute it as an effect during a round game, and when the number of acquired balls actually reaches a predetermined number, an image for indicating the predetermined number is additionally displayed. doing.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, if the setting of the effect mode of the predetermined number acquisition effect and the determination of the promotion effect are independently executed, the promotion effect is executed during the execution of the predetermined number acquisition effect. There was a risk that the production would be difficult for the player to understand.

More specifically, the effect mode used for the predetermined number acquisition effect is an effect mode that is executed and executed based on the moving image data or the still image data corresponding to the effect mode determined by the determining means. Since the corresponding voice data (speech, etc.) is also set, if the promotion effect is executed during the round game in which the predetermined number acquisition effect is executed, the effect of the predetermined number acquisition effect is significantly reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the second modification, the process for setting the effect mode of the predetermined number acquisition effect and the process for determining the promotion effect can be combined and executed, so that the player can execute the process. It is possible to perform an easy-to-understand effect.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a high-speed fluctuation mode that facilitates selection of a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time can be set based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. However, as a condition for shifting to this high-speed fluctuation mode. A number other than the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed may be provided, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result other than the jackpot winning, for example, the variable winning device 65a is temporarily opened although the jackpot has not been won. The high-speed fluctuation mode can be set based on the winning of the small hit to be executed, or the high-speed fluctuation mode can be set across the big hit game with a short big hit game period. A specific mode transition lottery may be configured to be executable separately from the lottery of symbols and ordinary symbols, and a high-speed fluctuation mode may be set when the mode transition lottery is won.

Further, the end condition for ending the high-speed fluctuation mode may be set by using the same elements as the various conditions used when setting the high-speed fluctuation mode. In this case, it is used when setting the high-speed fluctuation mode. It is advisable to configure the end conditions to be set by making the numerical values (parameters) of various conditions different. As a result, the setting condition and the end condition of the high-speed fluctuation mode can be set only by changing the values, so that the data capacity for storing the information related to the setting of the high-speed fluctuation mode can be reduced.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, it is configured to determine whether or not to set the high-speed fluctuation mode based on the content of the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) It may be configured to determine whether or not the high-speed fluctuation mode is set based on the content of (ordinary symbol fluctuation). In this case, for example, the normal symbol is given to the player, for example, during the normal symbol fluctuation in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time as the normal symbol fluctuation, or during the game per long normal symbol. It is determined whether or not the situation is such that the result of the lottery (normal symbol change) is watched, and the period during which the effect for making the player watch the result of the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol change) is executed or executed. For the period determined to be performed, even if the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol is executed in the high-speed fluctuation mode, the effect mode for notifying the fact may not be set.

In this way, the player should be made to pay more attention to the period during which the production of the content to be watched by the player is being executed rather than the special symbol lottery (special symbol change), or rather than the special symbol lottery (special symbol change). Even if the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol is executed in the high-speed fluctuation mode during the period when it is confirmed that the effect of the content is executed, the effect mode for notifying the fact is not set. It is possible to inform the player of the most important production in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 236 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. Can be kept accurate without timing the time interval by sending.

In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may be to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9". Further, the main symbol with a number or the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided and the third symbol is provided. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the display device 81. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates in response to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner in combination with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. However, the sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player is given an effect different from the usual one. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice production can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the winning / failing determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, and the sound from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). , Or a combination of them) to prepare a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the game state (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) after the end of the continuous advance notice production. May be good.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the continuous advance notice effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbol, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 395 (c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines the reception of the continuous notice command, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on and the stop symbol determination flag is turned on. , Other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command judgment processing, after the stop identification command processing, the processing corresponding to the continuous warning command is executed in the other command processing, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 sets the number of reserved balls added by "1" to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. A case has been described in which the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in connection with the start winning are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 as they are in response to the hold ball number command to be notified to. The type of counter included in the ball count command may be a part of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of these values by including information indicating the values of each counter in a command other than the reserved ball count command. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the command in any of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas corresponding to the hold count based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the hold ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a hold ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, whether it is a jackpot or not, a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and a loss based on the value of each counter indicated by the command. In the case of, a part or all of the deviation type, etc. is judged, and these judgment results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or together with a part or all of the value of the counter. It may be stored in RAM 223.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of reserved balls is determined by the main control device 110 using one reserved ball number counter 203a regardless of whether the balls are won in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The case of counting has been described. On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter for the first starting port corresponding to the first starting port 64a, the reserved ball number counter for the second starting port corresponding to the second starting port 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Prepared, the number of reserved balls associated with the starting prize at the first starting port 64a and the number of reserved balls associated with the starting winning at the second starting port 64b may be counted separately.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held is set to "4" regardless of whether the balls are won in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b has been described. The maximum number of reserved balls that can be held with the start winning of the first starting port 64a and the maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the starting winning of the second starting port 64b are separately determined and managed. May be good. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held with the start winning of the first starting port 64a is set to "4", and the maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the starting winning of the second starting port 64b is "4". As a result, at a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls held due to the start winning of the first starting port 64a is "4", and the number of reserved balls held due to the starting winning of the second starting port 64b is "4". In the situation where is "2", even if the first starting port 64a has any more starting prizes, the starting prize is not suspended, but if the second starting port 64b has a starting prize, it is suspended. You may. As a result, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b can be recognized by the player as separate ones, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the variation effect based on the start winning prize for the second starting port 64b may be given priority over the variation effect based on the start winning prize for the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the starting prize for the first starting port 64a may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning for the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to draw more attention to the player at the starting port where the variable effect is preferentially performed.

In the above embodiment, a case where a first start port 64a, a second start port 64b, and two start ports are arranged on the game board 13 as start ports for starting a big hit lottery when a ball is entered will be described. However, the number of starting ports is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one, or may be three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding holding ball count counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting opening, and each starting opening is held with a winning ball to the corresponding starting opening. You may want to count the number. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held may be set for each starting port in accordance with the starting winning prize to the corresponding starting port.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the number of reserved balls command sent by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in order to notify that the holding has been performed due to the winning of the starting port will be eventually given. It may include information indicating whether the hold was made by winning a prize at the starting port of. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started may also include information indicating which start port holds the fluctuation effect. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each start port, and when a hold ball number command is received, a hold ball number counter for the start port indicated by the hold ball number command is provided. When the number of reserved balls is set in, and the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of reserved balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing the number of reserved balls counter for the starting port indicated by the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting ports are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with the winning of each starting port (starting winning) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning is the command acquired in connection with the start winning in any of the starting ports. Information indicating the existence may be included. Further, the variation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating which start port the variation effect is associated with the start winning. .. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area is prepared for each start port, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in association with the start winning to the corresponding start port is supported. It may be stored in the look-ahead information storage area. As a result, each time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the start port that has detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. it can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending fluctuation effect can be held in the voice lamp control device 113 for each start port. Therefore, when the probability of winning a jackpot, the probability of sorting a jackpot type, the probability of sorting a missed type, etc. differ depending on the starting port that won the starting prize, whether or not each variation effect is a jackpot in the look-ahead processing. It is possible to correctly determine the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the loss type in the case of a miss, etc. based on which starting port the starting prize is awarded. Further, when the variation effect based on the start prize for 1 start port is performed in preference to the variation effect based on the start prize for other start ports, the variation based on the start prize for 1 start port is performed. The look-ahead processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of hold times of the variable effect that is the most recent big hit can be correctly determined.

Further, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 continuously gives notice when the value of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the start port is received from the main control device 110 by a command. When the start of the effect is decided, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) held at that time regardless of the start opening where the start winning is given. Further, in a pachinko machine in which a plurality of starting ports are provided and a variable effect for winning a prize in one starting port is preferentially executed over a variable effect for winning a prize in another starting port, the variation effect is given priority. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the starting port where the variable effect is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is not started for this variable effect. If the continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the low-priority start port and the variable effect is continuously held at the high-priority start port, the continuous advance notice effect is quite finished. There is a risk of not doing so. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is applied to this variable effect. Is not started, so it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 is reduced by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 394). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation processing (see FIG. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 is subtracted as the variation pattern command is set by the variation start processing (S307). A hold ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a (see S305 in FIG. 381) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the hold ball number command has a variation pattern. It may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of reserved balls held by the main control device 110. In this case, S1107 in FIG. 394 is omitted. Further, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a after subtraction may be included in the fluctuation pattern command. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the number of reserved balls (N) included in the fluctuation pattern command may be extracted and set to the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, the winning and passing through the through gate 67 to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, for winning prizes in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4". It may be any number other than. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is set by a number or a region divided into four in a part of the third symbol display device 81. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved balls are provided by the light emitting member. It may be configured to notify the number.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is horizontally The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

In slot machines, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by bonuses (features) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the bonus ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and is equivalent to the bonus ratio management chip or the bonus ratio management chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of winning combinations (the symbols are aligned on the valid line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning combinations during the bonus game period, and the winning combination during the AT period. You may manage the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio by counting the number of winning combinations.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly known as a setting) is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of a jackpot can be changed according to the setting as a pachinko machine. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The degree of advantage for each setting may be changed by changing the ratio according to the setting. Further, for example, the rate at which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is determined after the end of the big hit is changed according to the setting, or a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) The rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift) to) is determined may be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly increased (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. Then, in setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when it becomes a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot finishes in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of jackpot rounds to play the game. be able to. Alternatively, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be set to be higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. The jackpot type may be provided so as to be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out is more likely to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probabilistic state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below. In addition, each of the concepts of various inventions shown below adds a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the concept of another invention to the concept of the invention, or a part or a plurality of the configurations of the concept of the other invention. The concept of the invention may be modified and constructed by exchanging with a part or the like.

<Resin component that replaces nails>
In a game machine including a game board main body, a fixed member whose arrangement is fixed to the game board main body, and a connecting member for connecting the game board main body and the fixed member, the connecting member is a game. A game machine A1 characterized in that it can guide a ball.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a flow path of a game ball is randomly configured by a nail driven into a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-325743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the flow path of the game ball is composed only of nails, it is necessary to drive the nails into almost the entire area of the game board, but the strength of the part where the nails are hit is secured. Therefore, it is necessary to make the game board thicker, so that there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board is lowered, especially in the design in the thickness direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the game ball can be guided by the connecting member that connects the game board main body and the fixed member. Therefore, the range in which the connecting member is arranged is the game board main body. There is no need to drive nails into. Therefore, within the range in which the connecting member is arranged, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board main body, particularly in the thickness direction, can be improved.

For example, by forming a thin wall at a place where the thickness can be arbitrarily designed, the material cost can be reduced by reducing the volume of the member required for the entire game board, or the production member (electricity) can be used in the space vacated as a result of the thin wall. Decorative boards, etc.) can be arranged to enable various light emission effects.

The arrangement of the connecting members is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the connecting member may be arranged above the center frame of the game board so as to form a portion where the game ball introduced into the game area first collides, or the center as a member for holding the through gate inside. It may be arranged on the left and right sides of the frame, or may be arranged on the lower side of the center frame as a member for guiding the game ball to the winning opening.

Further, the connecting member may be formed in a symmetrical shape or may be formed in a left-right asymmetric shape. Basically, when the game area has a symmetrical shape, it is preferable that the connecting member also has a symmetrical shape, and when the game area has a left-right asymmetric shape (for example, in the case of a right-handed machine). It is preferable that the connecting member also has a left-right asymmetric shape.

In the game machine A1, the connecting member includes a guide portion that can guide the game ball, and the guide portion is configured to project toward the game area side.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the action effect similar to that of a nail overhanging on the game area side can be generated by the guide portion, and the connecting member transmits light. When formed from a sex resin material, it can transmit light more easily than a nail. Therefore, even in the range in which the guide portion is arranged, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light emitted from the back of the guide portion to the player side from being lowered.

As the shape of the guide portion, the shape of the nail may be imitated, but when the thin shape of the nail is formed from the resin material, the strength is lower than that of the nail made of the metal material, so that a plurality of nails are used. The area to be arranged may be formed from a shape surrounded by a single guide portion. Thereby, even when it is formed from a resin material, the lack of strength can be solved.

In the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the guide portion is provided with a recessed portion on the opposite side of the game region side.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the weight of the connecting member can be reduced. Further, since the wall thickness of the guide portion is reduced, the guide portion can be easily bent, and when the game ball collides with the guide portion, the guide portion is bent, so that the guide portion is bent between the game ball and the guide portion. Since the generated load can be alleviated, it is possible to easily avoid damage to the guide portion due to the load at the time of impact.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the guide portion includes a first guide portion arranged close to the game board main body and a second guide portion arranged close to the fixed member, and the first guide portion is provided. Is a gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is formed to be narrower than the second guide portion.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, since the first guide portion is narrow, the guide portion itself is easily bent, and the load can be released even if the game board main body does not bend. On the other hand, in the second guide portion, even if the guide portion itself does not bend, the load can be released by bending the fixed member formed as a thin plate.

The narrow width may be set to have a small maximum width, or may be specified by having a narrow portion as in the case where the shape is a triangle.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, the guide portion is characterized in that a portion where the angle at which the sides constituting the frame shape in the overhanging direction intersect at the maximum is arranged below the upper end position. Game machine A5.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, it is possible to allow bending deformation around the portion where the angle is maximum to make it easier to withstand the collision of the game ball. it can.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, the game machine A6 is characterized in that the fixed member is formed in an annular shape and is fixed to the inside of the game board main body.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, the shape of the fixed member can be easily held by the rigidity of the game board main body.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, the game machine A7 is configured such that the connecting member and the game board main body or the fixed member overlap each other, and the overlapping target changes depending on the location.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, when the game board body is formed without omitting the game board body by omitting the formation of the game board body and covering it with the fixed member. In comparison, the material cost required for the game board body can be reduced.

Further, in the range where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap, it is possible to easily pass the light emitted from the back surface, and the space on the back surface side can be secured by forming the fixed member to be thin. , The degree of freedom in arranging the effect device can be improved.

In the game machine A7, the game machine A8 in which the light emitting means is arranged behind the portion where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the space for arranging the light emitting means is formed by forming the fixed member with a thin wall as compared with the case where the light emitting means is arranged behind the game board main body. Can be easily secured.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, a thin-walled decorative member is provided between the fixed member and the connecting member, and the thin-walled decorative member is the first positioning formed on the fixed member. The game machine A9 is characterized in that it is aligned with the portion and the second positioning portion formed on the connecting member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the thin-walled decorative member can be aligned without being limited to the shapes of the fixed member and the connecting member.

In the game machine A9, the game machine A10 is characterized in that the first positioning portion and the second positioning portion are engaged with each other.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, the first positioning unit and the second positioning unit can align the fixed member and the connecting member.

<Distribution without nails>
The guiding means includes a passing area through which the game ball can pass, a guiding means configured to guide the game ball to the passing area, and a flow-down area in which the game ball passing through the passing area flows down. The ratio of guiding the game ball to the passing area is variable, and the flow area includes a first entry port and a second entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, and the first entry The game machine B1 is characterized in that the ratio of a game ball entering the ball opening and the ratio of the game ball entering the second entry port can be maintained.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that distributes a game ball to a winning opening by a nail driven into a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-325743). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the nail used for distributing the flow path of the game ball may change its state with respect to the base plate due to the collision with the game ball, and the change in the state causes the nail to enter the winning opening. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of fairness of the game because a state in which the ball is easy to hit and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball can be formed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, in a situation where the ratio of the guiding means guiding the game ball to the passing region can be changed, the flow area is the ratio of the game ball entering the first entrance and the first. 2 Since the ratio of the game ball entering the ball entry port can be maintained, the game ball may easily enter the first entry slot or the second entry opening, or may not easily enter the ball. This can be avoided and improved from the perspective of fairness in the game.

The game machine B1 is characterized in that the flow-down region is formed of a resin material.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the flow-down region is formed of the resin material. Therefore, if a part of the resin member forming the flow-down region is damaged, the resin member itself should be replaced. Can be easily restored to its original state. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of maintainability and improvement of the operating period of the game machine as compared with the case of sorting the game balls with nails.

Further, in the case of nails, even if they are bent, it is difficult to visually distinguish them, and while the operation may occur in a state where the distribution state (balance) of the game ball has changed from the time of shipment, the flow area from the resin material. When the shape is formed, it is possible to make it difficult to form a state different from the state at the time of shipment by making the shape difficult to bend or designing the shape to be easily damaged when bending occurs. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the distribution state (balance) of the game ball as it is at the time of shipment.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the first ball entry port is arranged on the upstream side of the second ball entry port, and the profit obtained by the player when the game ball enters the second ball entry port is obtained. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the profit is larger than the profit obtained by the player when the gaming ball enters the first entrance.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1 or B2, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball flows down to the second entrance side.

The mode of profit that the player can obtain is not limited in any way. For example, the presence or absence of prize balls, the number of prize balls, the presence or absence of a lottery of symbols, the profit that the probability of lottery changes depending on the passage of game balls, or a combination of these may be used.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, an upstream means that is arranged on the upstream side of the passing region and can guide the game ball in a third direction different from the passing region is provided, and the upstream means is said. The game ball configured to prevent the game ball from flowing down to the second entry port, and the game ball distributed in the third direction passes through the profit passing means that the player can benefit from when entering the ball. A game machine B4 characterized in that it can flow down a route.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the game ball that did not go to the passing area side does not interfere with the flow of the ball toward the second entrance, and further. Since there is a possibility of passing through the profit passing means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball deviated from the passing area side.

In the game machine B4, the game ball guided in the third direction by the upstream side means has a higher possibility of entering the profit passing means when the point where the guidance is started is on the upstream side. A game machine B5 characterized by being configured as such.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the attention of the upstream side means can be improved not only on the downstream side arranged on the profit passing means side but also on the upstream side. In other words, even if you are dissatisfied with the normal game, you can configure the game area so that you will be comfortable with the jackpot game.

In the game machine B5, the game machine B6 is characterized in that the first member constituting the general winning opening side and the second member forming the profit passing means side are positioned by engaging the resin constituent members with each other.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the fastening screw can be omitted as compared with the case where the first member and the second member are fixed with the metal fastening screw. The visibility at the overlapping position of the member and the second member can be improved.

In the game machine B6, the game machine B7 is characterized in that the positioning method is sandwiching with the game board.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, it is possible to easily define the positional relationship between the first member and the second member in the portion arranged to face the game area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down while contacting the first member and the second member from being irregularly disturbed. That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the front-rear positions of the first member and the second member are reversed, which tends to occur when the members are fixed to the game board main body with the fastening screws.

The game machine B8 is characterized in that any one of the game machines B5 to B7 is provided with a deceleration protrusion that secures the momentum of the game machine until it comes directly above the profit passing means and decelerates after coming directly above. ..

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B5 to B7, it is possible to avoid damage to the profit passing means due to the game ball colliding with the profit passing means at high speed.

In the game machine B8, the game machine B9 is characterized in that the means for passing profits after collecting the profits from a wide range on the left and right are widened on the left and right.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, even if the game ball arrives at the profit passing means continuously, the game ball that has reached earlier is flowed to the left and right, so that it is easy to accept the follow-up game ball. can do. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid poor entry when the game ball continuously reaches the profit passing means.

The game machine B10 is characterized in that, in the game machine B8 or B9, an auxiliary means for assisting the flow of the game ball in a predetermined manner is provided behind the flow path of the game ball to the profit passing means.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8 or B9, the flow of the game ball to the profit passing means can be assisted in a predetermined manner by the auxiliary means, so that there is a problem regarding the flow of the game ball. It can be improved in a predetermined manner.

In the game machine B10, the auxiliary means is a game ball that enters and flows down into a predetermined winning opening, and a game machine B11 that is a flow path of the game ball.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B10, the game ball that enters the predetermined winning opening and flows down can be made to appear as if it is flowing down toward the profit passing means. As a result, the game balls that have entered the predetermined winning opening during the jackpot game can be added as the number of game balls that appear to enter the profit passing means, so that most of the launched game balls are profitable. You can make the illusion that you are entering the passing means.

In the game machine B10, the auxiliary means is a decorative means for decorating the flow path to the profit passing means from the rear.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of the game machine B10, when the player's attention is focused on the flow path to the profit passage means, the game is played by the decorative means as compared with the case where the decoration is not applied. It is possible to improve the interest of the person.

In any of the game machines B1 to B12, the rate at which the game ball enters the first entry port and the rate at which the game ball enters the second entry port in the flow area are maintained at different rates. A game machine B13 characterized in that it can be executed in a plurality of states.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B12, the state maintained in the flow-down region can be changed in a plurality of states. For example, an infestation means that appears and disappears at regular intervals may be provided in the flow-down region, or the inclination angle of the inclined plate arranged between the first entrance and the second entrance may be changed. You may control it.

<Compact device for left and right distribution of game balls>
In a game machine including a game board main body and a flow-down means configured to allow the game balls to flow down in a manner of distributing the game balls to a plurality of entrances behind the front end surface of the game board main body, the game board main body is The flow means includes an arrangement area in which nails that can distribute the flow path of the game ball can be arranged and a non-arrangement area in which nails cannot be arranged. A game machine C1 characterized in that it is arranged in a range including the rear of the installation area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a swing configured so that the game ball can flow down toward the first and second entrances, which are provided on the left and right, and the first or second entrance. There is a gaming machine provided with a branch channel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144471, especially FIG. 4). The distribution flow path is formed of a resin material, and a game ball is formed so that it can flow down inside the distribution flow path. For reasons such as facilitating countermeasures when a ball is clogged, the first ball entry port and On the upstream side of the second entry port (position immediately before entering the ball), a gap portion having a size through which the game ball can pass is formed.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are configured to project toward the front side of the game board, the game area can be configured on the front side of the distribution flow path. There was a problem that it was difficult. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of securing a large range of formation of the game area.

In other words, the area required for arranging the first and second entrances is partially overhanging the front side of the game board, so that the other range in which the game ball can flow down is There is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game ball flows down may be reduced due to the narrowing.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the flow-down means is arranged behind the front end surface of the game board main body, another member for guiding the game ball is provided on the front side of the front end face of the game board main body. Since it can be arranged, a large range of formation of the game area can be secured.

In the game machine C1, the plurality of entrances are provided with a first entrance, and the first entrances are arranged so as not to overlap with a movable accessory arranged in the game area in front view. A game machine C2 characterized by.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game ball entering the first ball entry port from being lowered by the movable accessory.

In the game machine C1 or C2, at least a part of the flow path of the game ball that flows down from the first entrance is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the movable accessory arranged in the game area in front view. A game machine C3 characterized by.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1 or C2, the game ball that deviates from the first entrance and flows down can be hidden by a movable accessory.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the flow-down means is provided with a direction switching unit configured to allow the player side to flow down the game ball on the upstream side of the plurality of entrances. Machine C4.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the direction switching unit causes the game ball flowing down the flow-down means to flow to the player side immediately before the plurality of entry ports. It is possible to improve the visibility of the ball and improve the attention to the game ball flowing down toward a plurality of entrances.

The game machine C4 is characterized in that the game machine C4 includes a distribution means for distributing the flow direction of the game ball at the front position of the direction switching portion on the front side of the game board main body.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the game ball can be sorted by the sorting means even at the front position of the game board main body where it is difficult to hit a nail. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

In the game machine C5, the game ball provided with the ball entry means in which at least a part of the game balls distributed by the distribution means can be entered, the game ball flowing down the flow-down means and flowing down the direction switching portion is The game machine C6 is characterized in that the game ball discharged to the back side and flows down the flow-down means is configured to be visible through the game board main body.

According to the game machine C6, the subsequent visibility of the game ball that has flowed down the direction switching portion is reduced, so that it is possible to make the illusion that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. As a result, the game balls that flow down the flow-down means can be added to the number of game balls that flow down toward the entry means, and a large number of game balls appear to flow down toward the entry means. Can be done.

In this case, the game ball flowing down the flow-down means and the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board body are separated by the game board body and cannot collide with each other, so that the game ball actually flows down toward the ball entry means. It is possible to prevent the flow of the flowing game ball from being hindered by the game ball flowing down the flow means. That is, while ensuring the entry efficiency of the game ball that is actually flowing down toward the entry means, the player is made to appear as if more game balls are flowing down toward the entry means. can do.

The game machine C1 includes a first ball entry port, a second ball entry port, and a first flow path in which a game ball can flow down toward the first ball entry port, and the first flow path thereof. C7 is a gaming machine C7 provided with a branched flow path on the upstream side of the first entrance, in which the game ball flows in a direction deviating from the first entrance.

According to the game machine C7, even if a ball clogging occurs on the first ball entry side in the first flow path, the game ball can be discharged from the branched flow path, so that the ball clogging can be easily cleared. Can be done.

In the game machine C7, the first flow path advances the game ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting the first entry port and the second entry port on the upstream side of the first entry port. The game machine C8 is configured to deflect the game ball from the first entrance.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a swing configured so that the game ball can flow down toward the first and second entrances, which are provided on the left and right, and the first or second entrance. There is a gaming machine provided with a branch channel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144471, especially FIG. 4). The distribution flow path is formed of a resin material, and a game ball is formed so that it can flow down inside the distribution flow path. For reasons such as facilitating countermeasures when a ball is clogged, the first ball entry port and On the upstream side of the second entry port (position immediately before entering the ball), a gap portion having a size through which the game ball can pass is formed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, a gap portion formed in a size capable of discharging the game ball on the upstream side of the first entry port and the second entry port is a mode in which the game ball is discharged in the left-right direction. In order to secure a passage area for the game ball, a flow path for flowing the game ball toward the first entry port and a flow path for causing the game ball to flow down toward the second entry port are formed. Since it is necessary to leave a space between the left and right sides of the arrangement of the flow path for the ball, which is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the first ball is compared with the actual left and right widths of the first ball and the second ball. There is a problem that the left-right width for arranging the mouth and the second entrance is excessive.

In other words, the left-right width (area) required for arranging the first entry port and the second entry opening becomes excessive, so that a flow path of the game ball can be formed on the front side or the rear side of the game board. There is a problem that the range is narrowed and the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game ball flows down may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C8, the configuration for deflecting the game ball from the first entry port is configured to advance the game ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line. Since it is possible to eliminate the need for the distance from the second entry port to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, it is possible to suppress the left-right width (region) for arranging the first entry opening and the second entry opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game ball flows down.

The mode of designing the range in which the game ball flows down is not limited in any way.
For example, it may be an aspect of designing a region between the game board and the glass plate of the door frame (so-called game area), or a region behind the front end surface of the game board (for example, a resin interior). It may be the design aspect of the flow path). In the former case, an aspect of designing the arrangement of nails to be driven into the game board as a member for guiding the game ball is also included.

The game machine C8 includes a second flow path that allows the game ball to flow down toward the second entry port, and the second flow path is located on the upstream side of the second entry port. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball is advanced in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting the first entrance and the second entrance, and the game ball is deflected from the second entrance. C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C8, the left-right width (region) for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port can be further suppressed.

In the game machine C8 or C9, there is a second flow path in which the game ball can flow down toward the second entry port, and a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and is the first entry port. A game machine characterized by comprising a game ball deviating from the second flow path and a receiving means capable of accepting the game ball deviating from the second entrance. C10.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8 or C9, the means for accepting the game ball deviating from the first entry port and the means for accepting the game ball deviating from the second entry port are single. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts by reducing the number of parts.

In the game machine C10, the receiving means is arranged on the front side of the predetermined straight line.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect of the game machine C10, the visibility of the game ball accepted by the receiving means can be improved, so that the game ball that has entered the flow-down means is the first entry port or It is possible to easily determine whether the ball has passed through the second entrance, or has been deviated from the first and second entrances and accepted by the receiving means.

In the game machine C10, the receiving means is arranged on the back side of the predetermined straight line.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of the game machine C10, the visibility of the flow-down means can be improved as compared with the case where the flow path of the game ball is formed on the front side of the flow-down means. It is possible to easily determine that the game ball is passing through the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port arranged on the downstream side of the flow-down means.

<Direction is performed on the side that is easy to see, and evacuation is performed as a move to the side that is difficult to see>
A moving means capable of moving between a first position for performing an operation effect and a second position different from the first position is provided, and the second position is a position where the visibility of the moving means is lower than that of the first position. The game machine D1 characterized by being.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine provided with a rotary operation member pivotally supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-900214). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the rotary motion member is always visible inside the opening, the player can see the posture shift of the rotary motion member due to poor control or the rotary motion member after over-rotation. There is a problem that it is easy to be visually recognized and there is a possibility that the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the visibility of the moving means at the second position is lower than that at the first position where the motion effect is executed, so that the posture shift or over-rotation at the second position. Even if this occurs, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the state, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

The mode for reducing the visibility of the moving means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, regardless of whether it is a transparent member or an opaque member, a member that blocks the field of view may be arranged between the moving means and the player, and the moving means may be displayed on a liquid crystal display that easily attracts the attention of the player. It may be a mode in which the device is displaced (retracted) outward from the area on the front side of the device.

In the game machine D1, the game machine D2 is characterized in that the first position is arranged on the front side of the game machine with respect to the second position.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the visible size of the moving means itself can be expanded by moving the moving means from the second position to the first position.

In the game machine D2, the moving means is capable of rotating on a predetermined rotation axis, and the front-rear arrangement is changed by the rotation operation.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, it is possible to change the front-rear arrangement of the moving means while eliminating the need to translate the moving means back and forth. Therefore, the structure for changing the front-rear arrangement of the moving means can be simplified.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines D1 to D3 is provided with an auxiliary means for assisting the state of the moving means arranged at the second position to be kept on an appropriate side.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, by optimizing the state of the moving means by the auxiliary means at the second position, the effect of the moving means at the first position is appropriately produced. Can be executed.

The mode of assistance is not limited in any way. For example, the posture of the moving means may be corrected to an appropriate side by abutting, or the moving means may be maintained on an appropriate side by an urging force.

In the game machine D4, the auxiliary means is arranged on the second position side with respect to the first position.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, by placing the auxiliary means on the inconspicuous side, the auxiliary means can be easily hidden. Therefore, a separate member for hiding the auxiliary means can be unnecessary, and the space on the front side of the auxiliary means can be secured as an effect space.

The mode of arrangement on the second position side is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be simply an inconspicuous side, a rear side in the front-rear direction, or an outer side of the central opening of the game board facing the liquid crystal device.

In the game machine D5, the second position is set on the back side of the game machine with respect to the first position, and when the moving means is arranged at the second position, the moving means causes the player to use the auxiliary means. The gaming machine D6, which is arranged so as to block the line of sight.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the auxiliary means can be hidden by using the moving means, so that it is easy to avoid the exposure of the auxiliary means by any chance, and when the moving means is evacuated. It looks good. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary means can be increased.

In any of the game machines D1 to D6, the movement of the moving means is a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for arranging the moving means in a state in which the first movement is possible. The gaming machine D7, which is composed of movement and is configured to bring the state of the moving means closer to an appropriate side at the time of the second movement.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D6, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the moving means is in an improper state when moving toward the first position.

In the game machine D7, the moving means is characterized in that the state is brought closer to an appropriate side by an urging force.

According to the game machine D8, the means of transportation can be brought closer to the proper side without depending on the control.

In the game machine D7 or D8, the game machine D9 is characterized in that the second movement is a rotation operation about a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7 or D8, the state of the moving means can be changed so as to approach the proper side during the change of the posture of the moving means.

In any of the game machines D7 to D9, the game machine D10 is characterized in that the front side and the back side of the moving means are formed in different modes at the time of the first movement.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D7 to D9, the front side seen by the player is formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side is formed in a shape suitable for functionality. be able to.

<Production that changes the surface of the production device>
A first means capable of performing a predetermined effect is provided, and the first means can be changed into a first posture for performing the first effect and a second posture for performing the second effect as the predetermined effect. , The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the side facing the front changes between the first posture and the second posture.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine provided with a posture changing member axially supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-900214). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the posture changing member always faces the same side toward the front side, and the appearance does not change beyond the change in posture. Therefore, the effect of using the posture changing member is improved. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the side facing the front of the first means is configured to change between the first posture and the second posture, each of the single movable means called the first means. By designing the side surfaces in different manners, the side to be seen (front side) can be changed, so that the first means can be made to look like a completely different object to the player. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of improving the effect of the first means.

The mode of the predetermined effect is not limited to any one, and various modes are exemplified. For example, an operation effect in which at least a part of the first means operates may be used, or a light emission effect using the light emitted from the light emitting means included in the first means may be used.

In the game machine E1, the first means includes a predetermined light emitting means arranged along a predetermined shape so that the figure can be visually recognized by the emitted light, and the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is the said. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it can be changed between the first posture and the second posture.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E1, the effect of the first means can be improved by changing the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means.

The mode of the change of the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the figure to be visually recognized may be changed by controlling the light emitting pattern of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means in the stopped state, or the light emitting state of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means is fixed and predetermined. The figure (afterimage, etc.) to be visually recognized may be changed by operating the light emitting means, or a combination thereof may be used.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the first means is movable between the first position and the second position, and the outer shape of the first means that is visible at the first position and the visible shape at the second position. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the outer shape of the first means is different from that of the possible first means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, the first means is configured to change the outer shape that is visually recognized while moving, so that an effect that is difficult to realize with a single member can be achieved. It can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, the effect of the first means can be improved.

In the game machine E3, the game machine E4 is characterized in that a region in which the first means can perform an effect operation is set according to an effect mode.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E3, the area required for the effect operation executed by the first means is configured to change in magnitude according to the mode of the effect, so that the first means Even if the area in which the first means can perform the effect effect changes depending on the arrangement of the first means, the first means can be operated in the mode of the effect according to the area, so that the degree of freedom in designing the operation effect of the first means can be increased. Can be improved.

The gaming machine E3 or E4 is characterized by comprising a dividing means arranged so as to divide the first means arranged at the first position in a predetermined directional view.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3 or E4, the appearance of the first means at the first position and the appearance of the first means at the second position (non-division) are determined by the dividing means. Can be different.

In any of the game machines E3 to E5, in the predetermined light emitting means, the figure visually recognized in the first posture at the first position corresponds to the shape of the progress assisting means that assists the progress of the game ball in the game area. A game machine E6 characterized by being configured as such.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E3 to E5, the light emission in the first posture can produce an effect of suggesting the traveling direction of the game ball to the player. In addition to a single effect, it can also be used as an effect related to the direction of travel of the game ball.

The mode of the progress assisting means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a metal rail including a portion that guides the launch ball to the game area, a guide means that is arranged in the game area and guides the flow of the game ball, or a state that allows or limits the passage of the game ball. A ball passing state switching means that can be switched with is also used.

The game machine E7 is characterized in that the figure visually recognized in the second posture at the second position is a figure for drawing attention to a predetermined entry area where the game ball can enter.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, another aspect of the light effect can be performed by a single first means as a light effect executed for the same purpose. This makes it easier for the player to prevent the player from getting bored with the production.

In any of the game machines E3 to E7, the movement of the first means is a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for arranging the moving means in a state in which the first movement is possible. The gaming machine E8 is composed of the movement of the first means, and is configured to bring the state of the first means closer to an appropriate side at the time of the second movement.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E3 to E7, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the moving means is in an improper state when moving toward the first position.

In the game machine E8, the first means is a game machine E9 characterized in that the state is brought closer to an appropriate side by an urging force.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of the game machine E8, the first means can be brought closer to an appropriate side without depending on the control.

In the game machine E8 or E9, the game machine E10 is characterized in that the second movement is a rotation operation about a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effect of the game machine E8 or E9, the state can be changed so that the moving means is brought closer to an appropriate side during the change of the posture of the displacement means.

In any of the game machines E8 to E10, the game machine E11 is characterized in that the front side and the back side of the displacement means are formed in different modes during the first movement.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E8 to E10, the front side seen by the player is formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side is formed in a functionally suitable shape. be able to.

<Support structure of the operated member>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable and a support means for supporting the displacement means are provided, and the support means can limit the displacement of the displacement means and the allowable portion that allows the displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by including a limiting portion.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine including a rotary operation member in which a movable unit that moves up and down by driving a pair of left and right drive devices is rotationally driven by individual drive devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-000482). See publication). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the movable unit is supported by the plate portions extending vertically on both the left and right sides in a manner of linearly moving in the vertical direction, the drive timings of the pair of left and right drive devices are deviated. When a load is generated in the direction in which the posture of the movable unit collapses (tilts), the smoothness of the operation of the movable unit is lost, and the operating resistance increases, which increases the possibility of damaging the power transmission system. was there. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of directivity and durability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the support means for supporting the displacement means includes a limit portion for limiting the displacement of the displacement means and an allowance portion for allowing the displacement of the displacement means, so that the displacement means is driven. Even if the drive timing is deviated, the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the support means is allowed in advance. Therefore, the smooth operation of the displacement means can be maintained within the allowable width, and the space between the support means and the displacement means can be maintained. The load applied to the displacement means can be reduced. As a result, improvements can be made from the viewpoint of color rendering and durability.

Further, as the support mode of the displacement means, two support modes can be configured by appropriately selecting whether to increase the ratio affected by the allowable portion or the ratio affected by the limiting portion. it can.

In the conventional game machine, the movable unit has been described as being displaced in the vertical direction, but the displacement direction of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be in the vertical direction, in the horizontal direction, in the front-rear direction, in the rotation direction centered on a predetermined rotation axis, or in any combination thereof.

The shape of the allowable portion and the restrictive portion can be arbitrarily set, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the allowable portion may be formed as an elongated hole extending in the first direction, and the limiting portion may be formed in a perfect circular shape having a diameter shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the allowable portion.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the permissible portion is configured to allow the displacement of the displacement means in a state where the displacement of the restricted portion of the displacement means is restricted by the restrictor. Game machine F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the displacement of the displacement means with the limiting portion as the base end can be allowed. As a result, it is possible to easily secure the smoothness of the displacement of the displacement means because the control is unnecessary, as compared with the case where the presence or absence of the displacement limitation is switched by the electric control.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the permissible portion has a first permissible state in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowed by the first permissible width, and a second permissible width in which the displacement of the displacement means is smaller than the first permissible width. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to change the state with a second permissible state.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, even if the displacement width corresponding to the type of displacement of the displacement means is different, it is possible to correspond to the different displacement width by one permissible part. it can.

In the game machine F3, the state change is caused by a change in the posture of the displacement means.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the change in the posture of the displacement means causes a change in the allowable width allowed by the allowable portion. Since it is possible to directly connect the size of the permissible width of the displacement means, it is possible to avoid the malfunction of the displacement means in advance. Further, the number of constituent members can be reduced as compared with the case where another limiting member for holding down the displacement means and limiting the displacement is adopted.

In the game machine F4, the displacement means is supported by the support means so as to be displaced along the first direction, and in the first allowable state, the direction of displacement of the displacement means allowed by the allowable portion is said. The gaming machine F5, which is included on a predetermined plane parallel to the first direction, is characterized in that the direction of displacement of the displacement means allowed by the allowable portion intersects the predetermined plane.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, the allowable width of displacement by the allowable part can be changed by switching the direction allowed by the allowable part as the direction of displacement of the displacement means with respect to the first direction. it can.

As a result, in relation to the control of the driving device that drives the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means is maintained in the first allowable state within a range in which the displacement means and the support means are likely to be displaced in the first direction. By setting the posture of the displacement means to the second permissible state within the range where it is possible to prevent the displacement, or to prevent the displacement, the displacement of the displacement means is not too soft and not too hard. It can be in a certain displacement mode.

In any of the game machines F3 to F5, the displacement means supports an operating means configured to be operable, the operating means is configured to be operable at high speed, and the allowable portion is the first 2 A game machine F6 characterized in that it can be executed in a state where it is allowed.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F3 to F5, it is possible to easily prevent the displacement means from being displaced due to the inertial load generated by the high-speed operation of the moving means.

In any of the game machines F1 to F6, the game machine F7 is characterized in that the support means is composed of a pair of members that support the displacement means from both sides.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F6, the displacement means can be stably supported.

In the game machine F7, the pair of members are configured to be rotatable and displaceable with the first axis as a coaxial center, and the permissible width of the permissible portion is formed so as to extend along the first axis direction. Game machine F8.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, the displacement of the displacement means within the permissible width allowed for the permissible portion can be caused on the tangent plane of the cylinder centered on the first axis. it can. In other words, the displacement allowed in the permissible portion can be generated as a displacement in a mode in which the displacement means is twisted with respect to the first axis.

As a result, it is possible to three-dimensionally deal with the displacement of the displacement amount that is difficult to avoid such as backlash that may occur when the gears are used for the drive transmission mechanisms on both the left and right sides, and the rotation of the displacement means around the first axis. Displacement can be generated smoothly.

In the game machine F8, the game machine F9 is characterized in that one of the supporting means includes the limiting portion.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, it is possible to tolerate a misalignment at the time of assembling the other supporting means and the moving means, and it is possible to facilitate the assembling.

In any of the game machines F1 to F9, the allowable portion is formed as an elongated hole, and the limiting portion is formed as an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is shorter than the longitudinal direction of the allowable portion. F10.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F9, the moving means can be slid and moved in the longitudinal direction of the limiting portion and the allowable portion. As a result, the load generated in the moving means can be released, and the operation of the moving means can be utilized.

<Technical concept in which multiple types of fixing forces for transportation are set>
A movable moving means and a load applying means capable of applying a load to the moving means are provided, and the load applying means can switch the load to be applied according to the state of the moving means. A game machine G1 characterized by.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a regulating means (load applying means) configured to be able to move the movement of the moving means that is displaced up and down to a position where the movement can be regulated (for example, JP-A-2016-54856 See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the movement of the moving means can be regulated by the regulating means, no further effect can be expected, and the cost-effectiveness for the volume integral occupied by the regulating means is low. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing the regulatory means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means can be switched according to the state of the moving means, so that a single load applying means can be used for the moving means. There are multiple types of effects that can affect movement. That is, the load applying means can be effectively used.

The mode of the state of the moving means adopted as the reference for switching the load of the load applying means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, as a difference in the state of the moving means, a difference in the arrangement of the moving means may be adopted, or a difference in the operation mode may be adopted.

The state in which the operation mode is different includes, for example, a state in which the moving means actively operates and an operation of another moving means held by the moving means or another movable means arranged outside the moving means. An example is a state of passive operation.

The mode of switching the load to be applied is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the direction of the load based on the moving direction of the moving means may be switched (the direction facing the moving direction of the moving means and the direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means) may be switched. However, the mode of the load applied by the load applying means may be switched depending on the elapsed time from the start of movement of the moving means.

Further, as the mode of switching the load, the size of the load may be switched, or the mode of generating the load may be switched. The load generation mode may be, for example, a frictional force (brake) due to rubbing against the moving means, or a regulatory force (stopper) generated when the limit of its own movement allowable width is reached. ..

In the game machine G1, the load applying means includes an facing state in which a load is applied in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means and an intersecting state in which a load is applied in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means. The gaming machine G2 characterized in that the load to be applied can be switched.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the load applied to the moving means can be switched from the load applying means by changing the arrangement of the load applying means with respect to the moving path of the moving means. The complicated shape for switching the load is not required, and the load applying means can be easily configured.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the load applying means includes a load applying moving means that can move in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means, and the load applying moving means is configured to be in contact with the moving means. A game machine G3 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the load applying moving means can be configured to perform the appearance and disappearance of the moving means with respect to the moving path by a linear motion (linear motion). , The movement width (movement width in consideration of the variation in operation) required for the load application moving means in order to switch the mode of the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means can be reduced.

Therefore, the space for arranging the load applying moving means can be suppressed. In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the space for arranging the moving means and the loading means is usually limited to the inside of the size (volume) determined by a predetermined standard, so that the loading moving means is arranged. By suppressing the space of the above, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the moving means and the load applying means.

The game machine G3 is characterized in that the load applying means is configured so that the moving direction intersects the moving direction of the moving means at a right angle, and the movement of the moving means in the moving direction is restricted. Game machine G4 to play.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, it is possible to increase the difference in the mode of the load applied to the moving means with the minimum moving width.

The game machine G5, wherein in any of the game machines G1 to G4, switching of the load applied by the load applying means is executed corresponding to the position of the moving means.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, it is possible to deal with the case where the effect operation of the moving means is configured to be different depending on the position.

For example, when the moving means includes a predetermined operating means, the operating means operates at a high speed when the position of the moving means is stopped, while the operating means operates at a stopped or low speed when the moving means moves. When the effect is executed, there may be a demand for the moving means to be securely fixed when the position of the moving means is stopped, while a request for loose fixing (braking) when the moving means moves. Can occur.

By making the switching of the load applied by the load applying means executed according to the position of the moving means, it is possible to satisfy different demands due to the difference in the arrangement of the moving means.

In any of the game machines G1 to G5, the load applying means applies a load when the moving means moves in the forward direction, while applying a load when the moving means moves in the opposite direction. A game machine G6 characterized by being released.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G5, it is possible to deal with the difference between the forward and reverse movement directions depending on the presence or absence (large or small) of the load from the load applying means.

A feature of any of the game machines G1 to G6 is that a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means is provided, and a separation load generated in a direction in which the moving means and the driving means are separated is generated. Game machine G7 to play.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G6, a separation load is generated, so that the moving means can be separated from the driving means, and the transmission efficiency of the driving force can be lowered. ..

In the game machine G7, the separation load is generated from the load applying means.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machine G7, the load applying means can be configured with multiple functions.

In the game machine G7, the separation load is generated in the drive means.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, the transmission efficiency of the driving force can be reduced on the upstream side of the driving force transmission path.

In any of the game machines G1 to G9, a case where a frictional force is applied from the load applying means to the moving means and a case where the load applying means restricts the movement of the moving means can be configured. A game machine G10 characterized by.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G9, even when the moving means is moved by generating the same driving force, the variation of the moving mode of the moving means is increased. be able to.

<The modes of multiple guidance means that guide the movement of the transportation means are different>
It is characterized by including a movable moving means, a first guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means, and a second guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means in a manner different from the first guiding means. The game machine H1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which the moving means is guided by a pair of guiding means having the same embodiment (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157744). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the mode of the load applied to the pair of parts guided by the guiding means, which is the part of the moving means, is common, and the same applies to the improvement of durability. Since it is necessary to increase the strength, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the moving means (the part that is guided by the pair of guiding means) is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the guidance modes of the first guiding means and the second guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means are different, it is necessary to improve the given load mode and durability. The intensity numbers can be different. Therefore, since the shape and strength of the portion of the moving means that is guided by the plurality of guiding means can be configured to be different, the portion of the moving means (the portion that is guided by the plurality of guiding means). ) Can improve the degree of freedom in design.

The difference in mode between the first guide means and the second guide means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the first guide means may be configured as a guide rail, the second guide means may be configured as a guide hole, and the first guide means is a rotation guide means pivotally supported by a predetermined rotation axis. , The second guide means may be configured as a guide groove, or may be a mode in which the combination of each configuration is changed.

For example, when the first guide means and the second guide means are guide grooves, the grooves may be extended in parallel directions in the first guide means and the second guide means, but the widths of the grooves may be different. The first guide means and the second guide means may have a mode in which the extending directions of the grooves are non-parallel, while the widths of the grooves are common.

In the game machine H1, the game machine H2 is characterized in that at least a part of the second guide means is arranged along the first guide means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, at least a part of the second guide means follows the first guide means, so that the moving means can be operated in two stages.

In the game machine H2, the second guiding means includes an annex portion along the first guide means and an auxiliary portion for guiding the moving means in a direction different from the case of being guided by the annex. The featured game machine H3.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, the moving means can be guided to change the moving direction at the boundary between the side-by-side portion and the auxiliary portion. Therefore, the moving mode of the moving means can be complicated.

In any of the game machines H1 to H3, a transmission means for transmitting a driving force for moving the moving means to the moving means is provided, and the displacement direction of the transmitting means is one direction regardless of the moving direction of the moving means. A game machine H4 characterized by being fixed to.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H3, the design of the driving force transmission system is facilitated as compared with the case where the displacement direction of the transmission means is switched during the movement of the moving means. be able to.

The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the transmitting means is configured to transmit a driving force via a guided portion guided by the second guiding means.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H4, the driving force is transmitted via the guided portion guided by the narrow second guiding means, so that the guided portion at the time of transmitting the driving force is transmitted. It is possible to suppress misalignment.

In the game machine H5, the guided portion is configured to overtake the auxiliary guide portion guided by the first guide means in the moving direction of the transmission means.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of the game machine H5, the total weight of the auxiliary guide portion side is applied to the guided portion side, and the moving means is driven in opposition to the total weight. The driving force required at the start of movement can be reduced.

In any of the game machines H2 to H6, when the moving means is guided to the side-by-side portion, the first moving means of the moving means is rotated in a rotation direction with the second guiding means side of the moving means as a rotation axis. In a state where the guiding means side is urged and the moving means is guided to the auxiliary portion, the second guiding means side of the moving means moves in a rotation direction with the first guiding means side of the moving means as a rotation axis. A game machine H7 characterized by being urged.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H2 to H6, when a roller guided by the guiding means is adopted as a configuration, the roller can be easily rotated, so that the roller as a guided member Wear can be reduced.

In any of the game machines H3 to H7, when the moving means is guided to the auxiliary portion, the moving means is maintained in a predetermined portion of the first guiding means, and the first guiding means is the first. 2 The gaming machine H8 characterized in that it is formed wider than the guide means.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H3 to H7, the maintenance in the predetermined portion can be performed by the wide first guide means, so that the moving means guided by the auxiliary portion. Can stabilize the movement of. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the portion of the moving means that is guided by the second guiding means from becoming unstable when passing through the boundary between the side-by-side portion and the auxiliary portion. As a result, the movement of the moving means can be stabilized, and smooth step switching can be performed when the movement is configured to be switched stepwise.

Further, since the support area in the predetermined portion of the first guide means can be increased, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of local wear between the moving means and the first guide means.

The gaming machine H8 is characterized in that the predetermined portion is configured to suppress at least a vertical displacement of the moving means.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effect of the game machine H8, it is possible to reduce the load required to move the moving means in the portion guided by the first guiding means.

In the game machine H8 or H9, the game machine H10 is characterized in that the electrical wiring connected to the moving means is arranged through the first guide means.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effect of the game machine H8 or H9, a sufficient cross-sectional area through which the electric wiring is passed can be secured, and the displacement of the electric wiring when the moving means is guided to the auxiliary portion can be obtained. Since it can be suppressed, the durability of the electric wiring can be improved.

<Feature A group> (Invalid control)
Based on a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, an operation means capable of being operated by a player, and an operation of the operation means. A display control means capable of displaying the above mode on the display means, and a privilege capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the display means displays identification information for indicating the specific determination result. In the gaming machine having the granting means, the first process executing means capable of executing the first process when the power supply is started, and the operation until at least the execution of the first process is completed. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having an invalidation control means capable of processing the operation of the means as invalidity.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine in which initial settings are executed as a process when the power is turned on when the power is turned on has been proposed (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, when the initial setting is executed, it is necessary to regulate the execution of the game until the game can be started.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing initial settings.

According to the game machine A1, when the operating means is operated during the period in which the first processing is being executed, the operation can be invalidated. Therefore, when the first processing is executed, the operating means of the operating means It has the effect of suppressing problems that interfere with operation control.

The game machine A2 is characterized in that, in the game machine A1, the first process is such that a process necessary for displaying the aspect on the display means is executed.

According to the game machine A2, during the period in which the first process of executing the process necessary for displaying the above mode on the display means is executed, the process of invalidating the operation of the operation means is executed. It has the effect of suppressing defects.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the invalidation control means can set an invalidation period for invalidating the operation of the operation means if the first process is not completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine A3 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, if the first process is completed in the period until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the invalid period is not set, so that the operation means cannot be operated. However, it has the effect of suppressing problems that take a long time.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the setting process executing means capable of executing the setting process based on the setting information is provided, and the first process executing means also has the first processing during the period when the setting process is executed. The gaming machine A4 is configured so that one process can be executed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the setting process is completed by the setting process executing means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the operation means when the setting process is executed for a long period of time and the first process is completed. Is not invalidated, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the operating means is invalid for a long period of time.

<Feature B group>
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the means, and a privilege capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the display means displays the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result. A pre-discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before being discriminated by the discriminating means in a gaming machine having the granting means, and a pre-discrimination means thereof. It has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on a determination result, and a prohibition period setting means capable of setting a prohibition period in which execution of determination by the prior determination means is prohibited. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. When a game ball is inserted into the start port, a random number value for executing a game lottery, etc. is acquired, stored as a reserved ball until the lottery is executed, and prior to the lottery being executed. There has been proposed a game machine in which a determination such as a hit / fail determination of a reserved ball is executed and a notice effect or the like is executed based on the pre-reading result (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there is a case where there is a problem in the execution of the game effect or the like due to the execution of the effect based on the look-ahead result.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which defects are suppressed.

According to the game machine B1, since the prohibition period in which the execution of the determination by the prior determination means is prohibited is set, the period during which the effect based on the new prior determination cannot be executed is set, and the effect based on the advance determination is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine B1, the prohibition period setting means can set a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period that is longer than the first prohibition period, and the prior determination means satisfies a specific condition. If so, the pre-determination is executed if it is not within the second prohibition period, and if the specific condition is not satisfied, the pre-determination is executed if it is not within the first prohibition period. The gaming machine B2, which is characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the first prohibition period and the second prohibition period can be used properly, so that the period in which the pre-determination is not executed can be switched depending on the situation. There is an effect that suitable control can be executed.

The game machine B1 or B2 has a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means sets a prohibition period corresponding to a period in which the specific effect is executed. A game machine B3 characterized in that it is configured to be configurable.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1 or B2, the prohibition period is set according to the period during which the specific effect is executed. Therefore, when the specific effect is started, the effect by prior determination can be obtained. It has the effect of suppressing the trouble of being interrupted.

<Characteristic C group>
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination thereof. It is possible to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player when the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the means and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means, a pre-determining means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before being discriminated by the discriminating means, and a pre-discrimination thereof. It has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on a determination result by the means, and a prohibited period setting means capable of setting a prohibited period in which execution of the determination by the prior determination means is prohibited. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the prohibition period setting means is configured so that a plurality of different prohibition periods can be set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. When a game ball is inserted into the start port, a random number value for executing a game lottery, etc. is acquired, stored as a reserved ball until the lottery is executed, and prior to the lottery being executed. There has been proposed a game machine in which a determination such as a hit / fail determination of a reserved ball is executed and a notice effect or the like is executed based on the pre-reading result (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there is a case where there is a problem in the execution of the game effect or the like due to the execution of the effect based on the look-ahead result.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which defects are suppressed.

According to the game machine C1, since a plurality of different prohibition periods can be set, the length of the prohibition period can be made different depending on the state, and the problem that the prohibition period becomes unnecessarily long can be suppressed. is there.

In the game machine C1, the prohibition period setting means is configured to be configured to be able to set a prohibition period corresponding to the number of stored information to be determined as the specific determination result in the storage means. Characteristic gaming machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, a prohibition period corresponding to a specific determination result and the number stored in the storage means is set, so that the prohibition period is set according to the situation stored in the storage means. Since the prohibition period is set, there is an effect that the problem that the prohibition period becomes long can be suppressed.

The game machine C1 or C2 has a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means sets a prohibition period corresponding to a period in which the specific effect is executed. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is configured to be configurable.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1 or C2, the prohibition period is set according to the period during which the fixed effect is executed. Therefore, when the specific effect is started, the effect by pre-determination can be obtained. It has the effect of suppressing the trouble of being interrupted.

<Feature D group>
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and discrimination thereof. It is possible to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player when the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the means and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means. In a game machine having a privilege game execution means, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games, and the game machine is suggested to correspond to the privilege given to the player in the small privilege game. It is characterized by having a suggestion mode executing means capable of executing the mode, and a granting means capable of giving specific information when the suggestion mode is executed by the suggestion mode executing means. Game machine D1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game in which a lottery result such as a hit is notified is executed, and a notification such as a probability variation hit that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012).

However, there is a problem that the timing at which the notification is executed tends to be constant and the game becomes monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which defects are suppressed.

According to the game machine D1, a privilege is given in the small privilege game, and the specific information can be notified at the timing when the suggestion mode is executed. Therefore, the timing at which the specific information is notified can be diversified. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine D1, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball entry means. The small privilege game has a privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege based on the ball entering the ball, and the variable ball entering means is variable from the second state to the first state. A game machine D2 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the small privilege game is executed, so that the game ball can be inserted into the variable ball entry means and the privilege can be obtained. It has the effect of giving a fresh taste.

The game machine D1 or D2 is characterized by having a determination means capable of determining the small privilege game to which the specific information can be given among the plurality of small privilege games. Game machine D3.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1 or D2, the small privilege game to which the specific information is given is determined as the determination means, so that the specific information can be obtained in which small privilege game among the privilege games. It has the effect of being able to diversify whether it is granted and providing a variety of games.

<Feature E group>
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means are determined. A dynamic display period determining means that can be used, and a privilege giving means that can give a privilege advantageous to the player when the display means displays the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. The gaming machine has a storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means are stored. In the dynamic period group, a determination probability determined by the dynamic display period determining means is preset for the set dynamic display period, and in the plurality of dynamic display period groups, a determination probability is set in advance. A specific dynamic display period group in which the probability that the specific dynamic display period is determined is set higher than that of other dynamic display periods is set, and the dynamic display period determination means satisfies a predetermined condition. The dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group based on the above, and the gaming machine executes a specific effect when it is determined in advance that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that it has a specific effect executing means capable of performing.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game in which a lottery result such as a hit is notified is executed, and a notification such as a probability variation hit that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012).

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that suppresses a problem that the game becomes monotonous.

According to the game machine E1, since it can be determined in advance by the specific effect that the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group, it is expected that the dynamic display will be performed in the specific dynamic display period. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine E1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display period determining means can determine the dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group until the end condition is satisfied. A game machine E2 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the state in which the dynamic display period is determined by the specific dynamic display period group is continued until the end condition is satisfied, so that the specific dynamic display period Can be easily executed continuously, and there is an effect that the game can be given a fresh taste by a special dynamic display period.

In the game machine E1 or E2, when the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group by the dynamic display period determining means, a dynamic display period different from the specific dynamic display period is determined. The gaming machine E3 is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E1 or E2, the special effect is executed by determining the dynamic display period with a low probability of being determined, so that the special effect is continuously executed. By doing so, it can be determined that the specific dynamic display period group is continuously set, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

<Characteristic F group>
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means are determined. A dynamic display period determining means that can be used, and a privilege giving means that can give a privilege advantageous to the player when the display means displays the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. The gaming machine has a storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means are stored. In the dynamic period group, a determination probability determined by the dynamic display period determining means is preset for the set dynamic display period, and in the plurality of dynamic display period groups, a determination probability is set in advance. A specific dynamic display period group in which the probability that the specific dynamic display period is determined is set higher than that of other dynamic display periods is set, and the dynamic display period determination means satisfies a predetermined condition. The dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group based on the above, and when the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group, a specific suggestion mode is given to the player. A game machine F1 characterized in that it is notified.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game in which a lottery result such as a hit is notified is executed, and a notification such as a probability variation hit that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012).

However, there is a problem that the timing at which the notification is executed tends to be constant and the game becomes monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that suppresses a problem that the game becomes monotonous.

According to the game machine F1, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game becomes monotonous by expecting that the dynamic display is performed by the specific dynamic display period by notifying the suggestion mode.

<Characteristic G group>
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player in some cases, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on setting information and a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed. The effect executing means includes a storage means in which information is stored based on the establishment of a specific condition that can be satisfied in the above, and the effect executing means executes the effect based on the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine G1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which information related to the game, such as information on the lottery result, is notified to the player (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous and the game got tired early.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that suppresses a problem of getting tired of playing games at an early stage.

According to the game machine G1, the effect is executed based on the information stored in the storage means, so that the effect is executed by dynamically displaying the identification information, and the game is continuously executed. It has the effect of making it easier.

The game machine G1 has a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect based on the establishment of the effect condition, and the predetermined condition is configured to be able to be satisfied during the period in which the specific effect is executed. A game machine G2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, it is expected that the specific effect will be executed by being configured so that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period when the specific effect is executed. There is an effect that the game can be played and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group>
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination thereof. It is possible to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player when the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the means and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means. In a game machine having a privilege game execution means, an identification symbol display means capable of displaying an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means on the display means, and an effect corresponding to the setting information. The effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing the effect based on the identification symbol being displayed. H1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which information related to the game, such as information on the lottery result, is notified to the player (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous and the game got tired early.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that suppresses a problem of getting tired of playing games at an early stage.

According to the game machine H1, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic GB1 group> (Determine the period during which the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed and the period during which it is difficult to execute)
When the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination and the discrimination result by the discrimination means are the specific discrimination results, the first probability is the privilege game executing means capable of executing the privilege game and the probability of the specific discrimination result. Setting value setting means capable of setting 1 setting value from a plurality of setting values including at least a first setting value set in and a second setting value set with a higher probability than the first probability. And a set value storage means that can store information about the set value set by the set value setting means, and an effect executing means that can execute an effect based on the information stored in the set value storage means. A period setting means capable of setting at least a first period in which the effect can be executed by the effect executing means and a second period in which the effect is less likely to be executed than the first period. GB1 of a game machine characterized by having.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the state shifts to a winning state. Some of these game machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them are aimed at improving the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be obtained (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, although it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the winning game is executed, the content of the game cannot be different depending on the period during which the game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, according to the game machine GB1, it is possible to make the easiness of executing the effect different according to the period set by the period setting means, so that the player can be interested in the game period. This has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the game machine GB1, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means and the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are used. It has a dynamic display effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect and an effect mode determining means capable of determining the effect mode of the dynamic display effect, and the effect executing means is specified by the effect mode determining means. The gaming machine GB2 is characterized in that the effect can be executed when an effect mode different from the effect mode for showing that the determination result is determined.

According to the game machine GB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine GB1, when an effect indicating that the determination result of the determination means is not the specific determination result is executed, the effect related to the set value is executed by the effect execution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced.

<Characteristic GC group> (The content of the effect is determined according to the frequency with which the setting suggestion effect is executed)
When the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination and the discrimination result by the discrimination means are the specific discrimination results, the first probability is the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game and the probability of the specific discrimination result. Setting value setting means capable of setting 1 setting value from a plurality of setting values including at least a first setting value set in and a second setting value set with a higher probability than the first probability. And a set value storage means that can store information about the set value set by the set value setting means, and an effect executing means that can execute an effect based on the information stored in the set value storage means. The gaming machine GC1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that the effect mode of the effect can be determined based on the execution frequency of the effect by the effect executing means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the state shifts to a winning state. Some of these game machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them are aimed at improving the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be obtained (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, although it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the winning game is executed, the content of the game cannot be different depending on the period during which the game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, according to the game machine GC1, it is possible to make the easiness of executing the effect different according to the period set by the period setting means, so that the player can be interested in the game period. This has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

According to the game machine GC1, since the effect mode of the effect can be determined based on the execution frequency of the effect related to the set value, the player can easily predict the set value based on the effect to be executed. It is possible to suppress the storage. On the other hand, even when the execution frequency of the effect is low, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the set value and reducing the motivation to play.

In the game machine GC1, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means includes a first mode in which the information can be grasped and a second mode in which the information is more difficult to grasp than the first mode. The effect mode setting means capable of setting a predetermined mode from a plurality of modes is provided, and the effect mode setting means is the specific number of times or more when the number of times the effect is executed within a predetermined period is less than the specific number of times. The gaming machine GC2 is characterized in that the first aspect is easier to set than in the case of.

According to the game machine GC2, in addition to the effect of the game machine GC1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the number of times the effect is executed in a predetermined period is small, the effect in which the set value is easy to understand is easily executed, so that it is possible to provide a novel game property that the effect is expected not to be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

In the game machine GC1 or GC2, as a state in which the operation means that can be operated by the player and the execution frequency of the effect by the effect execution means are different, the first state in which the effect is difficult to be executed and the first state thereof As the state set by the state setting means based on the state setting means capable of setting at least the second state in which the effect is easily executed and the operation on the operating means, the first state or the said state. The gaming machine GC3, which comprises a selection means capable of selecting a second state.

According to the game machine GC3, in addition to the effect of the game machine GC1 or GC2, the first state and the second state can be selected by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to let the player select the game property of predicting the set value by increasing the execution frequency of the effect and the game property of predicting the set value based on the content of the effect. It has the effect of increasing the motivation to participate in the game and improving the player's interest in the game.

<Feature I group>
Identification of an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, and an identification symbol indicating an identification symbol corresponding to the storage of the information in the storage means. The identification symbol display means that can be displayed in the symbol display area, the discrimination means that can perform discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means move. A display means to be displayed, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, and the determination result specific to the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating is displayed, the identification symbol display means stores the information in the storage means. The identification symbol is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of the information stored in the case, and the identification symbol corresponding to the case where the dynamic display of the identification information is started is not displayed in the identification symbol display area. , The display position of the displayed identification symbol can be updated and displayed, and the mode displayed in the identification symbol 1 is different from the identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A game machine I1 characterized in that it is configured so that it can be moved and displayed as a mode of a symbol.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting port and information such as a winning random number is acquired, it is configured to be able to be stored as a reserved ball up to a predetermined number, and a reserved symbol for indicating the stored reserved number is provided. A game machine that is displayed one by one corresponding to the reserved ball, is hidden when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, and the order of the displayed reserved symbols is updated and displayed. Has been proposed (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the effect of the reserved symbol is monotonous and the player gets bored early.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets bored at an early stage.

According to the game machine I1, by moving and displaying the mode of the identification symbol as another mode of the identification symbol, the identification information is dynamically displayed and identified even when the dynamic display of the identification information is not started. It is possible to make the display position of the symbol appear to have been updated, and by diversifying the playability, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine I1, when the identification symbol display means moves and displays the mode of the identification symbol, the identification symbol is displayed by moving to the identification symbol displayed before the displayed identification symbol. A game machine I2 characterized in that it is to be made to.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the identification information is dynamically displayed by making it appear that the identification information is newly dynamically displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information is not started. It has the effect of making the number of times seem more than it actually is.

In the game machine I1 or I2, as a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a special dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, then temporarily stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display is started again. Is set, and the predetermined condition is the one that can be satisfied in the special dynamic display mode.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1 or I2, the mode of the identification symbol is moved to the player so that the special dynamic display mode is actually executed a plurality of times. It has the effect of making it easier to think.

<Characteristic J group>
A process execution means capable of executing a specific process required for a game when a specific condition is satisfied, and an audio output means capable of outputting a specific sound when the specific process is executed by the process execution means. The gaming machine having the above has a volume setting means capable of setting the volume output by the voice output means, and the voice output means is set by the volume setting means when the specific voice is output. The feature is that it is possible to switch between the case where the specific sound is output at the set volume and the case where the specific sound is output at a volume different from the volume. The game machine J1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which the game is ready to be played after the initial processing required for the game is executed when the power is turned on to the game machine. (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand what kind of processing is being executed externally when a game machine is executing a specific processing such as initial processing.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which the processing being executed is easy to understand.

According to the game machine J1, when a specific process is executed, a specific voice is output to make it easy to understand that the specific process is being executed, and a case where the specific process is notified and a case where the specific process is notified at a set volume. Since there are cases where the notification is made at a different volume, there is an effect that the notification can be easily noticed.

The game machine J1 is characterized in that the specific process is configured so that the game setting can be executed based on an operation from the outside of the game machine.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress illegal setting switching.

The game machine J1 or J2 has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the game machine is configured so that the volume can be changed and set based on the operation of the operation means, and the specific process is executed. The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that when the operating means is operated during the period of time, the specific voice can be output at a newly set volume.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1 or J2, there is an effect that the volume setting by the operating means can be easily executed even when the specific process is executed.

<Characteristic K group> (Determine different setting suggestion contents according to the start timing of the jackpot game)
A discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect. The game has a specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period, and the effect executing means has a case where the timing at which the privilege game is executed is the specific period and a case where the specific period is not. The game machine K1 is characterized in that it is configured so that the ease of executing a predetermined specific effect is different.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the state shifts to a winning state. Some of these game machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them are aimed at improving the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be obtained (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, although it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the winning game is executed, the degree of advantage to the player is constant regardless of when the winning game is executed. However, there is a problem that the player cannot be interested in the execution timing of the winning game and the game becomes monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the ease of executing the specific effect can be different depending on the timing at which the privilege game is executed, so that the player is interested in the execution timing of the privilege game. This has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

A plurality of game machines K1 including at least a first set value in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to the first probability and a second set value set to a higher probability than the first probability. The effect executing means has a set value setting means capable of setting a set value of 1 from the set values, and a set value storage means capable of storing information about the set value set by the set value setting means. Is a gaming machine K2 characterized in that an effect based on the information stored by the set value storage means can be executed as the specific effect.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1, the effect based on the information about the set value can be executed as a specific effect by the effect execution means, so that the player can execute the privilege game with respect to the execution timing. It has the effect of making the player interested and improving the player's interest in the game.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the effect executing means is more when the timing at which the privilege game is executed is within the specific period and the timing at which the privilege game ends is within the specific period. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific effect than when it is not within a specific period.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1 or K2, the ease of executing the specific effect is different based not only on the timing when the privilege game is executed but also on the timing when the privilege game ends. be able to. Further, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the specific effect when the timing at which the privilege game is executed and the timing at which the privilege game ends are within a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to have the player enthusiastically play the game in order to end the privilege game within a specific period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristic L group>
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and discrimination thereof. It is possible to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player when the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the means and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means. The suggestion mode is executed by the suggestion mode execution means capable of executing the suggestion mode corresponding to the privilege given during the privilege game and the suggestion mode execution means in the game machine having the privilege game execution means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized by having a giving means capable of giving specific information in the case.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game in which a lottery result such as a hit is notified is executed, and a notification such as a probability variation hit that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012).

However, there is a problem that the timing at which the notification is executed tends to be constant and the game becomes monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which defects are suppressed.

According to the game machine L1, specific information can be notified at the timing when the suggestion mode corresponding to the privilege given during the privilege game is executed, so that the timing at which the specific information is notified is diversified. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine L1 has a privilege amount determining means capable of determining the privilege amount of the privilege given during the privilege game, and a grant timing determining means capable of determining the timing at which the predetermined privilege amount is granted. The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the specific information can be given based on the determination result of the privilege amount determination means and the determination result of the grant timing determination means.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, specific information is given based on the amount of the privilege and the timing of granting, so that the player may be interested in the degree of granting the privilege. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The game machine L2 has an advantageous period setting means capable of setting an advantageous period advantageous to the player, and the advantageous period setting means can set at least a period including a period in which the privilege game is executed as the advantageous period. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the privilege amount determining means can determine the privilege amount of the privilege given during the advantageous period.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L2, specific information is given based on the amount of privilege given during the advantageous period, so that the specific information is given to the player during the period other than the privilege game. It also has the effect of making you interested in the benefits.

<Characteristic M group>
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means are determined. A dynamic display period determining means that can be used, and a privilege giving means that can give a privilege advantageous to the player when the display means displays the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. The gaming machine has a storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means are stored. In the dynamic period group, a determination probability determined by the dynamic display period determining means is preset for the set dynamic display period, and in the plurality of dynamic display period groups, a determination probability is set in advance. The specific dynamic display period group in which the probability that the specific dynamic display period is determined is set higher than that of other dynamic display periods is set, and the specific dynamic display period is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine M1 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when a period is determined.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A game machine has been proposed in which a winning game in which a lottery result such as a hit is notified is executed, and a notification such as a probability variation hit that is advantageous to the player is executed at a specific timing (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012).

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that suppresses a problem that the game becomes monotonous.

According to the game machine M1, when the specific dynamic display period is determined, the specific effect can be executed, so that the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the dynamic display is performed in the specific dynamic display period. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine M1 is characterized in that the dynamic display period determining means is configured to be able to determine the dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group until the end condition is satisfied. The game machine M2.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the state in which the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group can be easily executed continuously for the specific dynamic display period, which is special. There is an effect that the game can be given a fresh taste by the dynamic display period.

In the game machine M1 or M2, when the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group by the dynamic display period determining means, a dynamic display period different from the specific dynamic display period is determined. The gaming machine M3 is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

<Characteristic N group>
Identification of an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, and an identification symbol indicating an identification symbol corresponding to the storage of the information in the storage means. The identification symbol display means that can be displayed in the symbol display area, the discrimination means that can perform discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means move. A display means to be displayed, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, and the determination result specific to the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating is displayed, the identification symbol display means stores the information in the storage means. The identification symbol is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of the information stored in the case, and the identification symbol corresponding to the case where the dynamic display of the identification information is started is not displayed in the identification symbol display area. , The display position of the identification symbol displayed can be updated and displayed, and the gaming machine can change the display mode of the identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine N1 having a mode-variable means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting port and information such as a winning random number is acquired, it is configured to be able to be stored as a reserved ball up to a predetermined number, and a reserved symbol for indicating the stored reserved number is provided. A game machine that is displayed one by one corresponding to the reserved ball, is hidden when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, and the order of the displayed reserved symbols is updated and displayed. Has been proposed (Prior Art Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the effect of the reserved symbol is monotonous and the player gets bored early.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets bored at an early stage.

According to the game machine N1, by moving and displaying the mode of the identification symbol as another mode of the identification symbol, the identification information is dynamically displayed and the identification symbol is displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information is not started. It is possible to make the player think that the display position of is updated, and by diversifying the game playability, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine N1, when the identification symbol display means moves and displays the mode of the identification symbol, the identification symbol is displayed by moving to the identification symbol displayed before the displayed identification symbol. A game machine N2 characterized by being made to.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, the identification information is dynamically displayed by making it appear that the identification information is newly dynamically displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information is not started. It has the effect of making the number of times seem more than it actually is.

In the game machine N1 or N2, as a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a special dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, then temporarily stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display is started again. The gaming machine N3 is set to, and the predetermined condition can be satisfied in the special dynamic display mode.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1 or N2, the mode of the identification symbol is moved to the player so that the special dynamic display mode is actually executed a plurality of times. It has the effect of making it easier to think.

<Characteristic O group> (Determine different setting suggestion contents according to the start timing of the jackpot game)
A discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect. The game has a specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period, and the effect executing means has a case where the timing at which the privilege game is executed is the specific period and a case where the specific period is not. The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that it is configured so that the ease of executing a predetermined specific effect is different.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the state shifts to a winning state. Some of these game machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them are aimed at improving the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be obtained (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, although it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the winning game is executed, the degree of advantage to the player is constant regardless of when the winning game is executed. However, there is a problem that the player cannot be interested in the execution timing of the winning game and the game becomes monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the ease of executing the specific effect can be different depending on the timing at which the privilege game is executed, so that the player is interested in the execution timing of the privilege game. This has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

A plurality of game machines O1 including at least a first set value in which the probability of the specific determination result is set as the first probability and a second set value set in a higher probability than the first probability. The effect executing means has a set value setting means capable of setting a set value of 1 from the set values, and a set value storage means capable of storing information about the set value set by the set value setting means. Is a gaming machine O2, characterized in that an effect based on the information stored by the set value storage means can be executed as the specific effect.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine O1, the effect based on the information about the set value can be executed as a specific effect by the effect execution means, so that the player can execute the privilege game with respect to the execution timing. It has the effect of making the player interested and improving the player's interest in the game.

In the game machine O1 or O2, the effect executing means is more likely to be the case where the timing at which the privilege game is executed is within the specific period and the timing at which the privilege game is completed is within the specific period. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific effect than when it is not within the specific period.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine O1 or O2, the ease of executing the specific effect is different based not only on the timing when the privilege game is executed but also on the timing when the privilege game ends. be able to. Further, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the specific effect when the timing at which the privilege game is executed and the timing at which the privilege game ends are within a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to have the player enthusiastically play the game in order to end the privilege game within a specific period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z2 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)

Claims (3)

A process execution means that can execute a specific process required for a game when a specific condition is satisfied, and a process execution means.
In a gaming machine having a voice output means capable of outputting a specific voice when the specific process is executed by the process execution means.
It has a volume setting means capable of setting the volume output by the audio output means.
The audio output means outputs the specific audio at a volume set by the volume setting means when outputting the specific audio, and outputs the specific audio at a volume different from the volume. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that it can be output by switching between cases. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific processing is configured so that the setting of the game can be executed based on an operation from the outside of the gaming machine. It has an operating means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine
The volume can be changed and set based on the operation of the operating means.
The claim is characterized in that when the operating means is operated during the period in which the specific processing is being executed, the specific voice can be output at a newly set volume. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

Images